R&S UPL Set/User Manual/UPL_Bd2_10E Bd2 10E

UPL_Bd2_10E UPL_Bd2_10E

User Manual: R&S UPL Set/User Manual/UPL_Bd2_10E

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 434

DownloadR&S UPL  Set/User Manual/UPL_Bd2_10E Bd2 10E
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
Test and Measurement
Division

Operating Manual

AUDIO ANALYZER
R&S UPL/UPL16/UPL66
DC to 110 kHz
1078.2008.06/16/66
Software version UPL 3.00

Volume 2
Operating manual consists of 2 volumes

Printed in the Federal
Republic of Germany

1078.2089.12-10-

2

Dear Customer,
The Audio Analyzer R&S UPL is abbreviated as UPL.

UPL

Tabbed Divider Overview

Tabbed Divider Overview

Contents
Data Sheets
Safety Instructions
Certificate of quality
EU Certificate of Conformity
List of R & S Representatives

VOLUME 1
Tabbed Divider

1

Chapter 1:

Preparation for Use

2

Chapter 2:

Manual Operation

3

Index

VOLUME 2
Contents
Tabbed Divider

1078.2089.12

4

Chapter 3:

Remote Control

5

Chapter 4:

Maintenance

6

Annex A

UPL Default Setup

7

Index

RE

E-10

UPL

Contents

Contents
1 Preparation for Use
1.1

Putting into Operation........................................................................................................... 1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.6
1.1.7

1.2

Setting up the Audio Analyzer..................................................................................... 1.1
Rackmounting............................................................................................................. 1.1
Power Supply.............................................................................................................. 1.1
Switching On............................................................................................................... 1.3
Connecting an External Keyboard .............................................................................. 1.4
Connecting a Mouse ................................................................................................... 1.4

Fitting Options ...................................................................................................................... 1.5
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3

Enabling Software Options ......................................................................................... 1.5
Installation of Supplementary Software ...................................................................... 1.6
Installation of Virtual Drive (RAMDRIVE).................................................................... 1.7

1.3

Software Installation ............................................................................................................ 1.9

1.4

UPL Start Options................................................................................................................ 1.11
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4

Restarting the UPL Software .................................................................................... 1.11
Integration of Supplementary Programs ................................................................... 1.11
Command Line Parameters of the UPL Software .................................................... 1.12
Immediate Effect of Command line Parameters at Power-Up.................................. 1.14

2 Manual Operation
2.1

Explanations of Front- and Rearpanel Views incl. Key Combinations on the
External Keyboard ................................................................................................................. 2.3
2.1.1 Front-panel View ........................................................................................................... 2.3
2.1.2 Rear-panel View .......................................................................................................... 2.11
2.1.3 Block Diagram ............................................................................................................. 2.12

2.2

Operating Instructions ........................................................................................................ 2.13
2.2.1 Brief Introduction ......................................................................................................... 2.13
2.2.2 Introductory Examples................................................................................................. 2.15

2.3

General Instructions for Use .............................................................................................. 2.29
2.3.1 Panels.......................................................................................................................... 2.31
2.3.2 Data Entry.................................................................................................................... 2.34
2.3.2.1 Selecting a Parameter ................................................................................. 2.34
2.3.2.2 Entry of Numeric Data ................................................................................. 2.35
2.3.2.3 Using the Softkeys ....................................................................................... 2.36
2.3.2.4 Help Line...................................................................................................... 2.36
2.3.2.5 Entry of File Names ..................................................................................... 2.36
2.3.2.6 Data Input or Output during Measurements ................................................ 2.39

1078.2089.02

3

E-10

Contents

UPL

2.3.3 Display of Measured Values........................................................................................ 2.40
2.3.4 Settling Process .......................................................................................................... 2.41
2.3.4.1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 2.41
2.3.4.2 The Settling Parameters: ............................................................................... 2.42
2.3.4.3 Settling Process with External Sweep:........................................................... 2.47
2.3.4.4 SETTLING Check and Optimization .............................................................. 2.48
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.3.8
2.4

Status Display ........................................................................................................... 2.51
Error Messages ........................................................................................................ 2.53
Help Function............................................................................................................ 2.55
Simplification of Panels............................................................................................. 2.56

Units...................................................................................................................................... 2.57
2.4.1 Units for the Display of Measurement Results ............................................................ 2.57
2.4.2 Units for the Entry of Values........................................................................................ 2.61

2.5

Generators (GENERATOR Panel) ...................................................................................... 2.64
2.5.1 Selecting the Generator .............................................................................................. 2.65
2.5.2 Configuration of Analog Generator.............................................................................. 2.66
2.5.2.1 Unbalanced Output (Output UNBAL)............................................................. 2.68
2.5.2.2 Balanced Output (Output BAL) ...................................................................... 2.69
2.5.2.3 Output Power ................................................................................................. 2.70
2.5.3 Configuration of the Digital Generator......................................................................... 2.71
2.5.3.1 Generating Jitter, Phase and Common Mode ................................................ 2.77
2.5.3.2 AES/EBU Protocol Definition .......................................................................... 2.78
2.5.4 Functions ..................................................................................................................... 2.85
2.5.4.1 Common Parameters for Generator Signals .................................................. 2.86
2.5.4.1.1 Common Parameters for SINE, DFD, MOD DIST Signals........... 2.86
2.5.4.1.2 Common Parameters for All Generator Functions ....................... 2.87
2.5.4.1.3 Equalization of the Signals SINE, SINE BURST, DFD,
MULTISINE, RANDOM ................................................................ 2.88
2.5.4.1.4
2.5.4.2
2.5.4.3
2.5.4.4
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
2.5.4.7
2.5.4.8
2.5.4.9
2.5.4.10
2.5.4.11
2.5.4.12
2.5.4.13
2.5.4.14
2.5.4.15
2.5.4.16

1078.2089.02

Amplitude Variation of the Signals MULTISINE, RANDOM and
ARBITRARY ................................................................................. 2.89
Sweeps ........................................................................................................ 2.91
SINE............................................................................................................. 2.99
MULTISINE................................................................................................ 2.101
SINE BURST ............................................................................................. 2.106
SINE2 BURST ........................................................................................... 2.109
MOD DIST (Two-tone Signal to SMPTE) ................................................. 2.111
DFD (Difference Frequency Distortion) .................................................... 2.114
Random (Pseudo Noise) ........................................................................... 2.117
Arbitrary (User-Programmable Signal) ...................................................... 2.124
POLARITY (Polarity Test Signal).............................................................. 2.127
FSK (Frequency Shift Keying) ................................................................... 2.127
STEREO SINE........................................................................................... 2.128
MODULATION (modulated sine) ............................................................... 2.132
DC Voltage................................................................................................. 2.133
Coded Audio (Coded Audio Signals) ......................................................... 2.134

4

E-10

UPL

Contents
2.5.5 Auxiliary Generator.................................................................................................... 2.138
2.5.5.1 Auxiliary Generator Used as Analog Generator ........................................ 2.139
2.5.5.2 Auxiliary Generator Used as Common Mode Generator ........................... 2.140
2.5.5.3 Auxiliary Generator Used as Jitter Generator............................................ 2.140
2.5.5.4 Auxiliary Generator Sweep ........................................................................ 2.141

2.6

Analyzers (ANALYZER Panel) .......................................................................................... 2.142
2.6.1 Selecting the Analyzer ............................................................................................... 2.142
2.6.2 Configuration of Analog Analyzers ............................................................................ 2.146
2.6.3 Configuration of Digital Analyzer ............................................................................... 2.153
2.6.3.1 Measurement of Jitter, Phase and Common Mode...................................... 2.158
2.6.4 Ways of Starting the Analyzer, Ext. Sweep ............................................................... 2.159
2.6.5 Functions ................................................................................................................... 2.165
2.6.5.1 Common Parameters of Analyzer Functions ............................................. 2.166
2.6.5.2 RMS (incl. S/N) .......................................................................................... 2.178
2.6.5.3 RMS SELECT (Selective RMS Value)....................................................... 2.184
2.6.5.4 PEAK, Q-PEAK (Peak and Quasi-peak Weighting incl. S/N) .................. 2.196
2.6.5.5 DC.............................................................................................................. 2.198
2.6.5.6 THD Measurement .................................................................................... 2.199
2.6.5.7 THD+N/SINAD Measurement (Total Harmonic Distortion+ Noise) .......... 2.203
2.6.5.8 MOD DIST (Modulation Distortion) ........................................................... 2.212
2.6.5.9 DFD (Difference Frequency Distortion) .................................................... 2.214
2.6.5.10 Wow & Flutter ............................................................................................ 2.217
2.6.5.11 POLARITY (Polarity Test).......................................................................... 2.219
2.6.5.12 FFT (Spectrum) ......................................................................................... 2.220
2.6.5.13 FILTER SIM ............................................................................................... 2.229
2.6.5.14 Waveform (Display in the Time Domain)................................................... 2.230
2.6.5.15 Protocol Analysis ....................................................................................... 2.234
2.6.5.16 Measurement of Digital Input Amplitude.................................................... 2.234
2.6.5.17 Measurement of Phase between Digital Input and Reference Signal ....... 2.234
2.6.5.18 INPUT Display .......................................................................................... 2.235
2.6.5.19 Frequency Measurement........................................................................... 2.237
2.6.5.20 Combined Frequency, Phase and Group Delay Measurement ................. 2.240
2.6.5.22 Coherence Measurement and Transfer Function...................................... 2.244
2.6.5.23 Loudspeaker Measurements (RUB & BUZZ) ............................................ 2.246
2.6.5.24 Third Analysis (1/3 OCTAVE) .................................................................... 2.252
th
th
2.6.5.25 12 OCTAVE Analysis (12 OCTAVE)...................................................... 2.256
2.6.6 Headphone/Speaker Output...................................................................................... 2.260
2.6.7 Applications ............................................................................................................... 2.266
2.6.7.1 Crosstalk Measurement............................................................................... 2.266
2.6.7.2 Linearity Measurements............................................................................... 2.268
2.6.7.3 Fast Frequency-Response Measurements.................................................. 2.271
2.6.8 Optimizing the Measurement Speed ......................................................................... 2.272
1. Speed Optimization without Affecting Measurement Results................................ 2.272
2. Compromise between Measurement Time and Accuracy or Dynamic ................. 2.273
3. Speed Optimization Through Use of Internal Generator ....................................... 2.274
4. Optimizing the Speed of Generator Sweeps ......................................................... 2.274
5. Optimized Utilization of DSP Performance with the Clock Rate............................ 2.276
2.6.9 Improving the Frequency Response ......................................................................... 2.277

2.7

Analyzer Filters (FILTER Panel) ....................................................................................... 2.278

1078.2089.02

5

E-10

Contents

UPL

2.7.1 Weighting Filters........................................................................................................ 2.279
2.7.2 Creating the User-definable Filters............................................................................ 2.284
2.7.2.1 Common Parameters of All Filters............................................................... 2.285
2.7.2.2 Lowpass / Highpass..................................................................................... 2.286
2.7.2.3 Bandpass / Bandstop................................................................................... 2.287
2.7.2.4 Notch............................................................................................................ 2.289
2.7.2.5 Third-octave / Octave................................................................................... 2.290
2.7.2.6 Internal Calculation of Filters ....................................................................... 2.291
2.7.2.7 File-defined Filter ("FILE-DEF") ................................................................... 2.292
2.8

STATUS Panel.................................................................................................................... 2.293

2.9

Series of Measured Values, Files and Loadable Instrument Settings (FILE Panel)... 2.294
2.9.1 Loading and Storing .................................................................................................. 2.294
2.9.1.1 Loading and Storing of Instrument Setups and Complete Setups............... 2.296
2.9.1.2 Loading and Storing of Series of Measured Values and Block/List Data .... 2.302
2.9.1.3 Format of Block/List Files .............................................................................. 2.307
2.9.1.4 Editing Limit Files ......................................................................................... 2.312
2.9.1.5 Generating a Limit file from a Trace File...................................................... 2.314
2.9.1.6 Generating a Limit File using an Application Program................................. 2.317
2.9.1.7 Limit Report.................................................................................................. 2.317
2.9.2 Editing Files and Directories...................................................................................... 2.321
2.9.3 Series of Measured Values (Sweeps and Scans) and Block/List Data..................... 2.324
2.9.3.1 Scan count =1 .............................................................................................. 2.324
2.9.3.2 Interpolation to a Common X Axis ............................................................... 2.325
2.9.3.3 Scan Count >1 ............................................................................................. 2.325

2.10 Graphical Data Presentation (DISPLAY and GRAPHICS Panels)................................ 2.327
2.10.1
2.10.2
2.10.3
2.10.4
2.10.5
2.10.6
2.10.7
2.10.8
2.10.9

Parameters for Display of Traces and Spectra (DISPLAY Panel) .......................... 2.330
Trace and Spectrum Display (GRAPH panel) ........................................................ 2.337
Parameters for the Display of Lists......................................................................... 2.344
Display (GRAPH) of Lists........................................................................................ 2.346
Parameters for BARGRAPH Display ...................................................................... 2.347
BARGRAPH Display (GRAPHICS Panel)............................................................... 2.349
Limit Check ............................................................................................................. 2.350
PROTOCOL Analysis ............................................................................................. 2.352
Switching between Full-screen and Part-screen Mode .......................................... 2.357

2.11 Starting and Stopping Measurements or Sweeps.......................................................... 2.358
2.11.1
2.11.2
2.11.3
2.11.4
2.11.5
2.11.6
2.11.7
2.11.8

1078.2089.02

Overview of Measurement and Sweep Systems .................................................... 2.358
Switching Measurement Modes On and Off ........................................................... 2.359
Operating States of Measurement System (No Sweep Active) .............................. 2.360
Overview of Sweep Modes ..................................................................................... 2.361
Switching Sweeps On and Off ................................................................................ 2.362
Operating States of Sweep System ........................................................................ 2.363
Operating Modes of External Frequency and Level Sweeps.................................. 2.367
Several Sweep Traces Displayed in a Diagram...................................................... 2.368

6

E-10

UPL

Contents

2.12 Display of Selected Inputs / Outputs ............................................................................... 2.370
2.13 Fast Switch-off of Outputs ............................................................................................... 2.371
2.14 Printing / Plotting / Storing the Screen Contents........................................................... 2.371
2.14.1
2.14.2
2.14.3
2.14.4

Screen Copy to Printer (pixel-oriented)................................................................... 2.381
Output in HP-GL Format......................................................................................... 2.383
Output in PCX Format ............................................................................................ 2.383
Output in PostScript Format ................................................................................... 2.384
2.14.4 1 PostScript Configuration File PS.CFG....................................................... 2.385
2.14.4 2 Integrating and Output of PostScript Files ................................................. 2.387

2.14.5

Output of Measurement Traces and Lists ............................................................ 2.389

2.15 Setting and Displaying Auxiliary Parameters (OPTIONS Panel) ................................. 2.390
2.15.1
2.15.2
2.15.3
2.15.4
2.15.5

Selecting the Remote-Control Interface (IEC/IEEE Bus/COM2) ............................ 2.390
Beeper On/Off......................................................................................................... 2.393
Keyboard Settings................................................................................................... 2.393
Language of Help Texts.......................................................................................... 2.393
Display Settings ...................................................................................................... 2.394
2.15.5.1 Switching the Measurement Display ON/OFF ........................................... 2.394
2.15.5.2 Reading Rate of Measurement Results..................................................... 2.395
2.15.5.3 Resolution of Measurement Results.......................................................... 2.395
2.15.5.4 Graphics Display with Selectable Colours ................................................. 2.395

2.15.6
2.15.7
2.15.8
2.15.9

Calibration............................................................................................................... 2.399
Version Display and Service Functions .................................................................. 2.401
Transfer of Parameters (Parameter Link Function)................................................ 2.403
Selecting the Sampling Mode ................................................................................. 2.405

2.16 Macro-Operation................................................................................................................ 2.406
2.17 Connecting External Devices ........................................................................................... 2.408
2.18 UPL Used as Computer..................................................................................................... 2.412
2.18.1 Setting the Realtime Clock ..................................................................................... 2.412

1078.2089.02

7

E-10

Contents

UPL

3 Remote Control
3.1

Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3.1

3.2

First Steps (Read-in of Measured Values) .......................................................................... 3.3

3.3

Switchover to Remote Control............................................................................................. 3.4
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3

3.4

IEC/IEEE-Bus Messages ....................................................................................................... 3.6
3.4.1
3.4.2

3.5

SCPI Introduction........................................................................................................ 3.7
Command Structure.................................................................................................... 3.7
Structure of a Command Line..................................................................................... 3.9
Responses to Queries .............................................................................................. 3.11
Types of Parameters ................................................................................................ 3.13
Overview of Syntax Elements ................................................................................... 3.15
Programming Model of UPL Generator .................................................................... 3.16
Programming Model of UPL Analyzer....................................................................... 3.17

Instrument Model and Command Processing .................................................................. 3.18
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.6.6
3.6.7
3.6.8

3.7

Interface Messages .................................................................................................... 3.6
Device-Dependent Messages (Commands and Responses)..................................... 3.6

Structure and Syntax of Device-Dependent Messages ..................................................... 3.7
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
3.5.6
3.5.7
3.5.8

3.6

Setting the Device Address......................................................................................... 3.4
Indications During Remote Control............................................................................. 3.4
Return to Manual Operation........................................................................................ 3.5

Input Unit................................................................................................................... 3.18
Parser ....................................................................................................................... 3.19
Setting the Device Hardware .................................................................................... 3.19
Why is a Specific Operating Sequence Sometimes Required?................................ 3.19
Status Reporting System .......................................................................................... 3.21
Output Unit................................................................................................................ 3.21
Triggering a Measurement/Sweep............................................................................ 3.21
Command Synchronization....................................................................................... 3.21
3.6.8.1 Wait for End of Calibration ............................................................................. 3.22
3.6.8.2 Wait for End of Measurement/Sweep............................................................. 3.22
3.6.8.3 Comparison of Synchronization Capabilities .................................................. 3.24

Status Reporting System.................................................................................................... 3.24
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3

1078.2089.02

Structure of SCPI Status Register ............................................................................ 3.25
Overview of Status Register ..................................................................................... 3.27
Description of Status Registers ................................................................................ 3.28
3.7.3.1 Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE) .................. 3.28
3.7.3.2 IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE) ......................................... 3.29
3.7.3.3 Definition of bits used in the Event Status Register ....................................... 3.29
3.7.3.4 STATus:OPERation Register......................................................................... 3.30
3.7.3.5 STATus:QUEStionable Register.................................................................... 3.31
3.7.3.6 STATus XQUEStionable Register ................................................................. 3.32
8

E-10

UPL

Contents
3.7.4 Use of Status Reporting System ................................................................................. 3.33
3.7.4.1 Service Request, Use of Hierarchical Structure ............................................ 3.33
3.7.4.2 Serial Poll ....................................................................................................... 3.34
3.7.4.3 Parallel Poll .................................................................................................... 3.34
3.7.4.4 Queries .......................................................................................................... 3.35
3.7.4.5 Error Queue Query ........................................................................................ 3.35
3.7.5 Resetting the Status Reporting Systems..................................................................... 3.36

3.8

Notation of Command Table .............................................................................................. 3.37

3.9

Common Commands .......................................................................................................... 3.39

3.10 IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands................................................................................................... 3.41
3.10.1Generators .................................................................................................................. 3.41
3.10.1.1 Selection of Generator................................................................................. 3.41
3.10.1.2 Configuration of Analog Generators ............................................................ 3.41
3.10.1.3 Configuration of Digital Generators ............................................................. 3.44
3.10.1.3.1 AES / EBU PROTOCOL Definition............................................... 3.48
3.10.1.3.2 Auxiliary AUX GEN ....................................................................... 3.50
3.10.1.4 Generator Sweeps ....................................................................................... 3.52
3.10.1.4.1 Sweep Settings for Auxiliary Generator (AUX GEN) .................... 3.52
3.10.1.5 Generator Functions .................................................................................... 3.62
3.10.1.5.1 SINE ........................................................................................... 3.63
3.10.1.5.2 MULTISINE ................................................................................ 3.65
3.10.1.5.3 SINE BURST .............................................................................. 3.69
3.10.1.5.4 SINE2 BURST ............................................................................ 3.71
3.10.1.5.5 MOD DIST.................................................................................. 3.73
3.10.1.5.6 DFD ............................................................................................ 3.76
3.10.1.5.7 RANDOM ................................................................................... 3.79
3.10.1.5.8 ARBITRARY............................................................................... 3.83
3.10.1.5.9 POLARITY.................................................................................. 3.86
3.10.1.5.10 FSK (Frequency shift keying) ..................................................... 3.87
3.10.1.5.11 STEREO SINE ........................................................................... 3.88
3.10.1.5.12 MODULATION (FM or AM signal).............................................. 3.91
3.10.1.5.13 DC voltage.................................................................................. 3.92
3.10.1.5.14 Coded Audio (Coded Audio Signals).......................................... 3.93
3.10.2IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands for Analyzers .................................................................... 3.97
3.10.2.1 Selection of Analyzer ................................................................................. 3.97
3.10.2.2 Configuration of Analog Analyzers ............................................................ 3.97
3.10.2.3 Configuration of Digital Analyzers............................................................ 3.100
3.10.2.4 Starting the Analyzer, Ext. Sweep ........................................................... 3.103
3.10.2.5 Analyzer Functions .................................................................................. 3.105
3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer Functions .......................... 3.106
3.10.2.5.2 RMS Measurement incl. S/N .................................................... 3.108
3.10.2.5.3 Selective RMS Measurement incl. Sweep ............................... 3.112
3.10.2.5.4 Peak and Quasi-Peak Measurement incl. S/N......................... 3.119
3.10.2.5.5 DC Measurement ..................................................................... 3.122
3.10.2.5.6 THD Measurement ................................................................... 3.123
3.10.2.5.7 THD + N / Sinad Measurement ................................................ 3.125
3.10.2.5.8 MOD DIST................................................................................ 3.128
3.10.2.5.9 DFD .......................................................................................... 3.129

1078.2089.02

9

E-10

Contents

UPL
3.10.2.5.10
3.10.2.5.11
3.10.2.5.12
3.10.2.5.13
3.10.2.5.14
3.10.2.5.15
3.10.2.5.16
3.10.2.5.17
3.10.2.5.18
3.10.2.5.19
3.10.2.5.20
3.10.2.5.21
3.10.2.5.22
3.10.2.5.23
3.10.2.5.24
3.10.2.5.25

Wow & Flutter ...................................................................... 3.130
POLARITY ........................................................................... 3.131
FFT ...................................................................................... 3.131
Filter Simulation ................................................................... 3.136
WAVEFORM........................................................................ 3.137
Coherence Measurement and Transfer Function ................ 3.140
Loudspeaker Measurements (RUB & BUZZ) ...................... 3.142
Input Level of Digital Signal (DIG INP AMP) ........................ 3.146
Phase Measurement (PHAS TO REF) ................................ 3.147
PROTOCOL......................................................................... 3.147
INPUT DISP ......................................................................... 3.148
Frequency Measurement ..................................................... 3.150
Combined Frequency, Phase and Group-Delay
Measurement ....................................................................... 3.151
Sample Rate Measurement .................................................. 3.154
Terzanalyse............................................................................ 3.156
12th Octave Analysis (12th OCTAVE) ................................. 3.160

3.10.3 Selection of Analyzer Filter ..................................................................................... 3.163
3.10.4 Units for IEC/IEEE Measurement Results .............................................................. 3.171
3.10.5 Loading and Storing................................................................................................ 3.177
3.10.5.1 Loading and Storing Instrument Setups .................................................... 3.177
3.10.5.1.1 Loading and Storing Traces and Lists ........................................ 3.179
3.10.5.1.2 Storing Limit Violations (Error Reports) ...................................... 3.180
3.10.5.1.3 Storing Equalization Files ........................................................... 3.181
3.10.5.2 Commands for Editing Files and Directories ............................................. 3.182
3.10.6 Commands for Graphical Representation of Results ............................................. 3.183
3.10.6.1 Commands for Limit Check ....................................................................... 3.193
3.10.6.2 PROTOCOL Analysis ................................................................................ 3.195
3.10.7 Commands for Printing/Plotting of Screen and Storing in Files.............................. 3.197
3.10.8 Setting and Display of Auxiliary Parameters........................................................... 3.207
3.10.8.1 IEC/IEEE-Bus Address ............................................................................ 3.207
3.10.8.2 Switching the Beeper On/Off ................................................................... 3.207
3.10.8.3 MACRO Operating .................................................................................. 3.208
3.10.8.4 Transfer of Settings ................................................................................. 3.209
3.10.8.6 Parameters of COM2 Interface ............................................................... 3.211
3.10.8.7 Keyboard Settings ................................................................................... 3.212
3.10.8.8 Display Settings ....................................................................................... 3.213
3.10.8.9 Version Display........................................................................................ 3.217
3.10.8.10 Calibration................................................................................................ 3.219
3.10.8.11 Loading Speed f. Setups a. Analyzer Measurement Functions............... 3.220
3.10.9
3.10.10
3.10.11
3.10.12
3.10.14

1078.2089.02

Commands for Data Output ................................................................................. 3.221
Commands for Input/Output of Block Data........................................................... 3.222
Commands for Status and Error Queries ............................................................. 3.229
Commands for Synchronization ........................................................................... 3.232
Settings without Corresponding IEC/IEEE-Bus Command .................................. 3.234

10

E-10

UPL

Contents

3.11 Alphabetical List of IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands............................................................... 3.235
3.12 IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface...................................................................................................... 3.293
3.12.1 Interface Characteristics ......................................................................................... 3.293
3.12.2 Bus Lines ................................................................................................................ 3.293
3.12.3 Interface Functions ................................................................................................. 3.294
3.13 Interface Messages ........................................................................................................... 3.295
3.13.1 Common Commands.............................................................................................. 3.295
3.13.2 Addressed Commands ........................................................................................... 3.295
3.14 List of Error Messages...................................................................................................... 3.296
3.14.1
3.14.2
3.14.3
3.14.4
3.14.5
3.14.6

SCPI-Specific Error Messages ............................................................................... 3.296
Command Error ...................................................................................................... 3.297
Execution Error ....................................................................................................... 3.298
Device-Specific Error .............................................................................................. 3.299
Query Error ............................................................................................................. 3.299
UPL-Specific Error Messages................................................................................. 3.299

3.15 Examples of IEC/IEEE-Bus Programming (Hints and Program Examples) ............... 3.300
3.15.1 R&S BASIC............................................................................................................. 3.300
3.15.2 IEC/IEEE-Bus Control after Power-Up ................................................................... 3.300
3.15.3 Command Logging - Converting UPL-B10 Commands into
IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands..................................................................................... 3.300
3.15.4 Initialization and Default Status............................................................................... 3.302
3.15.5 Sending Instrument Setting Commands ................................................................. 3.302
3.15.6 Switchover to Manual Control ................................................................................. 3.302
3.15.7 Readout of Instrument Settings .............................................................................. 3.302
3.15.8 Readout of Measurement Results .......................................................................... 3.303
3.15.8.1 Readout of Triggered Measurements........................................................ 3.304
3.15.8.2 Readout of Non-Triggered Measurements ................................................ 3.305
3.15.9 Sweep Setting/Trigger ............................................................................................ 3.305
3.15.9.1 Generator Sweep....................................................................................... 3.305
3.15.9.2 External Sweep.......................................................................................... 3.306
3.15.9.3 RMS-Selektiv-Sweep ................................................................................. 3.306
3.15.10 Tuning - Setup for Maximum Measurement Speed.............................................. 3.307
3.15.10.1 Configuration for Maximum Measurement Speed................................. 3.307
3.15.10.2 Adapting Measurement Speed to Signal Frequency............................. 3.307
3.15.10.3 Configuration for Maximum Sweep Speed............................................ 3.309
3.15.10.3.1 Generator Sweep ..................................................................... 3.309
3.15.10.3.2 External Sweep ........................................................................ 3.310
3.15.10.3.3 RMS Selective Sweep .............................................................. 3.310
3.15.10.3.4 Measurement Speed with Reference to Sampling Mode ......... 3.312
3.15.11 List Management .................................................................................................. 3.312
3.15.11.1 Loading Lists into the UPL....................................................................... 3.312
3.15.11.1.1 Loading Sweep Lists into the UPL ......................................... 3.312
3.15.11.1.2 Loading and Display of Several Traces in the UPL................ 3.312
3.15.11.1.3 Loading and Displaying of Trace Pairs in the UPL................. 3.313
3.15.11.2 Readout of Data Lists from the UPL........................................................ 3.314
3.15.11.2.1 Readout of Lists of up to 1024 Values ..................................... 3.315

1078.2089.02

11

E-10

Contents

UPL

3.15.11.2.2 Readout of FFT Lists of more than 1024 Values ..................... 3.315
3.15.11.2.3 FFT Lists with Suppressed Noise Floor ................................... 3.317
3.15.11.2.4 Readout of Several Traces from UPL ...................................... 3.317
3.15.11.2.5 Readout of Trace Pairs from UPL ............................................ 3.318
3.15.12 Filter Settings...................................................................................................... 3.319
3.15.13 Finding a File ...................................................................................................... 3.320
3.15.14 Readout of Error Queue ..................................................................................... 3.320
3.15.15 Command Synchronization ................................................................................ 3.320
3.15.15.1 Command Synchronization with *WAI..................................................... 3.321
3.15.15.2 Command Synchronization with *OPC? .................................................. 3.321
3.15.15.3 Command Synchronization with *OPC and SRQ .................................... 3.321
3.15.16 Service Request ................................................................................................... 3.322
3.15.16.1 SRQ Interrupt Routine with Serial Poll..................................................... 3.322
3.15.16.1.1 Initialization of Serial Poll SRQ ................................................. 3.322
3.15.16.1.2 Serial Poll SRQ Routine ........................................................... 3.323
3.15.16.2 SRQ Interrupt Routine with Parallel Poll.................................................. 3.324
3.15.16.2.1 Initialization of Parallel Poll SRQ ............................................ 3.324
3.15.16.2.2 Parallel Poll SRQ Routine ...................................................... 3.324
3.15.17 Readout of Cursor Position and Values ............................................................... 3.325
3.15.18 Call a BASIC-Macro.............................................................................................. 3.329
3.15.19 Third analysis - Output of Block Data ................................................................... 3.333
3.16 Automatic Control of UPL with R&S BASIC.................................................................... 3.337
3.16.1
3.16.2
3.16.3
3.16.4

Use.......................................................................................................................... 3.337
Scope of Functions ................................................................................................. 3.337
Preparation for Use................................................................................................. 3.338
Operation ................................................................................................................ 3.339
3.16.4.1 Switchover between UPL and BASIC Entry Mode................................... 3.339
3.16.4.2 First Steps (Readout of Measurement Results) ...................................... 3.340
3.16.4.3 Logging Mode .......................................................................................... 3.340
3.16.4.4 Differences to IEC/IEEE-Bus Remote Control ........................................ 3.341
3.16.4.5 UPL-Specific Modifications to the BASIC Manual ................................... 3.346
3.16.4.6 BASIC Screen.......................................................................................... 3.348
3.16.4.7 Control Commands Unsuitable for Logging ............................................ 3.349
3.16.4.8 Driver for Screen and Keyboard STRINX.SYS........................................ 3.350
3.16.4.9 Operation of Serial Interfaces COM1 and COM2 .................................... 3.354
3.16.4.10 UPL-Specific Error Messages From BASIC ............................................ 3.355
3.16.4.11 UPL/BASIC Memory Management.......................................................... 3.356

3.17 Remote Control via RS-232 Interface .............................................................................. 3.357
3.17.1
3.17.2
3.17.3
3.17.4

Preparation for Use................................................................................................. 3.357
Switchover to Remote Control ................................................................................ 3.358
Return to Manual Operation.................................................................................... 3.358
First Steps (Readout of Measurement Results) ..................................................... 3.358
3.17.4.1 Readout of Measurement Results in QuickBASIC .................................... 3.359
3.17.4.2 Readout of Measurement Results in R&S BASIC ..................................... 3.360
3.17.4.3 Readout of Measurement Results in Borland-C 3.0 .................................. 3.361

3.17.5
3.17.6

Binary Data via RS232 Interface .......................................................................... 3.363
Differences to Remote Control via IEC/IEEE Bus ................................................ 3.364

1078.2089.02

12

E-10

UPL

Contents

4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting .................................................................... 4.1
4.1

Maintenance........................................................................................................................... 4.1
4.1.1 Mechanical Maintenance............................................................................................... 4.1
4.1.2 Electrical Maintenance .................................................................................................. 4.1

4.2

Function Test ......................................................................................................................... 4.1

4.3

Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 4.2
4.3.1 BIOS-SETUP................................................................................................................. 4.2
4.3.2 Others............................................................................................................................ 4.5

5 UPL Default Setup
A.1

Default Settings of Generator...............................................................................................A.1

A.2

Default Settings of Analyzer..............................................................................................A.13

A.3

Default Settings of Filter Panel ..........................................................................................A.21

A.4

Default Settings of Display Panel ......................................................................................A.22

A.5

Default Settings of Options Panel......................................................................................A.23

A.6

Default Settings of File Panel .............................................................................................A.25

6 Index

1078.2089.02

13

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Introduction

3

Remote Control

3.1

Introduction

• UPL may be equipped with option UPL-B4 permitting remote control via an IEC/IEEE-bus interface to
IEC 625.1/IEEE 488.2 standard and an
• RS-232 interface at the COM2 port.
In addition, UPL may be equipped with option UPL-B10 permitting sequence control for automatic
measurements.
Note:
The sections below mainly describe remote control via the IEC/IEEE-bus interface but most of them also
applies to remote control via the RS-232 interface and the Universal Sequence Controller
UPL-B10. If this is not the case reference will be made to the applicable section.

Note:
If the remote-control option UPL-B4 was not originally ordered with the UPL, it may be obtained via the
local sales engineer (for Order No. see data sheet). After entering an enable code as described in the
supplied instructions, the IEC/IEEE-bus option and the RS-232 interface are ready for use without any
additional hardware installations being required.

Note:
If the remote control option UPL-B4 is not enabled, UPL should not be connected to other
instruments via the IEC/IEEE bus as in this case problem-free operation cannot be guaranteed.
The connectors for the IEC/IEEE-bus and the RS-232 interface (COM2) are located at the rear of the
instrument. They allow a controller to be connected for remote control. The instrument supports SCPI
version 1993.0 (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments). The SCPI standard is based on
standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of device-specific commands, error handling and
status registers (see section 3.5.1 SCPI Introduction).
Note:
In the IEC/IEEE-bus command lists given below, all commands confirmed or approved by the SCPI
committee are written in normal characters. Other innovative commands or commands required for
general measurements are in italics and in the form and style as specified by SCPI (not part of SCPI
definition).
This section assumes a basic knowledge of IEC/IEEE-bus programming and controller operation. A
description of the interface commands is to be obtained from the relevant manuals.
The requirements of the SCPI standard placed on command syntax, error handling and configuration of
status registers are explained in detail in the respective sections. Tables provide a fast overview of the
bit assignment in the status registers. The tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of
the status registers. For detailed program examples of the main functions see 3.15 Examples of
IEC/IEEE-Bus Programming.

1078.2008.02

3.1

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Introduction

UPL

All program examples for IEC/IEEE-bus control are written in R&S BASIC, likewise all program
examples in the UPL software in the paths
C:\UPL\IEC EXAM\EXAM1.BAS ff and
C:\UPL\B10 EXAM\EXAM1.BAS ff.
Examples C:\UPL\IEC EXAM\EXAM1.BAS ff can be directly run on a controller using a suitable
IEC/IEEE-bus card and R&S BASIC. Files with the extension .SAC are setup files required by the
program examples for setting the UPL. Files with the extension .TXT provide the program code of the
examples as an ASCII file and can be accessed by any editor.
Examples C:\UPL\B10 EXAM\EXAM1.BAS ff can be run on an UPL using the Universal Sequence
Controller UPL-B10. Meaning of files with the extensions .SAC and .TXT as described above.

1078.2008.02

3.2

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: First Steps

3.2

First Steps (Read-in of Measured Values)

The short and simple operating sequence below permits rapid setup of the instrument and of its basic
functions.
A condition is, however, that the IEC/IEEE-bus address, which is factory-set to 20, is not changed.
Program example:
Triggering 10 measurement results and display on the screen.
1. Interconnect instrument and controller using the IEC/IEEE-bus cable.
2. Write the following program on the controller and start it with RUN (F2):
10 IEC TERM 10: ’
Controller expects LF as a delimiter of an UPL reply
20 IEC TIME 5000:
’Controller waits max. 5 s for a reply from
30 ’
UPL before sending an IEC/IEEE-bus timeout
40 IEC OUT 20,"*RST": ’
UPL default setup
45 IEC OUT 20,"INP:TYPE GEN2": ’ Internal connection to generator channel 2
50 IEC OUT 20,"*CLS": ’
Resets IEC/IEEE-bus status register
60 FOR I = 1 TO 10
70 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI": ’
Triggers a single measurement
80 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:DATA?": ’
Requests a measurement result
90 IEC IN 20, M$:
’Read-in of measurement result
100 PRINT M$:
’Output of measurement result
110 NEXT I
120 END
As a result of the default setup with *RST (see annex A UPL Default Setup in the UPL manual), the
UPL generator produces a 1-kHz sinewave signal with a level of 0.5 V.
Command INP:TYPE GEN2 establishes an internal connection between generator channel 2 and
analyzer channel 1 so that no cabling of outputs and inputs is required for this first test. The UPL
analyzer carries out 10 RMS measurement, indicates the measurement results in the display and
outputs them continuously on the controller display.
Note:
A measurement result must be triggered before it can be displayed on the screen (line 70). The settled
result available after triggering can be requested (line 80), read-in (line 90) and output to the controller
display (line 100).

3. Press the [LOCAL] key on the front panel to return to manual operation.

Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10)
See 3.16.4.2

First Steps (Readout

Results)

1078.2008.02

RS-232 interface

of Measurement See 3.17.4
Results)

3.3

First Steps (Readout

of Measurement

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Switchover to Remote Control

3.3

UPL

Switchover to Remote Control

After power-on, the instrument is always in the manual operating state (LOCAL state) and can be
operated from the front panel or the keyboard. It is switched to remote control (REMOTE state shown by
REMOTE caption in the screen center) as soon as it receives an addressed command from a controller.
If the UPL has been set to the manual status from REMOTE with the LOCAL key, then each command
via
R&S BASIC switches the UPL to the REMOTE status, because R&S BASIC sends each command in
addressed form to the UPL. If the
NI GPIB device driver is used, the first IEC/IEEE command should be send addressed. This
addressing for board-specific programming is for example the command ibcmd (board address,
20, 1) or for device-specific programming the repeat addressing setting in the NI GPIB device
driver – or ibloc(0) before the first IEC/IEEE command. If the UPL in the LOCAL state is sent a
non-addressed command, the latter will be carried out but the screen will show the old manual
settings and not the expected empty screen with the REMOTE caption.
During remote control, operation from the front panel is disabled. The instrument remains in the remote
state until it is reset to manual operation via the front panel or the IEC/IEEE bus (see section 3.3.3
Return to Manual Operation). Switching from manual operation to remote control and vice versa has no
effect on the instrument setup.

Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10)
See 3.16.4.1 Connection Basic-UPL

3.3.1

RS-232 interface
3.17.2 Switchover to Remote

Control

Setting the Device Address

The IEC/IEEE-bus address of the instrument is factory-set to 20. It can be changed manually under
UPL IECadr in the OPTIONS panel or via the IEC/IEEE bus.
Manually:

Enter the required address under UPL IECadr in the OPTIONS panel.

Via IEC/IEEE bus:
IECOUT 20,"SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 30":’
Set new address 30
HOLD 500:’
Wait approx. 500 ms before new commands are effected
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10)
Not applicable

3.3.2

RS-232 interface
Not applicable

Indications During Remote Control

• The remote-control status is signalled by the word REMOTE in the display center and by the REM
LED on the UPL front panel.
• Measurement results (active) are indicated in the upper part of the display.
• Error messages occurring during IEC/IEEE-bus control are displayed in plain text in the lower part of
the UPL display (see also section 3.14 List of Error Messages).

1078.2008.02

3.4

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Return to Manual Operation

3.3.3

Return to Manual Operation

Return to manual control can be made from the front panel or via the IEC/IEEE bus.
Manual:

Press the [LOCAL] key, the REM LED goes out.
Prior to the switchover, command processing must be completed as otherwise
remote control is immediately switched on again.
Note: LLO state (Local Lockout):
The [LOCAL] key can be locked by the universal command LLO in order to
prevent inadvertent switchover:
R&S-BASIC:
R&S BASIC command IECLLO
NI-GPIB-Treiber:
NI command SendLLO(0)
This state can be cancelled only by switching the "REN" line of the IEC/IEEE
bus from 0 to 1:
R&S-BASIC:
R&S BASIC commands IECNREN, followed by IECREN.
NI-GPIB-Treiber:
NI commands ibsre(0,0); followed by ibsre(0,1);.

Via IEC/IEEE bus:

R&S-BASIC:
:
IECLAD 20:’
IECGTL
:

Sets device to manual operation

NI-GPIB-Treiber:
ibloc (0);
To switch UPL from LOCAL state to REMOTE state, see 3.3 Switchover to
Remote Control

Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10)
See 3.16.4.1 Connection Basic-UPL

1078.2008.02

RS-232 interface
3.17.3 Return to Manual

3.5

Operation

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Messages

3.4

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus Messages

The messages transmitted on the data lines of the IEC/IEEE bus can be subdivided into two groups:
• interface messages and
• device-dependent messages

3.4.1

Interface Messages

Interface messages are transmitted on the data lines of the IEC/IEEE bus, with the control line "ATN"
being active. They are used for communication between the controller and the instrument and can only
be sent by a controller with controller function on the IEC/IEEE bus.
There are two groups of interface messages:
• common commands and
• addressed commands
See 3.13.1, Universal Commands and 3.13.2, Addressed Commands
Common commands affect all devices connected to the IEC/IEEE bus without any addressing being
required, whereas addressed commands only affect devices addressed as a listener. The relevant
interface messages for the UPL are listed in annex A.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10)

RS-232 interface

Not applicable

Not applicable

3.4.2

Device-Dependent Messages (Commands and Responses)

The device-dependent messages are transmitted on the data lines of the IEC/IEEE bus, with the control
line ATN being not active. The ASCII code is used for data transmission. Device-dependent messages
are differentiated according to the direction in which they are sent via the IEC/IEEE bus:
• Commands

are messages sent by the controller to the UPL. They control the device functions
and request information.
The commands are subdivided according to two criteria:
1. According to the effect they have on the device:
Setting commands
cause device settings to be made, e.g. the resetting of
the UPL or the setting of the output level to 1 Volt.
Queries

cause data to be provided for output via the
IEC/IEEE bus, eg for device identification or query of
the active input.

2. According to their definition in the IEEE 488.2 standard:
Common commands are precisely defined in their function and notation in
the IEEE 488.2 standard. They refer to functions as for
instance the management of the standardized status
registers, resetting and selftest
Device-specific
commands

refer to functions that depend on the device
characteristics, such as frequency setting. A large
number of these commands has also been
standardized by the SCPI Consortium (see section
3.5.1 SCPI Introduction)

• Responses

are messages sent by the UPL to the controller following a query. They may
contain results, device settings or information on the device status (see section
3.5.4 Responses to Queries).
The section below describes structure and syntax of device-dependent messages. As from section
3.10 IEC-bus Commands onwards, the commands are listed independent of their function,
described in brief and listed in alphabetical order.

1078.2008.02

3.6

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Structure and Syntax of Messages

3.5

Structure and Syntax of Device-Dependent Messages

3.5.1

SCPI Introduction

SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) describes a standardized command set for
the programming of instruments regardless of the type of instrument or manufacturer. The goal of the
SCPI Consortium is to standardize device-specific commands to a large extent. For this purpose an
instrument model has been developed which defines identical functions within an instrument or of
different instruments. Command systems have been generated and assigned to these functions so that
it is possible to address identical functions by the same commands. The command systems have a
hierarchical structure. Fig. 3-1 shows this tree structure, using a detail from the SOURce command
system for controlling the signal sources of the instrument. The other examples of syntax and structure
of the commands are taken from this command system.
SCPI is based on the IEEE 488.2 standard, ie it uses the same syntax elements as well as the "common
commands" defined therein. The syntax of the responses is partly subjected to stricter rules than laid
down in the IEEE 488.2 standard).

3.5.2

Command Structure

The commands consist of a so-called header and usually one or several parameters. Header and
parameters are separated by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, eg space). The
headers may be composed of several keywords. The query form is generated by appending a question
mark directly to the header.
Common Commands

Common commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk "*"
and one or several parameters.
Examples

"*RST"
"*ESE 253"

"*ESR?"

RESET, resets the UPL
EVENT STATUS ENABLE, sets the bits of
the Event Status Enable Registers
EVENT STATUS QUERY, queries the
contents of the Event Status Register.

Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10)

RS-232 interface

Common commands to be used can be looked up in Table 3.9 Common Commands.

Device-specific commands
Hierarchy

Device-specific commands have a hierarchical structure (see Fig. 3-1).
The various levels are represented by compound headers. Headers of
the highest level (root level) have one keyword only. This keyword
stands fro a whole command system.
Example:

SENSe

This keyword denotes the command system
SENSe (see section 3.5.7
Programming
Model of UPL Generator)

For lower-level commands the full path has to be specified, starting with
the highest level in the left-most position. The individual keywords are
separated by a colon ":".

1078.2008.02

3.7

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Structure and Syntax of Messages

Example:

UPL

"SENSe:FUNCtion:SETTling:MODE EXPonential"

(exponential settling of function test results)

This command is at the fourth level of the SENSe system. It selects the
function settling mode.
SENSe

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

SWEep

STANdard

LIST

DMODe

Level 4

Fig. 3-1

Optional keywords:

Long and short form:

FUNCtion

MMODe

SETTling

TOLerance

WEIGhting

MODE

Tree structure of SCPI command system, SENSe being shown
as an example

Some command systems permit certain keywords to be optionally inserted
into the header or omitted. In the manual these keywords are marked by
square brackets. For reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard, the
instrument must be able to recognize the full command length. Some of the
commands become considerably shorter when the optional keywords are
omitted.
Example: "DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[:DATA] ’String’"
The following command has the same effect:
"DISPlay:TEXT ’String’"
(text in graphic display)
The keywords have a long and a short form. The short form or the long
form can be entered, other abbreviations are not permissible
Example: "STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 1"
The following command has the same effect:
"STAT:QUES:ENAB 1" (0 bit of Status Questionable Register
enabled)

Note:
The short form uses uppercase characters, the long form gives the whole
keyword. Uppercase and lowercase letters are used for identification in the
manual, the UPL itself does not differentiate between uppercase and
lowercase characters.
Parameter:

The parameter must be separated from the header by a "white space". If a
command contains several parameters, they have to be separated by a
comma ",". Some of the queries permit the parameters MINimum and
MAXimum to be entered. For a description of the various types of
parameter see section 3.5.5 Types of Parameters.
Example: "SENSe:FREQuency:STARt? MAXimum"
Response: 21641.8
(query requesting the maximum value for starting a frequency sweep)

Numeric suffix:

If a device has several identical functions or features, eg inputs, the
desired function can be selected by a suffix added to the command.
Example: "SENSe2:Voltage:REFerence 1V"
(reference value for a relative INPUT peak measurement)

Note: Entries without suffix are interpreted like entries with suffix 1

1078.2008.02

3.8

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Structure and Syntax of Messages

3.5.3

Structure of a Command Line

The UPL can process IEC/IEEE-bus commands containing up to 240 characters. If this length is
exceeded, an error message is output.
A command line may take up more than one line on the controller display. The end of a line is
determined by a delimiter.
Delimiters for a command set to the UPL:
A command line to the UPL may contain one or several commands. It is terminated by a 
(ASCII code, 10 decimal) or  (EOI line active) together with the last useful character of the
command line or by . Since a  character (ASCII code, 13 decimal) as a
filler before the delimiter has no effect, the combination  is permissible.
Example for generating the various delimiter combinations:
++ (default setting of IEC/IEEE-bus controller):
10 IECEOI
20 IECOUT 20,"XYZ"

If no

’;’ is sent at the line end,  is added.

+:
10 IECEOI
20 IECOUT 20,"XYZ"+CHR$(10);

’;’ ensures that no  is added.

:
10 IECEOI
20 IECOUT 20,"XYZ";

’;’ ensures that no  is added.

:
10 IECNEOI
20 IECOUT 20,"XYZ"+CHR$(10);

’;’ ensures that no  is added.

+:
10 IECNEOI
20 IECOUT 20,"XYZ"

If no ’;’ is sent at the line end,  is added.

Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10)
User cannot influence the delimiter.

1078.2008.02

RS-232 interface
See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote Control via IEC/IEEE Bus

3.9

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Structure and Syntax of Messages

UPL

Sequencing of commands:
Commands may be lined up unless they exceed 240 characters in length.
Several commands in a command line are separated by a semicolon

";". If the next command belongs

to a different system, the semicolon is followed by a colon ":"
Example:
IECOUT 20,"SOUR:FREQ:STAR 20Hz;:SYST:BEEP:STAT ON"
(switches on beeper for error messages)

This command line contains two commands. The first command belongs to the SOURce
system and is used to set the start frequency for a generator sweep. The second command
is part of SYSTem and switches on an acoustic alarm in the case of errors.
If the successive commands belong to the same system and therefore have one or several common
levels, the command line may be shortened. The second command following the semicolon then starts
at the level that is below the common levels (see also Fig. 3-1). The colon after the semicolon has to be
omitted.
Example:
IECOUT 20,"SOUR:FREQ:STAR 20Hz;:SYST:BEEP:STAT ON"
(Start- and stop command for sweep)

This command line is shown in full length and contains two commands separated by a
semicolon. Both commands belong to the SOURce command system, FREQency
subsystem, ie they have two common levels.
In the shortened command line the second command starts at the level below
SOURce:FREQ. The colon after the semicolon has to be omitted.
The abbreviated form of the command line is:
IECOUT 20,"SOURce:FREQ:STAR;STOP 15kHz"
A new command line always begins with the complete path.
Example:

IECOUT 20,"SOUR:FREQ:START 20Hz"
IECOUT 20,"SOUR:FREQ:STOP 15 kHz
(Start- and stop command for sweep)

When common commands starting with an asterisk ’*’ are linked in a command string, they are
preceded by a semicolon ’;’ and not by ’;:’ as is the case with linked UPL commands.
Example:

IECOUT 20,"INIT;*WAI;:SENS:DATA1?"
↑
(triggers measurement, selects result of function measurement on channel 1 and sends next command only
after completion of the measurement!)

1078.2008.02

3.10

E-10

UPL
3.5.4

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Structure and Syntax of Messages
Responses to Queries

Delimiters of responses sent by the UPL:
All responses sent by the UPL to the IEC/IEEE-bus controller are terminated by  (ASCII
code, 10 decimal) and  (EOI line active). With the aid of the IECTERM command, the IEC/IEEEbus controller can be set to various delimiters, but only the setting
IECTERM 10 is useful.
• IECTERM 10 causes the IEC/IEEE-bus controller to respond to the delimiter . With
• IECTERM 1 (EOI only) ), the response string from the UPL displayed on the monitor of the IEC/IEEEbus controller is followed by an empty line, as  before  is interpreted as part of the
response string.
• IECTERM 0 (+), the response string from the UPL displayed on the
monitor of the IEC/IEEE-bus controller will again be followed by an empty line, as the  is interpreted as part of the response string and changed into a line feed command by the
IEC/IEEE-bus controller.
All other settings cause a TIMEOUT.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10)
User cannot influence the delimiter.

RS-232 interface
See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote Control via IEC/IEEE Bus

Possible queries
Unless explicitly specified otherwise, a query is defined for each setting command. The query is
generated by appending a question mark to the associated setting command. Some of the SCPI rules
imposed on the query responses are stricter than those of the IEEE 488.2 standard:
1. The requested parameter is sent without header.
Example:
Setting:
"INPut:TYPE BAL"
Query:
"INPut:TYPE?"

Response: BAL

(input BAL for analog analyzer)

2. Maximum and minimum values requested by the character data MAXimum and MINimum are
returned as numeric values
Example:
Setting:
"SENSe:FREQuency MAX|MIN|any value"
Query:
"SENSe:FREQuency? MAX"
Response: 21641.8
Query:
"SENSe:FREQuency? MIN"
Response: 2.0
(maximum or minimum value depend on current setting)

3. Numeric values with floating decimal point are output in the same unit as entered.
Example:
Setting:
"SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 20kHz?"
Query:
"SENSe:FREQuency:STARt?"
Response: 20.0 for 20 kHz
(sweep start frequency)

4. Integral values are returned as such.
Example:
Setting:
"INST:NSEL 1"
Query:
"INST:NSEL?"

Response: 1

(25-kHz analog generator)

5. Text (character data) are returned in short form (see sections 3.5.1 and 3.5.4).
Example:
Setting:
"OUTPut:TYPE BALanced"
Query:
"OUTPut:TYPE?"

Response: BAL

(generator output channel 1 XLR balanced)

1078.2008.02

3.11

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Structure and Syntax of Messages

UPL

6.
Character strings are output in the same way as they are input, ie the simple and
double quotation marks are also output (see section 3.5.6 Overview of Syntax Elements).
Example:
Setting:
"MMEMory:STORe:STATe 2,’LASTSAVE.SCO’"
Response: ’LASTSAVE.SCO’
Query:
"MMEMory:STORe:STATe? 2"
(storage of UPL setting under ’LASTSAVE.SCO’

7. Data blocks are output as ASCII characters or in binary form depending on the IEC/IEEE-bus
commands FORM ASC and FORM REAL.
Example:
Five floating-point values in the form of a trace are available after a sweep.
Setting: "FORM ASC"
Query:
"TRACe? TRACe"
Response: 1.1,1.2,1.3,1.4,1.5
(load Y values of curve A into the UPL)

Setting:
Query:

"FORM REAL"
"TRACe? TRACe"

The response is sent as a binary data stream. Floating-point values are 4 bytes long
and output in the IEEE format (LSB first):

# 2 2 0

--- 1.1 ---

--- 1.2 ---

--- 1.3 ---

--- 1.4 ---

--- 1.5 ---

23 32 32 30 cd cc 8c 3f 9a 99 99 3f 66 66 a6 3f 33 33 b3 3f 00 00 c0 3f
1st value

2nd value

3rd value

4th value

Hexadecimal
form

5th value

Number of following bytes in ASCII. This value divided by 4 yields
the number of the subsequent floating-point values in IEEE format.
Number of digits of subsequently indicated length in ASCII
The ASCII character ’#’ introduces a binary block transfer.

To receive the binary data stream in its full length, set EOI (in R&S-BASIC: IEC
TERM 1) in the controller program and not LF (0Ah = 10d) (in R&S-BASIC: IEC
TERM 10) as would normally be set for the reception of ASCII strings. This is to
avoid the binary data stream being interrupted if the bit combination 0Ah occurs.

Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10)
See
3.16.4.4 Differences from the

IEC-bus Syntax -

UPL-B10

1078.2008.02

RS-232 interface
See
3.17.6 Differences to Remote

Control via

IEC/IEEE Bus

3.12

E-10

UPL
3.5.5

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Structure and Syntax of Messages
Types of Parameters

Most commands require the specification of a parameter. The parameters must be separated from the
header by a "white space" (ASCII code, 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, generally a blank). Parameters may be
specified as numeric values, Boolean parameters, character data, character strings and block data. The
type of parameter required for the specific command as well as the permitted range of values are
described together with the commands (see section 3.10 IEC-bus Commands).
Numeric values
Numeric values may be entered in any customary form, ie with sign, decimal
point and exponent. If the values exceed the resolution of the UPL, they will be
rounded off. The number including the exponent may comprise up to 20
characters. The number of digits of mantissa and exponent is only limited by
this condition. The exponent is denoted by an "E" or "e". The exponent alone
must not be used. Physical quantities may be stated with the unit. Permissible
prefixes for the unit (also called engineering) are M (Mega), K (Kilo), m (milli)
and u (micro). The units for which these prefixes may be used can be seen
from the tables in section 2.4 Units in the UPL manual. With no unit stated,
the basic unit is assumed (see section 3.10 IEC-bus Commands column
Basic unit of UPL manual).
Examples:
"SOURce:FREQuency 1.5 kHz"
1.5E3
1.5E 3
+1.5E3
Special
numeric values

MIN/MAX

1500 Hz
1.5E+3
1.5E 03
001.5E3

The parameters MINimum, MAXimum, UP and DOWN are interpreted as
special numeric values.
MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value.
Upon a query the numeric value will be returned.
Example: Setting command: "SOURce:VOLTage MAXimum"
Query:
"SOURce:VOLTage?"
Response: 24
(maximum generator level)

UP/DOWN
NAN
Boolean parameter

UP increments, DOWN decrements the current numeric value by 0.001%.
Not A Number represents the value 9,91E37, is only sent as a device
response and denotes missing or illegal values.
Boolean parameters represent two states. The on state (true condition) is
represented by ON, the off state (false condition) by OFF.

Example: Setting command: "SENS:FUNC:WEIG ON"
Query:

"SENS:FUNC:WEIG?"

Response: ON

(W&F weighting filter on)

Character data

Character data follow the syntax rules for keywords, ie they also have a short
and a long form. Like any other parameter, they must be separated from the
header by a ’white space’. A query returns the short form of the character data.
Example: Setting command: "DISPlay:MODE COLB"
Query:
"DISPlay:MODE?"

Response: COLB

(Coloured representation on internal and external display)

1078.2008.02

3.13

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Structure and Syntax of Messages
Character string

UPL

According to SCPI strings must always be given in single or double quotation
marks. Normally single quotes are used as the double quotes are used for
identifying the total IEC/IEEE-bus command as a string.
Example: "MMEMory:DELete

’C:\UPL\USER\MYSETUP.SCO’"

(clearing of specified file)

Data strings

Numeric values are to be separated by commas, decimal digits by a ’.’.
Example: "TRAC LIST1, 100.0,1000.0,5000.0,15000.0"
(setting the X values in a graphics display)

"SOUR:LIST:FREQ 1.1,1.2,1.3,1.4,1.5"
(setting the frequencies for a frequency sweep)

Whether the data strings start with a comma or a blank depends on the
command and is defined by SCPI.

1078.2008.02

3.14

E-10

UPL
3.5.6

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Structure and Syntax of Messages
Overview of Syntax Elements

The following list provides an overview of the syntax elements..

:

The colon separates the keywords of a command.
In a command line, the colon following a semicolon identifies
the highest command level.

;

The semicolon separates two commands in a command line. It does not change the path.

,

The comma separates several parameters of a command.

?

The question mark forms a query.

*

The asterisk identifies a common command.

"

Quotation marks denote the beginning of a character string and terminate it.

#

The double cross denotes the beginning of block data.
A "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, eg space) separates header and
parameter.

.

Decimal point of numeric values.

1078.2008.02

3.15

E-10

1078.2008.02

Fig. 3-2

Digital
generator
48 kHz

Analog
generator
25 kHz

Sine² pulse

POLARITY

Sine² Pulse

Sine² Pulse

Sine² Pulse

Sine² Pulse

Burst

Multisine

Instruments and signal functions of UPL generator

"INST A25|D48"

Sine

"SOUR:FUNC
SIN|
MULT|
BURS|
S2P|
MDIS|
DFD|
RAND|
USER|
POL"

Signal function

Programming Model of UPL Generator

Generator instruments

3.5.7

UPL

3.16

"OUTP:SEL
OFF|
CH1|
CH2|
CH2Is1"

Channel
setting

INTERN

OPTICAL

S/P DIF

AES/EBU

Digital outputs
Ch 1 and Ch 2

XLR female

Analog outputs
Ch 1 and Ch 2

IEC\IEEE-bus commands

W iring of XLR connector
balanced (BAL) or
unbalanced (UNB)

"OUTP:TYPE
UNB|
BAL"

Output configuration

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Programming Model of UPL Generator

"INP:TYPE
AES|SPD|OPT|INT"

"INP2:TYPE
BAL|GEN1|GEN2"

1078.2008.02

Fig. 3-3

"INP:SEL
CH1|
CH2|
BOTH"

"INP:SEL
CH1|
CH2|
CH1And2|
CH1Is2|
CH2Is1"

"INST2 D48"

Digital
analyzer
48 kHz

Analog
analyzer
110 kHz

Analog
analyzer
22 kHz

"INST2 A22|A110|A300"

Analyzer instruments

Instruments and measurement functions of UPL analyzer

IEC/IEEE-Bus commands

INTERNAL

OPTICAL

UNBAL (BNC)

BAL (XLR)

Digital inputs
Ch 1 and Ch 2

GEN1
GEN CROSSED
GEN2

XLR female

Analog
Inputs Ch2

GEN1
GEN CROSSED
GEN2

XLR female

"INP1:TYPE
BAL|GEN1|GEN2"

Cannel
setting

Programming Model of UPL Analyzer

Input configuration

Analog
Inputs Ch1

3.5.8

UPL

3.17

"SENS3:FUNC
’FREQ’|
FQPH’|
FQGR"

"SENS2:FUNC
’PEAK|
RMS’ "

"SENS:FUNC
’RMS|
RMSS|
PEAK|
QPE|
DC|
THD|
THDN|
MDIS|
DIM|
DFD|
WAF|
FFT|
WAV’ "

Freq./
grpdel

Freq./
phase

Freq.

Input
RMS

Input
PEAK

WAV

QPEAK

PEAK

RMS
selective

RMS

Measurement functions

Ch2

Ch1

Ch2

Ch1

Ch2

Ch1

(Phase or group delay of Ch2)

"SENS4:DATA?"

"SENS3:DATA2?"

(Freq. of Ch2)

"SENS3:DATA1?"

(Freq. of Ch1)

"SENS2:DATA2?"

"SENS2:DATA1?"

"SENS:DATA2?"

"SENS:DATA1?"

Read-in of
measurement results

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Programming Model of UPL Analyzer

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Instrument Model and Command Processing

3.6

UPL

Instrument Model and Command Processing

The instrument model shown in the following figure has been configured under the aspect of processing
IEC/IEEE-bus commands. The individual components operate independently of each other and
simultaneously. They communicate with each other by means of so-called messages.

IEC/IEEE bus

Input unit
with input buffer

Command
identification
(Parser)

Data set
Status reporting
system
Device hardware

IEC/IEEE bus

Fig. 3-4

3.6.1

Output unit
with
output buffer

Instrument model with remote control via IEC/IEEE-bus

Input Unit

The input unit receives the commands in the form of characters from the IEC/IEEE bus and collects
them in the input buffer. The input buffer has a capacity of 1024 characters. As soon as the input buffer
is full or receives the interface message DCL, transfer on the IEC/IEEE bus is stopped and the received
data are sent to the parser where the commands are checked for syntax and semantic errors and the
hardware is set in the sequence in which the commands arrived. Data transfer on the IEC/IEEE bus is
then continued. However, if the buffer is not yet full when a terminator is received, the input unit can
receive the next command while the previous command is identified and executed. Reception of a DCL
clears
the
input
buffer.

1078.2008.02

3.18

E-10

UPL
3.6.2

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Instrument Model and Command Processing
Parser

The parser (to parse = grammatically analyze) analyzes the data received from the input unit proceeding
in the order in which the data are received. A GET (Group Execute Trigger), for example, is only
processed when the previously received commands are executed. A DCL command will be given
priority. Each command identified as correct will immediately be executed and causes a hardware
setting.
Syntax and semantic errors are recognized and passed on to the status reporting system. The
remaining part of a command line after the syntax error will be further analyzed as far as possible and
processed.
While the parser is setting the hardware, the input unit can collect new commands in the input buffer.
This means that further commands can already be processed while settings are being made in the
hardware ("overlapping execution").

3.6.3

Setting the Device Hardware

The term "device hardware" refers to that part of the UPL which performs the instrument function
proper: signal generation, measurements, etc. This does not include the controller.
An IEC/IEEE-bus command line which may contain several setting commands is sent to the parser,
which checks the IEC/IEEE-bus commands for syntax and semantic errors. If a command is identified
as correct, a check is made with the aid of the current settings whether the command is permissible.
Permissible commands are taken over into the UPL data set (corresponds to hardware settings) and
the device hardware is set. If it turns out that the command is illegal because of the existing settings, as
for example a generator level of 20 V on the unbalanced outputs, an "execution error" message is sent
to the status reporting system and no new settings will be made in the device hardware for this
command. Subsequent commands which prove to be permissible are executed as described in the
following section.
This strictly hierarchical sequence ensures that at no time illegal device states will be set.

3.6.4

Why is a Specific Operating Sequence Sometimes Required?

• Each IEC/IEEE-bus command received by the UPL is immediately checked whether it is permissible.
This check can only be carried out if the UPL knows which instrument or function the command is
intended for, ie if the addressed instrument or command has been activated before.
Example1:
Selecting an input impedance of 600 Ohm is permissible for the balanced input, not for the
unbalanced one.
If this check and the respective error messages were to be omitted, measurements would be carried
out with incorrect instrument settings or would not be possible at all and the user would not even
know about it.
Example2:
Setting: generator, unbalanced outputs.
Remote programming of 20 V generator level.
This is not possible, however, as the balanced output allows only 12 V to be set.
–
–
–
–
–

Should the UPL accept this incorrect setting without signalling an error because the user might
afterwards select unbalanced outputs which can handle 20 V.
What will happen when this subsequent selection is not made?
Should the incorrect voltage be output?
Or, should an error message be output when the switchover is not performed?
And when should this error be signalled?

1078.2008.02

3.19

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Instrument Model and Command Processing

UPL

These conflicts can be avoided by observing the required operating sequence!
• Since similar menu items of different instruments or functions are addressed with the same command
in remote control, they can only be distinguished by a reference to the currently used instrument or
function.
Example:
Command "INPut:SELect CH1" may be used for all 3 analyzer units.
To provide the possibility for presetting also parameters of non-active functions, information on the
instrument or function to be addressed would have to be added to each IEC/IEEE-bus command.
Thus the internal address management of UPL commands would have to be carried out by the
IEC/IEEE-bus programmer. This would make programming unnecessarily difficult and the number of
commands would increase by many times. The UPL uses approx. 6000 menu items which would
then have to be "called up" separately by the user.
• An important operational feature of the UPL is its capability to note the settings for the individual
generator and analyzer functions and to restore all required parameters when one of these functions
is selected.
This eliminates the need to reset each parameter when a new function is selected.
Example:
Settings: Generator, MOD DIST function with frequencies 400 Hz and 7 kHz.
Switchover to DFD function
The frequency pair 11 and 12 kHz, which was set when the DFD function was used last, is
automatically reset.
This function of the UPL is also available for operation via IEC/IEEE bus, ie even in the case of
remote control a function switchover triggers an automatic reset of all pertaining parameters. This is
a much quicker and more reliable than a reset of each parameter every time by the user via IEC/IEEE
bus.
If settings for non-active instruments would be permissible as well, this automatic function could no
longer be used, as in this case already set parameters would also be overwritten.
• As the same internal data sets are used for manual and remote control (combined manual and
remote control should be possible), the same method of internal parameter processing can only be
allowed for the two modes. Since automatic parameter restoration is indispensable for manual
control, it must also be used in the case of remote operation.

To relieve the user from having to pay attention to such not so obvious conditions, the following applies
for manual and remote control of the UPL:
Any setting that is not permissible cannot become effective in the UPL
This has sometimes the disadvantage that a certain sequence has to be observed even in the case of
remote-control. However, this is more than compensated for by the fact that setting errors are
immediately signalled.
Note:
The command logging capability offered by the Universal Sequence Controller for UPL, option UPL-B10,
minimized the risk of incorrect settings (see 3.15.3 Command Logging - Converting B10 into IEC/IEEEBus Commands)

1078.2008.02

3.20

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Instrument Model and Command Processing

3.6.5

Status Reporting System

The status reporting system collects information on the device status and makes it available to the
output unit on request. Structure and function are described in detail in section 3.7 Status Reporting
System.

3.6.6

Output Unit

The output unit collects the information requested by the controller. It processes such information in line
with the SCPI rules and makes it available in the 1024-character output buffer. If the requested
information is longer it will be made available in blocks in a way that is not noticeable to the controller.
If the UPL is addressed as a talker and the output buffer does not contain any data or expect data from
the data set management, the output unit sends the error message "Query UNTERMINATED" to the
status reporting system. No data will be sent on the IEC/IEEE bus and the controller waits for the set
time limit. This procedure is prescribed by SCPI.

3.6.7

Triggering a Measurement/Sweep

A measurement or a sweep can be triggered in three different ways:
• With the SCPI-specific command

IEC OUT 20,"INIT"

• With the Common Command

IEC OUT 20,"*TRG"

• With the addressed command "Group Execute Trigger" IEC LAD 20: IEC GET
The three trigger modes take about the same execution time.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10)
See 3.16.4.4 Differences from the

IEC-bus Syntax -

RS-232 interface
See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote

Control via IEC/IEEE

UPL-B10

Bus

The addressed GET command is illegal.

The addressed GET command is illegal.

Another three commands are available for waiting for a triggered measurement result. They are
described in section 3.6.8.3 Comparison of Synchronization Capabilities. The synchronization
command "*WAI" is used in the program examples below and in 3.15.15.1
Command
Synchronization with *WAI for demonstrating the three trigger modes for a single measurement.

3.6.8

Command Synchronization

There are two events in the UPL, which have to be waited for before the next command can be
executed to make sure that subsequent commands meet clear conditions:
• End of a calibration
• End of a measurement (measurement result ready to be fetched)
Through programming, the controller can be forced to wait for the end of a calibration or measurement
(see table 3-2 Comparison of synchronization capabilities). Commands "*OPC", "*OPC?" or "*WAI"
are used to ensure that a calibration or measurement is completed before a new command is sent (see
section 3.6.8.3 Comparison of Synchronization Capabilities).
In the examples below synchronization by means of the *WAI command is described.

1078.2008.02

3.21

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Instrument Model and Command Processing
3.6.8.1

UPL

Wait for End of Calibration

Wait for the calibration to be completed before sending the next setting command:
When analog analyzer instruments are called up with commands
IECOUT 20,"INSTrument2 A22;*WAI"
IECOUT 20,"INSTrument2 A110;*WAI"
with calibration switched on in the current setup ("CALibrate:ZERO:AUTO ON")
or upon loading a setup with commands
IECOUT 20,"MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 0, ’filename’;*WAI"
(current setup)

IECOUT 20,"MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 2, ’filename’;*WAI"
(complete setup)

IECOUT 20,"*RST;*WAI"
(default setup)

with calibration switched on in the setup to be loaded ("CALibrate:ZERO:AUTO ON")
or after calling up a calibration with commands
IECOUT 20,"CALibrate:LDG:AUTO ONCE;*WAI" or "CALibrate LDG;*WAI"
IECOUT 20,"CALibrate:ZERO:AUTO ON;*WAI"
or "CALibrate AUTO;*WAI"
IECOUT 20,"CALibrate:ZERO:AUTO ONCE;*WAI" or "CALibrate DCC;*WAI"
Without this forced synchronization, a subsequent generator or analyzer setting command would trigger
a new calibration procedure.

3.6.8.2

Wait for End of Measurement/Sweep

Note:
In the explanations below the term measurement result denotes either a single measurement result or a
sequence of results obtained in a single sweep.
A measurement or a sweep can be triggered by means of INIT , *TRG or GET (see section 3.6.8.2
Wait for End of Measurement/Sweep).
INIT will be used in the examples below.
With IEC/IEEE-bus commands assuming a settled measurement result, synchronization with *WAI,
*OPC? or *OPC must be effected by means of an SRQ. The use of the three synchronization methods
is described in section 3.6.8.3 Comparison of Synchronization Capabilities.
*WAI will be used in the examples below.
The effect of the various combinations of measurement or sweep trigger with a synchronization
command is described in the table below.

1078.2008.02

3.22

E-10

UPL
Table 3-1

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Instrument Model and Command Processing
Trigger command with/without synchronization

Trigger command with/without
synchronization
"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI"

Description

A single measurement or sweep is triggered. Subsequent commands are processed
after the measurement or sweep is completed.
Generator and analyzer setting commands do not trigger a new measurement.
A new measurement has to be triggered with
IECOUT 20,"INIT;*WAI".
This command is the simplest to use and should preferably be used for triggering a
measurement.

"INIT:CONT OFF"
without *WAI

When a generator or analyzer setting command is sent during a single measurement,
ie before the measurement is completed, the measurement is restarted to avoid
incorrect results (incorrect results could be obtained, for instance, when the generator
voltage is varied during the measurement).
Generator or analyzer setting commands sent after the single measurement has been
terminated will not trigger a new measurement.
A new measurement has to be triggered with
IECOUT 20,"INIT" .

"INIT:CONT ON;*WAI"

Generator and analyzer setting commands will only be processed when the
measurement is terminated. They will not trigger a new measurements.
A new measurement has to be triggered with
IECOUT 20,"INIT;*WAI" .

"INIT:CONT ON"
without *WAI

Each generator or analyzer setting command restarts a measurement to avoid incorrect
measurement results (incorrect results could be obtained, for instance, when the
generator voltage is varied during the measurement).

Note:
A synchronization of commands other than analyzer, generator, INIT, status loading or calibration
commands is ineffective and should be avoided considering that synchronization commands are .

1078.2008.02

3.23

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Instrument Model and Command Processing
3.6.8.3

UPL

Comparison of Synchronization Capabilities

Table 3-2

Comparison of synchronization capabilities

Comman
d

Action after hardware settling

Controller programming

Upon completion of the calibration or after a IECOUT 20,"INST2 A22"
measurement result has been obtained, command IECOUT 20,"*OPC?
"*OPC?" causes "1" to be entered in the output IECIN 20,A$
buffer. The "1" is irrelevant - the method is based on
the fact that command IECIN 20,A$ stops the program
run until the buffer has a "1".

*OPC?

This method is therefore not suitable to wait for a
"1" in the program loop. This is possible with
*OPC.
*WAI

Upon completion of the calibration or after a IECOUT 20,"INST2 A22;*WAI"
measurement result has been obtained, the next
command is executed.

*OPC

Upon completion of the calibration or after a - Set bit 0 in the ESE
measurement result has been obtained, the Operation - Set bit 5 in the SRE
Complete bit in the Event Status Register (ESR) is set - Wait for Service Request (SRQ)
which triggers an SRQ if bit 5 in the Status Enable
Advantage over "*OPC?" and "*WAI":
Register is set.
While waiting for SRQ with the Operation Complete bit in
the Event Status Register set, the program may carry
out other tasks.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10)

See 3.16.4.4 Differences from the

RS-232 interface

IEC-bus Syntax -

See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote

UPL-B10

Bus

*OPC cannot be used.

*OPC cannot be used.

Control via IEC/IEEE

Detailed examples for command synchronization are given in section 3.15.15 Command
Synchronization

3.7

Status Reporting System

The status reporting system (see Fig. 3-6, Overview of Status Register) stores all information on the
current operating status of the UPL, eg AUTORANGE being performed, and on errors. Such information
is stored in the status registers and in the error queue. The contents of the status registers and of the
error queue can be queried via the IEC/IEEE bus.
The information is hierarchically structured. The topmost level is formed by the Status Byte Register
(STB) defined by IEEE 488.2 and the associated mask register Service Request Enable (SRE). The
STB receives its information from the Standard Event Status Register (ESR) also defined in IEEE 488.2
and the associated mask register Standard Event Status Enable (ESE) as well as from the SCPIdefined STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable registers and the UPL-specific register
STATus:XQUEstionable, which contain detailed information on the UPL.
The status reporting system also includes the IST flag (Individual STatus) and the Parallel Poll Enable
Register (PPE) assigned to it. The IST flag, just as SRQ, combines the complete device status in a
single bit. The PPE for the IST flag has an analog function like the SRE has for the Service Request.

1078.2008.02

3.24

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System

3.7.1

Structure of SCPI Status Register

The STATus:OPERation Register and the STATus:QUEStionable Register (see section 3.7.3.4
STATus:OPERation Register and) consists of five registers of 16 bits each with different functions (See
Fig. 3-5). The individual bits are independent of each other, ie each hardware status is assigned a bit
number which is the same for all five registers. Bit 5 of the STATus OPERation Registers, for instance,
is assigned in all five registers to the hardware status "wait for trigger". Bit 15 (the most significant bit) is
set to zero in all registers. Thus the contents of the registers can be processed by the controller as a
positive integer.
15 14 13 12 CONDition register

3

2 1 0

PTRansition register
NTRansition register

EVENT register
To Status Byte Register
&

&

& & & & &

& & & & & & & & &

+ Summary bit

+ = logig OR
of all bits

ENABle register

Fig 3-5

& = logig AND

Status register model

CONDition register

The CONDition register is directly written to by the hardware or the summary
bit of the next lower register. Its contents reflects the current device status.
This register can only be read, but neither written to nor cleared. After an SRQ
has been caused by an entry in one of the status registers, reading the
CONDition register does not trigger another SRQ. Further SRQs are only
possible when the EVENT register of the status register is read.
Reading the register does not change its contents.

PTRansition register

1078.2008.02

The Positive TRansition register acts as a transition filter. Upon transition of a
bit of the CONDition register from 0 to 1, the associated PTR bit decides
whether the EVENt bit will be set to 1
PTR bit = 1: the EVENt bit is set.
PTR bit = 0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This register can be written and read.
Reading the register does not change its contents.

3.25

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System
NTRansition register

UPL

The Negative TRansition register also acts as a transition filter. Upon
transition of a bit of the CONDition register from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit
decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
NTR bit = 1: the EVENt bit is set.
NTR bit = 0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This register can be written and read.
Reading the register does not change its contents.
With the aid of these two transition registers the user can define the status
change of the CONDition register (none, 0 to 1, 1 to 0 or both) that is to be
stored in the EVENt register.

EVENt register

The EVENt register reports whether an event has occurred since its last
reading, it is the memory of the CONDition register. It registers events that
have been reported by the transition registers. The EVENt register is
continuously updated by the instrument. It can only be read by the user.
Reading this register clears its contents. After an SRQ has been caused
by an entry in a status register, another SRQ is only possible when the EVENt
register of the status register is read. Reading the CONDition register does
not cause another SRQ.

This register is frequently referred to as the overall register.
ENABle register

The ENABle register determines whether the EVENt bit affects the summary
bit (see below). Each bit of the EVENt register is ANDed (symbol ’&’) with the
associated ENABle bit. The events of all logical operations of this register are
ORed (symbol ’+’) and passed on to the summary bit.
ENAB bit = 0: the associated EVENt bit does not affect the summary bit.
ENAB bit = 1: if the associated EVENt is "1", the summary bit is also
set to "1".
This register can be written and read by the user.
Reading the register does not change its contents.

Summary bit

As stated above, the summary bit for each register is derived from the EVENt
and the ENABle registers. The result is entered into a bit of the CONDition
register of the next higher register.
The instrument automatically generates the summary bit for each register. An
event, eg a non-locking PLL, may thus cause a service request through all
hierarchical levels.

Note:
The Service Request Enable Register SRE defined in IEEE 488.2 may be considered as the ENABle
register of the STB provided that the STB is configured in conformance with SCPI. Accordingly, the ESE
may be considered as the ENABLe register of the ESR.

1078.2008.02

3.26

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System

3.7.2

Overview of Status Register

-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-

SRQ

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

-&-&-&-&-&-&-

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

always 0
RUN (BASIC Macro)
free
free
Analyzer overrun
Measuring status
Sweep status
Sweep status
free
free
Waiting for trigger
Measuring
SWEeping
RANGing
free
CALibrating

-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-

STATus:OPERation register

OPER
RQS/MSS
ESB
MAV

15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Low-dist. generator calib. under progress
Negative reference value matched
Analyzer offset calib. under progress
Setup conversion
Printer not ready
Hardcopy under progress
ORUN in channel 2
ORUN in channel 1
Calib. in channel 2
Calib. in channel 1
Range information for function
measurement in channel 2
Range information for function
measurement in channel 1
Function meas. result of channel 2 uncertain
Function meas. result of channel 1 uncertain

STATus:XQUEstionable register

QUES
ERRQ
XQUE
-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-

STB

SRE

15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-

PPE

15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

always 0
Overload of input channel 2
Overload of input channel 1
Generator status
Generator status
Generator status
Sweep underrange
free
free
Phase meas. res. uncertain
Freq. meas. res. uncertain
free
free
free
free
Function meas. res. uncertain

-&-&-&-&-&-&-&-

ESE

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Power on
User Request
Command Error
Execution Error
Device Dependent Error
Query Error
frei
Operation Complete

ESR

STATus:EVENt-Register

Meas.results
Query
responses

EVENt part
NTRansition part

Message AVailable

PTRansition part
CONDition part

IST flag

ENABle part

(Response to parallel poll)
Error queue

STATus:QUEStionable register

& = logic UND
= logic ODER
of all bits

Fig. 3-6

Overview of Status Register
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10)

See 3.16.4.4 Differences from the

IEC-bus Syntax -

RS-232 interface
See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote

Control via IEC/IEEE

UPL-B10

Bus

List of usable commands of the status reporting system.

List of usable commands of the status reporting system.

1078.2008.02

3.27

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System

UPL

3.7.3

Description of Status Registers

3.7.3.1

Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)

The STB is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough overview of the UPL status, collecting
information from the lower-level registers. It is comparable with the CONDition register of a
SCPI-defined register and is at the highest level of the SCPI hierarchy. Its special feature is that bit 6
acts as the summary bit of all other bits of the Status Byte Register.
The Status Byte Register is read out by the query *STB? or a Serial Poll .
The SRE is associated with the STB. The function of the SRE corresponds to that of the ENABle
register of the SCPI registers. Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE. Bit 6 of the SRE is
ignored. If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1, a Service
Request (SRQ) will be generated on the IEC/IEEE bus, which triggers an interrupt in the controller
configured for this purpose, and can be further processed by the controller.
The SRE can be set by the command *SRE and read out by the query *SRE?.
Its contents are not set to zero during reading.
If the EVENt part of a status register is read, the associated bit in the status byte register is deleted (eg
STAT:OPER:EVEN? deletes the OPER bit (d7) in the OPERation register).
Table 3-3

Definition of bits used in the Status Byte Register

Bit
No.

Definition

0

Free

1

XQUEstionable Status summary bit
This bit is set if in the XQUEstionable Status Register an EVENt bit is set and the associated
ENABle bit is set to 1.
The query command of the XQUEstionable Status Registers is "STATus:XQUEstionable:CONDition?" or
"STATus:XQUEstionable[:

2

Error Queue EVENt]?"
The Error Queue contains an entry to be read with command "SYSTem:ERRor?" followed by IECIN.

3

QUEStionable Status summary bit
This bit is set if in the QUEStionable Status Register an EVENt bit is set and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1.
A set bit denotes a questionable device status which can be specified in greater detail by querying the
QUEStionable Status Registers with "STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?" or "STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?"

4

MAV
A measurement result, response to a query (IEC/IEEE-bus command with ’?’) or Error Queue entry is available and
can be read with an IECIN command.

5

ESB bit
Summary bit of the Event Status Register. This bit is set if one of the bits in the Event Status Register is set and
enabled in the Event Status Enable Register.
Setting of this bit denotes a serious error which can be specified in greater detail by querying the Event Status
Registers with "*ESR?".

6

MSS bit (master status summary bit)
This bit is set if the UPL triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits of this register is set
together with its mask bit in the Service Request Enable Register SRE.

7

OPERation Status Register summary bit
This bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation Status Register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1.
A set bit denotes that an action is just being performed by the UPL. Information on the type of the action can be
obtained by querying the OPERation Status Register with "STATus:OPERation:CONDition?" or
"STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?".

Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10)
See 3.16.4.4 Differences from the

IEC-bus Syntax -

RS-232 interface
See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote

UPL-B10

Bus

Cannot be used

Cannot be used

1078.2008.02

3.28

Control via IEC/IEEE

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System

3.7.3.2

IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE)

Similar to the SRQ, the IST flag (Individual Status Flag) combines the complete status information in a
single bit. It can be queried by a parallel poll (see section 3.7.4.3 Parallel Poll, and 3.15.16.1 SRQ
Interrupt Routine with Serial Poll or with "*IST?".
The Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE) determines which bits of the STB affect the IST flag. The bits of
the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE, bit 6 - in contrast to the SRE - being used
too. The IST flag is obtained by ORing all results together. The PPE can be set by the command *PRE
and read by the query *PRE?.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10)
See 3.16.4.4 Differences from the

IEC-bus Syntax -

RS-232 interface
See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote

UPL-B10

IEC/IEEE Bus

Cannot be used

Cannot be used

3.7.3.3

Control via

Definition of bits used in the Event Status Register

The ESR is already defined in the IEEE 488.2 standard. It is comparable to the EVENt register of an
SCPI register. The Event Status Register can be read out by the query *ESR?.
The ESE forms the associated ENABle register. It can be set by the command *ESE and read out by
the query *ESE?.
Table 3-4

Definition of bits used in the Event Status Register

Bit No.

Definition

0

Operation Complete
Upon reception of the "*OPC" command this bit is set exactly when all previous commands have been
executed.

1

Free

2

Query Error
This bit is set if the controller wants to read data from the instrument but has not sent a data request
command, or if the controller does not fetch the requested data but sends instead a new command to the
instrument. A frequent cause is a faulty query which cannot be executed.

3

Device-dependent Error
This bit is set if a device-dependent error occurs. An error message with a positive number denoting the
error in greater detail in plain text (see 3.14 List of Error Messages) will be entered into the Error
Queue.

4

Execution Error
This bit is set if the syntax of the command received is correct but the command cannot be executed due
to various marginal conditions. An error message with a number between -200 and -300 describing the
error in greater detail (see 3.14 List of Error Messages) will be entered into the Error Queue.

5

Command Error
This bit is set if an undefined command or a command with incorrect syntax is received. An error
message with a number between -100 and -200 describing the error in greater detail (see 3.14 List of
Error Messages) will be entered into the Error Queue.

6

User Request
This bit is set upon pressing the [LOCAL] key, ie when the instrument is switched to manual control.

7

Power On
This bit is set upon power on of the instrument.

1078.2008.02

3.29

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System
3.7.3.4

UPL

STATus:OPERation Register

The CONDition part of this register contains information on the operations currently performed by the
UPL and the EVENt part on the operations performed by the UPL since the last readout of the register.
The register can be read by the commands
"STATus:OPERation:CONDition?" or
"STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?".
Table 3-5

Definition of bits used in the STATus:OPERation register

Bit No.

Definition

0

CALibrating
This bit is set as long as a calibration is performed by the UPL.

1

Free

2

RANGing
This bit is set as long as the UPL performs a range change (eg. autorange).

3

SWEeping
This bit is set while the UPL is performing a sweep. Bits 8 and 9 inform on the current sweep state.

4

MEASuring
This bit is set while the UPL is performing a measurement. Bit 10 informs on the current measurement state.

5

WAIT for TRIGGER
This bit is set while the UPL waits for a trigger event.

6-7

Free

8 and 9

Sweep Status
Bit 3, 9, 8
0 0 0 = Sweep OFF
0 0 1 = Sweep TERMINATED
0 1 0 = Sweep STOPPED
0 1 1 = Sweep INVALID
1 0 0 = Sweep MANU RUNNING
1 0 1 = Sweep SNGL RUNNING
1 1 0 = Sweep CONT RUNNING

No sweep performed
Single sweep completed
Sweep has been stopped and may be continued
Sweep invalid as not yet started
Manual sweep running
Single sweep running
Continuous sweep running

1 1 1 = Sweep OFF
10

Measuring Status
Bit 4, 10
0 0 = Measuring TERM
0 1 = Measuring STOP
1 0 = Measuring SNGL

Single measurement completed
Measurement stopped
Single measurement running

1 1 = Measuring CONT
11

Analyzer Overrun
The sampling rate applied to the external input is too high for the digital meter selected.
Remedy:
- Select a lower external sampling rate and set function again
- Select a fast digital meter.

12,13

Free

14

RUN (BASIC-Macro)
If a BASIC macro (see 2.16 Macro Operation) is started with the command SYST:PROG:EXEC ’filename.bas’,
this bit is set to 1. This bit is set to 0 when the program has been quit. This 1→0 transition can be queried via
serial poll or initiate an SRQ, eg to fetch measurement data (for a detailed example see 3.15.18 Call BASICMacro

15

Free

1078.2008.02

3.30

E-10

UPL
3.7.3.5

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System
STATus:QUEStionable Register

This register contains information on questionable device states. These may for instance occur if the
UPL is operated out of specifications. The register can be read by the commands
"STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?" or
"STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?".
Table 3-6

Definition of bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable Register

Bit No.

Definition

0

Function
This bit is set when the result of a function measurement is questionable.

1-4

Free

5

FREQuency
This bit is set when the result of a frequency measurement is questionable.

6

PHASe
This bit is set when the result of a phase measurement is questionable.

7-8

Free

9

Sweep underrange
During the sweep, valid but inaccurate measurement results were obtained because of underranging.

10 - 12

13 -14

Generator status
Bit 12, 11, 10
0
0
0
0
1
1

0
0
1
1
0
0

0
1
0
1
0
1

=
=
=
=
=
=

Generator OFF
Generator OFF
Generator RUNNING
Generator BUSY
Generator HALTED
Generator OVERRUN

1
1

1
1

0 = Generator OFF
1 = Generator OFF

Both generator channels are switched off
Generator outputs a signal
Generator DSP computes a waveform
No generator output signal due to incomplete or invalid setting
The sampling rate applied to the external input is too high for
the digital generator selected Remedy:
- Select lower sampling rate, call up function again.
- Select faster digital generator

Analyzer Status
Bit 14, 13
0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1

=
= ANL 1: OVLD
= ANL 2: OVLD
= ANL 1: OVLD 2: OVLD

Normal working order (no overload at any channel)
Overload at input channel 1
Overload at input channel 2
Overload at both input channels

With input impedance of 300Ω or 600Ω one or both input channels are overloaded!
To protect the analyzer input against damages the input impedance temporarily is switched to 200 kΩ and the
generator output is turned off. Measurement will be continued.
Ways to recover from overload:
- remove overload (input voltage at 300Ω or 600Ω must not exceed 25 V) or
- set input impedance to 200kΩ (INP:IMP R200K).
Reactivate generator output by sending command "OUTPut ON".
C.f. 2.13 Fast Switch-off of Outputs. The overload protection of the analyzer inputs is valid for analog board
versions ≥ 4.00 and software version ≥ 1.0.
15

Free

1078.2008.02

3.31

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System
3.7.3.6

UPL

STATus XQUEStionable Register

This register contains additional information for the Status Operation Register and information on rarely
occurring states. It can be read by the queries "STATus:XQUEStionable :CONDition?" or
"STATus:XQUEStionable[:EVENt]?".
Table 3-7
Bit No.

Definition of bits used in the STATus:XQUEstionable Register
Definition
Bit set:

0

Information of MEASuring bit (d4) and Measuring Status bit (d10) of Status Operation Register
refers to channel 1.
MEASuring bit (d4)
Measuring status bit (d10)
0
0
1
1

1

Bit set:

0 =
1 =
0 =
1 =

Measuring TERM
Measuring STOP
Measuring SNGL
Measuring CONT

Single measurement terminated on
Measurement stopped on
Single measurement in progress on
Continuous measurement in progress on

Information of MEASuring bit (d4) and Measuring Status bit (d10) of Status Operation Register
refers to channel 2.

Analogous to bit No. 0.
2-3

Additional range information for channel 1
d3 d2
0
0

0 =
1 =

1
1

0 =
1 =

Register
4-5

Measurement result valid
Ranging in channel 1.
Bit d2 (RANGing) of STATus OPERation Register set simultaneously.
Underrange (measurement result inaccurate) in channel 1
Overrange (measurement result invalid) in channel 1
Function bit d0 (function measurement result uncertain) of the Status Questionable
set simultaneously with underrange
and overrange bits.

Additional range information for channel 2
d3 d2
0
0

0 =
1 =

1
1

0 =
1 =

Register

Measurement result valid
Ranging in channel 2.
Bit d2 (RANGing) of STATus OPERation Register set simultaneously.
Underrange (measurement result inaccurate) in channel 2
Overrange (measurement result invalid) in channel 2
Function bit d0 (function measurement result uncertain) of the Status Questionable
set together with the underrange and overrange bits.

6

Bit set:

The calibration denoted in bit 13 or 15 is in progress in channel 1. No measurements are performed
during this period.

7

Bit set:

The calibration denoted in bit 13 or 15 is in progress in channel 2. No measurements are
performed during this period.

8

Bit set:

The sampling rate at the external input of channel 1 is too high for the digital instrument.
Remedy: Set lower rate and recall measurement function.

9

Bit set:

Ditto for channel 2

10

Bit set:

Read-out of screen content to a printer or a file. Operation of UPL is disabled for a few seconds.

11

Bit set:

Printer not ready.

12

Bit set:

A previous SETUP is converted to the latest status.

13

Bit set:

Calibration of analyzer offset in progress. No measurement results are output during this period.

14

Bit set:

A negative reference value is limited to +10-10 for the dBr calculation.

15

Bit set:

Calibration of low-distortion generator in progress. No measurement results are output during
this period.

1078.2008.02

3.32

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System

3.7.4

Use of Status Reporting System

For an efficient use of the status reporting system, the information contained therein has to be
transferred to the controller and further processed. There are various methods which are described in
the following. Detailed program examples are given in 3.15
Examples of IEC/IEEE-Bus
Programming.

3.7.4.1

Service Request, Use of Hierarchical Structure

Under certain conditions, the UPL may send a service request (SRQ) to the controller. This service
request usually causes an interrupt at the controller to which the controller program can respond by a
suitable action. As shown in Fig. 3-6 (Section 3.7.2 Overview of Status Register), a SRQ will always be
triggered if one or several of the bits 3, 5 or 7 have been set in the Status Byte Register and enabled in
the SRE. Each of these bits combines the information from a further status register. By setting the
ENABle registers of the status registers accordingly, any bit in any status register will be able to trigger a
SRQ. To utilize the possibilities of the service request, all bits in the enable registers SRE and ESE
should be set to "1".
Examples:
(see also Fig 3-6 , Section 3.7.2 Overview of Status Register ):
Use command "*OPC" for generating an SRQ. While waiting for the SRQ, the program may perform
other tasks.
• Setting bit 0 (Operation Complete) in the ESE
• Setting bit 5 (ESB) in the SRE
Upon completion of the settings, the UPL generates an SRQ.
Indicating the end of a sweep by an SRQ via bit 3 in the STATus OPERation Register. While waiting for
the SRQ the program may perform other tasks.
• Setting bit 7 (summary bit of STATus:OPERation Register) in the SRE
• Setting bit 3 (Sweep Terminated) in the STATus:OPERation:ENABle Register.
• Setting bit 3 in the STATus:OPERation:NTRansition to ensure that the transition of sweeping bit 3
from 1 to 0 (Sweep-Terminated) is also stored in the EVENt register. Calling up the *CLS command
causes all bits of the NTRansition and PTRansition to be set to 1 so that any bit change is recorded.
Enabling the desired enable bit, in this case bit 3, will normally be sufficient.
After having completed the sweep, the UPL generates an SRQ.
The SRQ is thus the only way for the UPL to become active of its own. A controller program should set
the UPL so that a service request will be generated in case of malfunctions. The program should
suitably respond to the service request. A detailed example of a service request routine is given in
section 3.15.15 Command Synchronization.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10)
See 3.16.4.4 Differences from the

IEC-bus Syntax -

RS-232 interface
See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote

UPL-B10

IEC/IEEE Bus

Cannot be used

Cannot be used

1078.2008.02

3.33

Control via

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System
3.7.4.2

UPL

Serial Poll

Serial Poll is mainly used for obtaining a quick overview of the status of several devices connected to
the IEC/IEEE bus
In the case of a Serial Poll, the status byte of a device can be queried with
IECOUT 20,"*STB?"
IEC IN 20,A%
However, querying the status byte is normally implemented by interface messages (see annex A,
Interface Messages) which means that a single byte is set to the hardware.
The R&S BASIC command for the execution of a Serial Poll is
IEC SPL 20,A%
It is much quicker than the Common Command "*STB?".
The serial poll method has already been defined in the IEEE 488.1 standard and used to be the only
standard method for querying the status byte of several devices. This method also works with
instruments which neither conform to SCPI nor to IEEE 488.2.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10)
See 3.16.4.4 Differences from the

IEC-bus Syntax -

RS-232 interface
See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote

UPL-B10

IEC/IEEE Bus

Cannot be used

Cannot be used

3.7.4.3

Control via

Parallel Poll

In the parallel poll mode up to eight devices are simultaneously requested by a command from the
controller to transmit 1 bit of information on the assigned data line, ie to pull the assigned data line to
logic 0 or 1. Similar to the SRE register which defines the conditions under which an SRQ will be
generated, there is a Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE), which is also ANDed bit by bit with the STB –
taking into account bit 6. The result is ORed and is then returned (may be inverted) as a reply to a
parallel poll of the controller. The result can also be read out without parallel poll by the query *IST.
The UPL must first be set for the parallel poll using the R&S BASIC command IEC PCON.
Example:
IECPCON 20,1,6:

UPL identifies itself by a 1 on line 6.

This command assigns a data line to the device on which it sends an SRQ. The parallel poll itself is
made by IEC PPL Pp%.
The parallel poll mode is mainly used to find out quickly which of the devices connected to the IEC/IEEE
bus has caused an SRQ. For this purpose SRE and PPE must be set to the same value. A detailed
example of parallel poll is given in section 3.15.16.1.2 Serial Poll SRQ Routine.
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL-B10)
See 3.16.4.4 Differences from the

IEC-bus Syntax -

RS-232 interface
See 3.17.6 Differences to Remote

UPL-B10

Bus

Cannot be used

Cannot be used

1078.2008.02

3.34

Control via IEC/IEEE

E-10

UPL
3.7.4.4

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System
Queries

Each individual register of a status register can be read out by queries. The individual queries are given
in the detailed description of the registers in Section 3.7.3 Description of Status Registers. The queries
always return a number representing the bit pattern of the queried register. This number is evaluated by
the controller program.
Queries are mainly used after a SRQ to obtain detailed information on the cause for the SRQ.

3.7.4.5

Error Queue Query

• Each error condition in the instrument causes an entry in the error queue. The entries in the error
queue are detailed error messages in plain text which can be read out via IEC/IEEE bus by the query
SYSTem:ERRor?. Each query SYSTem:ERRor? returns an entry from the error queue. If there are
no more error messages in the error queue, 0 = "No error" is returned by the instrument
• The error queue should be queried in the controller program after each SRQ since the queue entries
provide a more precise description of the error cause than the status registers. In particular in the test
phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried at regular intervals since it also
registers faulty commands from the controller to the UPL.
Note:
In addition to an entry in the Error Queue, each error causes a plain-text message to be output on the
UPL display so that the IEC/IEEE-bus control program can be checked in the REMOTE control mode
without reading out the Error Queue.

1078.2008.02

3.35

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Status Reporting System
3.7.5

UPL

Resetting the Status Reporting Systems

Table 3-8 contains the various commands and events causing a reset of the status reporting system.
None of the commands, with the exception of *RST affects the functional device setting. In particular
DCL does not clear the device settings.
Table 3-8

Resetting of device functions
Effect
DCL, SDC
Event

(Device Clear,
Selected Device
Clear)

*RST or
SYSTem:PRESet

STATus:PRESet

*CLS

Clears STB, ESR







yes

Clears SRE, ESE









Clears PPE









Clears EVENt registers







yes

Clears ENABle registers of OPERation,
QUESTionable and XQUEStionable Register,
fills ENABle registers of all other registers with
"1".





yes



Fills PTRansition registers with "1",
clears NTRansition registers





yes



Clears Error Queue







yes

Clears output buffer

yes

1)

1)

1)

Clears command processing and input buffer

yes







1) Any command that is the first one in a command line clears the output buffer.

1078.2008.02

3.36

E-10

UPL

3.8

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Notation

Notation of Command Table

All commands implemented in the UPL according to the command system are tabulated and described
in detail in section 3.10 IEC-bus Commands. The notation is in line with the SCPI standard provided
the committee has defined a command for the required function.

Command table in section 3.10 IEC-bus Commands
Command:

In this column the complete command without parameters is listed.

Parameter:

Here the required parameters and their range of values are stated. If the
command is only available in the form of a query, ’Query only’ is marked in
this column.

Basic unit:
Meaning:
Section:

Basic unit of physical parameter.
Brief description of command.
Reference to the detailed function description in the case of manual
operation, mainly section 2 of the UPL manual.

Upper/lower case

Upper/lowercase characters are used to differentiate between the long
form and the short form of the keywords of a command. The UPL itself
does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase letters.

Special character |

For some commands there is a choice of keywords having the same effect.
These keywords are stated in the same line and separated by a vertical
bar. Only one of these keywords need to be stated in the header of the
command. The effect of the command is independent of the keyword
selected.
Example:"SOURce:FREQuency:CW|:FIXed"
(setting generator to a constant frequency of 1 kHz)

The two commands below have an identical effect
"SOURce:FREQuency:CW 1E3"≡ "SOURce:FREQuency:FIXed 1E3"
A vertical bar in the notation of the parameters is used to separate
alternative options and is to be seen as "or". The effect of the command
differs according to the parameter stated.
Example:Selection of parameters for the command
"SENSe:VOLTage:UNIT V|DBV|DBU"
(measurement result may be displayed in Volt, dBV or dBu)

Special characters [ ]

Keywords in square brackets may be omitted in compound headers (see
section 3.5.3 Structure of a Command Line). For reasons of compatibility
with the SCPI standard, the instrument must be able to accept the full
length of the command.
Parameters in square brackets may also be optionally inserted in the
command or omitted.
Example: "SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE ..."
has the same effect as
"SENSe:REFerence:MODE ..."
(selecting the method for generating a level reference value)

1078.2008.02

3.37

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Notation

UPL

Parameters in square brackets
may also be optionally inserted in the command or omitted.
Example: TRACe[1]

stands for TRACe and TRACe1

TRACe[1|2] denotes that either TRACe1 or
TRACe2 can be selected, causing
different settings.
DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:MARKer MODE ...
(markers for FFT spectrum display may be different for TRACe1
and TRACe2)

TRACe[]

denotes that the command can be used for
TRACe1 and TRACe2, causing the same settings
in both cases.
DISPlay:TRACe[]:CURSor[1]:MODE ...
(selected cursor function apply to both traces!)

Special characters { }

Parameters in curly brackets may be included in the command as often as
required.
Example: SENSe[1]:LIST:FREQuency {,}
(frequencies of an RMS-selective sweep)

1078.2008.02

3.38

E-10

UPL

3.9

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Common Commands

Common Commands

The common commands are based on the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625.2) standard. A specific command has
the same effect in different instruments. The headers of these commands consist of an asterisk "*"
followed by three letters. Many common commands refer to the status reporting system described in
detail in section 3.15 Examples of IEC/IEEE-Bus Programming.
Table 3-9

Common Commands

Command

Brief description

Parameter / Notes

Universal
Sequence
Controller
UPL-B10

RS-232 interface

*CLS

Resets status byte

no query

Not usable

Not usable

*ESE

Sets Event Status Enable Register

0 to 255

Not usable

Not usable

*ESR?

Readout of content of Event Status
Register

query only

Usable

Usable

*IDN?

Identification query

ROHDE&SCHWARZ, UPL,
0, 2.xx

Usable

Usable

*IST?

Query for content of IST flag

query only

Not usable

Not usable

*OPC

Synchronization command

Usable

Usable

*PCB

Address for passing back the IEC/IEEEbus control

0 to 30, no query

Not usable

Not usable

*PRE

Sets Parallel Poll Enable Register

0 to 255

Not usable

Not usable

*RST

Resets the device to a defined default
state. The parameter link (see 2.15.8
Transfer of Parameters (Parameter
Link Function)) is disabled to maintain
the default setting described in
Appendix A UPL Default Setup

no query

Usable

Usable

*SRE

Sets Service Request Enable Register

0 to 255

Not usable

Not usable

*STB?

Query for content of Status Byte

query only

Not usable

Not usable

*TRG

Triggers measurement

no query

Usable

Usable

*TST?

UPL selftest

query only

Usable

Usable

*WAI

Synchronization command

Usable

Usable

*CLS
CLEAR STATUS sets the status byte (STB), the Standard Event Register (ESR) and the EVENt part
of the QUEStionable, OPERation and of the XQUEstionable Register to zero. The command has no
effect on the mask and transition parts of the register. The output buffer is cleared.
*ESE 0 to 255
EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the Event Status Enable Register to the defined value. The query
*ESE? returns the content of the Event Status Enable Registers in decimal form.
*ESR?
EVENT STATUS ENABLE returns the contents of the Event Status Enable Register in decimal form
(0 to 255) and clears the register.

1078.2008.02

3.39

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Common Commands

UPL

*IDN?
IDENTIFICATION QUERY for identification of the instrument.
The response is for example: "Rohde&Schwarz, UPL, 0, 2.xx"
UPL = instrument designation: 0 = serial number, 2.xx = firmware version
*IST?
INDIVIDUAL STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form (0 | 1).
The IST flag is the status bit sent during a Parallel Poll (see section 3.7.3.2 IST Flag and Parallel
Poll Enable Register (PPE)).
*OPC
OPERATION COMPLETE sets bit 0 in the Event Status Register if all preceding commands have
been executed. This bit may be used to assert a Service Request (see section 3.6.8.3 Comparison
of Synchronization Capabilities, 3.7.3.3 Event Status Reg. (ESR), Event Status Enable Reg. (ESE),
and section 3.15.15.3 Command Synchronization with *OPC and SRQ
*OPC?
OPERATION COMPLETE QUERY places an ASCII character "1" in the output buffer as soon as all
preceding commands have been executed (see 3.6.8.3 Comparison of Synchronization Capabilities
and section 3.15.15.3 Command Synchronization with *OPC and SRQ.
*PCB 0 to 30
PASS CONTROL BACK notifies the address of the controller to which the IEC/IEEE-bus control is to
returned.
*PRE 0 to 255
PARALLEL POLL REGISTER ENABLE sets the Parallel Poll Enable Register to the defined value.
The query *PRE? returns the contents of the Parallel Poll Enable Registers in decimal form
*RST
RESET sets the UPL to a defined default state. The parameter-Link (see 2.15.8 Transfer of
Parameters (Parameter Link Function)) is switched off to ensure that the default state as described
in Annex A UPL Default Setup is maintained after a change of instrument or function.
*SRE 0...255
SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE sets the Service Request Enable Register to the defined value. Bit 6
(MSS mask bit) remains 0. This command determines the conditions under which a Service Request
will be asserted. The query *SRE? outputs the contents of the Service Request Enable Registers in
decimal form.
Bit 6 is always 0.
*STB?
READ STATUS BYTE QUERY outputs the contents of the status byte in decimal form.
Its contents are not set to zero during reading.
If the EVENt part of a status register is read, the associated bit in the status byte register is deleted
(eg STAT:OPER:EVEN? deletes the OPER bit (d7) in the OPERation register).
*TRG
TRIGGER starts all actions waiting for a trigger event.
See sections 3.6.7 Triggering a Measurement/Sweep; 3.6.8.2 Wait for End of Measurement/Sweep
and section 3.15.8.1 Readout of Triggered Measurements.
*TST?
SELF TEST QUERY causes a brief selftest of the UPL and outputs an error code in decimal form (’0’
for ok., ’1’ for error)
*WAI
WAIT-to-CONTINUE allows processing of commands only after all preceding commands have been
executed, all signals settled and current measurements are terminated (see sections 3.6.8.2 Wait
for End of Measurement/Sweep, 3.6.8.3 Comparison of Synchronization Capabilities, and section
3.15.15.1 Command Synchronization with *WAI.

1078.2008.02

3.40

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands
Selection of Generator  Configuration of Analog Generators • Configuration of Digital Generators
• Generator Sweeps  Generator Functions

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands for Analyzers
Selection of Analyzer  Configuration of Analog Analyzers • Configuration of Digital Analyzers
• Starting the Analyzer, Ext. Sweep  Analyzer Functions

Selection of Analyzer Filter

Units for IEC/IEEE Measurement Results

Loading and Storing
Loading and Storing Instrument Setups • Loading and Storing Traces and Lists

Commands for Graphical Representation of Results

Commands for Printing/Plotting of Screen and Storing in Files

Setting and Display of Auxiliary Parameters
IEC/IEEE-Bus Address • Keyboard Settings • Tastatureinstellungen • Setting and Switching
Off the Displays • Version Display •Calibration •Transfer of Settings • Parameters of COM2 Interface
• Loading Speed for Setups and Analyzer Measurement Functions

Commands for Data Output
Commands for Input/Output of Block Data
Commands for Status and Error Queries
Commands for Synchronization
Settings without Corresponding IEC/IEEE-Bus Command

Alphabetical List of IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands

1078.2008.02

3.0

E-10

Generators

Selection of Generator

3.10.1

3.10.1.1

1078.2008.02

Command

Configuration of Analog Generators

OUTPut:SELect

3.10.1.2

INSTrument[1]:NSELect

equivalent to

INSTrument[1][:SELect]

Command

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands

3.10

UPL

3.41

Parameter

OFF
CH1
CH2
CH2Is1

1
3

aias

D48

A25

Parameter

Basic
unit

Basic
unit

Meaning

→ Generator channels switched off
→ Only generator channel 1 active
→ Only generator channel 2 active
→ Both generator channels active

→ Analog generator
→ Digital generator

→ Two-channel analog generator, frequency range:
2 Hz to 21.75 kHz with universal generator
10 Hz to 110 kHz low-distortion generator (UPL-B1 option)
→ Two-channel digital generator, frequency range:
2 Hz to 21.93 kHz with option UPL-B2 (digital audio I/O)
2 Hz to 43.86 kHz with option UPL-B29 (digital audio 96 kHz)

Meaning

2.5.2
GEN panel
Channel(s)
→ OFF
→1
→2
→2≡1

Section

E-10

2.5.1
GEN panel
INSTRUMENT
→ ANALOG
→ DIGITAL

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

Command

1078.2008.02

SOURce:VOLTage:LIMit[:AMPLitude]

SOURce:VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO

OUTPut:IMPedance

OUTPut:TYPE

UPL


0 to 20 V

OFF

ON

3.42

Output voltage limit for command
SOUR:VOLT:RANG:AUTO OFF preventing too high voltages to be entered.

→ The output amplifier is set to the maximum voltage specified by the next
command; higher voltages are not permissible. The current output voltage
is attained with the smaller digital values of the D/A converter. Setting the
analog hardware is not required for changing the output voltage.
Advantage: fast level changes and better transient response.

Range selection for setting the generator output voltage.
→ D/A converters operating at full range.
The output voltage is set using the output amplifier.
Optimum noise and THD values.
Any maximum voltage can be entered with command
SOUR:VOLT:LIM ,
higher voltages are not permissible.

→ Output impedance 600 Ω

R600

→ Balanced output (XLR connector)
→ Unbalanced output (BNC connector)

Meaning

Only for OUTPut:TYPE Bal
→ Output impedance 10 Ω
→ Output impedance 200 Ω
→ Output impedance 150 Ω, if the standard generator source impedance
was changed from 200 Ω to 150 Ω using Modification Analog Generator
UPL-U3 (Order No. 1078.4900.02)

V

Basic
unit

R10
R200
R150
(Query reply. = R200)

BALanced
UNBalanced

Parameter

E-10

2.5.2
GEN panel
For Volt Range =
AUTO, Max Volt
is displayed,
for Volt Range =
FIX, a numeric
value.

2.5.2
GEN panel
Volt Range
→ AUTO
→ FIX

2.5.2
GEN panel
Impedance
→ 10 Ω
→ 200 Ω
(→ 150 Ω)
→ 600 Ω

2.5.2
GEN panel
Output
→ BAL
→ UNBAL

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

1078.2008.02

3.43

ON

OUTPut

OFF


1µV to 1 MV

SOURce:VOLTage:REFerence

Parameter


1 MHz to 1 MHz

Command

SOURce:FREQuency:REFerence

UPL

V

Hz

Basic
unit

→ Switches all outputs on.
After an overload of analyzer inputs (input voltage into 300 Ω and 600 Ω
above 25 V), the input impedance is automatically switched to 200 kΩ to
protect the analyzer input and the generator output is switched off. This
command switches the generator on again and measurements can be
continued provided the overvoltage is eliminated or the input impedance
switched to 200 kΩ (INP:IMP R200K).
The overload protection of the analyzer iniputs is valid for analog board
versions ≥ 4.00 and software versions ≥ 1.0.
→ Switches all outputs off including clock lines of digital interfaces. See 2.13
Fast Switch-off of Outputs.

Reference voltage

Reference frequency

Meaning

E-10

2.13
Taste
OUTPUT OFF

2.5.2
GEN panel
Ref.Volt

2.5.2
GEN panel
Ref.Freq

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

AOUTput
AINPut

OUTPut:DIGital:UNBalanced:FEED

1078.2008.02

OFF
SIMLong

OFF
CH1
CH2
CH2Is1

OUTPut:SELect

OUTPut:DIGital:CSIMulator



ADATa
JITTer
PHASe
COMMon

3.44

Parameter

SOURce:DIGital:SYNC:DELay

Command

Configuration of Digital Generators

SOURce:DIGital:FEED

3.10.1.3

UPL

Use of generator data:
→ Generator controls the audio content of the output
→ Generator controls the jitter modulator of the digital interface
→ Same as JITTer with additional phase offset.
→ Generator controls common-mode voltage at digital output

Meaning

→ Cable simulation switched off
→ Cable simulation switched on

E-10

2.5.3
GEN panel
Cable Sim
→ OFF
→ LONG CABLE

2.5.3
GEN panel
Unbal Out
→ AUDIO OUT
→ AUDIO IN

→ Same channel present at BNC and XLR connectors
→ Input signal through-connected and output at BNC connector

A 100-m cable of 110-Ω nominal impedance is simulated and
cut into the generator output.

2.5.3
GEN panel
Channel(s)
→ OFF
→1
→2
→2≡ 1

2.5.3.1
GEN panel
Phase ToRef

ONLY

2.5.3
GEN panel
Src Mode
→ AUDIO DATA
→ JITTER ONLY
→ PHASE
→ COMMON

Section

→ Generator channels off
→ Only generator channel 1 active
→ Only generator channel 2 active
→ Both generator channels active and in phase

UI see Setting a phase offset for SOUR:DIG:FEED JPHase
2.5.3.1

Basic
unit

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

Command

1078.2008.02

OUTPut:SAMPle:FREQuency

OUTPut:SAMPle[:FREQuency]:MODE

SOURce:DIGital:SYNC:MODE

SOURce:DIGital:SYNC:SOURce

UPL

3.45

27 kHz to 55 kHz
40 kHz to 106 kHz



EXTern
SYNChron
VALue

F96

F44
F48
F88

F32

V60
WCLock
IWCLock
F1024

V50

AINPut
RINPut
SINPut

GCLock

Parameter

Hz

Basic
unit

E-10

2.5.3
GEN panel
Sample Freq
→ 32 kHz
→ 44.1 kHz
→ 48 kHz
→ 88.2 kHz
→ 96 kHz
→ EXTERN
→ SYNCHRON
→ VALUE:

→ Sampling frequency 32 kHz (only with option UPL-B2 Digital Audio I/O, not
with option UPL-B29 Digital Audio 96 kHz)
→ Sampling frequency 44.1 kHz
→ Sampling frequency 48 kHz
→ Sample freq. 88.2 kHz (only with option UPL-B29 Digital Audio 96 kHz
in High Rate Mode CONF:DAI HRM)
→ Sample freq. 96 kHz (only with option UPL-B29 Digital Audio 96 kHz
in High Rate Mode CONF:DAI HRM)
→ External sample frequency. Refer to next command for input values.
→ Sampling frequency synchronized to analyzer.
→ Sampling frequency entered with next command.

2.5.3
GEN panel

2.5.3
GEN panel
Sync Mode
→ VIDEO 50
→ VIDEO 60
→ WORD CLK
→ WRD CLK INV
→ 1024 kHz

→ The generator sampling rates of 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz are synchronized to
the 50-Hz video repetition rate.
→ Same as V50, but for 60 Hz (NTSC).
→ Generator directly synchronized to applied word clock using PLL.
→ Same as WCLock but with the inverted input used for synchronization.
→ Synchronization to a "customized clock", eg in the case of DAB

External sample frequency for digital instrument.
Option UPL-B2 (Digital Audio I/O)
Option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz)

2.5.3
GEN panel
Sync Out
→ GEN CLK
→ AUDIO IN
→ REF IN
→ SYNC IN

Section

→ The clock is generated in the UPL. Selectable: 32, 44.1 or 48 kHz
and 27 to 55 kHz variable.
→ Generator clock from analyzer input.
→ Generator clock from rear reference input
→ Generator clock controlled via rear BNC connector. The mark-to-space
ratio can be set with command
SOUR:DIG:SYNC:MODE to .

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

Command

3.46


1 MHz to 1 MHz

SOURce:FREQuency:REFerence

1078.2008.02


0 to 1 FS

AZERo
AONE

AOUTput
RGENerator

AINPut
AINReclock

WCLock
BCLock

AIPut
GCLock
RINPut
SPLL

Parameter

SOURce:VOLTage:LIMit[:AMPLitude]

SOURce:DIGital:REFerence

OUTPut:DIGital:REFerence:FEED

OUTPut:DIGital:SYNC:TYPE

OUTPut:DIGital:SYNC:FEED

UPL

Hz

FS

Basic
unit

Reference frequency

Voltage limitation (for audio data only)

All data of the reference generator are
→0
→1

→ The input is throughconnected.
→ The input signal is output again; the clock is processed via PLL using the
internal clock ("jitter suppression").
→ The same signal as on the front panel is output.
→ Reference generator output. For an output with phase the reference is
defined.

Specifies the signal to be output at the Ref-Out connector.

Specifies the signal type for OUTPut:DIGital:SYNC:FEED ...... .
→ Sampling frequency
→ 128 times the sampling frequency

→ Audio input signal output without clock processing.
→ Output of internal generator clock.
→ Same as GCLock, but reference input.
→ Audio input signal output after clock processing with internal PLL.

Specifies the signal to be output at rear BNC connector for synchronization.

Meaning

2.5.3
GEN panel
Ref.Freq

2.5.3
GEN panel
Max Volt

E-10

2.5.3
GEN panel
Data
→ ALL ZERO
→ ALL ONE

2.5.3
GEN panel
Ref Out
→ AUDIO IN
→ AUD IN RCLK
→ AUDIO OUT
→ REF GEN

2.5.3
GEN panel
Type
→ WORD CLK
→ BIPHASE CLK

2.5.3
GEN panel
Sync Out
→ AUDIO IN
→ GEN CLK
→ REF IN
→ SYNC PLL

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators


0 to 8.5 V

OUTPut:SIGNal:BALanced:LEVel

3.47



OUTPut:SIGNal: LEVel

1078.2008.02


8 to 24

OUTPut:AUDiobits

Parameter


10 nFS to 100 Fs

Command

SOURce:Voltage:REFerence

UPL

Vpp

Hz

Basic
unit

Setting the output voltage of the digital signal at the BAL (XLR) interface.
Peak-to-peak voltage upon termination with nominal impedance (110 );
without termination the voltage is twice as high.
This voltage is always 4 times as high as the voltage at the UNBAL (BNC)
interface.

Voltage at Unbal AES output

Word length of audio samples in bits.

Reference level

Meaning

2.5.3
GEN panel
BAL Vpp

2.5.3
GEN panel
Unbal Vpp

2.5.3
GEN panel
Audio Bits

2.5.3
GEN panel
Ref Volt

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

1078.2008.02

SOURce:PROTocol:LCHannelstatus

OUTPut:VALidity

SOURce:PROTocol

Command

3.10.1.3.1 AES / EBU PROTOCOL Definition

UPL

RAW

CRC

ZERO
AES3

CH1And2
NONE

ENHanced

STATic

OFF

3.48

Parameter

Basic
unit

Specifies how the channel status data for LEFT are to be generated.
→ All channel status data bits are 0
→ UPL generates local timecode and CRC. All other channel status data are
defined by the file loaded with command
MMEMory:LOAD:LPGC "filename".
→ Same as AES3, however local timecode is not generated by UPL but set
as a fixed value from the file.
→ Same as AES3, however neither local timecode nor CRC is generated by
UPL but set as fixed values from the file.

Sets the validity bits in the AES/EBU data stream.
→ Valid bit for both channels set.
→ Valid bit for none of the channels set

→ If the generated channel status data are of no interest, the
undesired menu lines are removed from the generator panel.
Channel status data cannot be entered.
The last-defined status remains unchanged.
→ Only basic channel status data can be generated (RAW data
identical in both channels have to be defined via a file with or without
valid CRC)
This mode can always be used without any restriction.
→ Selectable only with option UPL-B21 (digital audio protocol) fitted.
All protocol commands are displayed in the GENERATOR panel where the
full scope of protocol data generation can be entered and displayed.
Besides the valid CRC, local time code can also be generated, which
is reset with generator start and automatically counted up.
In this mode the analyzer must also be set to protocol analysis.
Therefore, when switching on ENHANCED the following settings are
made automatically in the analyzer panel:
• INSTRUMENT DIGITAL
(INST2 D48)
• Meas Mode AUDIO DATA
(SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT)
• FUNCTION PROTOCOL
(SENS:FUNC ’PROT’)
Conversely, this function is set to OFF as soon as one of the
three named analyzer menu lines is changed.

Meaning

E-10

2.5.3.2
GEN panel
Ch Sta. L
→ ZERO
→ FILE+AES3
→ FILE+CRC
→ FILE

2.5.3.2
GEN panel
Validity

2.5.3.2
ANA panel
PROTOCOL
→ PANEL OFF
→ STATIC
→ ENHANCED

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

Command

1078.2008.02

MMEMory:LOAD:PGU

SOURce:PROTocol:UMODe

MMEMory:LOAD:RPGC

SOURce:PROTocol:RCHannelstatus

MMEMory:LOAD:LPGC

UPL

"filename"

ZERO
FILE

"filename"

RAW

CRC

AES3

ZERO
LEQual

"filename"

3.49

Parameter

Basic
unit

Stating a file containing USER data
Preset data type: *.prd

→ All user bits are initialized to be 0.
→ User bits are output according to the definitions in the file loaded with
command MEMory:LOAD:PGU "filename".

Specifies how user data are to be generated.

Stating a file containing channel status data for RIGHT.
Preset file type: *.prd

Specifies how the channel status data RIGHT are to be generated.
→ All channel status data bits are 0
→ The two sides are identical, all definitions made for left are copied to the
right side. The operating mode is defined by Ch. Stat L.
→ UPL generates local timecode and CRC.
All other channel status data are defined by the file loaded with command
MMEMory:LOAD:RPGC "filename".
→ Same as AES3, however local timecode not generated by UPL but set as a
fixed value from the file.
→ Same as AES3, however neither local timecode nor CRC is generated by
UPL but set as fixed values from the file.

Stating a file containing channel status data for LEFT.
Preset file type: * .pgc

Meaning

2.5.3.2
GEN panel
Filname

2.5.3.2
GEN panel
User Mode
→ ZERO
→ FILE DEF

2.5.3.2
GEN panel
Filename

E-10

2.5.3.2
GEN panel
Ch Stat. R
→ ZERO
→ EQUAL L
→ FILE+AES3
→ FILE+CRC
→ FILE

2.5.3.2
GEN panel
Filename

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

1078.2008.02

OUTPut2:TYPE

OUTPut2:SELect

SOURce2:FUNCtion

Command

3.10.1.3.2 Auxiliary AUX GEN

UPL

BALanced

UNBalanced

OFF
CH1
CH2
CH2Is1

JITTer

COMMon

ANLGout

OFF

3.50

Parameter

Basic
unit

Selection of output channel when the auxiliary generator is used as an analog
generator (SOUR2:FUNC ANLG).
→ An unbalanced signal is generated at the XLR connector; the maximum
output level is 10 V.
→ A balanced signal is generated at the XLR connector, the maximum output
level is 20 V. The output impedance can be selected in three steps with
the subsequent command.

Selection of output channel when the auxiliary generator is used as an analog
generator (SOUR2:FUNC ANLG). The low-distortion generator is used, level
control is via the output amplifier.
→ Both channels off
→ Channel 1 on, channel 2 off
→ Channel 2 on, channel 1 off
→ Same signal on both channels

2.5.5
GEN panel
Output
→ UNBAL
→ BAL

2.5.5
GEN panel
Channel(s)
→ OFF
→1
→2
→2≡1

E-10

2.5.5
GEN panel
→ OFF
→ ANALOG OUT
→ COMMON MODE
→ JITTER

→ Auxiliary generator switched off, audio data generated without interference
signal, analog outputs switched off (high-impedance).
→ Audio data generated without interference signal, an analog signal
is generated at the analog XLR connectors in addition to the digital signal
at the BAL, UNBAL and optical outputs.
Frequency and level of the analog signal can be set or swept.
→ A common-mode interference signal is superimposed on the audio data,
the analog outputs are switched off (high-impedance).
Frequency and level of the interference signal can be set or swept
→ A jitter signal is added to the audio signal,
the analog outputs are switched off (high-impedance).
Jitter frequency and level can be set or swept.
Permissible only for digital generator in the Src Mode AUDIO DATA | PHASE
(INST D48 with SOUR:DIG:FEED ADAT|PHAS)

Section

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

1078.2008.02

3.51

For SOUR2:FUNC ANLG: Entry of sinewave amplitude of analog signal
For SOUR2:FUNC COMM: Entry of common-mode amplitude
For SOUR2:FUNC JITT:
Entry of jitter-peak amplitude


0 to 7.07 V
0 to 7.07 V
0 to 250 mUI

SOURce2:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]
V
V
UI

For SOUR2:FUNC ANLG: Entry of sinewave frequency of analog signal
For SOUR2:FUNC COMM: Entry of common-mode frequency
For SOUR2:FUNC JITT:
Entry of jitter frequency

Selection of output impedance when the auxiliary generator is used as an
analog generator (SOUR2:FUNC ANLG) and OUTP2:TYPE BAL
is selected; the output impedance of the unbalanced output
is generally 5 Ω.
→ 10 Ω
→ 200 Ω
→ 600 Ω

Meaning


10 Hz to 110 kHz
Hz

Basic
unit

SOURce2:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed]

R10
R200
R600

Parameter

The auxiliary generator has its own sweep system which is similar to that of
the function generator. 2-dimensional sweep, ie simultaneous frequency and
level sweep, is not implemented. The commands permissible for the
auxiliary generator are listed in section 3.10.1.4.1 Sweep Settings for
Auxiliary Generator (AUX GEN).

Command

E-10

2.5.5
GEN panel
Depending on
AUX GEN:
→ Anlg Ampl
→ Comm Ampl
→ JittPkAmpl

2.5.5
GEN panel
Depending on
AUX GEN:
→ Anlg Freq
→ Comm Freq
→ JittPkFreq

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel

2.5.5
GEN panel
Impedance
→ 10 Ω
→ 200 Ω
→ 600 Ω

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

SOURce2:SWEep ...

OUTPut2:IMPedance

UPL

Generator Sweeps

1078.2008.02

CW | FIXed
SWEep1
LIST1

3.52

Permissible for SOUR2:SWE:NEXT LIST only

Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
DWEL2

SOURce2:FREQuency:MODE

Specified file contains dwell times

DWELl2,’filename’

Auxiliary generator:
→ Frequency setting by entry using command SOUR2:FREQ 
→ Frequency setting for X axis via normal sweep
→ Frequency setting for X axis via list sweep

Permissible for SOUR2:SWE:NEXT DWEL only.

Auxiliary generator:
Dwell time for each sweep step

Permissible for AUTO SWEEP and AUTO LIST only
(SOUR2:SWE:MODE AUTO;:SOUR2:FREQ|VOLT:MODE SWE1|LIST1)

→ Sweep trigger at fixed preset time
→ Sweep triggered when a valid result is obtained
→ Sweep trigger is time-controlled by interpolated list value

Auxiliary generator:

Auxiliary generator:
→ Manual sweep trigger
→ Automatic sweep trigger

Meaning

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

s

Basic
unit


10 ms to 1000 s

DWELl
ASYNc
LIST

MANual
AUTO

Parameter

E-10

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
Dwell File

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
Dwell

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
Next Step
→ ANLR SYNC
→ DWELL
VALUE
→ DWELL FILE

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
Sweep Ctrl

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

SOURce2:SWEep:DWELl

SOURce2:SWEep:NEXTstep

SOURce2:SWEep:MODE

Command

3.10.1.4.1 Sweep Settings for Auxiliary Generator (AUX GEN)

3.10.1.4

UPL

Command

(SOUR2:FUNC ANLG)
(SOUR2:FUNC COMM)
(SOUR2:FUNC JITT)

Query
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
FREQ2

1078.2008.02

3.53

FREQuency2,’file’

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

CW | FIXed
SWEep1
LIST1

Permissible for SOUR2:SWE:MODE AUTO|MAN;:SOUR2:FREQ:MODE
LIST1 only


depending on STARt
and STOP

SOURce2:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP

SOURce2:VOLTage:MODE

File containing frequency values


2 to 1024

SOURce2:SWEep:FREQuency:POINts

Hz

Hz


10 Hz to 110 kHz

Auxiliary generator:
→ Amplitude setting by entry using command SOUR2:VOLT 
→ Amplitude setting via normal sweep, amplitude as X axis
→ Amplitude setting via list sweep, amplitude as X axis

Permissible for SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1 only

Auxiliary generator:
Step width of frequency sweep

Permissible for SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1 only

Auxiliary generator:
Number of sweep points of frequency sweep

Permissible for SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1 only

Auxiliary generator:
Stop value of frequency sweep

Permissible for SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1 only

Auxiliary generator:
Start value for frequency sweep

Permissible for SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1 only

Auxiliary generator:
Division of sweep range for
- frequency sweep of analog signal
- comon-mode frequency sweep
- jitter frequency sweep
→ linear
→ logarithmic

Meaning

SOURce2:FREQuency:STOP

Hz

Basic
unit


10 Hz to 110 kHz

LINear
LOGarithmic

Parameter

E-10

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
FREQ FILE

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
FREQUENCY
Step

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
FREQUENCY
Points

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
FREQUENCY
Stop

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
FREQUENCY
Start

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

SOURce2:FREQuency:STARt

SOURce2:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing

UPL

Command

VOLTage2,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
VOLT2

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

3.54

Permissible for SOUR2:SWE:MODE AUTO|MAN;:SOUR2:VOLT:MODE
LIST1 only


depending on STARt
and STOP

SOURce2:SWEep:VOLTage:STEP

1078.2008.02

File containing amplitude values


2 to 1024

SOURce2:SWEep:VOLTage:POINts

V
FS

V
V
UI


0 to 7.07 V
0 to 7.07 V
0 to 250 mUI

Permissible for SOUR2:VOLT:MODE SWE1 only

Auxiliary generator:
Step width for amplitude sweep

Permissible for SOUR2:VOLT:MODE SWE1 only

Auxiliary generator:
Number of sweep points of amplitude sweep

Permissible for SOUR2:VOLT:MODE SWE1 only

Auxiliary generator:
Stop value for amplitude sweep

Permissible for SOUR2:VOLT:MODE SWE1 only

Auxiliary generator:
Start value for amplitude sweep

Permissible for SOUR2:VOLT:MODE SWE1 only

Auxiliary generator:
Division of sweep range for
- sinewave amplitude of analog signal (SOUR2:FUNC ANLG)
- common-mode amplitude
(SOUR2:FUNC COMM)
- jitter-peak amplitude
(SOUR2:FUNC JITT)
→ linear
→ logarithmic

Meaning

SOURce2:VOLTage:STOP

V
V
UI

Basic
unit


0 to 7.07 V
0 to 7.07 V
0 to 250 mUI

LINear
LOGarithmic

Parameter

E-10

2.5.4.2 Sweepss
GEN panel
VOLTAGE |
AMPL
VOLT FILE

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
VOLTAGE |
AMPL
Step

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
VOLTAGE |
AMPL
Points

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
VOLTAGE |
AMPL
Stop

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
VOLTAGE |
AMPL
Start

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN panel
VOLTAGE |
AMPL
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

SOURce2:VOLTage:STARt

SOURce2:SWEep:VOLTage:SPACing

UPL

1078.2008.02

SOURce:FREQuency:MODE

DWELl,’filename’

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

CW | FIXed
SWEep1
SWEep2
LIST1
LIST2

3.55

Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
DWEL


10 ms to 1000 s

DWELl
ASYNc
LIST

MANual
AUTO

SOURce:SWEep:DWELl

SOURce:SWEep:NEXTstep

SOURce:SWEep:MODE

Command

Parameter

s

Basic
unit

2.5.4.1.3
GEN panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
Z Axis

→ Frequency setting via entry
→ Frequency setting via normal sweep;
frequency as X axis
→ Frequency setting via normal sweep;
frequency as Z axis
→ Frequency setting via list sweep;
frequency as X axis
→ Frequency setting via list sweep;
frequency as Z axis

E-10

2.5.4.1.3
GEN panel
Dwell File

2.5.4.1.3
GEN panel
Dwell

2.5.4.1.3
GEN panel
Next Step
→ ANLR SYNC
→ DWELL
VALUE
→ DWELL FILE

2.5.4.1.3
GEN panel
Sweep Ctrl

Specified file contains the dwell times

Dwell time per sweep

→ Sweep after a certain (fixed) time has elapsed
→ Sweep after a valid measured value has been obtained
→ Sweep after a certain time defined by interpolated list value

→ Manual sweep switching
→ Automatic sweep switching

Meaning

With a SINusoid, STEReo or DC sweep the sinusoidal frequency and/or the level is swept.
With a BURSt and S2Pulse sweep the burst frequency and/or the level is swept, likewise Ontime and/or interval (see next section).
With a MDISt sweep the upper frequency and/or the total voltage is swept.
With a DFD sweep the center frequency and/or the total voltage is swept.

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

Sweep Settings for Generator Functions SINusoid, STEReo, BURSt, S2Pulse, MDISt, DFD and DC

See 3.10.1.4.4 Which parameters can be swept?

•
•
•
•

3.10.1.4.2

UPL

FREQuency[1]
"filename"

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

3.56


Value range
V
determined by
FS
instrument or function

SOURce:VOLTage:STARt

1078.2008.02

CW | FIXed
SWEep1
SWEep2
LIST1
LIST2

Hz

SOURce:VOLTage:MODE

Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
FREQ,



SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP

LINear
LOGarithmic


2 to 1024

SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:POINts

SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing


Hz
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

Basic
unit

SOURce:FREQuency:STOP

Parameter


Hz
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

Command

SOURce:FREQuency:STARt

UPL

See 3.10.1.4.4 Which parameters can be swept?

Start value for amplitude sweep

→ Amplitude setting via entry
→ Amplitude setting via normal sweep;
amplitude as X axis
→ Amplitude setting via normal sweep;
amplitude as Z axis
→ Amplitude setting via list sweep;
amplitude as X axis
→ Amplitude setting via list sweep;
amplitude as Z axis

File containing frequencies

Step width for frequency sweep

Scaling of frequency sweep range
→ linear
→ logarithmic

For analog instrument
Number of sweep points for frequency sweep

Stop value for frequency sweep

See 3.10.1.4.4 Which parameters can be swept?

Start value for frequency sweep

Meaning

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
VOLTAGE
→ Start

E-10

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
Z Axis

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
FREQ FILE

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Step

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Spacing

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Points

FREQUENCY
→ Stop

2.5.4.2

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
FREQUENCY
→ Start

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

SWEep2 | LIST2

Switches a Z sweep off which was switched on with one of the following
commands.
SOURce:FREQuency:MODE SWEep2 | LIST2 or
SOURce:VOLTage:MODE SWEep2 | LIST2 or
SOURce:ONTime:MODE SWEep2 | LIST2 or
SOURce:INTerval:MODE SWEep2 | LIST2
SWEep2 and LIST2 are synonyms in this command

File containing amplitude values

Step width for amplitude sweep

Scaling of amplitude sweep range
→ linear
→ logarithmic

Number of sweep points for amplitude sweep

Stop value for amplitude sweep

Meaning

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Z Axis
→ OFF

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
VOLT FILE

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Step

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Points

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
VOLTAGE
→ Stop

Section

3.57

A normal sweep (or list sweep) is possible only when exactly 1 sweep parameter is set to SWEep1 (or LIST1).
The sweep system is switched off when all sweep parameters are set to CW (=FIXed).
Value range for "STARt", "STOP": values are specified in the functions section.

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

Max. 2 sweep parameters can be selected not to equal CW (= FIXed). Combining SWEep and LIST is not permissible. Likewise, assignment of the same
selection point (eg SWEep1) to different sweep parameters is not permissible; the selection made most recently is valid, the other sweep parameters are set to FIXed.

1078.2008.02

Note:

SOURce:OFF:MODE

VOLTage,’filename’

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
VOLT


V
Value range
FS
determined by
instrument or function

LINear
LOGarithmic

SOURce:SWEep:VOLTage:STEP

SOURce:SWEep:VOLTage:SPACing


2 to 1024

Basic
unit

SOURce:SWEep:VOLTage:POINts

Parameter


Value range
V
determined by
FS
instrument or function

Command

SOURce:VOLTage:STOP

UPL

Sweep Settings for Generator Functions BURSt and S2Pulse

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators


s, cyc
Value range
determined by
instrument or function


2 to 1024

SOURce:ONTime:STOP

SOURce:SWEep:ONTime:POINts

3.58


s, cyc
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

SOURce:ONTime:STARt

1078.2008.02

CW | FIXed
SWEep1
SWEep2
LIST1
LIST2

Basic
unit

SOURce:INTerval:MODE

Parameter

CW | FIXed
SWEep1
SWEep2
LIST1
LIST2

Command

SOURce:ONTime:MODE

can be swept?:

Number of sweep points of burst time sweep

Stop value for burst time sweep

See 3.10.1.4.4 Which parameters can be swept?

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Points

2.5.4.2
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
Stop

2.5.4.2
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
Start

E-10

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
Z Axis

→ Interval setting via entry
→ Interval setting via normal sweep; interval as X axis
→ Interval setting via normal sweep; interval as Z axis
→ Interval setting via list sweep; interval as X axis
→ Interval setting via list sweep; interval as Z axis
Start value for burst time sweep

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
Z Axis

Section

→ Burst time setting via entry
→ Burst time setting via normal sweep; burst time as X axis
→ Burst time setting via normal sweep; burst time as Z axis
→ Burst time setting via list sweep; burst time as X axis
→ Burst time setting via list sweep; burst time as Z axis

Meaning

Sweep settings same as with SINusoid, but for BURSt and S2Pulse Ontime and Interval may be swept in addition see 3.10.1.4.4 Which parameters

3.10.1.4.3

UPL

Command

1078.2008.02

3.59


2 to 1024

SOURce:SWEep:INTerval:POINts

LINear
LOGarithmic


s
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

SOURce:INTerval:STOP

SOURce:SWEep:INTerval:SPACing


s
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

SOURce:INTerval:STARt

Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
ONT

ONTime,’filename’

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

Basic
unit


s, cyc
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

LINear
LOGarithmic

Parameter

SOURce:SWEep:ONTime:STEP

SOURce:SWEep:ONTime:SPACing

UPL

Scaling of interval sweep range
→ linear
→ logarithmic

Number of sweep points for interval sweep

Stop value for interval sweep

See 3.10.1.4.4 Which parameters can be swept?

Start value for interval sweep

File containing burst time values

Step size for burst time sweep

Scaling of burst time sweep range
→ linear
→ logarithmic

Meaning

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Points

2.5.4.2
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
Stop

2.5.4.2
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
Start

2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
ONTIM FILE

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Step

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

1078.2008.02

3.60

---

If SOUR:VOLT:SEL
VLRT selected:
The levels of the left
(CH1) and right
channel (CH2) may
be swept and have a
fixed offset.
The offset remains
constant during level
sweep.
The level offset can
be set with
SOUR:VOLT:RAT


If SOUR:FREQ:SEL
FQPH selected:
Common sine
frequency for both
channels may be
swept
If SOUR:FREQ:SEL
FQFQ selected:
Sine frequency of left
channel may be
swept. Sine frequency
of right channel
remains constant.

STEReo

If SOUR:VOLT:SEL
VLVL selected:

---

Sine amplitude

Sine frequency

SINusoid

ON TIMESweep

VOLTSweep

FREQSweep

Which parameters can be swept?

Generator
Funktion

3.10.1.4.4

Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
INT

INTerval, ’filename’

Basic
unit

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

Parameter


s
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

Command

SOURce:SWEep:INTerval:STEP

UPL

---

---

INTERVALSweep

File containing interval values

Step size for interval sweep

Meaning

2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
INTV FILE

2.5.4.2
GEN panel
Step

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

Total amplitude of
both sinewave signals
Total amplitude of
both sinewave signals
DC voltage

Burst frequency

Useful frequency

Center frequency

---

S2Pulse

MDISt

DFD

DC

1078.2008.02

Burst amplitude
(amplitude during
HIGH phase of signal)

Sine frequency

Burst amplitude
(amplitude during
HIGH phase of signal)

The sine amplitude of
the left channel (CH1)
may be swept. The
sine amplitude of right
channel (CH2)
remains constant
during sweep.

BURSt

UPL

3.61

---

---

---

Burst duration, the
time during which the
sine has ist high level.

Burst duration, the
time during which the
sine has ist high level.

---

---

---

Burst interval length.

Burst interval length.

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

Command

Generator Functions

1078.2008.02

SOURce:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]

3.10.1.5

UPL

3.62

SINusoid
STEReoMULTisine
BURSt
S2Pulse
MDISt
DFD
RANDom
USER
POLarity
FSK
FM
DC

Parameter

Basic
unit
Generator signal:
→ Sinusoidal tone
→ Stereo signal
→ Multi-tone (up to 17 sine lines)
→ Sine burst
→ Sine2 burst
→ Double sine (similar to SMPTE)
→ Double sine (difference frequency distortion method)
→ Noise
→ User-defined signals
→ Polarity test signal
→ Frequency shift keying
→ Modulated sine
→ DC Voltage

Meaning

E-10

2.5.4
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ SINE
→ STEREO SINE
→ MULTISINE
→ SINE BURST
→ SINE² BURST
→ MOD DIST
→ DFD
→ RANDOM
→ ARBITRARY
→ POLARITY
→ FSK
→ MODULATION
→ DC

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators


0 to 1 FS

SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer

1078.2008.02

ON
OFF


-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS

OFF
ON

SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer:STATe

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe

ON
OFF

SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet:STATe

3.63

Parameter

SINusoid

Command

SOURce:FUNCtion [:SHAPe]

3.10.1.5.1 SINE

UPL

FS

V
FS

Basic
unit

Noise amplitude

For digital instrument only

→ Noise superimposed on signal
→ Noise superimposition off

Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument

DC amplitude

Note:
This setting cannot be made in the analog generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.

2.5.4.1
GEN panel
Dither

2.5.4.1
GEN panel
Dither
→ ON
→ OFF

2.5.4.1
GEN panel
DC Offset

2.5.4.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON

2.5.4.1
GEN panel
Frq. Offset

→ Frequency offset 0.1 %
→ No frequency offset

DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed to the generator
output.
→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.

2.5.4.3
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ SINE

Section

→ Sinusoidal tone

Meaning

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

1078.2008.02


0 to 10 V
0 to 20 V
0 to 1 FS

3.64

V
V
FS

EQUalize,’filename’

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]

ON
OFF

SOURce:VOLTage:EQUalize:STATe

Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
EQU


Hz
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

Basic
unit

SOURce:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed]

SOURce:SWEep ...

ON
OFF

SOURce:LOWDistortion

Parameter

GAUSsian
TRIangle
RECTangle

Command

SOURce:RANDom:PDF

UPL

Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3

Sine amplitude
Can be used as sweep parameter
Analog range (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog range (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital range

File containing equalizer data

→ Sine signal equalized
→ Sine signal not dependent on frequency

Can be used as sweep parameter

Sine frequency

For sweep commands see 3.10.1.4 Generator Sweeps

2.5.4.3
GEN panel
VOLTAGE

2.5.4.3
GEN panel
Equal.File

2.5.4.3
GEN panel
Equalizer
→ ON
→ OFF

E-10

FREQUENQY

2.5.4.3
GEN panel

2.5.4.1
2.5.4.3
GEN panel
Low Dist
→ ON
→ OFF

→ Sine signal generated by LDG
→ Sine signal generated by function generator
Only available with ANALOG generator and option UPL-B1 (Low Distortion
Generator)

2.5.4.1
GEN panel
PDF
→ GAUSS
→ TRIANGLE
→ RECTANGLE

Section

→ Noise distribution, Gaussian
→ Noise distribution, triangular
→ Noise distribution, uniform

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

1078.2008.02

SOURce:RANDom:SPACing:FREQuency

SOURce:RANDom:SPACing:MODE

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe

SOURce:FUNCtion [:SHAPe]

Command

3.10.1.5.2 MULTISINE

UPL

3.65


Lower limit value:
analog = 2.93 Hz
digital = sampling
frequency / 16384

ATRack

USERdefined


-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS

OFF
ON

MULTisine

Parameter

Hz

V
V
FS

Basic
unit

Setting value for frequency spacing for multisine measurement
The value range depends on the selected generator and its sampling
rate (see 2.5.1 Selecting the Generator

→ The entered value (see next command) is corrected to the
next settable value.
→ The value of the analyzer frequency spacing of FFT is automatically set
It can be read out with command CALC:TRAN:FREQ:RES?
provided FFT is selected in the analyzer.

Setting the frequency spacing for the multisine measurement

DC amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument

Note:
This setting cannot be made in the analog generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.

→ Virtually no DC voltage component at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.

DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed on the generator
output.

Multi-tone (up to 17 sine lines)

Meaning

2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Spacing

E-10

2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Spacing
→ USER DEF
→ ANLR TRACK

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON

2.5.4.4
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ MULTISINE

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

Command

1078.2008.02

SOURce:VOLTage:CREStfactor

MINimized
DPHase

SOURce:VOLTage:CREStfactor:MODE


1 to 100

VALue


1 to 17

3.66

Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
EQU

EQUalizer,’filename’.

OFF

ON

DEFinedvoltage

EQUalvoltage

Parameter

SOURce:MULTisine:COUNt

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

SOURce:VOLTage:EQUalizer:STATe

SOURce:FUNCtion:MODE
alias
SOURce:MULTisine:MODE

UPL
Basic
unit

2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Crest Fact

E-10

2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Crest Fact
→ OPTIMIZED
→ DEFINE PHAS
→ VALUE

→ The crest factor (ratio of peak/rms value) is minimized.
→ The phase of the lines can be separately set with the next but one
command
SOURce:PHASe[][:ADJust].
The start phase of the sinewave is entered.
→ The crest factor is set with the next command SOUR:VOLT:CRES 
so that it closely approaches a settable value.
The specified crest factor is approximated. This is the easier the more lines
are used for optimization. Acc. to measurements in line with ANSI S3.42 a
crest factor of 4 (= 12 dB) is recommended.

2.5.4.4
GEN panel
No of Sin

2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Equal.File

2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Equalizer
→ ON
→ OFF

2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Mode
→ EQUAL VOLT
→ DEFINE VOLT

Section

Number of settable frequencies

Equalizer file for correcting the multisine frequency lines.
Only with SOUR:VOLT:EQU:STAT ON selected, see 2.5.4.1.3 Equalization
of SINE, SINE BURST, DFD, MULTISINE, RANDOM

See 2.5.4.1.3 Equalization of SINE, SINE BURST, DFD, MULTISINE,
RANDOM
→ Every active multisine frequency line is equalized.
Equalizer is switched on. The menu item ”Equal. file” is activated,
ie the indicated file is loaded.
→ The levels of all frequency lines remain unchanged.

Selection of entry mode for individual multisine voltages:
→ The same amplitude applies for each sine. It is entered with
command SOUR:VOLT1 .
→ A separate amplitude can be defined for each sine.

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators


Query only

SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal[:LEVel|AMPLitude]?

3.67



SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal:GAIN

1078.2008.02


1 to 17
Hz

Value range
determined by
instrument or function

SOURce:FREQuency[][:CW|FIXed]

V
FS

dB

1 to 17

Analog instrument
OUTP:TYPE UNB
0 to 10 V
Analog instrument
OUTP:TYPE BAL
0 to 20 V
Digital instrument
0 to 1 FS

Basic
unit

SOURce:VOLTage[][:LEVel|AMPLitude]

Parameter


1 to 17

0 to 360 °

Command

SOURce:PHASe[][:ADJust]

UPL

1. SOUR:MULT:MODE EQU
2. SOUR1:VOLT 0

With the single amplitudes being unknown, all sinewaves should be set
explicitly to 0 before setting the maximum amplitude.

Total peak amplitude; query only

Subsequent amplification of all sine lines (<0 → attenuation); the upper range
limit depends on individual rules for sine and sine frequencies as well as on
SOUR:VOLT:LIM

Frequency entry for the i-th multisine line

The maximum amplitude can be set for SOUR:VOLT only when all other
sinewaves have an amplitude of 0. Otherwise, Vmax must be reduced by the
sum of the remaining single voltages.

Level entry for i-th multisine line
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3

For SOUR:VOLT:CRES:MODE DPHase only

The line is output starting with the specified phase.
If 0° is entered, the line starts at 0 and then rises.
If 90° is entered, the line starts with the specified voltage and then decreases.

Entered phase:
i-th sine phase; i = 2 to 17

Meaning

E-10

2.5.4.4
GEN panel
TOTAL PEAK

2.5.4.4
GEN panel
TOTAL GAIN

Freq No 1 to17

2.5.4.4
GEN panel

2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Volt No 1 to 17

2.5.4.4
GEN panel
Phas No 1 to 17

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

Command



SOURce:ONTime

1078.2008.02

SOURce:INTerval

-100% to 0%



3.68

set burst duration ...
60 s



tmax: 60 s – tmin

Digital generator:
tmin= 1 / sample
frequency

Analog generator:
tmin= 20.83 µs

tmin to tmax



fmax depending on
generator

1 µHz to fmax



BURSt

SINusoid

OFF


Query only

Parameter

SOURce:VOLTage:AM

SOURce:FREQuency:AM

SOURce:AM:MODE

SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal:RMS?

UPL

s

s

PCT

Hz

V
FS

Basic
unit

Available only with BURST modulation (SOUR:AM:MODE BURS)

Entry of the burst interval length (burst period), the sum of burst duration and
break time.

Available only with BURST modulation (SOUR:AM:MODE BURS)

Entry of the burst duration (time, the sine is switched on)

Available only with SINE modulation (SOUR:AM.MODE SIN)

Setting of the modulation deviation in %

Available only with SINE modulation (SOUR:AM.MODE SIN)

Setting of the modulation frequency

→ The amplitude modulation is switched off, the generator signal is not
modulated.
→ The generator signal is amplitude-modulated from 0% to -100% in the
form of a sinewave.
→ The generator signal is switched on and off periodically.

Selection of the type of modulation

Total RMS amplitude; query only

Meaning

2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
INTERVAL

2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
ON TIME

2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Variation

2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Mod Freq

2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Ampl Var
→ OFF
→ SINE
→ BURST

2.5.4.4
GEN panel
TOTAL RMS

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

1078.2008.02

SOURce:SWEep ...

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

SOURce:VOLTage:EQUalize:STATe

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe

SOURce:FUNCtion [:SHAPe]

Command

3.10.1.5.3 SINE BURST

UPL

3.69

Query form:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
EQU

EQUalize,’filename’

ON
OFF


-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS

OFF
ON

BURSt

Parameter

V
FS

Basic
unit

For sweep commands see 3.10.1.4 Generator Sweeps

File containing equlizer data

→ Equalizer on
→ Equalizer off

Equalization of the sine voltage of the bursted sinewave

DC amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument

Note:
This setting cannot be made in the analog generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.

→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.

DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed at the generator
output.

→ Sine burst

Meaning

2.5.4.1.1
GEN-Panel
Equal.File

2.5.4.1.1
GEN-Panel
Equalizer
→ ON
→ OFF

DC Offset

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON

E-10

2.5.4.5
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ SINE BURST

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators


0 to SOUR:VOLT


s, cyc
0 to 60 s
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

s
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

0 to 60 s

SOURce:VOLTage:LOWLevel

SOURce:ONTime[:CW|FIXed]

SOURce:INTerval[:CW|FIXed]

SOURce:ONTime:DELay

3.70

"SOUR:VOLT" is voltage-limited by SCPI command "SOUR:VOLT:LIM"

Caution:

1078.2008.02

Clock rate and fmax depend on generator (see 2.5.1 Selecting the Generator).

Note:

V
%on
FS
%on

FS

V


0 to 12 V
0 to 24 V
0 to 1 FS

Basic
unit

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]

Parameter


Hz
Voltage range
determined by
instrument or function

Command

SOURce:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed]

UPL

Sets a start delay for SINE BURST and SINE2 BURST.

Interval time
Can be used as sweep parameter

Burst time
Can be used as sweep parameter

Amplitude during LOW phase of signal
Analog instrument
Digital instrument

Burst amplitude (amplitude during HIGH phase of signal)
Can be used as sweep parameter
Analog instrument (OUTPUP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument(OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3

Sine frequency
Can be used as sweep parameter

Meaning

2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
BurstOnDel

2.5.4.5
GEN panel
INTERVAL

2.5.4.5
GEN panel
ON TIME

2.5.4.5
GEN panel
Low Level

2.5.4.5
GEN panel
VOLTAGE

E-10

2.5.4.5
GEN panel
FREQUENCY

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

1078.2008.02

3.71

Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3
When negative amplitudes are entered the pulse is inverted.

Burst amplitude
Can be used as sweep parameter


0 to 12 V
0 to 24 V
0 to 1 FS

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]

V
FS

Burst frequency
Can be used as sweep parameter


Hz
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument

DC amplitude

Note:
This setting cannot be made in the analog generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.

DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed at the generator
output.
→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.

Sine2 burst

Meaning

SOURce:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed]

V
FS

Basic
unit

For sweep commands see 3.10.1.4 Generator Sweeps


-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS

OFF
ON

S2Pulse

Parameter

2.5.4.6
GEN panel
VOLTAGE

E-10

FREQUENCY

2.5.4.6
GEN panel

GEN panel

2.5.4.7

2.5.4.1.1
DC Offset

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON

2.5.4.6
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ SINE² BURST

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

SOURce:SWEep ...

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe

SOURce:FUNCtion [:SHAPe]

Command

3.10.1.5.4 SINE2 BURST

UPL

3.72


0 to 60 s

SOURce:ONTime:DELay

1078.2008.02


s
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

Basic
unit

SOURce:INTerval[:CW|FIXed]

Parameter


s ,cyc
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

Command

SOURce:ONTime[:CW|FIXed]

UPL

Sets a start delay for SINE BURST and SINE2 BURST.

Interval time
Can be used as sweep parameter

Burst time
Can be used as sweep parameter

Meaning

2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN panel
BurstOnDel

2.5.4.6
GEN panel
INTERVAL

2.5.4.6
GEN panel
ON TIME

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

ON
OFF


0 to 1 FS

SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer:STATe

SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer

1078.2008.02


-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet

OFF
ON

ON
OFF

SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet:STATe

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe

MDISt

3.73

Parameter

SOURce:FUNCtion [:SHAPe]

Command

3.10.1.5.5 MOD DIST

UPL

FS

V
FS

Basic
unit

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
Dither

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
Dither
→ ON
→ OFF

→ Noise superimposed onto the signal.
→ Noise superimposition off
For digital instrument only
With option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz)
not allowed in High Rate-Mode (CONF:DAI HRM),
allowed in Base Rate-Mode (CONF:DAI BRM)
Noise amplitude

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC OFFSET

DC amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument

Note:
This setting cannot be made in the analog generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON

E-10

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
Frq. Offset
→ +1000 PPM
→ OFF

→ Frequency offset 0.1 %
→ No frequency offset

DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed at the generator
output.
→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.

2.5.4.7
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ MOD DIST

Section

→ Double sine (similar to SMPTE)

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

1078.2008.02

SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal[:LEVel|AMPLitude]

SOURce:FREQuency2[:CW|FIXed]
Hz

3.74


V
Value range
FS
determined by
instrument or function

fmax see 2.5.1


30 Hz to fmax / 8

Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3In the analog
instrument the lower limit SOUR:VOLT:RAT (for high rms voltage
specifications) depends on the required total rms voltage (see "TOTAL
VOLT").

Total amplitude
Can be used as sweep parameter

Interfering frequency

Useful frequency
Can be used as sweep parameter

Hz

SOURce:FREQuency[1][:CW|FIXed]

2.5.4.1
2.5.4.7
GEN panel
Low Dist
→ ON
→ OFF

→ Useful signal generated by LDG
Only available with ANALOG generator and option UPL-B1 (Low
Distortion Generator)
→ Both sines generated by function generator.

E-10

2.5.4.7
GEN panel
TOTAL VOLT

2.5.4.7
GEN panel
LOWER FREQ

2.5.4.7
GEN panel
UPPER FREQ

GEN panel

2.5.4.7

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
PDF
→ GAUSS
→ TRIANGLE
→ RECTANGLE

Section

→ Noise distribution, Gaussian
→ Noise distribution, triangular
→ Noise distribution, equivalent

Meaning

For sweep commands see 3.10.1.4 Generator Sweeps


ANALOG gen:
240 Hz to 21,75 kHz
DIGITAL gen:
240 Hz to fmax
fmax see 2.5.1

Basic
unit

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

SOURce:SWEep ...

OFF

ON

SOURce:LOWDistortion

Parameter

GAUSsian
TRIangle
RECTangle

Command

SOURce:RANDom:PDF

UPL

Command

1078.2008.02

SOURce:VOLTage:RATio

UPL


1 to 10

3.75

Parameter

Basic
unit
Ratio of interfering to useful signal

Meaning

2.5.4.7
GEN panel
VOLT LF:UF

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

1078.2008.02

SOURce:FUNCtion:MODE

IEC118

3.76

Parameter

IEC268

OFF
ON

ON
OFF

SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet:STATe

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe

DFD

Command

SOURce:FUNCtion [:SHAPe]

3.10.1.5.6 DFD

UPL

Basic
unit

→ Entry of center frequency (MEAN FREQ) and difference frequency
(DIFF FREQ) to IEC 268 with commands
SOUR:FREQ:MEAN  and
SOUR:FREQ:DIFF 
If a frequency sweep is selected (for the X or Z axis),
the center frequency is swept.
→ Entry of upper DFD frequency (UPPER FREQ) and
difference frequency (DIFF FREQ) to IEC 118 with commands
SOUR:FREQ  and
SOUR:FREQ:DIFF 
If a frequency sweep is selected (for the X or Z axis),
the UPPER FREQ is swept.

Note:
This setting cannot be made in the analog generator when a low-distortion
generator is used. With the offset switched on, the S/N ratio of the analog
DFD signal is poorer by 30 dB .
2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
Mode
→ IEC 268
→ IEC 118

2.5.4.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON

E-10

2.5.4.1
GEN panel
Frq. Offset
→ + 1000 PPM
→ OFF

→ Frequency offset 0.1 %
→ No frequency offset

DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed at the generator
output.
→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.

2.5.4.8
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ DFD

Section

→ Double sine (difference frequency method)

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators


0 to 1 FS

GAUSsian
TRIangle
RECTangle

ON

SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer

SOURce:RANDom:PDF

SOURce:LOWDistortion

1078.2008.02

3.77

2.5.4.8
GEN panel
MEAN FREQ

E-10

2.5.4.1
2.5.4.8
GEN panel
Low Dist
→ ON
→ OFF

→ 1st sine generated by LDG
Only available with ANALOG generator and option UPL-B1 (Low
Distortion Generator)→ Both sines generated by function generator

Center frequency
Can be used as sweep parameter

 Value range
Hz
determined by
instrument or function

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
PDF
→ GAUSS
→ TRIANGLE
→ RECTANGLE

→ Noise distribution, Gaussian
→ Noise distribution, triangular
→ Noise distribution, uniform

SOURce:FREQuency:MEAN

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
Dither

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
Dither
→ ON
→ OFF

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC OFFSET

Section

Noise amplitude

For digital instrument only.
With option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz)
not allowed in High Rate-Mode (CONF:DAI HRM),
allowed in Base Rate-Mode (CONF:DAI BRM)

→ Noise is superimposed on signal.
→ Noise superimposition off

Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument

DC amplitude

Meaning

For sweep commands see 3.10.1.4 Generator Sweeps

FS

V
V
FS

Basic
unit

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

SOURce:SWEep ...

OFF

ON
OFF

SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer:STATe

Parameter


-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS

Command

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet

UPL

3.78

 Value range
V
determined by
FS
instrument or function

SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal[:LEVel|AMPLitude]

1078.2008.02

 Value range
Hz
determined by
instrument or function

Basic
unit

SOURce:FREQuency:DIFFerence

Parameter

 Value range
determined by
instrument or function

Command

SOURce:FREQuency:[1][:CW|FIXed]

UPL

Total amplitude
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3

Difference frequency

Entry of upper DFD frequency with
SOURce:FUNCtion:MODE IEC 118 selected.

Meaning

E-10

2.5.4.8
GEN panel
TOTAL VOLT

2.5.4.8
GEN panel
DIFF FREQ

2.5.4.8
GEN-panel
UPPER FREQ

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

Command

FREQuency
TIME


0 to 12 V
0 to 24 V
0 to 1 FS



SOURce:RANDom:DOMain

SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal[:LEVel|AMPLitude]

SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal:RMS

1078.2008.02


-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS

OFF
ON

RANDom

3.79

Parameter

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe

SOURce:FUNCtion [:SHAPe]

3.10.1.5.7 RANDOM

UPL

V
FS

V
FS

V
FS

Basic
unit

Noise RMS amplitude
Analog-Instrument
Digital-Instrument

Noise peak amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3

→ Frequency domain
→ Time domain

Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument

DC amplitude

Note:
This setting cannot be made in the analog generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.

DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed at the generator
output.
→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
DC voltage can be set with the next command.

→ Noise

Meaning

2.5.4.9
GEN panel
VOLT RMS

2.5.4.9
GEN panel
VOLT PEAK

2.5.4.9
GEN panel
Domain
→ FREQ
→ TIME

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC OFFSET

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON

2.5.4.9
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ RANDOM

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators


Hz
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

Hz
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

SOURce:RANDom:FREQuency:LOWer
SOURce:RANDom:FREQuency:UPPer

SOURce:FREQuency:MEAN

3.80

WHITe
PINK
TOCTave
ARBitrary

SOURce:RANDom:SHAPe

1078.2008.02


Hz
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

SOURce:RANDom:SPACing:FREQuency

Basic
unit

ATRack
USERdefined

Parameter

SOURce:RANDom:SPACing:MODE

Command

Further commands for frequency domain only (SOUR:RAND:DOM FREQ):

UPL

Center frequency for 1/3-octave noise

E-10

2.5.4.9
GEN panel
MEAM FREQ

2.5.4.9
GEN panel
Lower Freq
Upper Freq

2.5.4.9
GEN panel
Equalizatn
→ WHITE
→ PINK
→ THIRD OCT
→ FILE

→ White noise
→ Pink noise
→ 1/3-octave noise
→ File-defined noise

Lower/upper frequency limit for
white and pink noise

2.5.4.9
GEN panel
Spacing

2.5.4.9
GEN panel
Spacing
→ ANLR TRACK
→ USER DEF

Section

Entry of frequency spacing

→ Analyzer frequency spacing synchronous
→ Frequency spacing acc. to user entry

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

Command

1078.2008.02

SOURce:ONTime

SOURce:VOLTage:AM

SOURce:FREQuency:AM

SOURce:AM:MODE

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

UPL

3.81

tmax: 60 s – tmin

Digital generator:
tmin= 1 / sample
frequency

Analog generator:
tmin= 20.83 µs

tmin to t max



-100% to 0%



fmax depending on
the generator

1 µHz to fmax



BURSt

SINusoid

OFF

RANDom, ’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
RAND

ARBitrary, ’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
ARB

Parameter

s

PCT

Hz

Basic
unit

Available only with BURST modulation (SOUR:AM:MODE BURS)

Entry of the burst duration (time the sine is switched on)

Available only with SINE modulation (SOUR:AM.MODE SIN)

Setting of the modulation deviation in %

Available only with SINE modulation (SOUR:AM.MODE SIN)

Setting of the modulation frequency

→ The amplitude-modulation is switched off, the generator signal is not
modulated.
→ The generator signal is amplitude-modulated from 0% to 100% in the
form of a sinewave.
→ The generator signal is switched on and off periodically.

Selection of the type of modulation

File with data for file-defined noise.
ARBitrary and RANDom are synonyms.

Meaning

2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
ON TIME

2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
Variation

2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
Mod Freq

2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
Ampl Var
→ OFF
→ SINE
→ BURST

2.5.4.9
GEN panel
Shape File

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

Command

set burst duration ...
60 s



Parameter

1078.2008.02

SOURce:RANDom:PDF

Command

GAUSsian
TRIangle
RECTangle

3.82

Parameter

Further commands for time domain only (SOUR:RAND:DOM TIME):

SOURce:INTerval

UPL

Basic
unit

s

Basic
unit

Section

→ Noise distribution, Gaussian
→ Noise distribution, triangular
→ Noise distribution, uniform

Meaning

E-10

2.5.4.9
GEN panel
PDF
→ GAUSS
→ TRIANGLE
→ RECTANGLE

Section

Entry of the burst interval length (burst period), i.e., the sum of burst duration 2.5.4.9
and break time
GEN-Panel
INTERVAL
Available only with BURST modulation (SOUR:AM:MODE BURS)

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

1078.2008.02

ARBitrary, ’filename’

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

3.83

Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
ARB


-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS

OFF
ON

USER

Parameter

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe

SOURce:FUNCtion [:SHAPe]

Command

3.10.1.5.8 ARBITRARY

UPL

V
FS

Basic
unit

File with data for waveform

Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument

DC amplitude

Note:
This setting cannot be made in the analog generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.

→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.

DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed at the generator
output.

→ User-defined waveforms

Meaning

2.5.4.10
GEN panel
Filename

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON

E-10

2.5.4.10
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ ARBITRARY

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

Command

1078.2008.02

SOURce:FREQuency:AM

SOURce:AM:MODE

SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal:RMS

SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal[:LEVel|AMPLitude]

UPL

3.84

fmax depending on the
generator

1 µHz to fmax



Available only with SINE modulation (SOUR:AM.MODE SIN)

Setting of the modulation frequency

→ The generator signal is switched on and off periodically. .

BURSt

Selection of the type of modulation

RMS signal amplitude for Analog generator
Only available with ANALOG generator in format AWD and TTF
SOUR:VOLT:TOT and SOUR:VOLT:TOT:RMS are coupled via the crest
factor (which is constant for a specific noise signal). A change of
SOUR:VOLT:TOT:RMS therefore affects the SOUR:VOLT:TOT value.

Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3

SOUR:VOLT:TOT and SOUR:VOLT:TOT:RMS are coupled via the crest
factor (which is constant for a specific signal). A change of SOUR:VOLT:TOT
therefore immediately affects the figure for SOUR:VOLT:TOT:RMS. If the
crest factor is changed, SOUR:VOLT:TOT will remain unchanged.

Peak amplitude of signal

Meaning

SINusoid

Hz

V
FS

V
FS

Basic
unit

→ The amplitude modulation is switched off, the generator signal is not
modulated.
→ The generator signal is amplitude-modulated from 0% to -100%

OFF


0 V to 20 V

0 V to 10 V

ONLY:

Src Mode = COMMON

0 to 1 FS

Src Mode = PHASE:

0 UI to 2,5 UI

Src Mode = JITTER ONLY:

0 to 1 FS

Src Mode = AUDIO DATA:

Digital Instrument:

0 to16.971 V

(OUTPUT = BAL:

0 to 14,142 V

Output = UNBAL:


Analog Instrument:

Parameter

2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
Mod Freq

2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
Ampl Var
→ OFF
→ SINE
→ BURST

2.5.4.10
GEN panel
VOLT RMS

2.5.4.10
GEN panel
VOLT PEAK

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

1078.2008.02

SOURce:INTerval

SOURce:ONTime

SOURce:VOLTage:AM

UPL

Command

3.85

set burst duration ...
60 s



tmax: 60 s – tmin

Digital generator:
tmin= 1 / sample
frequency

Analog generator:
tmin= 20.83 µs

tmin to tmax



-100% ... 0%



Parameter

s

s

PCT

Basic
unit

Available only with BURST modulation (SOUR:AM:MODE BURS)

Entry of the burst interval length (burst period), i.e., the sum of burst duration
and break time

Available only with BURST modulation (SOUR:AM:MODE BURS)

Entry of the burst duration (time the sine is switched on)

Available only with SINE modulation (SOUR:AM.MODE SIN)

Setting of the modulation deviation in %

Meaning

2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
INTERVAL

2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
ON TIME

2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
Variation

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators


0 to 12 V
0 to 20 V
0 to 1 FS

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]

1078.2008.02


-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS

OFF
ON

POLarity

3.86

Parameter

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe

SOURce:FUNCtion [:SHAPe]

Command

3.10.1.5.9 POLARITY

UPL

V
FS

V
FS

Basic
unit

Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3

Pulse amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument

DC amplitude
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument

Note:
This setting cannot be made in the analog generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.

→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.

DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed at the generator
output.

→ Polarity test signal

Meaning

2.5.4.11
GEN panel
VOLTAGE

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset

2.5.4.1.1
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON

E-10

2.5.4.11
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ POLARITY

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

’O33 ID code

SOURce:O33

1078.2008.02


0 to 11.29 V
0 FS to 1 FS


-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1FS to 1FS

ON
OFF

FSK

3.87

Parameter

SOURce:VOLTage

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe

SOURce:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]

Command

3.10.1.5.10 FSK (Frequency shift keying)

UPL

Sends the code for line measurements.
The data coded in this way can only be sent from option UPL-B33 or UPLB10 (universal sequence controller).

Level for both FSK frequencies

Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument

Amplitude of DC component

Note:
This setting is not possible in the analog generator when the low-distortion
generator is used.

DC offset allows a DC voltage to be superimposed onto the generator output.
→ Almost no DC voltage at the output
→ The DC component can be set with the following command.

Frequency shift keying; generates a sequence of two different sinewave
frequencies each being output for 9 ms (baud rate 110) . The data coded in
this way can only be defined from option UPL-33 or UPL-B10 using command
SOURce:O33 ’O33-’ .
Frequency #1: 1850 Hz, logic 0
Frequency #2: 1650 Hz, logic 1

Meaning

No manual
operation

2.5.4.12
GEN panel
Volt No 1

2.5.4.12
GEN panel
DC Offset

2.5.4.12
GEN panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON

2.5.4.12
GEN panel
FUNCTION
→ FSK

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

ON
OFF


0 to 1 FS

SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer:STATe

SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer

1078.2008.02


-1 FS to 1 FS

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet

OFF
ON

ON
OFF

SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet:STATe

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe

STEReo

3.88

Parameter

SOURce:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]

Command

3.10.1.5.11 STEREO SINE

UPL

FS

FS

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Dither

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Dither
→ ON
→ OFF

→ Noise superimposed on signal
→ Noise superimposition off

Noise amplitude

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
DC Offset

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Frq. Offset,
→ +1000 ppm
→ OFF

E-10

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
FUNCTION
→ STEREO SINE

Section

DC amplitude

Note:
This setting cannot be made in the ANALOG generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.

DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed to the generator
output.
→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.

→ Frequency offset 0.1 %
→ No frequency offset

Only available with DIGITAL generator and option UPL-B6 (Extended
Analysis Function)

→ Sine with different signals for the left and right channel.

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

1078.2008.02

SOURce:SWEep ...

SOURce:VOLTage:SELect

VLVL

VLRT

FQFQ

FQPH

3.89

For sweep commands see 3.10.1.4 Generator Sweeps

→ The levels of the left (CH1) and right channel (CH2) have a fixed offset.
The offset remains constant during level sweep.
→ The level of the left (CH1) and right channel (CH2) can be entered
independently of each other.

Determines the type of level entry in the left and right channel.

→ Left (CH1) and right channel (CH2) have the same frequency but a
selectable phase with a fixed delay.
→ The frequency of the left (CH1) and right channel (CH2) can be
entered independently of each other.

Determines the type of frequency entry in the left and right channel.

if SOURC:VOLT:EQU:STAT ON

Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST?
EQU

SOURce:FREQuency:SELect

File containing equalizer data

EQUalize,’filename’

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

E-10

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Volt Mode
VOLT&RATIO
VOLT CH1&2

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Freq Mode
FREQ&PHASE
FREQ CH1&2

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Equal.File

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Equalizer
→ ON
→ OFF

ON
OFF

→ Sine signal equalized
→ Sine signal not dependent on frequency

Section
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
PDF
→ GAUSS
→ TRIANGLE
→ RECTANGLE

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

→ Noise distribution, Gaussian
→ Noise distribution, triangular
→ Noise distribution, uniform

SOURce:VOLTage:EQUalize:STATe

Parameter
GAUSsian
TRIangle
RECTangle

Command

SOURce:RANDom:PDF

UPL


0 to 1 FS


0 to 100000

SOURce:VOLTage:CH2Stereo

SOURce:VOLTage:RATio

3.90


0 to 1 FS

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]

1078.2008.02


0 ° to 360 °

SOURce:PHASe

FS

FS

DEG


Value range
determined by
instrument or function

SOURce:FREQuency:CH2Stereo

Parameter

Hz
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

Command

SOURce:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed]

UPL

The level of the right channel is reset upon each command
SOUR:VOLT:RATio  or SOURce:VOLTage  and limited to 1.0 FS or
'Max Volt'.

Only available with SOUR:VOLT:SEL VLRT:
Entry of level offset between channel 2 (right channel) and channel 1 (left
channel) as numeric value.

Only available with SOURce:VOLTage:SELect VLVL:
Entry of sine amplitude of right channel. Remains constant during sweep.
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3

Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3

Entry of sine amplitude of left channel; may be used as sweep parameter.
The sine amplitude of right channel remains constant during sweep.

Entry of phase delay between right and left channel with the left channel
(CH1) as reference channel. During the sweep this phase remains constant
and cannot be swept.

Only available with SOUR.FREQ:SEL FQPH:

Only available if SOUR:FREQ:SEL FQFQ:
Entry of sine frequency of right channel.
Remains constant during sweep.

If SOUR:FREQ:SEL FQPH selected:
Entry of common sine frequency for both channels. Can be used as
sweep parameter.
If SOUR:FREQ:SEL FQFQ selected:
Entry of sine frequency of left channel. Can be used as sweep parameter.

Meaning

Volt Ch2:1

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
VOLT Ch2

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
VOLT Ch1

Phas Ch2:1

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Freq Ch2

E-10

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
FREQUENCY
oder
Freq Ch1

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

1078.2008.02

SOURce:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed]

SOURce:FUNCtion:MODE

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STATe

SOURce:FUNCtion

Command

3.10.1.5.12 MODULATION (FM or AM signal)

UPL

3.91


Value range
determined by
instrument and
sample frequency

FM
AM

Hz

Setting the modulation frequency

→ Frequency modulation; output of a frequency-modulated sinewave signal.
→ Amplitude modulation; output of amplitude-modulated sinewave signal.

Determines the type of modulation.

Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument

-5 V to 5 V
-10 V to 10 V
-1 FS to 1 FS

V
V
FS

DC amplitude

Note:
This setting cannot be made in the ANALOG generator when a low-distortion
generator is used.

DC offset permitting a DC voltage to be superimposed to the generator
output.
→ Hardly any DC voltage at the output
→ DC voltage can be set with the next command.

Setting a modulated sinewave signal. Either FM or AM can be used.

Meaning



OFF
ON

FM

Parameter

2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
Mod Freq
oder
Freq Ch1

2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
Mode
→ FM
→ AM

2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
DC OFFSET

2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON

2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
FUNCTION
→ FM

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

3.92

V
FS

1078.2008.02

Entry of DC amplitude; may be used as sweep parameter.
Is voltage-limited by SOUR:VOLT:LIM see 3.10.1.2 and 3.10.1.3


- 5 V to 5 V
-1 FS to 1 FS

SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal[:LEVel|AMPLitude]

DC voltage

Meaning

For sweep commands see 3.10.1.4 Generator Sweeps

DC

V
V
FS

Setting the carrier frequency

SOURce:SWEep ...

SOURce:FUNCtion

Command

Parameter

Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE UNB)
Analog instrument (OUTP:TYPE BAL)
Digital instrument

0 to 5 V
0 to 6V
0 to 0.5 FS

3.10.1.5.13 DC voltage

Setting the carrier amplitude



Hz

With SOUR:FUNC:MODE FM: Setting the deviation in %.
With SOUR:FUNC:MODE AM: Setting of modulation depth in %

SOURce:VOLTage2

Modulation deviation / depth


Value range
determined by
instrument and
sample frequency

PCT

Meaning

SOURce:FREQuency2[:CW|FIXed]

Parameter

0 to 100 %

Command

2.5.4.15
GEN-Panel
VOLTAGE

2.5.4.15
GEN-Panel
FUNCTION
→ DC

Section

2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
Carr Volt

2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
Carr Freq

2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
Bei FM:
Deviation
Bei AM:
Mod Depth

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]

UPL

1078.2008.02

CHL
CHC
CHR
CHLS
CHRS
CHLF

CH6

CH2

AC3

SOURce:CODedaudio:FORMat

SOURce:CODedaudio:CHANnel

CODedaud

3.93

Parameter

SOURce:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]

Command

3.10.1.5.14 Coded Audio (Coded Audio Signals)

UPL

Basic
unit

Single channels at 448 kb/s. Limited frequency selection 41.7 Hz, 994.8 Hz
or 15 kHz (see next command) at a fixed level of -20 dB. Coding of samples
at 16 bit.
→ Front left
→ Front center
→ Front right
→ Rear left
→ Rear right
→ Low frequency enhancement

→ Stereo mode at 192 kb/s. Frequency and level variation or sweep are
possible.
→ Multichannel sound with all channels at 448 kb/s. Frequency and level
variation or sweep possible.

Selection of channels producing sound.

Other formats are in preparation.

Coding format AC-3 (Dolby Digital)

Available only
• if the UPL-B23 (Coded Audio Signal Generation) is installed in
• DIGITAL generator (INST D48) in
• Meas Mode AUDIO DATA (SENSe:DIGital:FEED ADATa) at a
• sampling frequency of 48 kHz (OUTP:SAMP:MODE F48)

→ Output of digitally coded audio data to IEC 61937.

Meaning

E-10

2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Chan Mode
→ 2/0 192kb/s
→ 5.1 448kb/s
→L
448kb/s
→ C 448kb/s
→ R 448kb/s
→ LS 448kb/s
→ RS 448kb/s
→ LFE 448kb/s

2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Format
→ AC-3

2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
FUNCTION
→ CODED AUDIO

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

Command

1078.2008.02

3.94

5.21 Hz to 20 kHz at
a sampling rate of
48 kHz



SOURce:FREQuency

Only available in the multichannel modes 2/0 or 5.1 (SOUR:COD:CHAN
CH2|CH6) with frequency variation SOURce:FREQ:MODE FIX selected.

Frequency values outside this pattern are adapted to the next possible value.

The frequency step width depends on the number of WAV files in the
C:\UPL\AC3\48000\... directory and the frame length per WAV file:
Frequency range:
5 Hz to 1 kHz 1 kHz to 3 kHz 3 kHz to 20 kHz
Resolution
5.21 Hz
10.42 Hz
31.25 Hz
Number of frames: max. 6
max. 3
1

Entry of sine frequency (can be swept).

Frequency can be varied. The level is at -20 dB. 2.5.4.16

FIX

Only available in
• single channel modes
(SOUR:COD:CHAN CHL|CHC|CHR|CHLS|CHRS|CHLF) or with
• level variation (SOUR:VOLT:MODE FIX) selected

→ exactly 41.7 Hz
→ exactly 994.8 Hz
→ exactly 15000.0 Hz

Fixed frequency selection for crosstalk measurements and linearity (level)
sweeps.

Meaning

SOURce:FREQuency:MODE

Hz

Basic
unit

For sweep commands see 3.10.1.4 Generator Swepps

F042
F997
F15K

Parameter

E-10

2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
FREQUENCY

2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Vari Mode
→ FREQUENCY

2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
SWEEP CTRL

2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Frequency
→ 42 Hz
→ 997 Hz
→ 15 kHz

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

SOURce:SWEep ...

SOURce:CODedaudio:FREQuency

UPL

1078.2008.02

3.95

1 µFS to 1 FS or
-120 dBFS to 0 dBFS



SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal[:LEVel|AMPLitude]

Parameter

FIX

Command

SOURce:VOLTage:MODE

UPL

FS

Basic
unit

Only available in the multichannel modes 2/0 or 5.1 (SOUR:COD:CHAN
CH2|CH6) with level variation SOURce:VOLTage:MODE FIX selected.

Level can be varied in 24 steps of –5 dBFS between 0 dBFS and –120 dBFS.
Level values outside this pattern are adapted to the next possible value.

Entry of sine amplitude (can be swept)

Only available in the multichannel modes 2/0 or 5.1 (SOUR:COD:CHAN
CH2|CH6)

The level can be varied in 24 steps of –5 dBFS between 0 dBFS and –120
dBFS; one of three fixed settings can be selected as frequency
(SOUR:COD:FREQ F042|F997|F15K). This setting allows sweep of the sine
amplitude (next command).

Meaning

E-10

2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
TOTAL VOLT

2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Vari Mode
→ VOLTAGE

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

1078.2008.02

UPL

3.96

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Generators

1078.2008.02

3.97


1 mΩ to 100 kΩ

SENSe[]:POWer:REFerence:RESistance

Parameter

Ohm

Hz

Basic
unit

Meaning

Meaning

Reference resistance for power units

Lower limit frequency for analyzer instruments A22 and D48.

→ Analog analyzer, 22 kHz
→ Analog analyzer, 110 kHz
→ Digital analyzer, 48 kHz

1
2
4

 Query only
2 Hz | 10 Hz

Command

Configuration of Analog Analyzers

→ Analog analyzer, 22 kHz
→ Analog analyzer, 110 kHz
→ Digital analyzer, 48 kHz

Basic
unit

2.4 (RREF
2.6.2
ANLR panel
Ref Imped

2.6.2
ANLR panel
Min Freq

Section

E-10

2.6.1
ANLR panel
INSTRUMENT
→ ANLG 22 kHz
→ ANLG 110 kHz
→ DIGITAL

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

A22
A110
D48

INPut[]:FILTer[:LPASs]:FREQuency

3.10.2.2

INSTrument2[:SELect]
equivalent to
INSTrument2:NSELect

Parameter

Selection of Analyzer

3.10.2.1

Command

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands for Analyzers

3.10.2

UPL

1078.2008.02

INPut[1|2]:IMPedance

INPut[1|2]:TYPE

INPut[1|2]:COUPling

INPut[]:SELect

UPL

Command

R300
R600
R200K

GEN1
GEN2

BALanced

DC

AC

CH2Is1

CH1
CH2
CH1And2
CH1Is2

3.98

Parameter

Basic
unit

Input impedance for unbalanced input
→ 300 Ω
→ 600 Ω
→ 200 kΩ

→ Balanced input (XLR connector), see Fig. 2-1/11. For analog instruments
only.
→ Internal connection to generator channel 1. For analog instruments only.
→ Internal connection to generator channel 2. For analog instruments only.

Selection of coupling of analyzer input circuit for channels 1 and 2: available
in the two analog analyzer instruments only (INST2 A22 | 100).
→ AC coupling
A DC offset of the DUT will not be transmitted and
does not therefore affect the DUT.
Note:
A procedure similar to AC coupling can be selected in the digital analyzer
for specific measurement functions. Selection is made with menu item
DC Suppres ON (SENS:FUNC:DCS ON).
→ DC coupling:
Test signals up to 0 Hz are picked up and considered in the results of
RMS, RMS selective, Peak, Quasi-peak, DC, FFT and Waveform
measurements.

→ Only channel 1 active
→ Only channel 2 active
→ Channel 1 and 2 active, settings may be different
→ Channel 1 and 2 active, identical settings
Data of channel 1 adopted for channel 2.
→ Channel 1 and 2 active, identical settings
Data of channel 2 adopted for channel 1.

Meaning

2.6.2
ANLR panel
Imped
→ 300 Ω
→ 600 Ω
→ 200 Ω

E-10

2.6.2
ANLR panel
Input
→ BAL XLR
→ GEN1
→ GEN2
→ GEN CROSSED

2.6.2
ANLR panel
CH1 Coupl
CH2 Coupl
→ AC
→ DC

2.6.2
ANLR panel
CHANNEL(s)
→1
→2
→1&2
→1≡2
→2≡1

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

3.99


V
For value range see
2.6.2 Configuration of
the Analog Analyzers

SENSe[]:VOLTage:RANGe[1|2][:UPPer]

1078.2008.02

ON
OFF

Basic
unit

SENSe[]:VOLTage:RANGe[1|2]:AUTO

GROund

FLOat

Parameter


V
For value range see
2.6.2 Configuration of
the Analog Analyzers

Command

SENSe[]:VOLTage:RANGe[1|2]:LOWer

INPut[1|2]:LOW

UPL

2.6.2
ANLR panel
Range
→ FIX

2.6.22.6.2
ANLR panel
Range
→ AUTO

→ Autoranging
→ The current range is accepted and retained as :UPPer.
Corresponds to SENSe[]:VOLTage:RANGe[1|2][:UPPer]

Sets a range containing the specified level value and holds it unconditionally.

2.6.2
ANLR panel
Range
→ LOWER

2.6.2
ANLR panel
Common
→ FLOAT
→ GROUND

Section

Sets a range containing the specified level value. No underrange but higher
ranges may be selected.

→ Outer conductor of unbalanced. input not connected to instrument ground
(PE conductor).
→ Outer conductor of unbalanced. input connected to instrument ground (PE
conductor)

Meaning

E-10

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

1078.2008.02

INPut:FILTer[:LPASs]:FREQuency

SENSe:DIGital:SYNC:REFerence

Command

Configuration of Digital Analyzers

SENSe:DIGital:FEED

3.10.2.3

UPL

3.100

 Query only
10 Hz | 20 Hz

PLL88
PLL96

PLL32
PLL44
PLL48

PLLVari

GCLock

ADATa
JPHase
CINPut

Parameter

Hz

Basic
unit

Lower frequency limit of analyzer.
For SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT only.

Only with Meas Mode JITTER/PHASE (SENS:DIG:FEED JPH) selected.

→ only with option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) ...
→ ... in the High Rate Mode.

→ Reference signal is the sampling signal derived from the ...
→ ... input signal via the internal synchronization PLL. Synchronization is ...
→ ... made via the fixed-frequency VCXO.

→ Reference signal is the sampling signal derived from the input signal via
the internal synchronization PLL. Synchronization is made via the VCO
with maximum lock-in range. The capture range is:
•
with option UPL-B2 (Digital Audio I/O)
27 kHz to 55 kHz
•
with option UPL-B29 in the Base Rate Mode 40 kHz to 55 kHz
•
with option UPL-B29 in the High Rate Mode 40 kHz to 106 kHz

→ The generator clock is the reference for the jitter measurement. This is
only possible when the generator is also sychronized to the internal
generator clock (menu item "Sync To GEN CLK"
(SOUR:DIG:SYNC:SOUR GCL) in GENERATOR panel)

Indicates the signal to which the jitter measurement should be referenced.

→ Audio content
→ Demodulated jitter signal in the frequency range 0 to 100 kHz
→ Common-mode signal of digital inputs measured. Frequency range and
measurement function same as with jitter.

Specifies the parameter measured in the analyzer:

Meaning

2.6.1
ANLR panel
Min Freq

E-10

Related to
→ GEN CLK
→ VARI (PLL)
→ 32.0 (PLL)
→ 44.1 (PLL)
→ 48.0 (PLL)
→ 88.2 (PLL)
→ 96.0 (PLL)

2.6.3
ANLR-Panel

2.6.3.1
ANLR panel
Meas Mode
→ AUDIO DATA
→ JITTER/PHAS
→ COMMON/INP

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

1078.2008.02

RINPut

AINPut

SENSe:DIGital:SYNC:SOURce

CH1
CH2
BOTH

3.101

Parameter

AESebu
SPDif
OPTical
INTern

Command

INPut[1|2]:TYPE

INPut[]:SELect

UPL
Basic
unit

2.6.3
ANLR panel
Input
→ BAL (XLR)
→ UNBAL (XLR)
→ OPTICAL
→ INTERN
2.6.3
ANLR panel
Sync To
→ AUDIO IN
→ REF IN

→ AES/EBU interface, for connector see Fig. 2-1/17.
→ S/P DIFF interface, for connector see Fig. 2-1/17.
→ Optical interface, for connector see Fig. 2-1/17.
→ Internal interface for digital generator OPTical and INTern for
SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT|PHAS only.

→ The receiver is clocked with the input signal
(for SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT|PHAS only).
→ The receiver is clocked with the signal at the reference input
(for SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT|JPH only).

E-10

2.6.2
2.6.3
ANLR panel
CHANNEL(s)
→1
→2
→ BOTH

Section

For SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT only
→ Only channel 1 active
→ Only channel 2 active
→ Channel 1 and 2 active, identical setting

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

3.102


For value range see
2.6.3 Configuration of
the Digital Analyzer

INPut[]:AUDiobits

1078.2008.02


27 kHz to 55 kHz
40 kHz to 55 kHz
40 kHz to 106 kHz

CHSTatus

AUTO

VALue

F96

F44
F48
F88

F32

Parameter

INPut[]:SAMPle:FREQuency

INPut[]:SAMPle:FREQuency:MODE

UPL

Hz

Basic
unit

Section

Word length of audio samples to be analyzed in bits.
For SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT|PHAS only

for SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT|PHAS only

Value of applied sampling frequency
with option UPL-B2 (Digital Audio I/O)
with option UPL-B29 im Base Rate Mode
with option UPL-B29 im High Rate Mode

For SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT|PHAS only.

2.6.3
ANLR panel
Audio Bits

2.6.3
ANLR panel
Sample Frq
→ VALUE:

E-10

2.6.3
ANLR panel
Sample Frq
→ Sampling frequency 32 kHz for digital instrument, only with option UPL-B2
→ 32 kHz
(Digital Audio I/O)
→ 44.1 kHz
→ Sampling frequency 44.1 kHz for digital instrument
→ 48 kHz
→ Sampling frequency 48 kHz for digital instrument
→ 88.2 kHz
→ Sample frequency 88.2 kHz (only with option UPL-B29 Digital Audio 96
→ 96.0 kHz
kHz in High Rate Mode CONF:DAI HRM)
→ VALUE:
→ Sample frequency 96 kHz (only with option UPL-B29 Digital Audio 96 kHz
→ AUTO
in High Rate Mode CONF:DAI HRM)
→ CHAN STATUS
→ Sampling frequency externally applied. For input values see next
command.
→ Transfer of measured sample frequency. The sample rate is updated if the
value varies by more than 0.01%. Smaller variations are ignored.
→ Transfer of the sample frequency specified in the channel status data.

Setting the signal clock rate.

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results


2 to 1024


Analog instruments
10 µV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
1µFS to 1.0 FS

TRIGger:COUNt

ARM:LEVel:MIN

3.103


10 ms to 2000 s

TRIGger:TIMer

1078.2008.02


0 s to 10 s

CH1Rapidfreq
CH2Rapidfreq
CH1Edgetrigger
CH2Edgetrigger

CH1Trigger|CH2Trigg
er
TCHart

CH1Level |CH2Level

IMMediate
TIMer
CH1Freq|CH2Freq

Parameter

TRIGger:DELay

Command

Starting the Analyzer, Ext. Sweep

TRIGger:SOURce

3.10.2.4

UPL

V
FS

s

s

Basic
unit

Minimum voltage required for triggering a measurement with external
frequency sweep.

Number of measured values entered into the buffer.

Interval between recordings of measured values.

Waiting time after the measurement (settling time for DUT).

2.6.4
ANLR panel
START COND
→ AUTO
→ TIME
→ CH1Freq |
CH2Freq
→ CH1Level |
CH2Level
→ LEV TRG CH1|
LEV TRG CH2
→ TIME CHART
→ FRQ FST CH1
→ FRQ FST CH2

→ Continuous measurement mode w i t h o u t trigger condition
→ Storing measured values in the buffer at regular intervals.
→ Collection of measured values due to a variation in frequency found at the
ANALYZER input, channel 1 or channel 2.
→ Collection of measured values due to a variation in level found at the
ANALYZER input, channel 1 or channel 2.
→ Triggers a single measurement as soon as the level is within the range
specified by ARM:VOLT:STAR and ARM:VOLT:STOP.
→ Measured values from the ongoing continuous measurement are entered
into a timing diagram at the time interval selected by means of command
TRIG:TIM .
→ External frequency sweep with fast frequency measurement in channel 1
→ and channel 2
→ Edge-sensitive triggering; a measurement is triggered as soon as the level
→ enters the interval between ARM:VOLT:START and ARM:VOLT:STOP for
the first time.

2.6.4
ANLR panel
Min VOLT

2.6.4
ANLR panel
Points

2.6.4
ANLR panel
Timetick

2.6.4
ANLR panel
Delay

E-10

→ EDG TRG CH1
→ EDG TRG CH2

Section

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

3.104


LL to 900% or
LL to 20 dB

TRIGger:VOLTage:VARiation

1078.2008.02


LL to 50%

TRIGger:FREQuency:VARiation

PTC

PTC

V
FS


Analog instruments
10 µV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
1 µFS to 1.0 FS

Basic
unit

ARM:VOLTage:STARt
ARM:VOLTage:STOP

Parameter


Hz
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

Command

ARM:FREQuency:STARt
ARM:FREQuency:STOP

UPL

LL: The lower limit for the entry of variation is not less than 0.1% or 0,01 dB
and is output such that not more than 1024 measured values are generated
(depending on the spacing between start and stop values).

Minimum percentage or dB value by which the input voltage must vary for
triggering a measurement.

LL: The lower limit for the entry of variation is not less than 0.1% and is output
such that not more than 1024 measured values are generated (depending on
the spacing between start and stop values).

Minimum percentage by which the input frequency must vary for triggering a
measurement.

The input level must be within the start/stop voltage limits for triggering a
measurement.

The input frequency must be within the start/stop frequency for triggering the
measurement.

Meaning

2.6.4
ANLR panel
Variation

2.6.4
ANLR panel
Variation

2.6.4
ANLR panel
Start | Stop

2.6.4
ANLR panel
Start | Stop

Section

E-10

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

1078.2008.02

Command

Analyzer Functions

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

3.10.2.5

UPL

3.105

’OFF’
’RMS’
’RMSSelectiv’
’PEAK’
’QREak’
’DC’
’THD’
’THDNsndr’
’MDISt’
’DFD’
’WAF’
’POLarity’
’FFT’
’FILTersimulation’
’WAVeform’
’COHerence’
’RUBBuzz’
’PROTocol’
’THIRdoct’

Parameter

Basic
unit
→ Function measurement off
→ RMS measurement ’
→ RMS selective measurement
→ Peak measurement
→ Quasi-peak measurement
→ DC measurement
→ THD measurement
→ THD+N measurement
→ MOD DIST measurement
→ DFD measurement
→ Wow & flutter measurement
→ Polarity measurement
→ FFT display
→ Filter simulation
→ Waveform display
→ Coherence Measurement and Transfer Function
→ Loudspeaker measurements
→ AES/EBU protocol
→ Third analysis

Meaning

E-10

2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ OFF
→ RMS & S/N
→ RMS SELECT
→ PEAK & S/N
→ QPK & S/N
→ DC
→ THD
→ THD+N/SINAD
→ MOD DIST
→ DFD
→ WOW & FL
→ POLARITY
→ FFT
→ FILTER SIM.
→ WAVEFORM
→ COHERENCE
→ RUB & BUZZ
→ PROTOCOL
→ THIRD OCT

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results


Value range and units
are determined by
instrument and
function
see 2.6.5.1

0.001 to 10 s

SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:RESolution
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:RESolution
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:RESolution
SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:RESolution

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:TOUT
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:TOUT
SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:TOUT

3.106


0.001 to 10 %

SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:TOLerance
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:TOLerance
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:TOLerance

1078.2008.02


for EXP | FLAT:
2 to 6
for AVER:
2 to 100

OFF
EXPonential
FLAT
AVERage

Parameter

SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:COUNt
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:COUNt
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:COUNt
SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:COUNt

SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:MODE
SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:MODE
SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:MODE
SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:MODE

Command

3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer Functions

UPL

s

DEG(°)

V
FS
%
dB
Hz

%

Basic
unit

Maximum settling time
If no settled measurement result is achieved within this time, the
measurement is aborted and an invalid result is signalled.

Starting value of exponential resolution characteristic or resolution band.

Starting value of exponential tolerance characteristic or tolerance band.

Number of test points considered in settling.
3 means that the currently measured value is compared with the two
preceding results.

SENS:TRIG:SETT = Settling process for external triggering
SENS:FUNC:SETT = Settling process for measurement function
SENS3:FREQ:SETT = Settling process for frequency measurement
SENS3:PHAS:SETT = Settling process for phase measurement
→ OFF
→ Settling with exponential tolerance and resolution characteristic
→ Settling with tolerance and resolution band
→ Arithmetic averaging (not for settling with external triggering)

Meaning

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Timeout

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Resolution

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Tolerance

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Samples

E-10

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Settling
→ OFF
→ EXPONENTIAL
→ FLAT
→ AVERAGE

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

SPKC
PERM

SYSTem:PHONe

3.107


0 to 100 %

SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume

1078.2008.02


-120 to 120 dB

AES2
AE1And2

FNC2
FN1And2
AES1

FNC1

%

2.6.6
ANLR panel
Phone Out
→ SPKPhone
→ PERMANENT

→ Phones output conforms to loudspeaker setting.
→ Headphones output permanently switched on.

E-10

2.6.6
ANLR panel
Skp Volume

2.6.6
ANLR panel
Pre Gain
Volume of monitor output

Amplification or attenuation of function output.

→ The input signal of the analog analyzer A22 and A110 can be
monitored on channel 2.
→ ... on both channels (stereo).
With channel 1 or 2 selected as analyzer input, only the left or,
the right headphones output can be used for monitoring.
→ Aural monitoring of function output of analog analyzer
A22 for all measurement functions (except THD+N) for channel 1.
→ ... for channel 2.
→ ... for both channels (stereo).
→ Aural monitoring of left channel of AES/EBU interface of digital analyzer
D48 (Option: Digital Audio Protocol Analysis and Generation UPL-B2).
→ ... of right channel ...
→ ... of both channels (stereo) ...

INP2

dB

2.6.6
ANLR panel
SPEAKER
→ OFF
→ INPUT Ch1
→ INPUT JITT
→ INPUT COMM
→ INPUT Ch2
→ INPUT Ch1&2
→ FUNCT Ch1
→ FUNCT Ch2
→ FUNCT Ch1&2
→ DIG Ch1
→ DIG Ch2
→ DIG Ch1&2

→ Loudspeaker and headphones output switched off.
→ Aural monitoring of input signal of analog analyzers A22 and A110
on channel 1.
The signal is available at both output channels.
In the DIGITAL analyzer with option Digital Audio I/O (UPL-B2) in the
Meas Mode JITTER/PHAS the demodulated jitter signal is applied to the
ANLG 110 kHz analyzer and can be listened to.
In the DIGITAL analyzer with option Digital Audio I/O (UPL-B2), in the
Meas Mode COMMON/INP the superimposed common-mode signal
is applied to the digital inputs of the ANLG 110 kHz analyzer
and can be monitored.

OFF
INP1

IN1And2

Section

Basic
unit

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results
Meaning

Parameter

SYSTem:SPEaker:GAIN

SYSTem:SPEaker:SOURce

UPL

Command

see 3.10.4

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]

1078.2008.02

ON
OFF

ON
OFF

3.108

Parameter

"RMS"

ON
OFF

Parameter

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SNSequence

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DCSuppression

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

Command

3.10.2.5.2 RMS Measurement incl. S/N

SYSTem:SPEaker[:STATe]

UPL

Basic
unit

Basic
unit

E-10

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/CH2

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
S/N Sequ

→ S/N (signal-to-noise) measurement on
→ S/N (signal- to-noise) measurement off

Display units for RMS measurement

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
DC Suppres
→ ON
→ OFF

2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ RMS & S/N

Section

2.6.6
ANLR panel
LOCAL key

Section

Suppression of DUT DC in the digital analyzer.
→ DC not considered; corresponds to AC coupling
→ DC considered in the measurement and displayed; corresponds to DC
coupling

→ RMS measurement

Meaning

→ Loudspeaker on
→ Loudspeaker off
Command has no effect if option UPL-B5 is not fitted.

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE

UPL

3.109


1 ms ...
For value range see
2.6.5.2 → Meas Time

VALue

GENTrack

AFASt
AUTO
TRIGgered

Parameter

s

Basic
unit

Numerical entry of measurement time.
Measurement time for steadying the display.

AFASt and AUTO match the measurement time to the signal frequency by
taking the signal period into account. The measurement time is matched as
far as possible to the input signal. Maximum algorithmic error:
→ 1%
→ 1‰.
→ A special mode is available for RMS measurements, permitting a single
delay-free measurement with selectable measurement time to be carried
out as soon as the signal exceeds a set trigger threshold for the first
time.In conjunction with the generator burst signal this measurement
mode permits the first period of a signal to be measured and is particularly
suitable for echo-free measurements on loudspeakers.
→ Measurement over (at least) one whole period of the generator signal. If
required, the generator frequency is matched to the analyzer sampling
rate. In the case of high frequencies the measurement time is extended to
several periods to increase the measurement accuracy. Particularly
suitable for measuring very noisy or distorted signals and for extremely
fast sweeps. This measurement method guarantees maximum
measurement accuracy at minimum measurement times and should
therefore be given preference.
If the MODDIST signal is used as generator signal, the measurement time
is referred to the LOWER Frequency, which normally dominates.
→ Numerical entry of measurement time. For entry of values see next
command.

Meaning

2.6.5.2
ANLR panel
Meas Time

E-10

2.6.5.2
ANLR panel
Meas Time
→ AUTO FAST
→ AUTO
→ TRIGGERED
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1]:NOTCh[:STATe]

SENSe:SWEep:SYNC

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE

UPL

OFF
DB0
DB12
DB30

NORMal
BLOCk

3.110


Analog instrument
100 pV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
0.0 to 1.0 FS

VALue

STORe

CH2Meas

CH1Meas

CH2Store

CH1Store

Parameter

V
FS

Basic
unit

→ Analog notch filter off;
→ Analog notch filter on; no gain
→ Analog notch filter on; gain 12 dB
→ Analog notch filter on; gain 30 dB

Only available with option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) in Base Rate Mode
(CONF:DAI BRM).
In the high rate mode, the sweep can be operated at NORMal speed only.

Permits the speed to be increased for 1-dimensional generator frequency
sweeps with the universal generator:
→ normal speed common for all sweeps
→ sweep speed increased after the 2nd sweep; traces are not updated online
but only upon completion of the sweep (all at once).

Numerical entry of reference value.

→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 1 is stored as a reference.
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 2 is stored as a reference.
→ The value measured in channel 1 is used as a reference for the output of
results in reference-related units.
→ The value measured in channel 2 is used as a reference for the output of
results in reference-related units.
→ For a single-channel measurement, the current measurement result is
stored as a reference.
→ The reference value is entered using the next command.

Meaning

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Anlg. Notch
→ OFF
→ 0 dB
→ 12 dB
→ 30 dB

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Sweep Mode
→ NORMAL
→ BLOCK

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference

Section

E-10

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

OFF
ON

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STATe

1078.2008.02

3.111


1 to 3

SENSe[1]:FILTer:.....

SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:.....

 for analog instr.
10 Hz to 22.5 kHz

SENSe[1]:NOTCh:FREQuency:FIXed

Parameter

FIXed
GENTrack

Command

SENSe[1]:NOTCh:FREQuency:MODE

UPL

HZ

Basic
unit

2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
POST FFT
→ OFF
→ ON

→ No POST-FFT for the selected measurement function
→ POST-FFT for selected measurement function: see 2.6.5.12 FFT
with the following settings available:
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:FFT S256 to S8K
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:WINDow RECT to KAIS
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STARt ?
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STOP ?
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:RESolution?
If the group-delay measurement is selected with command
SENSe3:FUNCtion FQGRoupdelay, POST-FFT is always active as the
frequency information is obtained from FFT.
For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions

2.7.1
ANLR panel
Filter

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Notch Freq
→ VALUE:

E-10

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Notch Freq
→ VALUE:
→ GEN TRACK

Section

See 3.10.3 Selecting the Analyzer Filters

Numerical center frequency of notch filter.
For analog instrument only.

→ For numerical entry of notch-filter center frequency see next command.
→ The notch-filter center frequency tracks the generator frequency.

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DCSuppression

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

Command
Parameter


10 µs to 10s

VALue

AFASt
AUTO
GENTrack

3.112

see 3.10.4 Units for
IEC Measurement
Results

ON
OFF

"RMSSelectiv"

3.10.2.5.3 Selective RMS Measurement incl. Sweep

UPL

s

Basic
unit

Numerical entry of measurement time.
Measurement time for steadying the display.

AFASt and AUTO: Automatic matching of measurement time to the signal
frequency taking the signal period into account. The measurement time is
matched as far as possible to the input signal. Maximum algorithmic error
→ 1%
→ 1‰
→ Measurement over (at least) one whole period of the generator signal. If
required, the generator frequency is matched to the analyzer sampling
rate. In the case of high frequencies the measurement time is extended to
several periods to increase the measurement accuracy. Particularly
suitable for measuring very noisy or distorted signals and for extremely
fast sweeps. This measurement method guarantees maximum
measurement accuracy at minimum measurement times and should
therefore be given preference.
If the MODDIST signal is used as generator signal, the measurement time
is referred to the LOWER Frequency, which normally dominates.
→ Numerical entry of measurement time. For entry of values see next
command.

Display units for RMS measurement

Suppression of DUT DC in the digital analyzer.
→ DC not considered; corresponds to AC coupling
→ DC considered in the measurement and displayed; corresponds to DC
coupling

Selective RMS measurement

Meaning

2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
Meas Time

E-10

2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
Meas Time
→ AUTO FAST
→ AUTO
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/CH2

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
DC Suppres
→ ON
→ OFF

2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ RMS SELECT

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE

SENSe[1]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]

equivalent to

SENSe[1]:BWIDth[:RESolution]

SENSe[1]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:MODE

equivalent to

SENSe[1]:BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE

UPL
Basic
unit

VALue

GENTrack

STORe

CH2Meas

CH1Meas

CH2Store

CH1Store

3.113


Hz
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

SPCT1
SPCT3
STOCt
SOCT12
SFIX
SFASt

PPCT1
PPCT3
PTOCt
POCT12
PFIX
PFASt

Parameter

→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 1 is stored as a reference.
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 2 is stored as a reference.
→ The value measured in channel 1 is used as a reference for the output of
results in reference-related units.
→ The value measured in channel 2 is used as a reference for the output of
results in reference-related units.
→ For a single-channel measurement, the current measurement result is
stored as a reference.
→ The currently set generator output level is used as a reference.
Using the subsequent command SENS:FREQ:FACT  the bandpass
filter of the RMS SEL measurement in the Freq Mode GENTRACK can be
set to any multiple of the fundamental.
This allows single harmonics to be measured.
→ The reference value is entered using the next command.

Numerical entry of arithmetically symmetrical bandwidth.

PFASt
SFASt:
Bandstop filter with only 40 dB attenuation, third-octave bandwidth and
particularly
short settling time.

Parameter starting with
P ... = bandpass
S ... = bandstop

Bandwidth of bandpass or bandstop of selective RMS filter.

Meaning

E-10

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:

2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
Bandwidth

2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
Bandwidth
→ BP 1%
→ BP 3 %
→ BP 1/3 OCT
→ BP 1/12 OCT
→ BP FIX:
→ BP FAST
→ BS 1%
→ BS 3 %
→ BS 1/3 OCT
→ BS 1/12 OCT
→ BS FIX:
→ BS FAST

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence

UPL

3.114


Analog instruments
100 pV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
0.0 to 1.0 FS

Parameter

V
FS

Basic
unit
Numerical entry of reference value.

Meaning

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference

Section

E-10

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

1078.2008.02

SENSe:FREQuency:FACTor

SENSe[1]:FREQuency:MODE

Command

Sweep for selective RMS measurement

UPL

3.115

 MLT
1 to 20 for RMS
selective
measurements

CH1
CH2

GENTrack

MULTisine

LIST

SWEep

FIXed|CW

Parameter

Basic
unit

Factor by which the tracking bandpass filter is higher than the generator
frequency with setting GENTRACK (SENS:FREQ:MODE GENT).

→ Presetting for fixed frequency of selective RMS measurement. Numerical
entry with SENSe[1]:FREQuency[:FIXed|:CW]
→ Frequency sweep of selective RMS measurement.
The sweep parameters are determined by the following user
specifications:
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:STARt|STOP 
SENSe[1]:SWEep:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic
SENSe[1]:SWEep:STEP 
SENSe[1]:SWEep:POINts 
→ List sweep of frequency of selective RMS measurement.
The sweep parameters are read from the file specified under
MMEMory:LOAD:LIST FREQuency, "filename" For format of block/list files
see 2.9.1.3 Format of Block/Listen Data.
→ The frequency of the selective RMS measurement is set consecutively to
the multisine frequencies specified in the generator panel
(see 2.5.4.4 MULTISINE). The sweep is similar to a LIST sweep.
→ The frequency of the selective RMS measurement tracks the current
generator frequency.
By means of the factor (see next command SENS:FREQ:FACT ) it can
be determined whether the center frequency should directly track the
generator frequency (factor = 1) or be a multiple thereof. If the factor is an
integral multiple, it may be used for measuring single harmonics. The
bandpass center frequency can be tracked to the generator signal
functions SINE, MULTISINE, BURST or SINE2 PULSE“, only; any other
signal function causes an error message. The frequency of the selective
RMS measurement tracks the frequency measured in
→ channel 1
→ channel 2.

Meaning

E-10

2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
FREQ MODE
→ Factor

FREQ MODE
→ GEN TRACK
→ FREQ CH1
→ FREQ CH2

2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ OFF
→ AUTO SWEEP
MANU SWEEP
→ AUTO LIST
MANU LIST
→GEN MLTSINE

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1]:SWEep:MODE
MANual

AUTO

3.116

Automatic sweep
→ This command in conjunction with command
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:MODe SWEep sets the AUTO SWEEP mode.
→ This command in conjunction with command
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:MODe SWEep sets the MANU SWEEP mode.
Pressing the LOCAL key activates the spinwheel.

Numerical entry of frequency for selective RMS measurement.


Hz
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

→ Analog notch filter on; gain 12 dB
→ Analog notch filter on; gain 30 dB
→ Analog notch filter on; no gain
→ Analog notch filter off.
The notch filter can only be set in the analog instruments when a bandstop
filter has been selected for SENS:BWID:MODE.

Only available with option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) in Base Rate Mode
(CONF:DAI BRM).
In the high rate mode, the sweep can be operated at NORMal speed only.

Permits the speed of 1-dimensional sweeps with the universal generator to be
increased.
→ Normal speed used for any kind of sweep
→ Sweep speed increased as from 2nd sweep
→ Sweep speed increased again as from 2nd sweep; update of curve not
online but only upon completion of the sweep (all at once).

Meaning

SENSe[1]:FREQuency[:FIXed|CW]

Basic
unit

See 3.10.3 Selecting the Analyzer Filters
Particularly when monitoring weak residual signals amplified by means of Pre
Gain, a highpass filter should be used for DC suppression to avoid the signal
to be distorted or suppressed altogether.
In conjunction with a selective RMS measurement filter No. 2 must be
selected as filter No. 1 is already used in the UPL as a selective RMS
bandpass or bandstop filter. 3.10.3 Selecting the Analyzer Filters

DB12
DB30
DB0
OFF

NORMal
FAST
BLOCk

Parameter

E-10

2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ AUTO SWEEP
→ MANU SWEEP

2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
FREQ MODE
→ FIX

2.7.1
ANLR panel
Filter

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Anlg. Notch
→ 12 dB Auto
→ 30 dB Auto
→ 0 dB
→ OFF

2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
Sweep Mode
→ NORMAL
→ FAST
→ BLOCK

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

SENSe[1]:FILTer2:.....

SENSe[1]:NOTCh[:STATe]

SENSe:SWEep:SYNC

UPL

1078.2008.02

3.117

Sweep step size
Depending on selected SPACing
SENSe[1]:SWEep:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic,
the sweep frequency range between "STARt" and "STOP" is divided into
linear steps in Hz or logarithmic steps in the form of a multiplier.

 | 
The selected step
size should be so
wide that not more
than 1023 single
steps (= 1024 sweep
points) are obtained.
It should not exceed
the absolute
difference between
STOP and STARt.

SENSe[1]:SWEep:STEP

Í

Number of sweep steps.
Depending on the selected SPACing (SENSe[1]:SWEep:SPACing
LINear|LOGarithmic),
the sweep frequency range between "STARt" and "STOP" is divided into 
linear or logarithmic sweep points.

SENSe[1]:SWEep:SPACing LINear:
Hz
SENSe[1]:SWEep:SPACing LOGarithmic: No unit because of multiplication
factor.

2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
Steps

2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
Points

E-10

2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG

→ Linear sweep spacing
→ Logarithmic sweep spacing


2 to 1024

2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ Start | Stop

2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ AUTO LIST
→ MANU LIST

Section

Start and stop frequency for frequency sweep of selective RMS
measurement.

SENSe[1]:SWEep:POINts

Automatic list sweep
→ This command in conjunction with command
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:MODe LIST sets the AUTO LIST mode.
→ This command in conjunction with command
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:MODe SWEep sets the MANU LIST mode.
Pressing the LOCAL key activates the spinwheel.

Meaning

LINear
LOGarithmic

Basic
unit

SENSe[1]:SWEep:SPACing

MANual

AUTO

Parameter


Hz
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

Command

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

SENSe[1]:FREQuency:STARt
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:STOP

SENSe[1]:LIST:MODE

UPL

Command

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:.....

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

UPL

3.118

FREQency,"filename
"
= path and filename
of frequency list for a
LIST sweep of a
selective RMS
measurement, eg
"c:\UPL\ref\swpflst.lst"

Parameter

Basic
unit

For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions

Loading a frequency list for the list sweep.

Meaning

2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl

E-10

2.6.5.3
2.9.1.3
ANLR panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ Filename

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

see 3.10.4 Units for
IEC Measurement
Results

ON
OFF

PPEak
NPEak
PTOPeak
PABSolut

SFASt
FAST
SLOW
FIXed
VALue

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SNSequence

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:MMODe

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime:MODE

3.119

"QPEak"

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

1078.2008.02

"PEAK"

Parameter

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

Command

3.10.2.5.4 Peak and Quasi-Peak Measurement incl. S/N

UPL

Basic
unit

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
S/N Sequ
→ ON
→ OFF
2.6.5.4
ANLR panel
Meas Mode
→ PK +
→ PK → PK to PK
→ PK abs
2.6.5.4
ANLR panel
Intv Time
→ FIX 50ms
→ FIX 200ms
→ FIX 1000ms
→ FIX 3 SEC
→ VALUE:

→ S/N (signal-to-noise) measurement on.
→ S/N (signal-to-noise) measurement off.

→ PK+ value
→ PK- value
→ Peak-to-peak value
→ Absolute peak value

→ 50 ms
→ 200 ms monitoring interval for peak search
→ 1000 ms
→ s monitoring interval for quasi-peak search
→ Numerical entry of interval time. For entry of values see next command.

E-10

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/CH2

2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ QPK & S/N

→ Quasi-peak measurement

Display units for RMS measurement

2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ PEAK & S/N

Section

→ Peak measurement

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

FIXed
GENTrack

SENSe[1]:NOTCh:FREQuency:MODE

3.120

DB0
DB12
DB30
OFF

SENSe[1]:NOTCh[:STATe]

1078.2008.02


Analog instrument
100 pV to 1000V
Digital instrument
0.0 to 1.0 FS

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence

GENTrack
VALue

STORe

CH2Meas

CH1Meas

CH2Store

CH1Store

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE

Parameter


20 ms to 10s

Command

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime

UPL

V
FS

s

Basic
unit

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Anlg. Notch
→ 0 dB
→ 12 dB
→ 30 dB
→ OFF
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Notch Freq
→ VALUE:
→ GEN TRACK

→ Analog notch filter on; no gain
→ Analog notch filter on; gain 12 dB
→ Analog notch filter on; gain 30 dB
→ Analog notch filter off;

→ For numerical entry of notch-filter center frequency see next command.
→ The center frequency of the notch filter tracks the generator frequency.

E-10

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:

→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 1 is stored as a reference.
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 2 is stored as a reference.
→ The value measured of channel 1 is used as a reference for theresults in
reference-related units.
→ The value measured of channel 2 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ For a single-channel measurement, the current measurement result is
stored as a reference.
→ The currently set generator output level is used as a reference.
→ The reference value is entered using the next command.
Numerical entry of reference value.

2.6.5.4
ANLR panel
Intv Time

Section

Numerical entry of interval time.
Monitoring interval for peak search

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:.....

3.121


1 to 3

SENSe[1]:FILTer:.....

Parameter


for analog instr.
10 Hz to 22.5 kHz

Command

SENSe[1]:NOTCh:FREQuency:FIXed

UPL

Hz

Basic
unit

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Notch Freq
→ VALUE:

Section

For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions

2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl

2.7.1
ANLR panel
Only available with option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) in Base Rate Mode Filter
(CONF:DAI BRM).
In the high rate mode (CONF:DAI HRM), the measurement functions PEAK
and QPEak can be operated without filter.
See 3.10.3 Selecting the Analyzer Filters

Numerical center frequency of notch filter.

Meaning

E-10

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

FAST
VALue

CH1Store

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:.....

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence

see 3.10.4 Units for
IEC Measurement
Results

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]

3.122


Analog instrument
- 1000 V to 1000 V

GENTrack
VALue

STORe

CH2Meas

CH1Meas

CH2Store

"DC"

Parameter

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

Command

3.10.2.5.5 DC Measurement

UPL

V

Basic
unit

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/CH2

2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ DC

Section

For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions

Numerical entry of reference value.

→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 1 is stored as a reference.
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 2 is stored as a reference.
→ The value measured of channel 1 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ The value measured of channel 2 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ For a single-channel measurement, the current measurement result is
stored as a reference.
→ The currently set generator output level is used as a reference.
→ The reference unit is specified by the next command.

2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference

E-10

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:

→ 200 ms integration time for steadying the display.
2.6.5.5
→ Numerical entry of integration time. For entry of values see next command. ANLR panel
Meas Time
→ FIX 200ms
→ VALUE:

Display units for RMS measurement

→ DC measurement

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

SELectdi
LSELectdi

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:MMODe

FAST
PRECision

PCT|DB

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DMODe

SENSe[1]:UNIT

1078.2008.02

 *)

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DISTortion

DEVen
LDEVen

DODD
LDODd

DALL
LDALl

"THD"

3.123

Parameter

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

Command

3.10.2.5.6 THD Measurement

UPL

Basic
unit

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit

E-10

2.6.5.6
ANLR panel
Dyn Mode
→ FAST
→ PRECISION

→ Analog notch switched off.
→ Analog notch switched on when the applied signal is of good quality.

Display units for results of THD measurements.

2.6.5.6
ANLR panel
→ di2468

2.6.5.6
ANLR panel
Meas Mode
→SELECT di
→ LEV SEL di
→ All di
→ LEV All di
→ All odd di
→ LEV odd di
→ All even di
→ LEV even di

→ Any combination of harmonics from d2 to d9 can be set with the
→ following command.
Result in dB
Result in V (analog) or FS (digital)
→ Selection of harmonics to be measured:
→ All harmonics from d2 to d9 Result in dB
Result in V (analog) or FS (digital)
→ All uneven harmonics:
→ d3, d5, d7, d9
Result in dB
Result in V (analog) or FS (digital)
→ All even harmonics:
→ d2, d4, d6, d8
Result in dB
Result in V (analog) or FS (digital)
Decimal equivalent of integer  for any combination of harmonics,
eg d2, d4, d6, d9, is desired;
binary: 10010101;
decimal equivalent  = 149

2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ THD

Section

THD measurement

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

di3

1078.2008.02

32

16

8

4

2

1

64

di4

128

di5

di2

di6

di8

di9

di7

LSB

MSB

*)

Weighting

Harmonics

Data bit

For settling command see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions

Numerical entry

Determining the fundamental frequency:
Automatically by frequency measurement.
Numerical entry of fundamental frequency. For entry of values see next
command.

Numerical entry of reference value in reference-related level units.
SENS:FUNC:MMOD LSEL | LDAL | LDOD | LDEV

3.124

Meaning

2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl

2.6.5.6
ANLR panel
Fundamentl

2.6.5.6
ANLR panel
Fundamentl

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Ref Volt

Section

E-10

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Example: di1, di3, di5 and di7
Data word: 10101010
Weighting = 2+8+32+128
Decimal equivalent: =170


Hz
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:FUNDamental

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:.....

AUTO
VALue

V
FS

Basic
unit

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:FUNDamental:MODE

Parameter


Analog Instruments:
100 pV to 1000 V
Digital Instrument:
100 pFS to 100 FS

Command

SENSE[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence

UPL

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1]:UNIT

SENSe[1]:THDN:REJection

SENSe:FUNCtion:APERture:MODE

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DMODe

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:MMODe

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

Command

3.10.2.5.7 THD + N / Sinad Measurement

UPL

PCT|DB

NARRow
WIDE

SLOW
FAST
SFASt

FAST
PRECision

THDN
LTHDn
SNDRatio
NOISe
LNOise

"THDNsndr"

3.125

Parameter

Basic
unit

Display units for results of THD+N measurement

Sets the characteristic of the notch filter in the digital instrument.
→ The noise is measured close to the carrier.
→ An two-pole notch filter is additionally taken into account to evaluate
attenuated harmonics in the vicinity of the carrier.

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit

2.6.5.7
ANLR panel
Rejection
→ NARROW
→ WIDE

E-10

2.6.5.7
ANLR panel
Meas Time
→ SLOW
→ FAST
→ SUPERFAST

2.6.5.7
ANLR panel
Dyn Mode
→ FAST
→ PRECISION

→ Analog notch filter switched off.
→ Analog notch filter switched on when the applied signal is of good quality.

Selection of measurement speed
→ Measurement using FFT size 8192
→ Measurement using FFT size 2048
→ Measurement using FFT size 512

2.6.5.7
ANLR panel
Meas Mode
→THD+N
→ LEVEL THD+N
→ SINAD
→ NOISE
→ LEVEL NOISE

2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ THD+N/SINAD

Section

Result display as
→ THD+N value in dB
→ THD+N RMS value in V (analog) or FS (digital)
→ SINAD value in negative dB
→ Same as THD+N but without harmonics weighting, in dB
→ Same as THD+N RMS value but without harmonics weighting, in V
(analog) or FS (digital)

→ THD+N measurement

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

V
FS

Basic
unit

1078.2008.02

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:FFT
S512
S1K
S2K
S4K
S8K

3.126

FFT Size
→ 512 lines
→ 1024 lines
→ 2048 lines
→ 4096 lines
→ 8192 lines

2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
FFT Size
→ 512
→ 1024
→ 2048
→ 4096
→ 8192

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
POST FFT
→ OFF
→ ON

→ No POST-FFT for the selected measurement function
→ POST-FFT for selected measurement function (see 3.10.2.5.12 FFT)
CALC:TRAN:FREQ:FT S256 to S8K
CALC:TRAN:FREQ:WIND RECT to KAIS
CALC:TRAN:FREQ:STAR?
CALC:TRAN:FREQ:STOP?
CALCe:TRAN:FREQ:RES?

OFF
ON

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STATe

2.6.5.7
ANLR panel
Fundamentl

2.6.5.7
ANLR panel
Fundamentl
→ AUTO
→ VALUE:

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Ref Volt

Section

2.7.1
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl

Numerical entry of fundamental frequency

Determining the fundamental frequency:
→ Automatically by frequency measurement.
→ Numerical entry of fundamental frequency. For entry of values see next
command.

Numerical entry of reference value for measurement response in referencerelated level units for the setting
SENS:FUNC:MMOD LTHD | LNO

Meaning

See 3.10.3 Selecting the Analyzer Filters


Hz
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

AUTO
VALue


Analog Instruments:
100 pV to 1000 V
Digital Instrument:
100 pFS to 100 FS

Parameter

E-10

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

SENSe[1]:FILTer1:.....

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:FUNDamental

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:FUNDamental:MODE

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence

UPL

1078.2008.02

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST SENSe,
’filename’

OFF

3.127

Only permissible with SENS:VOLT:EQU ON

Command for entering the name of the equalizer file.

→ The equalizer is switched off. The THD+N value is calculated from the
original FFT spectrum.

→ The equalizer is switched on. The command that follows is accepted. The
THD+N value is calculated from the equalized FFT spectrum.

Activation/deactivation of an equalizer table consisting of frequency
information and associated voltage gain factors.

SENSe:VOLTage:EQUalize[:STATe]
ON

For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions

Lower band limit for THD+N measurement function

Upper band limit for THD+N measurement function

Meaning

2.6.5.7
ANL Panel
Equal. file

2.6.5.7
ANL Panel
Equalizer
→ ON
→ OFF

2.7.1
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl

E-10

2.6.5.7
ANLR panel
→ Frq Lim Low

2.6.5.7
ANLR panel
→ Frq Lim Upp

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:.....

Hz


Value range
determined
by instrument or
function

Basic
unit

SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:LOWer

Parameter


Hz
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

Command

SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:UPPer

UPL

FAST
PRECision

PCT|DB

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DMODe

SENSe[1]:UNIT

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:.....

"MDISt"

3.128

Parameter

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

Command

3.10.2.5.8 MOD DIST

UPL

Basic
unit

Section

For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions

Display units for results of MOD-DIST measurement.

→ Analog notch filter switched off.
→ Analog notch filter switched on if the applied signal is of good quality.

2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit

E-10

2.6.5.8
ANLR panel
Dyn Mode
→ FAST
→ PRECISION

MOD-DIST measurement. Measurement with double-sine (similar to SMPTE) 2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ MODDIST

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

D2
D3

FAST
PRECision

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:MMODe

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DMODe

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:.....

PCT|DB

SENSe[1]:UNIT

3.129

Parameter

"DFD"

Command

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

3.10.2.5.9 DFD

UPL

Basic
unit

E-10

2.6.5.9
ANLR panel
Dyn Mode
→ FAST
→ PRECISION

→ Analog notch filter switched off.
→ Analog notch filter switched on if the applied signal is of good quality.

2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl

2.6.5.9
ANLR panel
Meas Mode
→ d2 (IEC268)
→ d3 (IEC268)
→ d2 (IEC118)
→ d3 (IEC118)

→ Intermodulation distortion d2
→ Intermodulation distortion d3

For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit

2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ DFD

Section

Display units for results of DFD measurement

→ Difference frequency distortion measurement

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

NAB
JIS
DINiec
SI05
SI10

ON
OFF

PCT

OFF
ON

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:STANdard

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:WEIGhting

SENSe[1]:UNIT

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STATe

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:.....

"WAF"

3.130

Parameter

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

Command

3.10.2.5.10 Wow & Flutter

UPL

Basic
unit

For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions

2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Fnct Settl

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
POST FFT
→ OFF
→ ON

→ No POST-FFT for selected measurement function
→ POST-FFT for selected measurement function (see 3.10.2.5.12 FFT)
CALC:TRAN:FREQ:FFT S256 to S8K
CALC:TRAN:FREQ:WIND RECT to KAIS
CALC:TRAN:FREQ:STAR?
CALC:TRAN:FREQ:STOP?
CALC:TRAN:FREQ:RES?

E-10

2.6.5.10
ANLR panel
Weighting
→ ON
→ OFF

→ W&F weighting filter on
→ W&F weighting filter off

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit

2.6.5.10
ANLR panel
Rule
→ NAB
→ JIS
→ DIN/IEC
→ 2 Sigma 5 s
→ 2 Sigma 10s

→ W&F acc. to NAB
→ W&F acc. to JIS
→ W&F acc. to DIN/IEC
→ W&F, 2-sigma, 5 s.
→ W&F, 2-sigma, 10 s

No further display unit selectable.

2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ WOW & FL

Section

→ Wow & flutter measurement

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

FFT

Command

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DCSuppression

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

3.10.2.5.12

Command

POLARITY

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

3.10.2.5.11

UPL

3.131

see 3.10.4 Units for
IEC Measurement
Results

ON
OFF

"FFT"

Parameter

"POLarity"

Parameter

Basic
unit

Basic
unit

Meaning

Display units for RMS measurement

Suppression of DUT DC in the digital analyzer.
→ DC not considered; corresponds to AC coupling
→ DC considered in the measurement and displayed; corresponds to DC
coupling

→ FFT measurement function

→ Polarity test of DUT.

Meaning

E-10

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/CH2

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
DC Suppres
→ ON
→ OFF

2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Function
→ FFT

Section

2.6.5
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ POLARITY

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

1078.2008.02

3.132

DB12
DB30
DB0
OFF

SENSe[1]:NOTCh[:STATe]

s


-10 to 10 s

SENSe[1]:CHANnel:DELay

Basic
unit


Value range
V
determined by
FS
instrument or function

GENTrack
VALue

STORe

CH2Meas

CH1Meas

CH2Store

CH1Store

Parameter

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE

UPL

→ Analog notch filter on; gain 12 dB
→ Analog notch filter on; gain 30 dB
→ Analog notch filter on; no gain
→ Analog notch filter off;

Available only for for two-channel measurements in instruments A22 and D48
and Zoom FFT off ("CALC:TRAN:FREQ:ZOOM 1")

Interchannel delay
Delay compensation of the DUT by entering the time by which channel 1 is to
be delayed with respect to channel 2. If channel 2 has a shorter delay than
channel 1, this can be compensated for by entering a negative value.

Numerical entry of reference value.

→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 1 is stored as a reference.
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 2 is stored as a reference.
→ The value measured of channel 1 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ The value measured of channel 2 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ For a single-channel measurement, the current measurement result is
stored as a reference.
→ The currently set generator output level is used as a reference.
→ The reference unit is specified by the next command.

Meaning

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Anlg. Notch
→ 0 dB
→ 12 dB
→ 30 dB
→ OFF

2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Chan Delay

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference

E-10

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

1078.2008.02

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:

AVERage

1 to 256

S256
S512
S1K
S2K
S4K
S8K

3.133


1 to 3

SENSe[1]:FILTer:...

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:FFT


HZ
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

Basic
unit

SENSe[1]:NOTCh:FREQuency:FIXed

Parameter

FIXed
GENTrack

Command

SENSe[1]:NOTCh:FREQuency:MODE

UPL

Filters

Number of averaging procedures for optimum noise suppression.

FFT size
→ 256 lines
→ 512 lines
→ 1024 lines
→ 2048 lines
→ 4096 lines
→ 8192 lines

No filter can be switched on:
• Analyzer ANLG 110kHz
• Option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) in high rate mode (CONF:DAI HRM)

The three filters are available with:
• Analyzer ANLG 22 kHz (INST2 A22) or
• Analyzer DIGITAL (INST2 D48) in Meas Mode AUDIO DATA
(SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT)

See 3.10.3 Selecting the Analyzer

Numerical entry of notch-filter center frequency.

→ For numerical entry of notch-filter center frequency see next command.
→ Center frequency of notch filter tracks the generator frequency.

Meaning

2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Average

2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
FFT Size
→ 256
→ 512
→ 1024
→ 2048
→ 4096
→ 8192

2.7.1
ANLR-Panel
Filter

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Notch Freq
→ VALUE:

E-10

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Notch Freq
→ VALUE:
→ GEN TRACK

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

Parameter

 = 1
1 to 128
for instr.
A22 a. D48
n = 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32,
64, 128
A110 =
n =1, 2, 4, 8,16

Query only


Query only

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:ZOOM

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:SPAN?

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:RESolution?

3.134


Hz
Value range
determined by
instrument or function

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:CENTer

1078.2008.02


Query only

Basic
unit

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STARt?
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STOP?

EXPonential

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:AVERage:TCONtr NORMal
ol

UPL

2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Center

2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Start / Stop

Queries the frequency resolution of FFT, depending on CENTer and SPAN.
The response is  in Hz.

Queries the frequency range around the center frequency as a function of the
zoom factor.
The response is  in Hz.
Contrary to the manual mode, SPAN can only be read in but not entered in
the IEC/IEEE-bus mode. The SPAN value can be changed by changing the
zoom factor and modifying the sampling frequency and the oversampling
factor.

2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Resolution

2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Span

E-10

2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Avg Mode
→ NORMAL
→ EXPONENTIAL

Section

Zoom FFT off (standard FFT)
2.6.5.12
FFT zoom factor
ANLR panel
Contrary to the manual mode, the zoom factor instead of the SPAN is entered Zoom-FFT
in the IEC/IEEE-bus mode. The SPAN being a function of the zoom factor it
can be determined by the following query.

Center frequency for FFT calculation

Queries the beginning and end of FFT, depending on CENTer and SPAN.
The response is  in Hz.

→ The specified number of FFTs is performed, intermediate results are
added and then divided by this number.
→ Averaging is performed continuously.

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

1078.2008.02

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST SENSe,

SENSe:VOLTage:EQUalize[:STATe]

’filename’

OFF

ON

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:WINDow:BETAfact  = 1 to 20
or

3.135

RECTangular
HANNing
BLACkman_harris
RIF1
RIF2
RIF3
HAMMing
FLATtop
KAISer

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:WINDow

Parameter


Query only

Command

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:MTIMe?

UPL

Only permissible with SENS:VOLT:EQU ON

Command for entering the name of the equalizer file.

→ The equalizer is switched off; the FFT spectrum remains unchanged.

→ The equalizer is switched on. The command that follows is accepted.

Activation/deactivation of an equalizer table consisting of frequency
information and associated voltage gain factors.

2.6.5.12
ANL Panel
Equal. file

2.6.5.12
ANL Panel
Equalizer
→ ON
→ OFF

2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
ß-Factor

E-10

2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Window
→ RECTANG...
→ HANN
→ BLACKMAN H
→ RIFE VINC 1
→ RIFE VINC 2
→ RIFE VINC 3
→ HAMMING
→ FLAT TOP
→ KAISER

→ Fast and frequency-accurate
→ High spectral resolution, wide, bell-shaped curve
→ Steep slope of bell lobe
→ Excellent suppression of distant interference
→ Excellent suppression of distant interference
→ Excellent suppression of distant interference
→ Implemented for the sake of completeness
→ Amplitude read from graphic diagram
→ Characteristics determined by ß factor

Section

2.6.5.12
ANLR panel
Meas Time

Meaning

Queries the measurement time of FFT, depending on FFT size.
The response is  in s.

keine ß factor for KAISer window
Einheit

Basic
unit

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

3.136


1 to 3

SENSe[1]:FILTer:.....

1078.2008.02

PCT
DB
see 3.10.4 Units for
IEC Measurement
Results

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]

Parameter

’FILTersim’

Command

Filter Simulation

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

3.10.2.5.13

UPL

Basic
unit-

See 3.10.3 Selecting the Analyzer Filters

Unit of Y axis to be selected with the next command for display of the filter
curve.

→ Display of sum frequency response of the filter
to be selected with SENS:FILT... on the UPL display, eg
SENS:FILT:AWE ON
SESN:FILT2:UFIL5 ON
SENS:FUNC ’FILT’
IEC LAD 20
IEC GTL

Meaning

2.7.1
ANLR panel
Filter

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2

E-10

2.6.5.13
ANLR panel
Function
→ FILTER SIM.

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results


Analog instrument
- 1000 V to 1000 V
Digital instrument
- 1 kFS to 1 kFS

SENSE[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence

3.137

see 3.10.4 Units for
IEC Measurement
Results

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]

1078.2008.02


2 to 1024

USAMpl

COMPressed

STANdard

ON
OFF

"WAVeform"

Parameter

SENSe[1]:WAVeform:COMPression

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:MMODe

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DCSuppression

Command

WAVEFORM

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

3.10.2.5.14

UPL

V
FS

Basic
unit

Numerical entry of reference value.

Display unit for results of DC measurement.

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit

2.6.5.14
ANLR panel
Comp Fact

E-10

2.6.5.14
ANLR panel
Meas Mode
→ STANDARD
→ COMPRESSED
→ UNDERSAMP

→ Standard display of samples, max. trace length is 7488 samples.
Interpolation can be switched on.
→ To allow measurements over longer periods of time only peaks are
displayed.
With command SENSe:WAVeform:COMPression  (see below) the
number of peak-weighted samples is determined.
Available only for instruments A22 and D48.
Interpolation cannot be switched on.
→ Undersampling of signal to record longer periods;
the number of samples specified under SENSe:WAVeform:
COMPression is arithmetically combined (without detection).
Number of peak-weighted samples of WAVeform mode
SENSe:FUNCtion:MMODe COMPressed.

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
DC Suppres
→ ON
→ OFF

2.6.5
ANLR panel
Function
→ WAVEFORM

Section

Suppression of DUT DC in the digital analyzer.
→ DC not considered; corresponds to AC coupling
→ DC considered in the measurement and displayed; corresponds to DC
coupling

→ Waveform display of applied signal

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1]:SMOothing:APERture

POSitive alias
RISing

TRIGger:SLOPe

N1
N2
N4
N8
N16
N32

3.138

NEGative alias
FALLing


Analog instruments
-50V to 50V
Digital instrument
-1 FS to 1 FS

TRIGger:LEVel

Parameter


1

Command

SENSe[1]:FILTer:.....

UPL

V
FS

Basic
unit

Filters

N1 to N32 = factor 1 to 32

Selects the interpolation stages for smoothing the display of the traced
waveform.

Sets the trigger edge.

Sets the voltage for the trigger threshold.

No filter can be switched on:
• In analyzer ANLG 110kHz
• Option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) eingebaut und High Rate Mode
(CONF:DAI HRM)

A filter can be selected if
• Option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) fitted and Base Rate Mode
(CONF:DAI BRM)
• ANLG 22 kHz or DIGITAL instument (INST2 A22|D48)
• In DIGITAL analyzer Source Mode AUDIO DATA (SENS:DIG:FEED
ADAT)
• Measurement function WAVEFORM, Meas Mode UNDERSAMPLE
(SENS:FUNC:MMOD USAM) .

See 3.10.3 Selecting the Analyzer

Meaning

2.6.5.14
ANLR panel
Interpol
→1
→2
→4
→8
→ 16
→ 32

2.6.5.14
ANLR panel
Trig Slope
→ RISING
→ FALLING

2.6.5.14
ANLR panel
Trig Level

2.6.5.14
ANLR-Panel
Filter

Section

E-10

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

1078.2008.02

GENBurst

CH1
CH2

TRIGger:CHANnel

3.139

Parameter


see 2.6.5.14
WAVEFORM

Command

SENSe[1]:WAVeform:DURation

UPL

s

Basic
unit

E-10

2.6.5.14
ANLR panel
Trig Src
→ CHAN 1
→ CHAN 2
→ GEN BURST

→ Channel 1
→ Channel 2
triggers the measurement for both channels when the trigger level is
exceeded (TRIGger:LEVel ).
→ The generator signal triggers the measurement upon start of the "Burst
On" phase, provided that a suitable generator function has been
selected. Signal delay times of the devices under test can thus be
determined graphically from the waveform display.
To be set only for two-channel measurements in instruments A22 and D48.

2.6.5.14
ANLR panel
Trace Len

Section

Sets the period for which the signal is traced. The max. settable Trace Len is
a function of the sampling rate and the interpolation value.

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

1078.2008.02

S256
S512
S1K
S2K
S4K
S8K


-10to10 s

SENSe[1]:CHANnel:DELay

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency: FFT

PCT
DB

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1]

3.140

Parameter

’COHerence’

Command

Coherence Measurement and Transfer Function

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

3.10.2.5.15

UPL

s

Basic
unit

FFT size
→ 256 lines
→ 512 lines
→ 1024 lines
→ 2048 lines
→ 4096 lines
→ 8192 lines

Available only for for two-channel measurements in instruments A22 and D48

Interchannel delay
Delay compensation of the DUT by entering the time by which channel 1 is to
be delayed with respect to channel 2. If channel 2 has a shorter delay than
channel 1, this can be compensated for by entering a negative value.

Units for result display for transfer function (ratio channel 2/channel 1) of
COHERENCE measurement provided TRACE A is selected with
DISP:TRAC:FEED ’SENS:DATA’.

Coherence and transfer function with built-in option UPL-B6
Conditions:
• Analog instrument 22 kHz (INST2 A22) or
digital instrument (INST2 D48) in Meas Mode AUDIO DATA
(SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT)
• Two-channel measurement (INP:SEL CH1A | CH2ICH1I | BOTH)

Meaning

2.6.5.22
ANLR panel
FFT Size
→ 256
→ 512
→ 1024
→ 2048
→ 4096
→ 8192

2.6.5.22
ANLR-Panel
Chan Delay

2.6.5.22
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1

E-10

2.6.5.22
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ COHERENCE

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

1078.2008.02


2 to 2048

3.141

Number of averaging procedures to increase the accuracy of the coherence
measurement

→ Fast and frequency-accurate
→ Selective, wide bell
→ Steep bell slopes
→ Excellent far-off band attenuation
→ Excellent far-off band attenuation
→ Excellent far-off band attenuation
→ For reason of completeness
→ Amplitude can be read off the graphics display
→ Characteristics determinable by ß factor (subsequent command)

Meaning

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency: AVERage

Basic
unit

ß-factor for KAISer window

HANNing
RECTangular
BLACkman_harris
RIF1
RIF2
RIF3
HAMMing
FLATtop
KAISer

Parameter

2.6.5.22
ANLR panel
Average

2.6.5.22
ANLR panel
ß factor

E-10

2.6.5.22
ANLR panel
Window
→ HANN
→ RECTANG...
→ BLACKMAN H
→ RIFE VINC 1
→ RIFE VINC 2
→ RIFE VINC 3
→ HAMMING
→ FLAT TOP
→ KAISER

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:WINDow:BETAfact 
or 1 to 20

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency: WINDow

UPL

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE

Command

3.142

V | DBV | DBU | ... |
DBR

AUTO
VALue
GENTrack

AFASt

’RUBBuzz’

Parameter

Loudspeaker Measurements (RUB & BUZZ)

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

3.10.2.5.16

UPL

Basic
unit

Unit for result display of RUB & BUZZ measurement

Measurement time of RUB & BUZZ measurement for adapting the
measurement speed to the signal frequency.
→ Automatic matching of measurement time to signal frequency taking into
account the
→ signal period.
→ Numerical entry of desired measurement time.
→ Measurement taking up (at least) one whole generator signal period. If
required, the generator frequency can be adapted to the analyzer sample
rate. To increase the measurement time in the case of high frequencies,
the measurement time is exceeded to several periods. This mode
guarantees maximum accuracy at a minimum measurement time and
should be given preference.

HRM.

• Option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) in High Rate Mode (CONF:DAI

No Rub&Buzz measurement available if
• im DIGITAL-Instrument

Rub&Buzz measurement is available if
• Option UPL-B6.
• Option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) fitted and Base Rate Mode
(CONF:DAI BRM)
• Analog instrumente 22 kHz (INST2 A22) both channels,
• Analog instrument 110 kHz (INST2 A100) channel 1 (INP:SEL CH1)

Loudspeaker measurements only with built-in option UPL-B6

Meaning

E-10

2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/CH2

2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
Meas Time
→ AUTO FAST
→ AUTO
→ VALUE:
→ GEN TRACK

2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
FUNCTION
→ RUB & BUZZ

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1]:FREQuency:MODE

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE

UPL

GENTrack

FIXed | CW

3.143


Analog instrument
100 pV to 1000 V

STORe

CH2Meas

CH1Meas

CH2Store

→ A fixed highpass filter is used; the numeric value of the passband
frequency is entered with the subsequent command SENS:FREQ .
→ Generator tracking:
A tracking highpass filter is used which should preferably be tuned to
about the 5th harmonic of the generator frequency. The multiple by which
the passband frequency should be higher than the generator frequency
can be entered with the subsequent command SENS:FREQ:FACT .
Frequency limits, within which tracking of the filter frequency should be
performed, can be selected with commands
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:LOWer
and SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:UPPer.
When a limit is reached (FrqLim Low or Upp) the filter frequency is held
at this frequency.
Thus a tracking highpass filter can be created which becomes a fixedfrequency highpass filter below FrqLim Low and/or above FrqLim Upp.
If tracking should be performed over the entire frequency range, the
frequency limits should be set to the minimum and maximum value.

Determination of highpass filter type

Numerical entry of reference value with command SENS:REF:MODE VAL

→ With two-channel measurements the current measurement result of
channel 1 is stored as reference value.
→ With two-channel measurements the current measurement result of
channel 2 is stored as reference value.
→ Value measured in channel 1 is used as a reference for result display with
relative units
→ Value measured in channel 2 is used as a reference for result display with
relative units.
→ With single-channel measurements the current result is stored as
reference value.

CH1Store

Meaning

→ Reference value to be entered with the following command

Basic
unit

VALue

Parameter

E-10

2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
FREQ MODE
→ FIX
→ GEN TRACK

2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
Reference

2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
Reference

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

1078.2008.02

3.144

2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
Frq Lim Low

Lower band limit for tracking the highpass filter frequency for command
SENS:FREQ:MODE GENT.
If the product of generator frequency and factor drops below the value
specified here, the passband frequency of the highpass filter is held at this
value.

SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:LOWer

Value range:
ANLG 22 kHz:
10.0 Hz to 21.9 kHz
ANLG 110 kHz:
20.0 Hz to 120 kHz

2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
Filter

Two digital filters (number 2! and 3!) can be selected in addition to the
standard highpass filter.
Use: Lowpass filter for band limiting (particularly in the ANLG 110 kHz
instrument), delay filter for extending the settling time, etc., Bandstop to filter
out spurious.
Note:
Like the standard highpass filter, the filter selected here is only active for
measurement channel 1.

E-10

2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
FREQ MODE
→ Factor

2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
FREQ MODE
→ FIX

Section

SENSe[1]:FILTer2:.....
SENSe[1]:FILTer3:...
↑
The 2 is important!

NORMal
FAST
BLOCk

Factor by which the passband frequency of the tracking bandpass or
highpass filter should be higher than the generator frequency when
GENTRACK (SENS:FREQ:MODE GENT) is set.

Entry of numeric passband frequency for the setting SENS:FREQ:MODE FIX

Meaning

2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
Sweep Mode
→ NORMAL
→ FAST
→ BLOCK

Basic
unit

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Permits the speed for 1-dimensional sweeps with the universal generator to
be increased:
→ Normal sweep speed to be used with any kind of sweeps.
→ Sweep speed increased as from 2nd sweep run.
→ Further increase of sweep speed as from 2nd sweep. Update of trace is
not online but performed (all in one) when the sweep is completed.

SENSe:SWEep:SYNC

 MLT
2 to 20

SENSe:FREQuency:FACTor

Parameter


Value range depends
on instrument

Command

SENSe[1]:FREQuency[:FIXed|CW]

UPL

Command

1078.2008.02

SYSTem:SPEaker ...

SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:UPPer

UPL

3.145


Value range:
ANLG 22 kHz:
FrqLim Low to
21.9 kHz
ANLG 110 kHz:
FrqLim Low to
120 kHz

Parameter

Basic
unit

In the 22 kHz analyzer, the (residual) Rub & Buzz signal in channel 1 and the
unfiltered signal in channel 2 can be monitored. This is done by selecting
SYST:SPE:SOUR FNC1 | FNC2 provided the selected channel is also active
as a measurement channel.

Upper band limit for tracking the highpass filter frequency for command
SENS:FREQ:MODE GENT.
If the product of generator frequency and factor exceeds the value specified
here, the passband frequency of the highpass filter is held at this value.

Meaning

2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
SPEAKER

2.6.5.23
ANLR panel
Frq Lim Upp

Section

E-10

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

1078.2008.02

SENSe2[:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence

SENSe2[:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE

3.146


100 pV to1000 V

VALue
STORe
DIGoutampl

V | DBV | DBU | DBM
W | DPCTV | DV |
VVR
PCTVVR | DPCTW
DW | PPR | PCTPPR
DBR

SENSe2:UNIT[]

Parameter

’DIGInpampl’

Command

Input Level of Digital Signal (DIG INP AMP)

SENSe2:FUNCtion

3.10.2.5.17

UPL

V

Basic
unit

Numerical entry of reference value.

Reference value for result display in relative units
provided a referenced unit is selected.
→ Reference value specified with the following command.
→ The current measurement result is stored as reference value.
→ The currently valid and each newly set generator voltage is stored as
reference value.

Unit for result display of digital input amplitude.

Available only in Meas Mode COMMON/INP ("SENS:DIG:FEED CINP")

→ Measurement of digital input amplitude, see 3.10.2.5.20

Meaning

2.6.5.16
ANLR-Panel

E-10

2.6.5.16
ANLR-Panel
Reference
→ VALIE:
→ STORE
→ DIG OUT AMP

2.6.5.16
ANLR-Panel
Unit

2.6.5.16
ANLR-Panel
INPUT DISP
→ DIG INP AMPL

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Meaning

1078.2008.02

Command

PROTOCOL

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

3.10.2.5.19

"PROTocol"

3.147

Parameter

UI | PCTFRM |
DEGFRM
NS

Basic
unit

Protocol data of the digital AES/EBU interface are displayed in the graphics
window.

Meaning

Unit for result display of phase.

Basic
unit

SENSe2:UNIT[]

Parameter

→ Measurement of phase between digital input and reference input
see 3.10.2.5.20
Nur verfügbar im Meas Mode JITTER/PHAS (SENS:DIG:FEED JPH"

Command

Phase Measurement (PHAS TO REF)

E-10

2.6.5
ANLR panel
Function
→ PROTOCOL

Section

2.6.5.17
ANLR-Panel
Unit

2.6.5.17
ANLR-Panel
INPUT DISP
→ PHAS TO REF

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

SENSe2:FUNCtion ’PHASetoref’

3.10.2.5.18

UPL

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]

Command

INPUT DISP

SENSe2:FUNCtion

3.10.2.5.20

UPL

3.148

see 3.10.4 Units for
IEC Measurement
Results

"DIGInpampl"

"PHASetoref"

"RMS"

"OFF"
"PEAKvoltage"

Parameter

Basic
unit

E-10

2.4
Unit Ch1/CH2

2.6.5.18
ANLR panel
INPUT DISP
→ OFF
→ PEAK
→ RMS
→ PHAS to REF
→ DIG INP AMP

→ Input peak measurement off
→ Display of input peak value for all analyzers in all
measurement modes
In the digital analyzer the input signal is sampled with the
user-determined sample rate (see 2.6.3).
In the analog analyzer the input signal is sampled with the
following clock rates after input level control:
ANLG 22 kHz with 48 kHz, ANLG 110 kHz with 307.2 kHz
The input peak measurement mainly serves for level control
and shows peak values of the AC-coupled input signal in front
of the filters.
→ Input RMS measurement for the
analog analyzers INST2 A22 | A100, and the
digital analyzers INST D48 in the measurement mode
SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT for measurement functions
SENS:FUNC ’THD’|’THDNsndr’|’MDISt’|’DFD’|’FFT’
The input RMS measurement can be displayed in the form of a
sweep curve if DISP:TRAC:FEED ’SENS2:DATA’ is set in the
DISPLAY panel
→ Display of frame phase of the signal with jitter between AUDIO and
REF input. This measurement can be carried out simultaneously with any
measurement function available for the JITTER signal:
SENS:FUNC ’RMS’|’RMSS’|’PEAK’|’FFT’|’WAV’|’PROT’
→ Display of digital input amplitude at the selected
digital input (XLR or BNC). Only with
jitter option (UPL-B22) in the measurement mode COMMON/INP.
(INST2 D48 mit SENS:DIG:FEED JPH)
This measurement can be carried out simultaneously with any
measurement function available for the COMMON signal:
SENS:FUNC ’RMS’|’RMSS’|’PEAK’|’FFT’|’WAV’
Display units for RMS measurement

Section

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

1078.2008.02

SENSe2[:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence

SENSe2[:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE

UPL

3.149


Analog instrument
1µV to 1000V
Digital instrument
0.0 to 1.0 FS

VALue

GENTrack
DIGoutampl

CH2Meas

CH1Meas

STORe

CH2Store

CH1Store

Parameter

V
FS

Basic
unit

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference

E-10

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ DIG OUT AMP
→ VALUE:

→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 1 is stored as a reference.
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 2 is stored as a reference.
→ The value measured of channel 1 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ The value measured of channel 2 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ For a single-channel measurement, the current measurement result is
stored as a reference.
→ The currently set generator output level is used as a reference.
→ The measured value is referenced to the level of the digital signal
set in the digital generator (see 2.6.5.18 INPUT) that is to
- "Unbal Vpp", with the UNBAL input selected, and to
- "Bal Vpp", with the BAL input selected.
Permissible only in the Meas Mode COMMON/INP (SENS:DIG:FEED
CINP)
with display of digital input amplitude INPUT DISP = DIG INP
AMP (SENS2:FUNC ’DIGI’)
if GENERATOR INSTRUMENT = DIGITAL is set.
→ The reference value is entered using the next command.
Numerical entry of reference value.

Section

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

1078.2008.02

SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:.....

SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence

CH1Store

SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence:MODE

3.150


- 1 MHz to 1 MHz

GENTrack
VALue

STORe

CH2Meas

CH1Meas

CH2Store

HZ|DHZ|DPCTHZ|
TOCT|OCT|DEC|
F|FR

FAST
PRECision

"OFF"
"FREQuency"

Parameter

SENSe3:FREQuency:UNIT[1|2]

SENSe[1]:FREQuency:APERture:MODE

Command

Frequency Measurement

SENSe3:FUNCtion

3.10.2.5.21

UPL

Hz

Basic
unit

For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions
Frequency settling not selectable for
SENSe:DIGital:FEED PHASe|CINPut

Numerical entry of reference value.

→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 1 is stored as a reference.
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 2 is stored as a reference.
→ The value measured of channel 1 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ The value measured of channel 2 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ For a single-channel measurement, the current measurement result is
stored as a reference.
→ The currently set generator output level is used as a reference.
→ The reference unit is specified by the next command.

Display units for results of frequency measurement.

Definition of measurement time and precision of the frequency measurement
for the measurement functions OFF and RMS. Does not influence the other
measurement functions.
→ The frequency measurementis set to attain optimum speed
→ The frequency measurement is set to attain optimum precision

The availability of the frequency measurement depends on measurement
function and option UPL-B29 (digital audio 96 kHz), see 2.6.1 Selecting the
Analyzer

→ Frequency measurement off
→ Frequency measurement on

Meaning

2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Freq Settl

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Ref Freq

E-10

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Ref Freq
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2

2.6.5.19
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time
→ FAST
→ PRECISION

2.6.5.19
ANLR panel
FREQ/PHAS
→ OFF
→ FREQ

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

DEG|RAD|DDEG|
DRAD|

STORe
GENTrack
VALue


- 1 MHz to 1 MHz

SENSe3:PHASe:UNIT2

SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence:MODE

SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence

3.151

HZ|DHZ|DPCTHZ|
TOCT|OCT|DEC|
FFR

SENSe3:FREQuency:UNIT[1]

1078.2008.02

"OFF"
"FQPHase"

SENSe3:FUNCtion

Command

Parameter

Hz

Basic
unit

Meaning

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference

E-10

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Ref Freq
→ STORE
→ VALUE:
→ GEN TRACK

→ The current frequency measurement result is stored as reference value.
→ The currently set generator frequency is used as a reference.
→ The reference value is entered using the next command.

Numerical entry of reference value.

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch2

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1

Display units for results of phase measurement.

Display units for results of frequency measurement.

The availability of the frequency and phase measurement depends on
measurement function and option UPL-B29 (digital audio 96 kHz), see 2.6.1
Selecting the Analyzer

2.6.5.19
ANLR panel
FREQ/PHASE
→ OFF
→ FREQ&PHASE

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

→ Combined frequency and phase measurement off.
→ Combined frequency and phase measurement on.

Combined Frequency, Phase and Group-Delay Measurement

Combined Frequency and Phase Measurement

3.10.2.5.22

UPL

Command

1078.2008.02

3.152

For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions

Numerical entry of reference value .

2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Phas Settl

2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Freq Settl

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference

E-10

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Reference
→ STORE
→ VALUE:

→ The current phase measurement result is stored as reference value.
→ The reference value is entered using the next command.

SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:.....

DEG

2.6.5.19
ANLR panel
Format Pha
→ 0 .. 360°
→ -180° .. 180°
→ - 360° .. 0°
→ 0 .. 2 π
→ - π .. + π
→ -2 π .. 0

Section

Display format for phase measurement
→
0 to 360°
→ - 180° to -180°
→ - 360° to 0 °
→
0 to 2 π
→
- π to + π
→
-2 π to 0

Meaning

For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions


-360° to +360°

SENSe3:PHASe:REFerence

Basic
unit

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:.....

STORe
VALue

POSitive
POSNegative
NEGative
RAD
RADBipolar
RADNegative

Parameter

SENSe3:PHASe:REFerence:MODE

SENSe3:PHASe:FORMat

UPL

S
DS
DEG
RAD

STORe
VALue
GENTrack


-1 MHz to 1 MHz

STORe
VALue

SENSe3:PHASe:UNIT2

SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence:MODE

SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence

SENSe3:PHASe:REFerence:MODE

3.153

HZ|DHZ|DPCTHZ|
TOCT|OCT|DEC|
FFR

SENSe3:FREQuency:UNIT[1]

1078.2008.02

"OFF"
"FQGRoupdelay"

Parameter

SENSe3:FUNCtion

Command

Combined Frequency and Group-Delay Measurement

UPL

Hz

Basic
unit

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Ref Freq
2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Ref Phase
→ STORe
→ VALUE:

→ The current phase measurement result is stored as reference value.
→ The reference value is entered using the next command.

E-10

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Ref Freq
→ STORE
→ VALUE:
→ GEN TRACK

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch2

Numerical entry of reference value.

→ The current frequency measurement result is stored as reference value.
→ The reference value is entered using the next command.
→ The currently set generator frequency is used as a reference value.

Note:
In addition to group delay (in s), phases outside the range ±360° can be
measured in DEG or RAD when the frequency sweep mode has been
selected.

Display units for results of group-delay measurement

Display units for results of frequency measurement

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1

2.6.5.19
ANLR panel
FREQ/PHASE
→ FREQ&GRPDEL

→ Combined frequency and group-delay measurement off
→ Combined frequency and group-delay measurement on. With RSM
measurements, POST-FFT is automatically switched on as the frequency
information is obtained from FFT.
The availability of the frequency and group-delay measurement depends on
measurement function and option UPL-B29 (digital audio 96 kHz), see 2.6.1
Selecting the Analyzer

Section

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

1078.2008.02

SENSe3:FREQuency:UNIT2

SENSe3:FREQuency:UNIT[1]

SENSe[1]:FREQuency:APERture:MODE

Command

Sample Rate Measurement

SENSe3:FUNCtion

3.10.2.5.23

SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:.....

SENSe3:PHASe:REFerence

UPL

|

|

|

3.154

TOCT | OCT | DEC
FFR

HZ | DHZ | DPCTHZ

TOCT | OCT | DEC
FFR

Selection of the result units for channel 2.

Selection of the result units for channel 1

|

HZ | DHZ | DPCTHZ

2.6.5.21
ANLR-Panel
FREQUENCY
→ SAMPLE FREQ

→ Off
→ The measured sampling frequency is displayed on the channels switched
on
Available only for instrument D48

2.4
ANLR-Panel
Unit Ch2

2.4
ANLR-Panel
Unit Ch1

E-10

2.6.5.19
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time
→ FAST
→ PRECISION

Section

2.3.4.2
ANLR panel
Freq Settl

2.6.5.1
ANLR panel
Ref Phase

Section

Meaning

For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions

Numerical entry of reference value

Meaning

FAST
PRECision

Basic
unit

s

Basic
unit

Definition of measurement time and precision of the frequency measurement
for the measurement functions OFF and RMS. Does not influence the other
measurement functions.
→ The frequency measurementis set to attain optimum speed
→ The frequency measurement is set to attain optimum precision

’OFF’
’SFREquency’

Parameter


-360 s to +360 s

Parameter

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

1078.2008.02

SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:...

SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence

SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence:MODE

UPL

3.155


-1 MHz to 1 MHz

GENTrack
VALue

STORe

CH2Mea

CH1Meas

CH2Store

CH1Store

Parameter

Hz

Basic
unit

For settling commands see 3.10.2.5.1 Common Parameters for Analyzer
Functions

Numerical entry of reference value.

→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 1 is stored as a reference.
→ For a two-channel measurement, the current measurement result of
channel 2 is stored as a reference.
→ The value measured of channel 1 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ The value measured of channel 2 is used as a reference for the results in
reference-related units.
→ For a single-channel measurement, the current measurement result is
stored as a reference.
→ The currently set generator output level is used as a reference.
→ The reference unit is specified by the next command.

Meaning

2.3.4.2
ANLR-Panel
Freq Settl

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Ref Freq

E-10

2.6.5.19
ANLR-Panel
Ref Freq
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:MCOunt

Command

Terzanalyse

SENSe[1]:FUNCion

3.10.2.5.24

UPL

3.156


64 ms to 43200s

VALue

T32

T30

’THIRdoct’

Parameter

s

Basic
unit

Numerical entry of measurement time of the third analysis.

Measurement Time of third analysis
→ The only parameter determining the measurement speed is the
measurement time, which is entered with the next command. The
measurement time also determines the update rate of the third analysis.

→ Maximum 30 thirds can be calculated and displayed.
The lowest third which can be measured has a rated center frequency of
25 Hz.
→ 2 additional low-frequency thirds, i.e., maximum 32 thirds, can be
calculated and displayed. The lowest third which can be measured has a
nominal center frequency of 16 Hz.

Defines the number of thirds which can be measured and displayed

For a detailed example see 3.15.19 Readout of Blockdata of Third Octave
Measurement

No Third Analysis measurement available if
• Analyzer 110 kHz
• Digital instrument with option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) in High Rate
Mode (CONF:DAI HRM.

Third Analysis measurement is available if
• Option UPL-B6 (Extended Analysis Functions) or with hardware upgrade
UPL-U8 or in modell UPL 06G.
• Analog instrumente 22 kHz (INST2 A22) both channels
• Digital instrument with option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) in Base Rate
Mode (CONF:DAI BRM)

The analysis is performed according to standard IEC 1260 of 1995 with level
accuracy of class 0 (± 1,0 dB).

Meaning

2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time

2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time
→ VALUE:

2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Line Count
→ 30
→ 32

E-10

2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Function
→ 1/3 OCTAVE

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

1078.2008.02

Analog units:

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]
|
|
|
|

3.157

FS | PCTFS | DBFS |
DPCT | DBR | LSBS |
BITS

Digital units:

V | DBV | DBU
DBM | W | DPCTV
DV | VVR | PCTVVR
DPCTW |DW | PPR
PCTPPR |DBR


20 ms to 100 s

EDGE

SMOoth

OFF
FORever

Parameter

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime

SENSe:VOLTage:INTV:MODE

UPL

s

Basic
unit

Units for the third analysis measurement results

Only for
Max Hold = SLOW DECAY (SENSe:VOLTage:INTV:MODE SMOoth) und
Max Hold = FAST DECAY (SENSe:VOLTage:INTV:MODE EDGE)

Setting of the time for which the maximum value of a third is held before the
marker returns to the measured value. The selected hold time does not
influence the decay time.

Hold function for the maximum result of each third.
Reset by "INIT:CONT ON"
→ Max-hold function switched off; only the third bars are displayed.
→ Max-hold function switched on; the markers lie on the maximum values;
reset only by starting the measurement with "INIT:CONT ON".
→ Max-hold function switched on; the markers lie on the maximum values for
the "hold time" to be set with the following command
(SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime ) and then decay exponentially
(time constant 0.5 s).
→ Max-hold function switched on; the markers remain on the maximum
values for the "hold time" to be set with the following command
(SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime ) and then go back to the current
measurement value for the third.

Meaning

2.4
ANLR-Panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2

2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Holdtime

E-10

2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Max Hold
→ OFF
→ FOREVER
→ SLOW DECAY
→ FAST DECAY

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1]:FILTer[1] ...

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE

UPL

3.158


Analog instruments
100 pV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
0.0 to 1.0 FS

VALue

STORe

CH2Meas

CH1Meas

CH2Store

CH1Store

Parameter

V
FS

Basic
unit

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference

E-10

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ VALUE:

Section

2.7.1
ANLR-Panel
Only available with option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) in Base Rate Mode Filter
(CONF:DAI BRM).
In the high rate mode (CONF:DAI HRM), the measurement functions
THIRdoct can be operated without filter.
See 3.10.3 Selecting the Analyzer Filters

Numeric entry of reference value.

→ Dual-channel measurement: Store the current measurement result of
channel 1 as reference value.
→ Dual-channel measurement: Store the current measurement result of
channel 2 as reference value.
→ Dual-channel measurement: Each result of level measurement in
channel 1 is used as reference value for result output in reference-related
units (floating reference value).
→ Dual-channel measurement: Each result of level measurement in
channel 2 is used as reference value for result output in reference-related
units (floating reference value).
→ With single-channel measurement: Store the current result as reference
value
→ Reference value is displayed upon using the following command

Meaning

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:UPPer

SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:LOWer

UPL

3.159

fmax depending on
the sampling rate but
not exceeding
22449 Hz

DIGITAL:
FrqLim Low to fmax

ANLG 22 kHz:
FrqLim Low to 21938
Hz



fmax depending on
the sampling rate but
not exceeding 22449
Hz

DIG 48 kHz,
32 lines:
14.1Hz to fmax
30 lines
22.6 Hz to 21938 Hz

ANLG 22 kHz,
32 lines:
14.1 Hz to 21938 Hz
30 lines
22.6 Hz to 21938 Hz



Parameter

Hz

Hz

Basic
unit

Upper band limit for third analysis.

Lower band limit for third analysis.

Meaning

E-10

2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
→ Frq Lim Upp

2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
→ Frq Lim Low

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

1078.2008.02

SENSe:VOLTage:INTV:MODE



SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture

ON

OFF

3.160

tmessFFT =
Measurement time
for a zoom FFT
depending on the
lower frequency limit

tmessFFT ... 43200 s

VALue

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE

Parameter

’TWELvthoct’

Command

12th Octave Analysis (12th OCTAVE)

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

3.10.2.5.25

UPL

s

Basic
unit

→ Maxhold function switched on, the markers lie on the highest values;
reset via "INIT:CONT ON".

axhold function switched off, the bars of the frequency bands
are displayed, only.

Hold function for the maximum values of the individual thirds.

Numeric entry of the measurement time of the 12th octave analysis

→ Numeric entry of the measurement time of the 12th octave analysis
The measurement time defines the update rate of the 12th octave
analysis
For entry of values see next command..

The 12th octave analysis is not available
• in the 110-kHz analyzer
• in the digital instrument, with UPL-B29 option installed
(Digital Audio 96 kHz) in high rate mode (CONF:DAI HRM).

The 12th octave analysis is available
• with UPL-B6 option installed (Extended Analysis Functions)
• in the analog instrument 22 kHz (INST2 A22),
• in the digital instrument with UPL-B29 option installed
(Digital Audio 96 kHz) in base rate mode, only (CONF:DAI BRM)

The 12th octave analysis is a level measurement by means of a special
zoom FFT in up to 125 frequency bands simultaneously.

Meaning

2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
Max Hold
→ OFF
→ ON

2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time

2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time
→ VALUE:

E-10

2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
Function
→ 12th OCTAVE

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1]:FILTer[1] ...

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]

UPL

3.161


Analog instruments
100 pV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
0.0 to 1.0 FS

VALue

STORe

CH2Meas

CH1Meas

CH2Store

CH1Store

FS | PCTFS | DBFS |
DPCT | DBR | LSBS |
BITS

Digital units:

V | DBV | DBU |
DBM | W | DPCTV |
DV | VVR | PCTVVR |
DPCTW |DW | PPR |
PCTPPR |DBR

Analog units:

Parameter

V
FS

Basic
unit

Available only with option UPL-B29 installed (Digital Audio 96 kHz) in base
rate mode (CONF:DAI BRM).
In the high rate mode (CONF:DAI HRM), the 12th octave function can be
operated without filter, only.

See 3.10.3

Numeric entry of reference value.

→ Reference value is displayed upon using the following command

→ Dual-channel measurement: Store the current measurement result of
channel 1 as reference value.
→ Dual-channel measurement: Store the current measurement result of
channel 2 as reference value.
→ Dual-channel measurement: Each result of level measurement in
channel 1 is used as reference value for result output in reference-related
units (floating reference value).
→ Dual-channel measurement: Each result of level measurement in
channel 2 is used as reference value for result output in reference-related
units (floating reference value).
→ Single-channel measurement: Store the current result as reference value

Result display units of the 12th octave analysis.

Meaning

2.7.1
ANLR-Panel
Filter

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference

E-10

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ VALUE:

2.4
ANLR-Panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

1078.2008.02

SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:UPPer

SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:LOWer

UPL

3.162

fmax depending on
the sampling rate but
not exceeding
20586 Hz

DIGITAL:
FrqLim Low to fmax

ANLG 22 kHz:
FrqLim Low to
20586 Hz



fmax depending on
the sampling rate but
not exceeding
20586 Hz

DIG 48 kHz:
15.4 Hz to fmax

ANLG 22 kHz:
15.4 Hz to 20586 Hz



Parameter

Hz

Hz

Basic
unit

Upper band limit for the 12th octave analysis.

Lower band limit for the 12th octave analysis.

Meaning

E-10

2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
→ Frq Lim Upp

2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
→ Frq Lim Low

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

3.163

*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF

SENSe[1]:FILTer:UFILter1... UFILter9[:STATe]

1078.2008.02

*)
1 to 3
OFF

SENSe[1]:FILTer

Parameter

*) = 1 to 3
OFF
Query returns name
of the filter switched
on:
UFIL1
:
UFIL9
AWE
CMES
CCIT
CCIR
CCIU
DEMP5015
DEMP50
DEMP75
DEMP17
WRUM
URUM
DCN
CARM
IECT
JITT

Command

Selection of Analyzer Filter

SENSe[1]:FILTer

3.10.3

UPL

Basic
unit

A HPASs, LPASs, BPASs, BSTOp, NOTCh, TERZ, OCTav or FILE filter with
freely selectable parameters (see SENSe:FILTer:HPASs|:LPASs ... and
subsequent commands) can be assigned to each of the 9 user filters
(UFILter).
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

Switches off the filter in the analyzer measurement functions RMS, PEAK,
QPE or THDN.

UPL-B29: For the functions marked (*), no digital filter can be switched on in
the high rate mode or analyzer ANLG 110 kHz.

Measurement
Number of
functions
possible filters
-----------------------------------------------RMS
3
RMS SELECT
1
PEAK
3 (*)
QPK
1 (*)
THD+N
1
FFT
3 (*)
FILTER SIM
3
WAVEFORM
1 (*)
RUB&BUZZ
2
THIRD OCT
1 (*)

Switches off the filter in the analyzer measurement functions.

Meaning

E-10

2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter

2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter

2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF

*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF

*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF

*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF

*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF

SENSe[1]:FILTer:CCIRweight[:STATe]

SENSe[1]:FILTer:AWEighting[:STATe]

SENSe[1]:FILTer:CMESsage[:STATe]

SENSe[1]:FILTer:DEMPhasis50[:STATe]

SENSe[1]:FILTer:DEMPhasis75[:STATe]

1078.2008.02

*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF

SENSe[1]:FILTer:CCIUnweight[:STATe]

3.164

Parameter

*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF

Command

SENSe[1]:FILTer:CCITt[:STATe]

UPL
Basic
unit

For unweighted and weighted noise measurements
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

For unweighted and weighted noise measurements
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

For transmission measurements
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

For RFI voltage measurements
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

For RFI voltage measurements
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

Bandpass filter 20 Hz to 20 kHz
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

For psophometric measurements
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

Meaning

E-10

2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ DEEMPH 75

2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ DEEMPH 50

2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ C MESSAGE

2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ A Weighting

2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ CCIR wtd

2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ CCIR unwtd

2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ CCITT

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF

*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF

*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF

*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF

*) = 1 to 4
ON | OFF

SENSe[1]:FILTer:WRUMble[:STATe]

SENSe[1]:FILTer:URUMble[:STATe]

SENSe[1]:FILTer:DCNoise[:STATe]

SENSe[1]:FILTer:CARM[:STATe]

SENSe[1]:FILTer:JITTer[:STATe]

1078.2008.02

*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF

SENSe[1]:FILTer:DEMPhasis5015[:STATe]

3.165

Parameter

*)
1 to 3
ON|OFF

Command

SENSe[1]:FILTer:DEMPhasis17[:STATe]

UPL
Basic
unit

Weighting of jitter transmission function

Filter for weighted noise measurements in line with older regulations.
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

Highpass filter for measuring the DC noise
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

Unweighted noise measurement for testing tape recorders
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

Weighted noise measurement for testing tape recorders
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

For unweighted and weighted noise measurements
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

For unweighted and weighted noise measurements
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

Meaning

E-10

2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ JITTER wtd

2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ CCIR ARM

2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ DC NOISE HP

2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ RUMBLE unw

2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ RUMBLE wtd

2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ DEEM 50/15

2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ DEEMPH J.17

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results


1 to 9
ON

1 to 9
ON

= 1 to 9
ON

1 to 9
ON

SENSe[1]:UFILter:LPASs[:STATe]

SENSe[1]:UFILter:BPASs[:STATe]

SENSe[1]:UFILter:BSTOp[:STATe]

SENSe[1]:UFILter:NOTCh[:STATe]

Basic
unit

Notch filter
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

Bandpass
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

Bandpass
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

Lowpass
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

Highpass
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

Filter for tuner measurements to DIN/IEC 315

Meaning

1078.2008.02

3.166

E-10

2.7.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09

2.7.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09

2.7.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09

2.7.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09

2.7.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09

2.7.1
FILTER panel
Filter
→ IEC Tuner

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

*)  stands for the filter of analyzer measurement functions RMS, PEAK, QPE and THDN, which has been assigned the specified filter function.
Example:
" SENS: FUNC ’ RMS ’ "
" SENS: FILT1:DEMP5015 ON"
" SENS: FILT3:CCIT ON"
causes the following setting in the ANALYZER panel in the RMS & S/N measurement function
:
 • Notch (Gain) OFF

 • Filter
DEEM 50/15 
i=1
 • Filter
OFF

i=2
 • Filter
CCITT

i=3
 • Func Settl
OFF



1 to 9
ON

SENSe[1]:UFILter:HPASs[:STATe]

Parameter

*)
1 to 4
ON|OFF

Command

SENSe[1]:FILTer:IECTuner[:STATe]

UPL

3.167

 = 1 to 9
 = LL*)
For MB limit see
2.6.5.1 Common
Parameters of
Analyzer Functions

SENSe[1]:UFILter:PASSb:LOWer

1078.2008.02


1 to 9
Query only

SENSe[1]:UFILter:STOPb?

Hz

 = 1 to 9
 = LL*)
Hz
For MB limit see 2.6.1
Selecting the
Analyzer

Basic
unit

SENSe[1]:UFILter:PASSb

N4
N8


1 to 9
ON

SENSe[1]:UFILter:FILE[:STATe]

SENSe:UFILter[1...9]:DEGRee


1 to 9
ON

SENSe[1]:UFILter:OCTav[:STATe]

Parameter


1 to 9
ON

Command

SENSe[1]:UFILter:TOCTave[:STATe]

UPL

Lower passband of BPASs and BSTOp

Queries the stopband of HPASs and LPASs

Passband of HPASs and LPASs

Selection of order for highpass and lowpass filters
→ Order 4
→ Order 8

User-defined filter
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

Octave filter
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

Third-octave filter (Third Octave)
When a filter is switched ON the previously active filter is automatically
switched OFF.

Meaning

E-10

2.7.2.3
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Passb low

2.7.2.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Stopband

2.7.2.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Passband

2.7.2
FILTER panel
Degree
→4
→8

2.7.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09

2.7.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09

2.7.2
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

 = 1 to 9
 = LL*)
Hz
For MB limit see 2.6.1
Selecting the
Analyzer

1 to 9

3 to 120 dB
Query only for all
filters except for filedefined filters
 = 1 to 9
 = 0 to 1 s

SENSe[1]:UFILter:WIDTh

SENSe[1]:UFILter:ATTenuation

SENSe[1]:UFILter:DELay

3.168

 = 1 to 9
 = LL*)
For MB limit see
2.6.1 Selecting the
Analyzer

SENSe[1]:UFILter:CENTer

1078.2008.02


1 to 9
Query only

SENSe[1]:UFILter:STOPb:UPPer?

s

dB

Hz


1 to 9
Query only

Basic
unit

SENSe[1]:UFILter:STOPb:LOWer?

Parameter

 = 1 to 9
 = LL*)
Hz
For MB limit see 2.6.1
Selecting the
Analyzer

Command

SENSe[1]:UFILter:PASSb:UPPer

UPL

Settling time of FILE-defined filters

Attenuation of all filters except FILE Def. The value may be corrected in the
UPL and queried.

Center frequency of NOTCh, TOCT OCTAv

Center frequency of NOTCh, TOCT OCTAv

Queries the upper stopband of BPASs and BSTOp

Queries the lower stopband of BPASs and BSTOp

Upper passband of BPASs and BSTOp

Meaning

E-10

2.7.2.7
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Delay

2.7.2.1
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Atten

2.7.2.4 and
2.7.2.5
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Width

2.7.2.4
2.7.2.5
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Center Frq

2.7.2.3
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Stopb upp

2.7.2.3
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Stopb low

2.7.2.3
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Passb upp

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

1078.2008.02

*) LL = Lower limit value for instruments

Basic
unit

Path and file name of file-defined filter data
e.g. "C:\UPL\USER\MYFILT.ZPZ"

Queries the settling time of filters HPASs, LPASs, BPASs, BSTOp, NOTCh,
TOCT OCTav

3.169

Meaning

E-10

2.7.2.7
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Filename

2.7.2.1
FILTER panel
FILTER 01 to 09
→ Delay

Section

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

22: 24 Hz
A110: 171 Hz
D48: Sample Freq*Oversamp/2000 (see 2.6.3 Configuration of the Digital Analyzer)

"filename"

1 to 9

SENSe[1]:UFILter:FILE

Parameter


1 to 9
Query only

Command

SENSe[1]:UFILter:DELay?

UPL

1078.2008.02

UPL

3.170

E-10

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Command

1078.2008.02




 Relative units for analog level measurement results






∆V
∆%V
V/VR
%V/Vr
∆W
∆%W
P/Pr
%P/Pr

DV
DPCTV
VVR
PCTVVR
DW
DPCTW
PPR
PCTPPR
DBR


 Relative units for digital level measurements


∆%
%FS

UI
ns

DPCT
PCTFS

UI
NS

3.171


 Absolute units for digital phase measurements


FS
LSBs
dBFS
bits

FS
LSBS
DBFS
BITS


 Absolute units for digital jitter and phase measurements



 Relative units for intermodulation measurements and W&F



dB
%

DB (only for SENS[1]...)
PCT (only for SENS[1]...)

dBr




 Absolute units for analog level measurement results




V
mV
µV
dBV
dBu
W
dBm

Meaning

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2

Section

E-10

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

V
MV (only for SENS[1]...)
UV (only for SENS[1]...)
DBV
DBU
W
DBM

Parameter

Units for IEC/IEEE Measurement Results

SENSe[1|2][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]

3.10.4

UPL

Command

1078.2008.02

SENSe3:PHASe:UNIT

SENSe3:FREQuency:UNIT[1|2]

SENSe[1|2][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]

UPL

DEG
RAD
DDEG
DRAD
S
DS

HZ
DHZ
DPCTHZ
TERZ
OCT
DEC
FFR

3.172

Absolute and relative units for phase readout
°
In addition to group delay (in s), phases outside the range ±360°
RAD
can be measured in DEG or RAD
∆°
∆RAD
s (for group delay)
∆s (for group delay)

Absolute and relative units for frequency readout
Hz
∆Hz
∆%Hz
Terz
Oct
Dec
f/fr


%FRM  Absolute units for digital phase measurement results

FRM



 Relative units for digital jitter measurements


Uir
%UI

UIR
PCTUI

PCTFRM (only for
SENS2..)
DEGFRM (only for
SENS2..)


 Absolute units for digital jitter measurements


ppm
DBUI

Meaning

PPMUI
DBUI

Parameter

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2

2.4
ANLR panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2

Section

E-10

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

"SENS:FUNC

"SENS:FUNC
’THDN’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD THDN | NOIS"

"SENS:FUNC

"SENS:FUNC
’WAV’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD STAN"

"SENS:FUNC
’THDN’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD SNDR"

"INST2 A22 | A110"

"INST2 A22 | A110"

"INST2 A22"

"INST2 A22 | A110"

"INST2 A22 | A110"

1078.2008.02

"SENS:FUNC
’WAV’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD COMP"

"INST2 A22 | A110"

’WAF’"

’THD’ | ’MDIS’ | ’DFD’ "

"SENS:FUNC
’THDN’" und
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD LNOI | NOIS "

"INST2 A22 | A110"

’RMS’ |
’RMSS’ |
’PEAK’ |
’QPE’ |
’DC’ |
’FFT’ "

"SENS:FUNC

Measurement function

"INST2 A22 | A110"
"INST2 A22 | A110"
"INST2 A22"
"INST2 A22"
"INST2 A22 | A110"
"INST2 A22 | A110"

Instrument

Example:
Display units selectable for measurement results
SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]:

Display units selectable for measurement results:

UPL

3.173

"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
DB"

"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
V | MV | UV | DPCTV | DV | VVR
| PCTVVR"

"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
PCT"

"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
DB | PCT"

"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
V | DBV | DBU | DBM |
W | DPCTV | DV | VVR |
PCTVVR | DPCTW | DW | PPR |
PCTPPR | DBR"

Selectable display units

E-10

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

Instrument

1078.2008.02

"INST2 D48" and
"SENS:DIG:FEED CINP"

"INST2 D48" and
"SENS:DIG:FEED JPH"

Instrument

"INST2 D48" and
"SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT"

UPL

’THD’ | ’MDIS’ | ’DFD’ "

"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
UI | PCTUI | PPMUI | NS | UIR"

"SENS:FUNC
’WAV’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD STAN"

3.174

"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
V | MV | UV | DPCTV | DV | VVR
| PCTVVR"

"SENS:FUNC
’WAV’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD STAN"

"SENS:FUNC
’WAV’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD COMP"

"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
V | DBV | DBU | DBM |
W | DPCTV | DV |
VVR | PCTVVR |
DPCTW | DW | PPR | PCTPPR |
DBR"

"SENS:FUNC ’RMS’ | ’RMSS’ | ’PEAK’ | FFT"

"SENS:FUNC
’WAV’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD COMP"

"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
UI | PCTUI | PPMUI | NS | UIR |
DBR | DBUI"

Selectable display units

"SENS:FUNC ’RMS’ | ’RMSS’ | ’PEAK’ | FFT"

Measurement function

"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
DB"

"SENS:FUNC
’THDN’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD SNDR"

"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
PCT"

"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
DB | PCT"

"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
FS | PCTFS | DPCT | LSBS"

’WAF’"

Selectable display units
"SENS:UNIT[1|2]
FS | PCTFS | DBFS | DPCT |
DBR | LSBS | BITS"

"SENS:FUNC
’DC’"
"SENS:FUNC
’WAV’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD STAN"

"SENS:FUNC

"SENS:FUNC
’THDN’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD THDN | NOIS

"SENS:FUNC

"SENS:FUNC
’WAV’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD COMP"

"SENS:FUNC
’THDN’" and
"SENS:FUNC:MMOD LNOI | NOIS "

’RMSS’ | ’PEAK’ | ’QPE’ "

Measurement function

"SENS:FUNC

E-10

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

"SENS2:FUNC ’PEAK’"

"SENS2:FUNC ’PHAS’"

"SENS2:FUNC ’PEAK | ’DIGI’"

"INST2 D48" and
"SENS:DIG:FEED JPH"

"INST2 D48" and
"SENS:DIG:FEED JPH"

"INST2 D48" and
"SENS:DIG:FEED CINP"

Selectable display units

1078.2008.02

"SENS3:FUNC ’FQGR’"

"SENS3:FUNC ’FQPH’"

"INST2 A22"

"INST2 A22"

"SENS3:FUNC ’FREQ’"

Measurement function

"INST2 A22 | A110 | D48"

Instrument

"SENS2:UNIT[1|2]
V | DBV | DBU | DBM |
W | DPCTV | DV |
VVR | PCTVVR |
DPCTW | DW | PPR | PCTPPR | DBR"

"SENS2:UNIT
UI | PCTFRM | DEGFRM | NS"

"SENS2:UNIT[1|2]
UI | PCTUI | PPMUI | NS | UIR |
DBR | DBUI"

"SENS2:UNIT[1|2]
FS | PCTFS | DBFS |
DPCT | DBR | LSBS | BITS"

3.175

"SENS3:FREQ:UNIT
HZ | DHZ | DPCTHZ | TOCT | OCT | DEC |
FFR"
"SENS3:PHAS:UNIT
S | DS"

"SENS3:PHAS:UNIT
DEG | RAD | DDEG | DRAD"

"SENS3:FREQ:UNIT
HZ | DHZ | DPCTHZ | TOCT | OCT |
DEC | FFR"

"SENS3:FREQ:UNIT[1|2]
HZ | DHZ | DPCTHZ | TOCT | OCT |
DEC | FFR"

Selectable display units

E-10

IEC-Bus Commands: Graphical Representation of Results

"SENS2:UNIT[1|2]
V | DBV | DBU | DBM |
W | DPCTV | DV |
VVR | PCTVVR |
DPCTW | DW | PPR | PCTPPR | DBR"

Display units selectable for frequency, phase and group delay measurements
SENSe3:FREQuency:UNIT[1|2] and SENSe3:PHASe:UNIT2:

"SENS2:FUNC ’PEAK’"

"INST2 D48" and
"SENS:DIG:FEED ADAT"

Measurement function

"SENS2:FUNC ’PEAK’ | ’RMS’"

"INST2 A22 | A110"

Instrument

Display units selectable for input, peak, RMS and phase measurements
SENSe2[:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]:

UPL

1078.2008.02

UPL

3.176

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

1078.2008.02

0|2,"filename"

MMEMory:STORe:STATe

3.177

Query:
MMEM:STOR:STAT?
0
MMEM:STOR.STAT?
2

’string’

Query:
MMEM:...
... LOAD:STAT? 0
... LOAD:STAT? 2
... LOAD:STAT? 4

0 | 2 | 4, "filename"

OFF

Parameter

MMEMory:STORe:INFOtext

MMEMory:LOAD:STATe

SYSTem:INFOtext:STATe
ON

Loading and Storing Instrument Setups

3.10.5.1

Command

Loading and Storing

3.10.5

UPL

Basic
unit

2.9.1.1
FILE panel
Info Displ
→ ON
→ OFF

Section

0: Store current setup under filename extension .SAC
2: Store complete instrument setup under filename extension .SCO.

A comment of max. 39 characters can be entered for a description of the
measurement, a DUT, etc. This comment is displayed in the file box when a
setup is loaded by scrolling through the file selection window and
SYST:INFO:STAT ON has been selected.

E-10

2.9.1.1
FILE panel
Mode / Filename

2.9.1.1
FILE panel
Info Text

2.9.1.1
0: Load current setup with filename extension .SAC
FILE panel
2: Load complete instrument setup with filename extension .SCO.
For loading the R&S default setup under C:UPL \ SETUP \ DEFAULT.SET Mode / Filename
use command *RST. Switch off the parameter link (see 2.15.8 Transfer of
Parameters (Parameter Link Function)) to ensure that the default setup
described under annex "A UPL Default Setup" remains unchanged even
after an instrument or function change.
4: Display of (4 bit-) PCX pictures on 1:1 scale on the screen of UPL. It is thus
possible to view under program control PCX files stored in UPL (eg for
demos). As long as a PCX picture is displayed on the screen, UPL is not
ready to receive further IEC/IEEE-bus commands. The PCX picture
remains on display until the UPL is set to the LOCAL state with the
SYST:COMM:GTL command. Subsequently the UPL is ready to receive
IEC/IEEE-bus commands. To switch the UPL from LOCAL to REMOTE
again, see 3.3 Switchover to Remote Control

→ During scrolling in the file selection window of the file box the "Info text"
for a setup is displayed in the user info line
(of minor importance for IEC/IEEE-bus control).
→ "Info text" is not displayed.

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

Command

1078.2008.02

MMEMory:STORe:STATe:RONLy

UPL

ON
OFF

3.178

Parameter

Basic
unit
→ File is write-protected
→ File is not write-protected

Meaning

E-10

2.9.1.1
FILE panel
Attrib
→ REAN ONLY
→ READ/WRITE

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

1078.2008.02

MMEMory:STORe:LIST

TRACe1,"filename"
TRACe2,"filename"
TR1And2,"filename"

MMEMory:STORe:TRACe

3.179

Query:
MMEM:STOR:LIST?
LIST[1|2]
MMEM:STOR:LIST?
DWEL

LIST1,"filename"
LIST2,"filename"
DWELl,"filename"

Query:
MMEM:STOR:TRAC?
TRAC[1|2]
MMEM:STOR:TRAC?
TR1A

BIN
ASCii
EXPort

Parameter

MMEMory:STORe:FORMat

Command

3.10.5.1.1 Loading and Storing Traces and Lists

UPL

Basic
unit

2.9.1.2
FILE panel
Store
→ X-Axis
→ Z-Axis
→ DWEL VALUE

→ Store X-axis list under "filename"
→ Store Z-axis list under "filename"
→ Store dwell-time list under "filename"

E-10

2.9.1.2
FILE panel
Store
→ TRACE A
→ TRACE B
→ TRACE A+B

FILE panel
Format
→ REAL
→ ASCII
→ EXPORT

2.9.1.2

Section

→ Store trace A buffer under "filename"
→ Store trace B buffer under "filename"
→ Store trace pair under "filename"

Informationen über den Inhalt der Dateien siehe 2.9.1.2 Loading and Storing
of Series of Measured Values and Block/List Data und 2.9.1.3 Format
of Block/Listen Data.

→ Data stored in binary format
→ Data stored in ASCII format
→ Daten werden im Textformat in Tabellenform ohne Zusatzinformation mit
der Dateierweiterung .EXP gespeichert.
Vorteil: Dateien im EXP-Format können von jedem Texteditor oder
anderen Programmen problemlos gelesen und weiterverarbeitet
werden.
Nachteil: Da die Zusatzinformationen fehlen, können die Dateien
vomUPL/UPD nicht mehr eingelesen werden.

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

1078.2008.02

ERRors,"filename"
LIMUpper,"filename"
LIMLower,"filename"

MMEMory:STORe:LIST

3.180

Query:
MMEM:STOR:LIST?
ERR
MMEM:STOR:LIST?
LIMU
MMEM:STOR:LIST?
LIML

BIN
ASCii

Parameter

MMEMory:STORe:FORMat

Command

3.10.5.1.2 Storing Limit Violations (Error Reports)

UPL

Basic
unit

2.9.1.2
FILE panel
Store
→ LIM REPORT
→ LIM UPPER
→ LIM LOWER

→ Store limit error under "filename"
→ Store upper tolerance curve under "filename"
→ Store lower tolerance curve under "filename"

E-10

2.9.1.2
FILE panel
Format
→ REAL
→ ASCII

Section

→ Data stored in binary format
→ Data stored in ASCII format

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting


fmin to fmax

ON
OFF

EQUalize,"filename"

CALCulate:EQUalize:NORMfreq

CALCulate:EQUalize:INVert

MMEMory:STORe:LIST

1078.2008.02

TRACe1
TRACe2

CALCulate:EQUalize:FEED

3.181

Query:
MMEM:STOR:LIST?
EQU

BIN
ASCii

Parameter

MMEMory:STORe:FORMat

Command

3.10.5.1.3 Storing Equalization Files

UPL

Hz

Basic
unit

Store equalization file under "filename"

→ Frequency stored in inverted form
→ Frequency stored without inversion

E-10

2.9.1.2
FILE panel
Store
→ EQUALIZATN

2.9.1.2
FILE panel
Invert 1/n
→ ON
→ OFF

Norm Freq

2.9.1.2
FILE panel

2.9.1.2
FILE panel
Volt Source
→ TRACE A
→ TRACE B

→ Amplitude data read from
→ Trace buffer A/B

Frequency to the level at which is normalized

2.9.1.2
FILE panel
Format
→ REAL
→ ASCII

Section

→ Data stored in binary format
→ Data stored in ASCII format

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

3.182

"filename1","filenam
e2"

MMEMory:COPY

1078.2008.02

"pathname"

MMEMory:CDIRectory

Parameter

"filename"

Command

Commands for Editing Files and Directories

MMEMory:DELete

3.10.5.2

UPL

Basic
unit

Selects the file to be copied.
Specifies the name of the target file (with drive and directory, if required) to
which a copy should be made.

Selects a directory for file operation.

Deletes a file.

Meaning

2.9.2
FILE panel
Copy + To

2.9.2
FILE panel
Work Dir

FILE panel
Delete

2.9.2

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

Commands for Graphical Representation of Results

1078.2008.02

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:COUNt

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:MODE

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:OPERation

Command

3.183


recorded:
1 to 100 000
stored:
max. 17 traces

MAXHold

WATerfall|CASCade

DELete_bef_wr

AUToprotocol alias
AUTOprotocol

FFTList
FFTErrors
PROTocol

BARGraph
SPECtrum

CURVeplot
LISTalias TLISt
ERRors

Parameter

Basic
unit

Specifies the number of single traces and trace pairs to be recorded together
and stored. Automatically sets the number of Z values in the case of a Z
sweep.

→ Selects a single trace or a pair of traces. Each new X sweep overwrites
the previous trace.
→ Shifts a single trace (trace pairs not possible) on the Z axis for obtaining a
spatial presentation (with FFT-SPECtrum only).
→ Maximum hold function for FFT SPECtrum for FFT-AVERage = 1.

The parameters below determine the form for the graphics display of
measurement results.
→ Line chart in Cartesian coordinates.
→ List of numeric values.
→ List of out-of-tolerance values. In this case the limit check function must
be active.
→ Bargraph display in analog form.
→ Display of FFT or, in the case of THD, DFD or MOD-DIST, in the form of
a schematic spectrum display.
→ FFT data in tabular form.
→ FFT limit violation data in tabular form. Limit check function must be active.
→ Protocol data of the digital AES/EBU interface displayed in the graphics
window.
→ Protocol data of the digital AES/EBU interface displayed in the graphics
window. Automatic decoding of the channel status bits irrespective of the
professional bit value (see 2.10.8 PROTOCOL Analysis).

Meaning

2.10
DISP panel
Scan Count

E-10

2.10
DISP panel
Mode
→ DEL BEF WR
→ WATERFAL
→ MAX HOLD

DISP panel
OPERATION
→ CURVE PLOT
2.10.2
→ SWEEP LIST
2.10.4
→ SWP LIM REP
2.10.4
→ BARGRAPH
2.10.2
→ SPECT LIST
2.10.8
→ SPC LIM REP
2.10.6
→ PROTOCOL
2.10
2.10.8
→ PROTO AUTO

2.10

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

In the following, TRACe1 and TRACe2 serve for differentiating between displayed curves (trace A and trace B), bargraphs and result lists.

3.10.6

UPL

Command


see 3.10.4 Units for
IEC Measurement
Results

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:Y[:SCALe]:UNIT

3.184

TRACe[1|2]
Query only
Query:
TRAC? TRAC[1|2]

TRACe:DATA?

1078.2008.02

TRACe[1|2],"filename
"
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:TRAC?
TRAC[1|2]

"OFF"

"DFILe"

"HOLD"
"FILE"

"SENSe3:DATA1"
"SENSe3:DATA2"

"SENSe2:DATA2"

"SENSe2:DATA1"

"SENSe1:DATA2"

"SENSe1:DATA1"

Parameter

MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:FEED

UPL

1)

Basic
unit

Determines the units for results displayed in numerical form.

The trace (block data!) can be read from the UPL to the controller.

Loads a trace from a file for display.

→ Measurement function specified by SENSe1:FUNCtion "<>". Value from
channel 2 (CH1).
→ Measurement function specified by SENSe1:FUNCtion "<>2. Value from
channel 2 (CH2).
→ Result of input RMS measurement of channel 1 (CH1) for THD and THDN
functions.
→ Result of input RMS measurement of channel 2 (CH2) for THD and THDN
functions.
→ Measured value from frequency meter, channel 1 (CH1).
→ Measured value from frequency meter,channel 2 (CH2) if SENS3:FUNC
FREQ is selected.
Measured value from phase meter, channel 2 (CH2) if SENS3:FUNC
FQPH.
Measured value from group delay measurement, channel 2 (CH2) if
SENS:FUNC FQGR is selected
→ Retains previously displayed values (no collection of new values).
→ Displays measured values from a file using the command
described below.
→ Loads a trace pair with scale and reference values or reference trace using
the command described below.
→ Switch-off

Selects the result to be displayed as TRACe1 (or TRACe2).

Meaning

2.10.1
DISP panel
Unit

2.10.1
DISP panel

E-10

2.10.1
DISP panel
TRACE A/B
→ FILE + Filename

2.10.1
DISP panel
TRACE A/B
→ FUNC CH1
→ FUNC CH2
→ INP RMS CH1
→ INP RMS CH2
→ FREQ CH1
→ FREQ CH2
→ PHASE
→ GROUP DEL
→ HOLD
→ FILE
→ DUAL FILE
→ OFF

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

Command

Parameter

1078.2008.02

REFTrace,"filename"

MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe[1|2]

3.185

Query:
MMEM:LOAD:TRAC[
1|2]? REFT



DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel

REF997
REF1000

IFILe

GENTrack

OTRAce
CH1Meas
CH2Meas

HOLD

MAXimum
CURSor[1]
CURSor 2
FILE

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:MO
DE VALue

UPL

1)

Basic
unit

2.10.1
DISP panel
Reference
→ FILE +
Reference

→ File containing the reference-trace data for trace A.
Default extension = .TRC

E-10

2.10.1
DISP panel
Reference
→ VALUE

2.10.1
DISP panel
Reference
→ VALUE
→ MAX
→ oCURSOR
→ *CURSOR
→ FILE
→ HOLD
→ OTHER TRACE
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ GEN TRACK
→ FILE INTERN
→ REF 997 Hz
→ REF 1000 Hz

Section

Entry of reference value for relative units.

A reference value is required for all relative units of TRACe1 or TRACe2.
→ The subsequently entered value is used as a reference.
→ Uses the maximum value of the trace once.
→ The value pointing to the o-cursor is stored as a reference.
→ The value pointing to the *-cursor is stored as a reference.
→ Reference for reference-related units is a file indicated by
MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe[1|2]REFTrace,"name.TRC".
→ The reference-trace memory is no longer filled with new
(sweep) values. Stored values are retained.
→ Reference for reference-related units is another trace.
→ Reference for reference-related units is the value measured in channel
1 or 2 pertaining to the respective reference point (depending on the
display measured frequency, function or input result).
→ The reference trace is erased and reloaded for each measurement
using the respective generator setting.
→ When a trace with the associated reference trace (Internal reference FILe)
is loaded, IFILe activates this internal reference file again when another
reference has been selected before.
→The value measured at 997 Hz or 1 kHz is taken once as a reference
→ value for a single sweep run. With FFT traces, the nearest bin (actually
measured frequency line) is taken, with frequency sweeps interpolation
is made between the two neighbouring points.If the X axis is not the
frequency axis (for example in the case of level sweeps or waveform
traces), an error message is output and the reference value remains
unchanged.

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

Command

1078.2008.02

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:NORMalize:
MODE

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe2:Y[:SCALe]:EQUal

UPL

VALue

3.186

CURSor[1] (o-Cursor)
CURSor2 (*-Cursor)

OFF

ONCE

OFF

ON

Parameter

Basic
unit

2.10.1
DISP panel
Scale
→ AUTO ONCE
→ MANUAL

→ Uses the minimum and maximum values of the present trace for rescaling
the display once. The new scaling data are transferred to and used in
DISP:TRAC:Y:TOP  and DISP:TRAC:Y:BOTT .
→ Leaves scaling to the user with the aid of the following two commands.

Presettings required:
DISP:TRAC[1|2]:OPER CURV
DISP:TRAC[1|2]:FEED ’SENS1:DATA1’|’SENS1:DATA2’|’HOLD’
DISP:TRAC[1|2]:Y:UNIT VVRPCTVVR|PPR|PCTPPR|DBR
DISP:TRAC[1|2]:Y:RLEV:MODE GENT
or
DISP:TRAC[1|2]:OPER CURV
DISP:TRAC[1|2]:FEED ’SENS3:DATA1’|’SENS3:DATA2’|’HOLD’
DISP:TRAC[1|2]:Y:UNIT TOCT|OCT|DEC|FFR
DISP:TRAC[1|2]:Y:RLEV:MODE GENT

and
and
and

and
and
and

→ The multiplier is obtained from the measured value at the cursor position
divided by the reference value at this position. Thus the new reference
corresponds to the value measured at this position (= 0 dBr).
→ Entry of a fixed multiplier using the next command:

With normalize the reference curve can be multiplied so that a specific Y
value is obtained at the desired Y position.

2.10.1
DISP panel
Scale B
→ EQUAL A
→ NOT EQUAL A

→ TRACe2 may be displayed on the same axis as TRACe1. In this case no
values can be entered for: UNIT,: RLEVel,:SCALe:AUTO,:TOP,:BOTTom
and :SPACing for the second axis.
→ Independent of trace 1.

2.10.1
DISP panel
Normalize
→ o-Cursor
→ *-Cursor
→ VALue

E-10

ONCE
mit Softkey
F7
(AUTOSCALE)
→ F7 (A)
→ F8 (B)

Section

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

 see 3.10.4
Units for IEC
Measurement Results


ON

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:X[:SCALe]:UNIT

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:X[:SCALe]:RLEVel

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X[:SCALe]:AUTO

3.187



DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom

1078.2008.02



DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:TOP

OFF

LINear
LOGarithmic

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y:SPACing

Parameter


10-12 to 106
or
-200 dB to 120 dB

Command

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:NORMalize

UPL

2)

1)

1)

Multiplier |
dB

Basic
unit

2.10.1
DISP panel
Scale
→ AUTO
→ MANUAL
or
Softkey
F7
(AUTOSCALE)
→ F9 (X)

→ Uses the minimum and maximum values of the present trace for
scaling the X axis (once).
→ Leaves scaling to the user with the aid of the following two commands.

E-10

2.10.1
DISP panel
Reference

2.10.1
DISP panel
Unit

2.10.1
DISP panel
Bottom

Entry of reference value for relative units.

Determines the units for the numeric results displayed on the X axis.

Sets the lower value of the Y axis (of the dependent value) in the case of
DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:Y:AUTO OFF.

2.10.1
DISP panel
Top

2.10.1
DISP panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG

→ Linear spacing of Y axes
→ Logarithmic

Sets the upper value of the Y axis (of the dependent value) in the case of
DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:Y:AUTO OFF

2.10.1
DISP panel
Normalize

Section

The specified number is multiplied to obtain the reference value. This allows
the reference of a trace to be determined as required.

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

"string"

[,]

CURSor[1|2]

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[:DATA]

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT:LOCate

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]: ACTive

1078.2008.02

N12
D12
OFF



DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X[:SCALe]:RIGHT

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[1]:MODE



DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X[:SCALe]:LEFT

3.188

Parameter

LINear
LOGarithmic

Command

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X:SPACing

UPL

2)

2)

Basic
unit

2.10.1
DISP panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG

Section

Parameters used for selecting the cursor function and the type of the
displayed numeric cursor values.
→ Display of measured values A and B and of associated X value.
→ Display of difference value of A and B at the cursor position and of X value.
→ The deactivated cursor is no longer displayed.

Switches the cursors alternately on and off. This only affects the display.
CURSor1 is marked with o, CURSor2 with *.

Determines the X and Y position of the text. X and Y are the relative distance
from the 0 point of the coordinates in % (0 to 100).

Permits a text to be entered that will be displayed within the trace display in
the case of DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:OPERation CURVeplot.

Sets the right-hand value of the X axis (of the independent value) in the case
of DISPlay:TRACe:X:AUTO OFF. The lower value of LEFT and RIGHT is
used as left-hand value.

E-10

2.10.2
Softkey
F8: selects ΟCURS.
F9: (Ο-CURSOR)
→ F6 (A,B)
→ F7 (A-B)
→ F11 (ON/OFF)

2.10.2
DISP panel
Softkey, 1st level
F8

2.10.1
DISP panel
X Pos, Y Pos

2.10.1
DISP panel
COMMENT

2.10.1
DISP panel
Right

Sets the left-hand value of the X axis (of the independent value) in the case of 2.10.1
DISPlay:TRACe:X:AUTO OFF.
DISP panel
Left

→ Linear spacing of X axis
→ Logarithmic

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

Command

1078.2008.02

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[1|2]:POSition

HLD2
OFF



MIN2
I MAX1
MAX1
I MAX2
MAX2
MARKer1
NEXTharm
VALue

3.189

Parameter

HL2
HLD1

HL1

N12
D12
C12

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[1|2]:POSition:MO
DE
MIN1

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor2:MODE

UPL

3)

Basic
unit

Sets specified cursor to the value of the X axis if
DISPlay:TRACe[]:CURSor[1|2]:POSition:MODE VALue is set.

E-10

2.10.2
not via softkey

2.10.2
Softkey
F8 sel. Ο-CURS
or
*-CURS
→ F10 (SET TO)
→ ---→ ---→ F6 (I MAX A)
→ F7 (MAX A)
→ F8 (I MAX B)
→ F9 (MAX B)
→ F10
(MARKER)
→ F11(NXTHARM)

2.10.2
Softkey
F8 sel. o-cursor
F9 sel. *-cursor
→ F6 (A,B)
→ F7 (A-B)
→ F8 (* - Ο)
→ F9 (HLINE)
→A
→ F9 (HLINE)
→B
→ F9 (HLINE)
→ ∆A
→ F9 (HLINE)
→ ∆B
→ F11 (ON/OFF)

→ Display of measured values A and B and of associated X value.
→ Display of difference value of A and B at the cursor position and of X value.
→ Difference of trace and X values of curves A and B which are marked by
the two cursors.
→ The *-cursor is switched to horizontal line. Its Y value and intersections
with TRACe1 (if any) are displayed.
→ Intersections with TRACe2 are displayed.
→ The *-cursor is switched to horizontal line. The difference between its Y
value and the Y value of the o-cursor are displayed.
Intersections with TRACe1 are displayed as well.
→ Same as with HLD1, but the intersections with TRACe2 are displayed.
→ The deactivated cursor is no longer displayed.

Changes the position of the specified cursor.
→ Sets cursor to the minimum of TRACe1.
→ Sets cursor to the maximum of TRACe2.
→ Sets cursor to calculated maximum of TRACe1 (with FFT only)
→ Sets cursor to maximum of TRACe1.
→ Sets cursor to calculated maximum of TRACe2 (with FFT only)
→ Sets cursor to maximum of TRACe2.
→ Sets cursor to value of 1st marker (FFT only).
→ Sets cursor to the next harmonic (FFT only).
→ Sets cursor to the value specified with the command below.

Section

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

1078.2008.02

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:MARKer:HARMonics

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:MARKer:MODE



DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:ZOOM

OFF

ON

OFF

3.190

Parameter

MAXimum
CURSor

4

3

2

0
1
-1

OFF
ON

Command

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]: CURVe

UPL
Basic
unit

2.10.2
Softkey
F11
(MARKER)
F6 (TRACE A)
or
F7 (TRACE B).
→ MAX
→ CURSOR
→ VIEW OFF

2.10.2
Softkey
F10 (ZOOM)
→ F10 (UNZOOM)
→ F6 (AT o UP)
→ F7 (AToDOWN)
→ F8 (CEN TO o)
→ F9 (o TO *)
→ F11 (UNDO)

2.10.2
Softkey
→ F6 (CURVE)
→ F6 (A ON/OFF)
→ F7 (B ON/OFF)

Section

E-10

→ Sets markers for harmonics (frequency multiples) of MARKer1 (FFT only). 2.10.2
Values marked in TRACe1 or TRACe2.
Softkey
→ No harmonics markers.
F11 (MARKER)
F6 (TRACE A)
or
F7 (TRACE B)
→ F10 (HARM)
on/off

→ Sets the first marker to the maximum of TRACe1 or TRACe2.
→ Sets the first marker to the value defined by the o-cursor. TRACe1 or
TRACe2 is used.
→ No markers

Markers for FFT spectrum display

→ Restores the original X axis defined by X AXIS LEFT and RIGHT.
→ Expands the display on the X axis by the factor 2 (can be repeated).
→ Reduces the display on the X axis by the factor 2 (repeated actions
possible).
→ Shifts the center of the X axis of the new coordinates to the value of the
o-cursors (CURSor1) without expanding the X axis.
→ The end points of the expanded X axis are determined by the X values of
the two cursors
→ Cancels the last action.

→ TRACe1: trace A on/off
→ TRACe2: trace B on/off

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting


1 to 17

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:INDex

3.191

"string"

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe2:Y:LABel

1078.2008.02

"string"

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1]:Y:LABel

Selects the nth single trace or curve pair. In the graphics display a circle
marks the intersection of the vertical cursor line and the selected trace.

Specification of a string determining a user-definable label (unit and title) for
the Y2 axis.

Specification of a string determining a user-definable label (unit and title) for
the Y1 axis.

E-10

2.9.3.3
Keys
PAGE UP /
PAGE DOWN

2.10.2
DISP panel
Unit/Label

2.10.2
DISP panel
Unit/Label

2.10.2
DISP panel
Unit/Label

"string"

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X:LABel

Specification of a string determining a user-definable label (unit and title) for
the X axis.

2.10.2
DISP panel
User Label
→ ON
→ OFF

→ Activates user title and units.
→ Deactivates user title and units.

Section

ON
OFF

Meaning

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:LABel

Basic
unit

2.10.2
Softkey
F7
(AUTOSCALE)
F6 (ALL)

Parameter

Rescales the X and the TRACe1 axis. When active also the axis of TRACe2.

Command

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:AUToscale

UPL

Command

Query only

P
SP
AP
GP
FP
DP
OP
GAT
GAO
GAD
FAT
FAO
FAD
SHON
SHOFf

1078.2008.02

3.192

Parameter

1) Depending on DISPlay:TRACe:FEED and (with SENSe1) of SENSe1:FUNCtion
2) Depending on the sweep selected for generator and analyzer
3) Same units as with DISPlay:TRACe[]:X:UNIT permitted.

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[]:DATA3?

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[]:DATA2?

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[]:DATA1?

DISPlay:CONFiguration

UPL
Basic
unit

Return the values of the cursor position. Depending on
DISPlay:TRACe[]:CURSor[1|2]:MODE and
DISPlay:TRACe:CURSor[1|2]ACTive the following values are available:
DATA1
DATA2 DATA3
with CURSor1 and CURSor2 ACTive
N12
A
X
B
D12
A-B
X
OFF
only with CURSor2 ACTive:
C12
A-oA
X-oX
B-oB
HL1
XAL
y
XAR
HL2
XBL
Y
XBR
HLD1
XAL
A-Y
XAR
HLD2
XBL
B-Y
XBR

Configuration of screen display after switchover to LOCAL:
→ Full-screen graphics display (plot)
→ Status panel and graphics window
→ Analyzer panel and graphics window
→ Generator panel and graphics window
→ File panel and graphics window
→ Display panel and graphics window
→ Options panel and graphics window
→ Generator, analyzer and filter panel
→ Generator, analyzer and options panel
→ Generator-, analyzer and display panel
→ File, analyzer and filter panel
→ File, analyzer and options panel
→ File, analyzer and display panel
→ Show IO graphics on
→ Show IO graphics off

Meaning

Ext. UPL
keyboard

2.10.2
Display in
graphics
window

E-10

ALT+G
ALT+A
ALT+T
ALT+F
ALT+D
ALT+R
ALT+Z
SHOW I/O ALT+I
OPTIONS ALT+O

GEN
ANLR
FILT
FILE
DISP
GRAPH
ZOOM

Keys

2.3.1

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

Commands for Limit Check

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

ON
OFF



LIMUpper,
"filename"

CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:STATe

CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:VALue

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

1078.2008.02

TRACe1
TRACe2
TR1And2

3.193

Parameter

CALCulate:LIMit:ON

Command

*)

Basic
unit

2.10.7
DISP panel
Lim Upper
→ VALUE:
2.10.7
DISP panel
Lim Upper
→ FILE +
filenam"

→ Defines a file containing the upper limit curve.

E-10

2.10.7
DISP panel
LIMIT CHECK
Mode
→ LIM UPPER
Mode
→ OFF

→ Upper limit monitoring switched on.
→ Upper limit monitoring switched off.

Specifies a single upper limit value.

2.10.7
DISP panel
Check
→ TRACE A
→ TRACE B
→ TRACE A+B

Section

→ TRACe1 or bargraph 1 monitored.
→ TRACe2 or bargraph 2 monitored.
→ Both traces (bargraphs) monitored together.

Meaning

See also Sections 2.10.7 Limit Check, 3.10.9 Commands for Input/Output of Data and 3.10.9 Commands for Input/Output of Data, for the transfer of limit curves
and limit check results in the form of block data.

3.10.6.1

UPL

LIMLower,
"filename"


Query only

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL?

1078.2008.02

*) Same units as with DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:Y:UNIT permitted.



CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:VALue

3.194

Parameter

ON
OFF

Command

CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:STATe

UPL

*)

Basic
unit

ON

Lim Low

ON
Lim Low

OFF
Lim Low

OFF

Lim Upp

ON
Lim Upp

ON
Lim Upp

2.10.7
No manual
control

E-10

2.10.7
DISP panel
Lim Lower
→ FILE + filename

→ Defines a file containing the lower limit curve.

Returns ON if Lim Upper values are exceeded or Lim Lower values are not
attained, otherwise OFF.

2.10.7
DISP panel
Lim Lower
→ VALUE:

2.10.7
DISP panel
LIMIT CHECK
Mode
→ LIM LOWER
Mode
→ OFF

Section

Specifies a single lower limit value.

→ Lower limit monitoring switched on.
→ Lower limit monitoring switched off.

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

Command

PROTOCOL Analysis

"filename"

Query only
Response:
UBB
SQB
NSYN
PRMB
SQLR
RERR
NONE

MMEMory:LOAD:PAC

DISPlay:PROTocol:ERRor:GENeral?

1078.2008.02

"filename"

BINary
HEXadecimal
ASCii
FILE

3.195

LCHannelstatus
RCHannelstatus
LUSerdata
RUSerdata

Parameter

MMEMory:LOAD:PAU

DISPlay:PROTocol:FORMat

DISPlay:PROTocol:SELect

3.10.6.2

UPL

Basic
unit

"UBB"
"SQB"
"NSYN"
"PRMB"
"SQLR"
"RERR"
"NONE"

: unexpected preamble for beginning of block (too early)
: no preamble (blank) for beginning of block
: no preamble for beginning of block
: preamble invalid
: error in the channel sequence (L/R)
: measured and set rate differ by more than 200 ppm
: no error

Query only
Indicates errors occurred.

Selects the interpretation file for channel status data.

Selects the interpretation file for user data if
DISPlay:PROTocol:FORMat FILE has been set.

Format selects the interpretation mode for user data.
→ User data displayed as 0101 sequence.
→ User data displayed as hexadecimal figures
→ User data displayed as plain text
→ Interpretation file for user data loaded with MMEMory:LOAD:PAU
"filename".

Selects the protocol data of the AES/EBU interface to be displayed.
→ Left channel: status data
→ Right channel: status data
→ Left channel: user data
→ Right channel: user data

Meaning

E-10

2.10.8
GRAPH panel
Display

2.10.8
DISP panel
Proto File

2.10.8
DISP panel
Proto File

2.10.8
DISP panel
Format
→ BIN
→ HEX
→ ASCII
→ FILE DEF

DISP panel
Source
→ CHAN STAT L
→ CHAN STAT R
→ USER DATA L
→ USER DATA R

2.10.8

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

Query only

DISPlay:PROTocol:CHSTatus?

Query only
Y0
N1

DISPlay:PROTocol:RVALbit?

1078.2008.02

Query only
Y0
N1

EQUAL
DIFF

Query only

YES

DISPlay:PROTocol:LVALbit?

DISPlay:PROTocol:LR?

Query only

DISPlay:PROTocol:ERRor:RCRC?

NO
LTC

Query only

DISPlay:PROTocol:ERRor:LCRC?

3.196

Parameter

Query only

Command

DISPlay:PROTocol:ERRor:PARity?

UPL
Basic
unit

Query only
Indicates the position of the validity bit in the right channel.

Query only
Indicates the position of the validity bit in the left channel.

Query only
Channel status data between left and right channel are ...
"EQUAL": same
"DIFF" : different

Query only
Indicates changes in the channel status data.
"NO"
: No changes
"LTC" : Changes in local-time-code only
(bits 112 to 143) and CRC (bits 184 to 191).
"YES" : Changes at another bit position.

Query only
Internal counter of CRC errors (right)

Query only
Internal counter of CRC errors (left)

Query only
Displays the sum of all occurred parity errors. Zero reset by reselecting the
analyzer or pressing the start key.

Meaning

E-10

2.10.8
GRAPH panel
Display

2.10.8
GRAPH panel
Display

2.10.8
GRAPH panel
Display

2.10.8
GRAPH panel
Display

2.10.8
GRAPH panel
Display

2.10.8
GRAPH panel
Display

2.10.8
GRAPH panel
Display

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

1078.2008.02

Command

3.197

For reasons of
compatibility with
existing programs the
replys are as follows:
PRIN
PLOT
PRHP
PRPS
PCXF
HPGL
FIPS
FIEP

FIPS, ’filename.PS’
FIEPs, ’filename.EPS’

FIHPgl, ’filename.GL’
alias
HPGLfile, ’name.GL’

FIPCx,
’filename.PCX’
alias
PCXFile, ’name.PCX’

PRSPc alias PRINter
PLHPgl alias
PLOTter
PRPS
PRHPgl

Parameter

Basic
unit

Meaning

→ to file in PostScript format
→ to file in Encapsulated PostScript format

→ to file in HPGL format

→ to file in PCX format

E-10

→ PRINTR/SPC
→ PLOTTR/HPGL
→ PRINTR/HPGL
→ PRINTR/PS
→ FILE/PCX
→ FILE/HPGL
→ FILE/PS
→ FILE/EPS

(destination/format)

2.14
OPTIONS panel
Destin

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

Screen copy
→ to printer in the specified printer format (PRSPC = SPeCial printer format)
→ to plotter in HPGL format
→ to printer in PostScript format
→ to printer in HPGL format taking into account the content of the prolog file
C:\UPL\REF\GL_PRO.LOG and the epilog file C:\UPL\REF\GL_EPI.LOG.

Commands for Printing/Plotting of Screen and Storing in Files

HCOPy:DESTination

3.10.7

UPL



TRACe

HCOPy:DEVice:PRINter

1078.2008.02

3.198

Parameter

GRATicule

ALL

OFF

ON

ON
OFF

Command

HCOPy:ITEM:LABel:STATe

HCOPy:ITEM

HCOPy:DEVice:COLor

UPL
Basic
unit

Effective only with HCOPy:DESTination PRINter
Selects a printer driver.
The number  to be specified for the desired printer driver can be obtained
from the printer-driver box "List of installable Printers" opened under
"Printname" in the OPTIONS panel.

→ Hardcopy with comment
→ Hardcopy without comment

E-10

2.14
OPTIONS panel
Printname

2.14
Key H COPY
or Ctrl F8

2.14
OPTIONS panel
Copy
→ SCREEN
→ CURVE/GRID
→ CURVE

2.14
OPTIONS panel
COLOR
→ ON
→ OFF

→ PCX information stored in colors in the file specified by HCOP:DEST
PCXFile, ’filename’.
→ PCX information stored in black/white in the file specified by HCOP:DEST
PCXFile, ’filename’.

Effective only with HCOPy:DESTination PLOTter|HPGLfile
→ The complete screen is output, ie all labels and cursors as well as
traces/bargraphs with scales. In the case of graphics windows the result
display and a panel are output in addition.
→ Stores the traces/bargraphs with scales and scale labels but not the
cursors and other labelling.
→ Only the trace(s) displayed is (are) transferred.

Section

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

1078.2008.02


0 to 80

HCOPy:PAGE:LMARgin

COM2
LPT1
IEC

WHITe
FDEFined

3.199

Parameter



Command

HCOPy:PLADdress

HCOPy:PLPort

HCOPy:ITEM:FRAMe

UPL
Basic
unit

Margin of hardcopy (number of spaces)

Sets the IEC/IEEE-bus address of the plotter when
HCOPy:DESTination PLOTer and
HCOPy:PLPort IEC
has been selected.

Effective only with HCOPy:DESTination PLOTter
→ Hardcopy via serial interface 2.
→ Hardcopy via parallel printer interface.
→ Hardcopy via IEC/IEEE-bus interface.

For HCOP:DEST PRPS|FIPS|FIEPs:
The color information for the frames of the GRAPH panel is taken
from the PostScript configuration file \UPD\REF\PS.CFG, key word
"Background Color" "Frame:" and "Plane:" and available as RGB
information for color PostScript pictures and as shades of grey for
black/white PostScript pictures.
Examples in file PS.CFG show the RGB combination for different
background colors.

Selection of background color of GRAPH panel frame and result panel for
hardcopies on a printer or storage in a .PCX file.
WHITE should be selected when the characters cannot be clearly
distinguished on the grey background.
→ White
→ Color defined via file
For HCOP:DEST PRSPc|FIPCx:
Color No. 2 (backgrnd frames) defined in files
\UPD\REF\PRN_BW.PLT (BW printer) and
\UPD\REF\PRN_CL.PLT (color printer) is used.

Effective only with HCOPy:DESTination PRSPc|FIPCx|PRPS|FIPS|FIEPs

Meaning

E-10

2.14
OPTIONS panel
LEFT MRGN

2.14
OPTIONS panel
→ IEC Adr

2.14
OPTIONS panel
Plot on
→ COM 2
→ LPT 1
→ IEC BUS

2.14
OPTIONS panel
Frame
→ WHITE
→ FILE DEF

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

Command


0.1 to 10

LANDscape
PORTtrait

Query only

Query only

HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe:Y

HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation

HCOPy:PAGE:WIDTh?

HCOPy:PAGE:LENGth?

1078.2008.02


0.1 to 10

HIGH
MEDium
LOW

3.200

Parameter

HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe:X

HCOPy:DEVice:RESolution

UPL
Basic
unit

E-10

Indicates the hardcopy length in cm. The length of a hardcopy depends on the 2.14
following settings:
OPTIONS panel
- HCOPy:DEVice:PRINter (selected printer)
Prn Height
- HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe:Y (Y scaling)
- HCOPy:DEVice:RESolution (resolution)

2.14
OPTIONS panel
Prn Width,

2.14
OPTIONS panel
ORIENTATION
→ LANDSCAPE
→ PORTRAIT

→ Hardcopy in upright format
→ Hardcopy in landscape format

Indicates the hardcopy width in cm. The width of a hardcopy depends on the
following settings:
- HCOPy:DEVice:PRINter (selected printer)
- HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe:X (X scaling)
- HCOPy:DEVice:RESolution (resolution)

2.14
OPTIONS panel
Y-SCALING

2.14
OPTIONS panel
X-SCALING

2.14
OPTIONS panel
Prn Resol
→ HIGH
→ MEDIUM
→ LOW

Section

Scaling of Y axis of screen hardcopy

Scaling of X axis of hardcopy

Sets the printer resolution. Whether a resolution can be set and which one
depends on the printer used.
→ High resolution (eg 300 dpi)
→ Medium resolution (eg 150 dpi)
→ Low resolution (eg 75 dpi)

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

1078.2008.02

SYSTem:PRINt

HCOPy:PLOTs

HCOPy:SIZE

UPL

Command

TRACe1
TRACe2
EQUalize
ERRors
DWELl
LIMLower
LIMUpper
LIST1
LIST2
TR1And2
OFF


1 to 6

LETTer

A4

3.201

Parameter

Basic
unit

→ Printout of TRACe1.
→ Printout of TRACe2.
→ Printout of equalization values
→ Printout of values violating limits
→ Printout of timing values
→ Printout of lower limit values
→ Printout of upper limit values
→ X axis (eg sweep)
→ Z axis (eg sweep)
→ Printout of both traces
→ Switched off

Printout of numerals in ASCII code (including X axis).

Number of UPL plots to be printed on a PostScript page.

→ UPL images are optimally positioned on format A4
(21 cm * 29.6 cm).
→ UPL images are optimally positioned on format LETTER
(21.6 cm * 27.9 cm).

Form feed for a screen copy in PostScript format

Meaning

E-10

2.14.5
OPTIONS panel
PRINT-----Type
→ TRACE A
→ TRACE B
→ EQUALIZATN
→ LIM REPORT
→ DWELL
→ LIM LOWER
→ LIM UPPER
→ X AXIS
→ Z AXIS
→TRACE A+B
→ OFF

2.14
OPTIONS panel
Plots/Page

2.14
OPTIONS panel
Paper Size
→ A4
→ LETTER

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

1078.2008.02

HCOPy[:IMMediate]

UPL

Command

3.202

Program example:
:
IECOUT 20,"HCOPy:DESTination PRINter"
IECNREN:’ Inhibits the LOCAL key ...
IECREN:’... releases key blocking.
IECOUT 20,"DISP:CONF GAT":’ GEN, ANLR and FILTER panel
IECOUT 20,"HCOP CF":’ Triggers a hardcopy with comment
’
and form feed
IECLLO:’ Reactivates blocking of the LOCAL key.
:

One of the four parameters CNF, CF, NCNF or NCF can be added to the
HCOP command for printing the screen content with a comment:
CNF:
Hardcopy with comment*, without form feed
CF:
Hardcopy with comment*, with form feed
NCNF: Hardcopy without comment, without form feed
NCF:
Hardcopy without comment, with form feed
Thus a specific screen configuration (3-panel, split-screen or full-screen
display) can be output to the printer via IEC/IEEE bus, RS-232 or through
UPL-B10 control.
The desired screen configuration has to be selected before with command
DISP:CONF ... (see end of section 3.10.6, Commands for Graphical Display
of Results).
The HCOP command with one of the 4 parameters switches the UPL from
REMOTE to manual control, builds up the screen with the selected
configuration, scans the screen content and starts the hardcopy.
The next IEC/IEEE-bus command switches the UPL back to the REMOTE
mode.

With setting
HCOPy:DESTination PRINter

CNF
CF
NCNF
NCF

Starts printout of the screen content

Meaning

Depending on command HCOP:DEST ... the current screen content is
printed, plotted, or stored in a PCX or HPGL file or as a PostScript file,
In the case of IEC/IEEE-bus and RS-232 control, only the result window and
REMOTE are printed.
A remedy is a HCOPY command with specified parameters which permits a
hardcopy with preceding screen configuration to be printed.

Basic
unit

Without parameter

Parameter

E-10

HCOPy command
via IEC/IEEE bus,
RS-232 or
Universal
Sequence
Controller UPLB10

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

1078.2008.02

Cont’d
HCOPy[:IMMediate]

UPL

Command

CONFig

CONFig

3.203

Parameter

Program example:
:
IECOUT 20,"HCOPy:DESTination PCXFile,’filename’"
IECNREN:’ Inhibits the LOCAL key ...
IECREN:’... releases key blocking
IECOUT 20,"DISP:CONF GAT":’ GEN, ANLR and FILTER panel
IECOUT 20,"HCOP CONF":’ Triggers a hardcopy without
comment
IECLLO:’ Reactivates blocking of the LOCAL key.
:

The HCOP command with parameter CONF switches the UPL from REMOTE
to manual control, builds up the screen with the selected configuration, scans
the screen content and starts a hardcopy into the file.
The next IEC/IEEE-bus command reset the UPL to the REMOTE mode.

The desired screen configuration has to be selected first with command
DISP:CONF ...
see end of section 3.10.6, Commands for Graphics Display of Results).

With setting
HCOPy:DESTination PCXFile,’filename’:

Program example:
:
IECOUT 20,"HCOPy:DESTination PRINter"
IECNREN:’ Inhibits the LOCAL key ...
IECREN:’... releases key blocking.
IECOUT 20,"DISP:CONF GAT":’ GEN, ANLR and FILTER panel
IECOUT 20,"HCOP CONF":’ Trigg. a hcopy without comment
IECLLO:’ Reactivates blocking of the LOCAL key.
:

If a screen copy without comment is output (HCOP:ITEM:LAB:STAT OFF),
the desired screen configuration is first set with command
DISP:CONF and then the HCOP command with parameter CONF is given.

Cont’d:
HCOPy:DESTination PRINter

Meaning

E-10

HCOPy command
via IEC/IEEE bus,
RS-232 or
Universal
Sequence
Controller UPLB10

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

1078.2008.02

Cont’d
HCOPy[:IMMediate]

UPL

Command
TITLe
SUPPlement

3.204

Parameter

Program example:
:
IECOUT 20,"HCOPy:DESTination FIPS, ’filename.PS’"
IECNREN:’ Inhibits the LOCAL key ...
IECREN:’... disables key blocking.
IECOUT 20,"DISP:CONF GAT":’ GEN, ANLR and FILTER panel
IECOUT 20,"HCOP TITL":’ Triggers a hardcopy with a
comment as a title
IECLLO:’ Reactivates blocking of the LOCAL key.
:

Thus a specific screen configuration (3-panel, split-screen or full-screen
display) can be output to the PostScript printer or a PostScript file via
IEC/IEEE bus, RS-232 or through UPL-B10 control.
A selection can be made with command HCOPy:ITEM ALL|GRAT|TRAC
whether the whole screen content (ALL), only traces and scales (GRAT) or
only traces (TRAC) are output as PostScript plot or stored in a PostScript file.
When a hardcopy of traces is to be made (HCOP:ITEM GRAT|TRAC) make
sure that the screen configuration selected with
DISP:CONF P|SP|AP|GP|FP|DP|OP allows traces to be plotted.
The HCOP command with one of the three parameters
switches the UPL from the REMOTE to the manual control mode,
builds up the selected configuration,
scans the screen content and starts the hardcopy.
The next IEC/IEEE-bus command resets the UPL to REMOTE.

A comment* can be added to the PostScript plot as a TITLe or caption
(SUPPlement).

With settings
HCOPy:DESTination PRPS
HCOPy:DESTination FIPS, ’filename.PS’
HCOPy:DESTination FIEPs, ’filename.EPS’

Meaning

E-10

HCOPy command
via IEC/IEEE bus,
RS-232 or
Universal
Sequence
Controller UPLB10

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

1078.2008.02

Cont’d
HCOPy[:IMMediate]

UPL

Command
CONFig

3.205

Parameter

Program example:
:
IECOUT 20," HCOPy:DESTination FIPS, ’filename.PS’ "
IECNREN:’ Inhibits the LOCAL key ...
IECREN:’... disables key blocking.
IECOUT 20,"DISP:CONF GAT":’ GEN, ANLR and FILTER panel
IECOUT 20,"HCOP CONF":’ Trigg. a hcopy without comment
IECLLO:’ Reactivates blocking of the LOCAL key.
:

If a screen copy without comment (HCOP:ITEM:LAB:STAT OFF) is output,
the desired screen configuration is first set with command
DISP:CONF and then the HCOP command with parameter CONF is
triggered.

Cont’d:
With settings
HCOPy:DESTination PRPS
HCOPy:DESTination FIPS, ’filename.PS’
HCOPy:DESTination FIEPs, ’filename.EPS’

Meaning

E-10

HCOPy command
via IEC/IEEE bus,
RS-232 or
Universal
Sequence
Controller UPLB10

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

1078.2008.02

3.206

2.14
Key H COPY
or CTRL F8

Aborts the hardcopy.

E-10

HCOPy command
via IEC/IEEE bus,
RS-232 or
Universal
Sequence
Controller UPLB10

Section

HCOPy:ABORt

Note:
No further HCOP command may be given while a hardcopy is being executed
(printed), since a command would abort the printout.

Program example:
:
IECOUT 20,"HCOPy:DESTination PLOTter"
IECNREN:’ Inhibits the LOCAL key ...
IECREN:’... releases key blocking.
IECOUT 20,"DISP:CONF GAT":’ GEN, ANLR and FILTER panel
IECOUT 20,"HCOP CONF":’ Triggers a hardcopy
IECLLO:’ Reactivates blocking of the LOCAL key.
:

The HCOP command with one of the three parameters switches the UPL
from REMOTE control to manual control, builds up the screen with the
selected configuration,
scans the screen content and starts the hardcopy.
The next IEC/IEEE-bus command resets the UPL to REMOTE control.

With settings
HCOPy:DESTination PLOTter and
HCOPy:DESTination PRHPgl
HCOPy:DESTination HPGLfile,’filename’:
The default parameter CONF triggers a hardcopy to a plotter, a HPGLcompatible printer or a HPGL file with preceding screen configuration.
A comment cannot be output.
In addition to the screen configuration selected with DISP:CONF ... a
selection can be made with command HCOPy:ITEM ALL|GRAT|TRAC
whether the total screen content (ALL), only traces with scales (GRAT) or only
traces (TRAC) are plotted or transferred to the HPGL file. When traces are to
be plotted (HCOP:ITEM GRAT|TRAC) make sure that a screen configuration
allowing traces to be plotted has been selected with DISP:CONF
P|SP|AP|GP|FP|DP|OP.

Meaning

No manual
control

CONFig

Parameter

Starts the printout (see above)
The next Basic command is not carried out before printing (with optimum
speed) in the background is completed.

Command

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Printing and Plotting

HCOPy:WAIT

Cont’d
HCOPy[:IMMediate]

UPL

Command

Switching the Beeper On/Off

1078.2008.02

SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe

3.10.8.2

SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess

ON
OFF

3.207

Parameter


0 to 31

Parameter

IEC/IEEE-Bus Address

3.10.8.1

Command

Setting and Display of Auxiliary Parameters

3.10.8

UPL

Basic
unit

Basic
unit

→ Beeper on
→ Beeper off

IEC/IEEE bus address of UPL

Meaning

Meaning

E-10

2.15.2
OPTIONS panel
Beeper
→ ON
→ OFF

Section

2.15.1
OPTIONS panel
UPL IECadr

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters


0 to 1024
Query only

SYSTem:PROGram:POINts?

1078.2008.02

{,}

SYSTem:PROGram[:DATA]

3.208

Parameter

’filename’

Command

MACRO Operating

SYSTem:PROGram:EXECute

3.10.8.3

UPL

Basic
unit

Number of the available block-data values written to the block buffer by the
BASIC macro.

No manual
control

E-10

2.16
OPTIONS-Panel
Exec Macro


2.15.9
Selecting the
Sampling Mode

Section

Up to 1024 various floating-point values can be transferred to the external
No manual
control program from a BASIC macro. To do this, the values are written to the control
block buffer by the BASIC macro and then read by the external control
program.
For a detailed example see 3.15.18 Call BASIC-Macro

Only in IEC/IEEE-bus or RS232-remote-control mode can a BASIC macro be
started with this command. A program supplied by the Universal Autorun
Control UPD-K1 cannot start a BASIC macro.

By means of this command any BASIC program with the name 
(preferred file extension: *.BAS) can be loaded and started. After the program
has been quit, a 1 → 0 transition is generated in the RUN bit (#14) of the
operation register. This is communicated to the controller via SRQ or serial
poll so that it can fetch the measurement results. Data exchange between the
external control program and the BASIC program can be performed via the
measurement-result displays, the measurement-result buffers or the block
data input/output by adding on the command SYST:PROG {,}.
For a detailed example see 3.15.18 Call BASIC-Macro.

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters

Command

Transfer of Settings

512

d9

d9

1

512

d10

1

1024

256

0

d8

1078.2008.02

Basic
unit
Permits transfer of settings in the generator or analyzer to another signal or
measurement function or to another instrument.

128

0

d7

64

0

d6

32

0

d5

16

0

d4

8

1

d3

4

0

d2

2

1

1

d0

3.209

0

d1

Meaning

E-10

2.15.7
OPTIONS panel
Param. Link

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters

Changing generator function (tracking Gen → Anl) the appropriate measurement function for the
analyzer is set. (MDIST, DFD, POL, FM → W&F)

Changing analyzer instrument keeps FUNCTION + Parameters

not used

Changing analyzer instrument keeps FREQ/PHASE

Changing analyzer instrument keeps INPUT DISP

Changing analyzer instrument keeps START COND

Changing analyzer instrument keeps Input Configuration

Changing analyzer functiom keeps FUNCTION parameters

Changing generator instrument keeps FUNCTION + Parameters

Changing generator instrument keeps Output Config

n = Sum of the weighting of the set bits
n = 1 + 8 + 512 + 1024
n =1545

Databit:
Data word:
Weighting:

Function

 *)
0 to 2047

Parameter

Changing generator function keeps FUNCTION parameters

Example: Function of d0, d3, d9 and d10 required

1024

256

d8

d10 (MSB)

64

128

d7

d5

d6

16

32

d4

4

8

d3

2

d1

d2

1

Weight

d0 (LSB)

Data bit

Calculation of :

*)

SYSTem:PARameter:LINK

3.10.8.4

UPL

1078.2008.02

HRM

BRM

Selecting the Sampling Mode

CONFigure:DAI

3.10.8.5

UPL

3.210

Note: In the HRM even the performance and functions of analog
measurements are reduced. This mode should therefore only be
selected when the higher sampling rate is really required in the
generator or analyzer.

When hardware option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) is installed, UPL can
be operated in two different sampling modes:
→ Base Rate Mode
Option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) generally functions like option
UPL-B2 (Digital Audio I/O). Clock frequencies up to 55 kHz can be
generated and analyzed. Maximum performance of UPL performance
without reduction of functions.
→ High Rate Mode
Option UPL-B29 (Digital Audio 96 kHz) permits generation and analysis in
the High Rate Mode with clock frequencies up to 106 kHz. Some
measurement functions in 2-channel operation are performed at lower
speed. Analyzer functions are slightly reduced:
• no RUB&BUZZ measurement
• THIRD OCT measurement only analog
• THIRD OCT, WAVEFORM, PEAK and QPEAK measurements only
without filter
• digital phase measurement not possible with all measurement functions

E-10

2.15.9
OPTIONS panel
Sampl Mode
→ BASE RATE
→ HIGH RATE

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters

Parameters of COM2 Interface

1078.2008.02

SYSTem:COMMunicate:GTL

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:FEED:BITS

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:FEED:PARity[:TYPE]

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:FEED:BAUD

Command


n=7|8

NONE
EVEN
ODD


n=
2400
3600
4800
7200
9600
19200
38400
56000

3.211

Parameter

Basic
unit

Return to manual operation.
This command is only required in case of remote control via RS-232 but can
also be used for IEC/IEEE-bus operation and Universal Sequence Controller
UPL-B10.

Number of data bits (default setting: 7)

Parity check
→ Parity check off
→ Check for even parity (default setting)
→ Check for odd parity

Transmission speed in baud (bits/s)
(default setting: 9600)

Meaning

LOCAL
keystroke

E-10

2.15.1
OPTIONS panel
Data Bits
→7
→8

2.15.1
OPTIONS panel
Parity
→ NONE
→ EVEN
→ ODD

2.15.1
OPTIONS panel
Baud Rate
→ 2400 Baud
→ 3600 Baud
→ 4800 Baud
→ 9600 Baud
→ 19200 Baud
→ 38400 Baud
→ 56000 Baud

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters

The parameters to be set in this section apply to a screen printout on a plotter with COM2 interface selected.
(HCOP:DEST PLOT mit HCOP:PLP COM2).

3.10.8.6

UPL

Command

1078.2008.02


0.25 to 1.0 s

SYSTem:KEY:RDELay

3.212

Parameter


0 to 50 Hz

Command

Keyboard Settings

RTS
XON


n=1|2

Parameter

SYSTem:KEY:RRATe

3.10.8.7

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:CONTrol

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:FEED:SBITs

UPL

s

Hz

Basic
unit

Basic
unit

Response delay of UPL and AT keyboard

Repetition rate of UPL and AT keyboard

Meaning

Type of synchronization
→ Hardware handshake via RTS and CTS line (default setting)
→ Software handshake

Number of stop bits (default setting: 1)

Meaning

E-10

2.15.3
OPTIONS panel
Rep Delay

2.15.3
OPTIONS panel
Reptn Rate

Section

2.15.1
OPTIONS panel
Handshake
→ RTS/CTS
→ XON/XOFF

2.15.1
OPTIONS panel
Stop Bits
→1
→2

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters

1078.2008.02

DISPlay:ACTualize

OFF

ON

ON
OFF

DISPlay:ANNotation[:ALL]

3.213

Parameter

INTern
COLBoth
BWBoth
AUTO

Command

Display Settings

DISPlay:MODE

3.10.8.8

UPL

Basic
unit

Note:
To enhance speed, it is best to turn off the graphic when the remotecontrol mode is selected. Graphics should only be activated when traces
are to be displayed.

No manual
control

E-10

2.15.5
OPTIONS panel
Meas Disp
→ ON
→ OFF
Ext. Keyboard:
CTRL D

→ Display of measurement results and status
→ Result and status display cleared (FFT, sweep and IEC/IEEE-bus
operation speeded up).

This command may be called from Universal Autorun Control UPD-K1 or via
the IEC/IEEE bus or by means of RS232 remote control.
→ Updates the graphics panel and repeats the update every time
commands are output which change the graphics display in the UPL,
eg DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X [:SCALe]:AUTO ON.
→ The graphics panel is not updated not even after commands changing the
graphics display in the UPL.

2.15.5
OPTIONS panel
Extrn Disp
→ INTERN ONLY
→ BOTH COLOR
→ BOTH B/W
→ BOTH AUTO

Section

→ Display on internal LCD
→ Additional display on external color monitor
→ Additional display on external monochrome monitor
→ Additional display on external VGA monitor; the display mode (color
or monochrome) is adapted to the built-in LCD. The display is thus
optimized for the built-in LCD so that the contrast quality will not be
affected.

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters

Command

1078.2008.02

SYSTem:DISPlay:READing:RESolution

SYSTem:DISPlay:READing:RATE

UPL



MAXSpeed
FSTSpeed
MEDSpeed
SLWSpeed

3.214

Parameter

Basic
unit

Window 2

CH2

Window 4

Window 3

Input peak

Window 6

Window 5

Frequency

Leading zeros may be omitted so that for  = 34, for example, the result in
window 6 is displayed with 4 decimal digits, the result in window 5 with 3 and
the results in windows 1 to 4 without any decimal digits at all.

W indow 6
W indow 5
W indow 4
W indow 3
W indow 2
W indow 1

SYSTem:DISPlay:READing:RESolution 112244

Window 1

CH1

Function

Each number is assigned to a result window:

Presetting for manual control.
Sets the number of decimal digits for the display of measured values in the
result windows. With measurements via IEC/IEEE bus results are always
displayed with maximum resolution.
Decimal digits for the 6 result windows are specified by 6 numbers between 0
and 6 (higher numbers are interpreted as 6).
0: Automatic display of decimal digits
1 to 6: 1 to 6 decimal digits

Presetting for manual control.
Determines the rate for the output of measured values in the result windows.
The setting is only effective in the continuous measurement mode. In the
case of sweeps and triggered measurements as well as with all
measurements via IEC/IEEE bus, results are always output at maximum
speed.
→ Max. output speed
→ 6 results/second
→ 3 results/second
→ 1 result/second

Meaning

E-10

2.15.5
OPTIONS panel
Read Resol

2.15.5
OPTIONS panel
Read Rate
→ MAX SPEED
→ 6/s
→ 3/s
→ 1/s

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters

Command

1078.2008.02

SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:COLor

SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:SELect

SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACe[]:LOAD

UPL

BLACk
DGRay
LGRay

GREen
YELLow
BLUE
CYAN
MAGenta
WHITe


1 to17

ALINe

ACOLor

DEFault

MANual

3.215

Parameter

Basic
unit

Newly assigned colors are only visible on the screen after the LOCAL mode
has been restored.

Shades of grey with monochrome display selected.

Assignment of color to the scan number specified with command
SYST:DISP:TRAC[1|2]:SEL  when color display is selected.

E-10

→ BLACK
→ DARK GRAY
→ LIGHT GRAY

2.15.5.4
OPTIONS panel
Color (A) / (B)
→ GREEN
→ YELLOW
→ BLUE
→ CYAN
→ MAGENTA
→ WHITE

2.15.5.4
OPTIONS panel
Scannr.(A)
Scannr.(B)

2.15.5.4
OPTIONS panel
Scan conf
→ MANUAL
→ DEFAULT
→ AUTO COLOR
→ AUTO LINE

→ For each scan of a trace group (to be selected with the subsequent
command SYST:DISP:TRAC[1|2]:SEL ) a color and the line pattern
can be selected for the display.
→ Automatic assignment of color and line pattern to max. 17 scans for Trace
A and Trace B. All scans of Trace A are green uninterrupted with thin
lines, those of Trace B yellow dotted with thin lines.
→ Automatic assignment of color to 17 scans for Trace A and Trace B. ALL
scans of Trace A in uninterrupted thin lines, all scans of Trace B in dotted
thin lines.
→ Automatic assignment of line pattern to 17 scans of Trace A and Trace B.
All scans of Trace A in green, all scans of Trace B in yellow.
Scan number of trace group to which a color or line pattern is to be assigned
with the two subsequent commands SYST:DISP:TRAC[1|2]:COL and
SYST:DISP:TRAC[1|2]:LINE for screen display.

Section

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters

Command

1078.2008.02

SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:LINE

UPL

SSOLid
SD
SP
SPD
DSOLid
DD
DP
DPD

3.216

Parameter

Basic
unit

The newly assigned line pattern is only visible on the screen after the LOCAL
mode has been restored.

Line patterns for the scan number specified with command
SYST:DISP:TRAC[1|2]:SEL .
→ thin continuous line
→ dashed line
→ dotted line
→ dash-dot line
→ three-times-wide continuous line
→ dashed line
→ dotted line
→ dash-dot line

Meaning

E-10

2.15.5.4
OPTIONS panel
Line (A) / (B)
→
→ -----→ ......
→ .-.-.→
→ ======
→ ::::::
→ :=:=:=

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters

Command

Version Display

1078.2008.02

SYSTem:AHARdware:VERSion?

SYSTem:SOFTware:VERSion?

3.10.8.9

UPL

3.217

Query:
SYST:AHAR:VERS?
ABO
SYST:AHAR:VERS?
ACOD
The response is
either the number of a
version (eg 0.01) or
-NA- (Not Available) if
the board is not
installed.

Query only

ABOard
ACODe

Query:
SYST:SOFT:VERS?
SOFT
SYST:SOFT:VERS?
SETU
The response is the
number of a version
(eg 3.05).

Query only

SOFTware
SETUp

Parameter

Basic
unit

→ Version number of analog board
→ Version number of generator source impedance with the
BAL output selected:
Query reply 0.00: generator source impedance 200 Ω
(standard value)
0.01: generator source impedance 150 Ω with the
standard generator source impedance changed
from 200 Ω to 150 Ω using the Modification Analog
Generator UPL-U3 (Order No. 1078.4900.02)

→ Version number of UPL software
→ Version number of setup

Meaning

E-10

2.15.7
OPTIONS panel
VERSIONS -----Anlg Board code

2.15.7
OPTIONS panel
VERSIONS -----Software
Setup

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters

Command

1078.2008.02

SYSTem:OPTions:VERSion?

SYSTem:DHARdware:VERSion?

UPL

B5
B21
B22
B10
B33
B6
B8

3.218

The response is either the number
of an option (eg 0.01), INST or NA- (Not Available) if the board or
option are not installed.

SPEaker
DAPRotocol
DAJItter
SQCOntrol

alias
LDG
B1
REMOte
B4
DAUDio
B2 | B29
Answer:
1.15 to 1.27
UPL16 (U8)
1.46 to 1.51
UPL-B2
2.16 to 2.23:
UPL-B29

Query:
SYST:DHAR:VERS?
CPU
SYST:DHAR:VERS?
DBO
The response is the
number of a version
(eg 0.05).

Query only

CPUboard
DBOard

Parameter

Basic
unit

→ Audio Monitor
→ Digital Audio Protocol
→ Jitter and Interface Test
→ Universal Sequence Controller
→ Line measurement to ITU-T33
→ Extended analyzer functions
→ Mobile Phone Test Set

Version display of options
→ Low Distortion Generator
→ Remote Control
B4)
→ Digital Audio I/O
Digital Audio 96 kHz
Acoustic measurements on GSM mobile stations

→ CPU board 3.86 | 4.86 (386-CPU, 486-CPU)
→ Version number of digital board

Meaning

(UPL-

(UPL-B5)
(UPL-B21)
(UPL-B22)
(UPL-B10)
(UPL-B33)
(UPL-B6)
(UPL-B8)

(UPL-B2)
(UPL-B29)
(UPL16)

(UPL-B1)

E-10

2.15.7
2.6.6
OPTIONS panel
OPTIONS ------B1 Low Dist
B4 Rem Ctrl
B2 DigAudio
B5 Speaker
B21 DA Prot
B22 DA Jitt
B10 Seq Ctrl
ITU-T O33
B6 Coher
B8 PhoneTst

2.15.7
OPTIONS panel
VERSIONS -----CPU board
Digl. Board

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters

OFF
ONCE

OFF

CALibrate:JITTer:AUTO

CALibrate

1078.2008.02

OFF
ON
ONCE

CALibrate:ZERO:AUTO

LDG

DCC

AUTO

OFF
ONCE

3.219

Parameter

CALibrate:LDG:AUTO

Command

3.10.8.10 Calibration

UPL

Basic
unit

2.15.6
OPTIONS panel
CALIBR. ANL
Zero Auto
→ OFF
→ ON
→ ONCE
2.15.6
OPTIONS panel
CALIBR. DIG
PhaseToRef
→ OFF
→ ONCE
2.15.6

→ No offset calibration
→ Offset calibration cyclic and after a change of analyzer/instrument.
→ Manual triggering of offset calibration; then reset to ON

→ No calibration of digital Phase to Ref measurement.
→ Manual triggering of automatic calibration of digital
Phase to Ref measurement; then reset to OFF.

→ No offset calibration.
Equivalent to CALibrate:ZERO:AUTO OFF.
→ Offset calibration cyclic and after a change of analyzer/instrument.
Equivalent to CALibrate:ZERO:AUTO ON.
→ Manual triggering of offset calibration; then reset to AUTO.
Equivalent to CALibrate:ZERO:AUTO ONCE.
→ Automatic calibration of low-distortion generator. This should be after one
hour of operation at the earliest.
Equivalent to CALibrate LDG:AUTO ONCE.

E-10

2.15.6
OPTIONS panel
CALIBR. GEN
LDG Auto
→ OFF
→ ONCE

Section

→ No calibration of low-distortion generator
→ Triggers an automatic calibration of the low-distortion generator.
This should be after one hour of operation at the earliest.

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters

1078.2008.02

SYSTem:LSPeed

Command

SLOW

FAST

3.220

Parameter

Basic
unit

Meaning

→ without restrictions, therefore slower than FAST
(default setting).

No manual
operation

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Auxiliary Parameters

Speed for loading setups and analyzer measurement functions
→ Loading setups and analyzer functions can be speeded up while
FAST is active.
(considerably faster than SLOW), given the following
minor restrictions:
• During loading of setups and changing analyzer functions the
graphics system is not initialized, IEC/IEEE-bus commands for the
graphics systems have no effect and are rejected with an error
message. K1 commands UPLGTLU und UPLGTLG
cannot be used for graphic display (see
section 3.16.4.3, Basic Extensions).
• When analyzer measurement functions are changed, the currently set
function is not stored, ie
after switching back to the previously set function, the parameters
of the slower mode (SYST:LSP SLOW) will be set.
• When an *RST is performed, the output of measurement results
is suppressed so as if the command DISP:ANN OFF were
output. When the IEC/IEEE-bus is quit,
(LOCAL key or IEC/IEEE-bus command GTL) the slower load
mode is set without the above-mentioned restrictions.

3.10.8.11 Loading Speed for Setups and Analyzer Measurement Functions

UPL

Query only

Query only

SENSe3:DATA1|2?

SENSe4:DATA?
DEG

Hz

V/FS

Depen
ding
on
FUNC

Basic
unit

Returns the measured value of the 4th analyzer (phase meter).

Returns the measured value of 3rd analyzer (frequency counter).
DATA1 selects input channel 1
DATA2 selects input channel 2.

Returns the measured value of the 2nd analyzer (peak voltage meter).
DATA1 selects input channel 1
DATA2 selects input channel 2.

Returns the measured value of the 1st analyzer for RMS, RMSS, PEAK,
QPE, DC, THD, THDN, MDIST, DFD and WAF functions.
DATA1 selects input channel 1
DATA2 selects input channel 2.

Meaning

3.15.8
No manual
control
Result display

3.15.8
No manual
control
Result display

3.15.8
No manual
control
Result display

3.15.8
No manual
control
Result display

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Data Input/Output

1078.2008.02

3.221

E-10

Write access to the measurement-result buffers is also possible with Universal Autorun Control (UPD-K1) or remote control (IEC/IEEE bus interface).
This is of particular interest for operation with BASIC macros:
• The measurement results calculated by a BASIC macro can be displayed in the usual measurement-result window.
• Any floating-point parameters and measurement results may be exchanged between the BASIC macro and the controller via the measurement-result buffers.
For a detailed example see 3.15.18 Call BASIC-Macro.

Query only

SENSe2:DATA1|2?

Parameter

Query only

Command

Commands for Data Output

SENSe[1]:DATA1|2?

3.10.9

UPL


0 to 1023
Query only
{,}


0 to 1023
Query only
{,}


0 to 1023
Query only
{,}

SENSe[1]:LIST:FREQuency:POINts?
SOURce:LIST:FREQuency:POINts?

SOURce:LIST:VOLTage

SOURce:LIST:VOLTage:POINts?

SOURce:LIST:ONTime

SOURce:LIST:ONTime:POINts?

SOURce:LIST:INTerval

1078.2008.02

{,}
{,}

REAL

ASCIi

3.222

Parameter

SENSe[1]:LIST:FREQuency
SOURce:LIST:FREQuency

Command

Commands for Input/Output of Block Data

FORMat[:DATA]

3.10.10

UPL

S

V

Hz

Basic
unit

Section

Specifies the block data for a sweep of the on-time to off-time ratio of the
burst signal or a sequence of measurements.

Returns the number of currently available block data for the on-time axis.

Specifies the block data for a sweep of the on-time and off-time ratio of the
burst signal or of a sequence of measurements.

Returns the number of currently available block data for the voltage axis.

Specifies the block data for a voltage sweep or the output voltage for a
sequence of measurements.

The two commands are identical and return the number of currently available
block data for the frequency axis.

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

These two commands are identical and specify the block data for a frequency 2.9.1.3
sweep or frequencies for a sequence of measurements. When limit or
No manual
equalization curves are specified, the frequencies are to be sorted in
control
ascending or descending order.

→ Determines the numeric format for block data only. Output of numbers with No manual
sign, point and possibly exponent (default).
control
→ Determines the numeric format for block data only. Output in binary
form. This setting is not stored in the setup and set to ASCII each
time the UPL is switched on.

Meaning

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Block Data Input/Output


0 to 1023
Query only
{,}


0 to 1023
Query only
{,}


0 to 1023
Query only
{,}


0 to 1023
Query only

SOURce:LIST:DWELl:POINts?

SOURce:LIST:DWELl:CONTrol[:DATA]

SOURce:LIST:DWELl:CONTrol:POINts?

SOURce:VOLTage:EQUalize[:DATA]

SOURce:VOLTage:EQUalize:POINts?

SOURce:EQUalize:CONTrol[:DATA]

SOURce:EQUalize:CONTrol:POINts?

1078.2008.02

{,}

SOURce:LIST:DWELl

3.223

Parameter


0 to 1023
Query only

Command

SOURce:LIST:INTerval:POINts?

UPL

s

Basic
unit

Returns the number of currently available block data for the frequency axis of
the equalization curve.

Specifies the block data for the frequency axis of the equalization curve.

Returns the number of currently available block data for the voltage
equalization list.

Specifies the block data for the voltage axis of the equalization curve.

Returns the number of currently available block data for the dwell time.

X axis for the dwell time.

Returns the number of currently available block data for the dwell time.

Specifies the block data for the dwell time of a sweep or a measurement
sequence.

Returns the number of currently available block data for the interval axis.

Meaning

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Block Data Input/Output

{,}


0 to 1024
Query only
{,}

{,}


0 to 1023
Query only
{,}


0 to 1023
Query only

SENSe:EQUalize:CONTrol[:DATA]

SENSe:EQUalize:CONTrol:POINts?

CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer[:DATA]

CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:TRACe

CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:POINts?

CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:CONTrol[:DATA]

CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:CONTrol:POINts?

1078.2008.02


0 to 1024
Query only

SENSe:VOLTage:EQUalize:POINts?

3.224

Parameter

{,}

Command

SENSe:VOLTage:EQUalize[:DATA]

UPL

1)

Basic
unit

2.9.1.3
No manual
operation

2.9.1.3
No manual
operation

Section

Returns the number of currently available block data for the X axis of the limit
curves.

Specifies the block data for the X axis of the limit curves

Returns the number of currently available block data for the Y axis of the
upper limit curve.

Returns the block data for the y axis of the upper limit trace interpolated
along the x axis. The command trac:points? list1 gives the number of
x values, which were used for interpolation. It is the same as the number of
interpolated y values for the upper limit trace.

Specifies the block data for the Y axis of the upper limit curve.

Returns the number of currently available block data values for the frequency
axis of the equalization curve for measurement functions THD+N and FFT.

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

E-10

2.9.1.3
Keine
Handbedienung

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
operation

Block data for frequency axis of equalization curve for measurement functions 2.9.1.3
THD+N and FFT.
No manual
operation

Returns the number of currently available block data values of the voltage
equalization list for measurement functions THD+N and FFT.

Block data for voltage axis of equalization curve for measurement functions
THD+N and FFT.

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Block Data Input/Output

{,}


Query only

Query only

{,}Query only


0 to 1023
Query only

CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:CONTrol[:DATA]

CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:CONTrol:POINts?

CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL?

CALCulate:LIMit:REPort[:DATA]?

CALCulate:LIMit:REPort:POINts?

3.225


0 to 1023
Query only

CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:POINts?

1078.2008.02

{,}

CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:TRACe

Parameter

{,}

Command

CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer[:DATA]

UPL

1)

Basic
unit

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

Section

Lim Low

ON
Lim Low

OFF
Lim Low

OFF

Lim Upp

ON
Lim Upp

ON
Lim Upp

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

Returns the number of currently available block data of limit violations.

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

Returns the block data of limit violations. Corresponds to the contents of a
2.9.1.3
Limt Report file as described in section 2.9.1.2 Loading and Storing of Series No manual
of Measured Values and Block/List Data
control

ON

Returns ON if Lim Upper values are exceeded or Lim Lower values are not
attained, otherwise OFF.

Returns the number of currently available block data for the X axis of the limit
curves.

Specifies the block data for the X axis of the limit curves.

Returns the number of currently available block data for the Y axis of the
lower limit curve.

E-10

Returns the block data for the y axis of the lower limit trace interpolated along 2.9.1.3
the x axis. The command trac:points? list1 gives the number of x
Keine
values, which were used for interpolation. It is the same as the number of
Handbedienung
interpolated y values for the lower limit trace.

Specifies the block data for the Y axis of the lower limit curve.

Meaning

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Block Data Input/Output

TRACe2,
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? TRAC2
Query reply  =
0 to 1023
Query only
LIST1, {,}
Query:
TRACe? LIST1
LIST1 
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? LIST1
Query reply  =
0 to 1023
Query only
LIST2, {,}
Query:
TRACe? LIST2

TRACe:POINts?

TRACe[:DATA]

TRACe:POINts?

TRACe[:DATA]

3.226

TRACe2, {,}
Query:
TRACe? TRACe2

TRACe[:DATA]

1078.2008.02

TRACe1
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? TRAC1
Query reply  =
0 to 1023

TRACe:POINts?

Parameter

TRACe1, {,}
Query:
TRACe? TRACe1

Command

TRACe[:DATA]

UPL

2)

2)

1)

1)

Basic
unit

Specifies the block data of the second (convoluted, nested) sweep list (Z
axis).

Returns the number of the currently available block data of the first
sweep list (X axis).

Specifies the block data of the first sweep list (X axis).

Returns the number of the currently available block data of the second
measurement sequence (Y2 axis).

Specifies the block data of the second measurement sequence (Y2 axis).

Returns the number of currently available block data of the first measurement
sequence (Y1 axis).

Specifies the block data of the first measurement sequence (Y1 axis).

Meaning

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Block Data Input/Output

REFerence2,{,}
Query:
TRACe? REF2
REFerence2
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? REF2
Query reply  =
0 to 1023
CREFerence1,{,<
n>}
Query:
TRACe? CREF1

TRACe[:DATA],

TRACe:POINts?

TRACe[:DATA],

3.227

REFerence1
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? REF1
Query reply  =
0 to 1023

TRACe:POINts?

1078.2008.02

REFerence1,{,}
Query:
TRACe? REF1

TRACe[:DATA]

Parameter

LIST2
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? LIST2
Query reply  =
0 to 1023

Command

TRACe:POINts?

UPL
Basic
unit

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

Section

Loads the running reference values for the X axis of trace A.

Returns the number of the currently available block data for the Y axis of
trace B.

Loads the running reference values for the Y axis of trace B

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

Returns the number of the currently available block data for the Y axis of trace 2.9.1.3
A.
No manual
control

Loads the running reference values for the Y axis.

Returns the number of the currently available block data of the second
(convoluted, nested) sweep list (Z axis).

Meaning

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Block Data Input/Output

CREFerence2
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? CREF2
Query reply  =
0 to 1023

TRACe:POINts?

1078.2008.02

3.228

1) Depending on DISPlay:TRACe:FEED and (with SENSe1:DATA) of SENSe1:FUNCtion
2) Depending on sweep selected for generator and analyzer.

CREFerence2,{,<
n>}
Query:
TRACe? CREF2

TRACe[:DATA]

Parameter

CREFerence1
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? CREF1
Query reply  =
0 to 1023

Command

TRACe:POINts?

UPL
Basic
unit

Returns the number of the currently available block data for the X axis of
trace B.

Loads the running reference values for the X axis of trace B

Returns the number of the currently available block data for the X axis of
trace A.

Meaning

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Block Data Input/Output



STATus:OPERation:ENABle



STATus:OPERation:NTRansition

1078.2008.02



STATus:OPERation:PTRansition

3.229

Example:
d2 and d5 set:
 = 36 (4 + 32)

....d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0

...

.... 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0

Query only

STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?

3.7.3.4
No manual
control

3.7.3.4
No manual
control

3.7.5
No manual
control

Section

If a bit is set in the NTRansition register, a transition from 1 to 0 of the
corresponding bit in the CONDition register causes 1 to be entered in the
corresponding bit of the EVENt register provided the corresponding bit in the
ENABle mask is set.
Default setting: every bit reset (65535 or 0xFFFF)

If a bit is set in the PTRansition register, the transition from 0 to 1 of the
corresponding bit in the CONDition register causes 1 to be entered in the
corresponding bit of the EVENt register provided the corresponding bit in the
ENABle mask is set.
Default setting: every bit reset (65535 or 0xFFFF)

3.7.3.4
No manual
control

3.7.3.4
No manual
control

Sets the ENABle mask which validates a bit in the EVENt register.
3.7.3.4
Example: When d5 is set in the ENABle mask, the "Waiting for Trigger" event No manual
is set in the EVENt register provided the bit has changed.
control
Dafault setting: every bit reset (0)

Outputs the content of the EVENt register as a decimal number. A bit set in
the EVENt register indicates a change of the corresponding bit in the
CONDition register. The entry in the PTRansition and NTRansition registers
determines whether a bit transition from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 causes an entry
in the EVENt register.
Reading out clears the register!

Outputs the contents of the CONDition register as a decimal number (current
value of Operating Status of UPL). For the weighting of the individual bits see
3.7.3.4 STATus:OPERation Register
Reading out does not clear the register.

Meaning

Query only

Basic
unit

STATus:OPERation:COND?

Parameter

Resets the Enable registers of the OPERation, QUEStionable and
XQUEstionable registers to 0. See 3.7.5 Resetting the Status Reporting
Systems.

Command

Commands for Status and Error Queries

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Status and Error Queries

STATus:PRESet

3.10.11

UPL







Query only

Query only



STATus:QUEStionable: ENABle

STATus:QUEStionable: PTRansition

STATus:QUEStionable: NTRansition

STATus:XQUEstionable:COND?

STATus:XQUEstionable[:EVENt]?

STATus:XQUEstionable: ENABle

1078.2008.02

Query only

STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?

3.230

Parameter

Query only

Command

STATus:QUEStionable:COND?

UPL
Basic
unit

See above.

See above.

Outputs the content of the CONDition register as a decimal number (current
value of XQuestionable Status of UPL). For the weighting of individual bits
see
3.7.3.6 STATus:XQUEStionable Register.
Reading out does not clear the register.

See above.

See above.

See above.

Outputs the contents of the EVENt register as a decimal number. A bit set in
the EVENt register indicates a change of the corresponding bit in the
CONDition register. The entry in the PTRansition and NTRansition registers
determines whether a bit transition from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 causes an entry
in the EVENt register.
Reading out clears the register!

Outputs the status of the CONDition register (current value of Questionable
Status of UPL) as a decimal number. For the weighting of the individual bits
see 3.7.3.5 STATus:QUEStionable Register.
Reading out does not clear the register.

Meaning

3.7.3.6
No manual
control

3.7.3.6
No manual
control

3.7.3.6
No manual
control

3.7.3.5
No manual
control

3.7.3.5
No manual
control

3.7.3.5
No manual
control

3.7.3.5
No manual
control

3.7.3.5
No manual
control

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Status and Error Queries

Query only

Query only

SYSTem:VERSion?

SYSTem:ERRor?

1078.2008.02

SYSTem:COMMunication:GTL



STATus:XQUEStionable: NTRansition

3.231

Parameter



Command

STATus:XQUEstionable: PTRansition

UPL
Basic
unit

Return to manual operation.
This command is only required in the case of remote-control via the RS-232
interface but can also be used for IEC/IEEE-bus operation and Universal
Sequence Controller UPL-B10.

Returns the last error message out of the error message queue. Error
messages consist of a number followed by text. Negative error numbers are
SCPI-defined, positive numbers are device-specific. If no error occurred, the
output is 0, "No error"
If the queue gets too long, the error message:
-350, "Queue overflow" is output.
With *CLS and upon power-on of the device, all error messages are cleared.

Returns the number of the associated SCPI version by specifying the year
with decimal point and one decimal digit.

See above.

See above.

Meaning

LACAL
keystroke

3.3.2
No manual
control

2.15.7
No manual
control

3.7.3.6
No manual
control

3.7.3.6
No manual
control

Section

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Status and Error Queries

3.232

2.11
START key
SINGLE key

Section

1078.2008.02

ABORt

INITiate:NEXT


CONTinuous

STOP

SINGle

Stops a measurement as if the STOP/CONT key were actuated during an
ongoing measurement. With the command INIT:CONT ON the measurement
is resumed.

Has the same effect as turning the spinwheel by  steps or pressing the
cursor keys (n=1 or n= −1). Makes the next step in the case of a manual
sweep or moves the graphics cursor provided the graphics panel is active.

This is only effective if the measurement was interrupted with INIT:FORC
STOP or ABOR or if the measurement was started with INIT:FORC SING or
INIT:CONT OFF and completed.

E-10

2.11
STOP/CONT key

2.11
Spinwheel

2.11
→ Taste START
→ Taste SINGLE
→ STOP function
of toggel key
STOP/CONT
→ CONT function
of toggel key
STOP/CONT

→ • A measurement in progress is immediately aborted.
• Trailing pointer, average and peak values are reset.
• A new continuous measurement is started.
(identical with command "INIT:CONT ON")
→ • A measurement in progress is immediately aborted.
• A new measurement is started.
(identical with command INIT:CONT OFF)
→ An ongoing measurement is stopped as if the STOP/CONT key
was pressed during the measurement (identical with command ABORt ).
The measurement is continued with INIT:FORC CONT.
→ • A new continuous measurement is started.
• Trailing pointer, average and peak values are not reset.

STARt

→ Presetting of continuous measurement.
→ Presetting of a single measurement which is triggered with
INITiate[:IMMediate] (see next command)!

Meaning

INITiate:FORCe

Basic
unit

2.11
Starts a single measurement. Command INITiate:CONTinuous ON|OFF
determines whether it is a continuous or a single measurement (see previous START key
SINGLE key
command).
The two INITiate commands simulate the function of the START or SINGLE
key. The following commands are to be entered:
START key:
INITiate:CONTinuous ON,
INITiate[:IMMediate]
SINGLE key:
INITiate:CONTinuous OFF, INITiate[:IMMediate]

ON
OFF

Parameter

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Synchronization

INITiate[:IMMediate]

Command

Commands for Synchronization

INITiate:CONTinuous

3.10.12

UPL

1078.2008.02

:MMEM:DATA ’filename’, # 2 2 0

Example:

Meaning

Example:

3.233

The ASCII character # initiates binary block transfer

Number of digits of subsequent length information in ASCII

Length in ASCII of binary data record in bytes

MMEM:DATA 'MYSETUP.SAC',#48561
MMEM:DATA '\UPL\USER\MYSETUP.SAC',#48561

3.10.13
3.17.5
No manual
control

E-10

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Binary Data via IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface

If ’filename’ contains no path information, the command stores the subsequent binary data in
the current working directory of the UPL. The current working directory of the UPL is the
directory specified under Work Dir in the FILE Panel of the UPL.
If ’filename’ contains a path that exists in the UPL, the binary data are stored in this path.
If ’filename’ contains a path that does not exist in the UPL, the error message "Could not
write to file" is output.
This command therefore allows the transfer of any files of any length from the process
controller to the UPL.
If a data record to be transferred to the UPL is in the form of a file, its precise length can be
determined by means of the DOS command DIR. The value thus obtained is to be specified
in the command MMEM:DATA under "Length of subsequent binary data".
To allow file transfer from a process controller to the UPL not only for experienced C- and
IEC/IEEE-bus programmers, the DOS programs IEC_BT.EXE and UPMD5.EXE will be
supplied with the UPL as from UPL software version 2.0 (see „Initial Steps“, „Transfer of File
to UPL“ and following).

< any binary data (20 bytes) >

Length of subsequent length information
of binary data
:
Length of subsequent binary data
: Any binary codes of any length

:

’filename’, #

Parameters

Binary Data via IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface

MMEMory:DATA

Command

3.10.13

UPL

Query only

’filename’

Parameters

Example: MMEM:CHEC?, ’\UPL\USER\MYSETUP.SAC’
Reply (for example):
"4edb9481dc7b1fb27393c10c950cf9c1"

This command determines the MD5 signature of a file.
If ’filename’contains no path information, the command determines the MD5 signature of
the specified file in the current working directory of the UPL. The current working directory of
the UPL is the directory specified under Work Dir in the FILE Panel of the UPL.
If ’filename’ contains a path that exists in the UPL, the MD5 signature of the associated
file is determined.
If ’filename’ contains a path that does not exist in the UPL, the error message "Execution
error" is output.
A 32-digit signature of the specified file is returned in response to the query.
To check whether the contents of a file were transferred error-free from the process controller
to the UPL, the MD5 signature method can be used to generate, from the UPL path
C:\UPL\IEC_EXAM and prior to the transfer, a digital signature of the file on the process
controller using the program UPMD5.EXE. After the transfer of the file to the UPL via the
IEC/IEEE bus, a digital signature of the transferred file is generated by means of the command
MMEMory:CHECk? ’filename’. If the two signatures agree, it can be assumed that the file
contents are identical and the transfer was therefore error-free. Moreover, it can be determined
in this way whether any subsequent modifications have been made to a file.

1078.2008.02

Explanation

3.234

3.10.13
3.17.5
No manual
control

E-10

Section

IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands: Binary Data via IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface

Settings without Corresponding IEC/IEEE-Bus Command

Command

• Setting the contrast for UPL monochrome display
• Selection of remote control in the OPTIONS panel with remote via IEC/COM2

3.10.14

MMEMory:CHECk?

UPL

UPL

3.11

Alphabetical List of Commands

Alphabetical List of IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands
Command

Parameter

ABORt

Section
2.11
Taste STOP/CONT

ARM:FREQuency:STARt
ARM:FREQuency:STOP


Value range determined by
instrument or function

2.6.4
ANLR-Panel
Start  Stop

ARM:LEVel:MIN


Analog instruments
10 mV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
1µFS to 1.0 FS

2.6.4
ANLR-Panel
Min VOLT

ARM:VOLTage:STARt
ARM:VOLTage:STOP


Analog instruments
10 mV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
1 mFS to 1.0 FS

2.6.4
ANLR-Panel
Start  Stop

CALCulate:EQUalize:FEED

TRACe1
TRACe2

2.9.1.2
FILE-Panel
Volt Source
→ TRACE A
→ TRACE B

CALCulate:EQUalize:INVert

ON
OFF

2.9.1.2
FILE-Panel
Invert 1/n
→ ON
→ OFF

CALCulate:EQUalize:NORMfreq


fmin to fmax

2.9.1.2
FILE-Panel
Norm Freq

CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL?


Query only

2.10.7
keine
Handbedienung

CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:CONTrol:POINts?


Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:CONTrol[:DATA]

{,}

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:POINts?


0 to 1023
Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:STATe

ON
OFF

2.10.7
DISP-Panel
LIMIT CHECK
Mode
→ LIM LOWER
→ OFF

1078.2008.02

3.235

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:TRACe

{,}

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:VALue



2.10.7
DISP-Panel
Lim Lower
→ VALUE:

CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer[:DATA]

{,}

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

CALCulate:LIMit:ON

TRACe1
TRACe2
TR1And2

2.10.7
DISP-Panel
Check
→ TRACE A
→ TRACE B
→ TRACE A+B

CALCulate:LIMit:REPort:POINts?


0 to 1023
Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

CALCulate:LIMit:REPort[:DATA]?

{,}
Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:CONTrol:POINts?


0 to 1023
Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:CONTrol[:DATA]

{,}

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:POINts?


0 to 1023
Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:STATe

ON
OFF

2.10.7
DISP-Panel
LIMIT CHECK
Mode
→ LIM UPPER
Mode
→ OFF

CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:TRACe

{,}

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:VALue



2.10.7
DISP-Panel
Lim Upper
→ VALUE:

CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer[:DATA]

{,}

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

1078.2008.02

3.236

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:AVERage


1 to 256

Section
2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Average

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:AVERage:TCON NORMal
trol EXPonential

2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Avg Mode
→ NORMAL
→ EXPONENTIAL

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:CENTer


Value range determined by
instrument or function

2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Center

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:FFT

S256
S512
S1K
S2K
S4K
S8K

2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
FFT Size
→ 256
→ 512
→ 1024
→ 2048
→ 4096
→ 8192

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:MTIMe?


Query only

2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:RESolution?


Query only

2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Resolution

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:SPAN?


Query only

2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Span

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STARt?
CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STOP?


Query only

2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Start / Stop

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:STATe

OFF
ON

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
POST FFT
→ OFF
→ ON

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:WINDow

RECTangular
HANNing
BLACkman_harris
RIF1
RIF2
RIF3
HAMMing
FLATtop
KAISer

2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Window
→ RECTANG...
→ HANN
→ BLACKMAN H
→ RIFE VINC 1
→ RIFE VINC 2
→ RIFE VINC 3
→ HAMMING
→ FLAT TOP
→ KAISER

1078.2008.02

3.237

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:WINDow:BETAf  = 1 to 20
actor

2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
ß-Factor

CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:ZOOM


1 to 128
for iInstrument
A22 u. D48:
n = 1,2,4,8,16,32,64,128 A110:
n = 1,2,4,8,16
n = 1: Zooming aus

2.6.5.12
ANLR-Panel
Zoom-FFT

CALibrate

OFF
Equivalent to
CAL:ZERO:AUTO OFF
AUTO
Equivalent to
CAL:ZERO:AUTO ON
DCC
Equivalent to
CAL:ZERO:AUTO ONCE
LDG
Equivalent to
CAL LDG:AUTO ONCE

2.15.6

CALibrate:JITTer:AUTO

OFF
ONCE

2.15.6
OPTIONS-Panel
CALIBR. DIG
PhaseToRef
→ OFF
→ ONCE

CALibrate:LDG:AUTO

OFF
ONCE

2.15.6
OPTIONS-Panel
CALIBR. GEN
Low Dist
→ OFF
→ ONCE

CALibrate:ZERO:AUTO

OFF
ON
ONCE

2.15.6
OPTIONS-Panel
CALIBR. ANL
Zero Auto
→ OFF
→ ON
→ ONCE

CONFigure:DAI

BRM
HRM

2.15.9
OPTIONS-Panel
Sampl Mode
→ BASE RATE
→ HIGH RATE

DISPlay:ACTualize

ON
OFF

No manual
control

1078.2008.02

3.238

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Section

Parameter

DISPlay:ANNotation[:ALL]

ON
OFF

2.15.5
OPTIONS-Panel
Meas Disp
→ ON
→ OFF
Ext. Keyboard:
CTRL D

DISPlay:CONFiguration

P
SP
AP
GP
FP
DP
OP
GAT
GAO
GAD
FAT
FAO
FAD
SHON
SHOFf

2.3.1
Keys

Ext. UPL
keyboar

d
GEN
ALT+G
ANLR
ALT+A
FILT
ALT+T
FILE
ALT+F
DISP
ALT+D
GRAPH ALT+R
ZOOM
ALT+Z
SHOW I/O
ALT+I
OPTIONS ALT+O

DISPlay:MODE

INTern
COLBoth
BWBoth
AUTO

2.15.5
OPTIONS-Panel
Extrn Disp
→ INTERN ONLY
→ BOTH COLOR
→ BOTH B/W
→ BOTH AUTO

DISPlay:PROTocol:CHSTatus?

Query only
Response::
NO
LTC
YES

2.10.8
GRAPH-Panel
Display

DISPlay:PROTocol:ERRor:GENeral?

Query only
Response::
UBB
SQB
NSYN
PRMB
SQLR
RERR
NONE

2.10.8
GRAPH-Panel
Display

DISPlay:PROTocol:ERRor:LCRC?


Query only

2.10.8
GRAPH-Panel
Display

DISPlay:PROTocol:ERRor:PARity?


Query only

2.10.8
GRAPH-Panel
Display

DISPlay:PROTocol:ERRor:RCRC?


Query only

2.10.8
GRAPH-Panel
Display

1078.2008.02

3.239

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

DISPlay:PROTocol:FORMat

BINary
HEXadecimal
ASCii
FILE

2.10.8
DISP-Panel
Format
→ BIN
→ HEX
→ ASCII
→ FILE DEF

DISPlay:PROTocol:LR?

Query only
Response:
EQUAL
DIFF’

2.10.8
GRAPH-Panel
Display

DISPlay:PROTocol:LVALbit?

Query only
Response:
Y0
N1

2.10.8
GRAPH-Panel
Display

DISPlay:PROTocol:RVALbit?

Query only
Response::
Y0
N1

2.10.8
GRAPH-Panel
Display

DISPlay:PROTocol:SELect

LCHannelstatus
RCHannelstatus
LUSerdata
RUSerdata

2.10.8
DISP-Panel
Source
→ CHAN STAT L
→ CHAN STAT R
→ USER DATA L
→ USER DATA R

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT:LOCate

[,]

2.10.1
DISP-Panel
X Pos, Y Pos

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TEXT[:DATA]

’string’

2.10.1
DISP-Panel
COMMENT

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe:X:LABel

’string’

2.10.2
DISP-Panel
Unit/Label

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:AUToscale alias
AUTOscale

2.10.2
Softkey
F7 (AUTOSCALE)
→ F6 (ALL)

recorded:
1 to 100,000
stored:
17 traces max.

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:COUNt

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[]:DATA1?
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[]:DATA2?
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[]:DATA3?

1078.2008.02

3.240

Query only

2.10
DISP-Panel
Scan Count

2.10.2
Display in
graphics window

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

Section

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[1]:MODE

N12
D12
OFF

2.10.2
Softkey
F8: sel. Ο-CURS.
F9: (Ο-CURSOR)
→ F6 (A,B)
→ F7 (A-B)
→ F11 (ON/OFF)

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[1|2]

ACTive

2.10.2
DISP-Panel
Softkey level 1
F8

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[1|2]:POSition



2.10.2
nicht über Softkey
bedienbar

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor[1|2]:POSition:M MIN1
ODE MIN2

2.10.2
Softkey
F8 sel. Ο-CURS
or *-CURS.
→ F10 (SET TO)
→ ---→ ---→ F6 (I MAX A)
→ F7 (MAX A)
→ F8 (I MAX B)
→ F9 (MAX B)
→ F10 (MARKER)
→ F11 (NXT
HARM)

I MAX1
MAX1
I MAX2
MAX2
MARKer1
NEXTmarker
VALue

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:CURSor2:MODE

N12
D12
C12
HL1
HL2
HLD1
HLD2
OFF

2.10.2
Softkey
F8 sel. Ο-CURSOR
F9 sel. *-CURSOR
→ F6 (A,B)
→ F7 (A-B)
→ F8 (* - Ο)
→ F9 (HLINE)
→A
→ F9 (HLINE)
→B
→ F9 (HLINE)
→ ∆A
→ F9 (HLINE)
→ ∆B
→ F11 (ON/OFF)

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:INDex


1 to 17

2.9.3.3
Tasten
PAGE UP /
PAGE DOWN

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:LABel

ON
OFF

2.10.2
DISP-Panel
User Label
→ ON
→ OFF

1078.2008.02

3.241

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:MODE

DELete_bef_wr
WATerfall|CASCade
MAXHold

2.10
DISP-Panel
Mode
→ DEL BEF WR
→ WATERFALL
→ MAX HOLD

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:OPERation

CURVeplot
LIST alias TLISt
ERRors
BARGraph
SPECtrum
FFTList
FFTErrors
PROTocol
AUToprotocol alias AUTOprotocol

2.10
DISP-Panel
OPERATION
→ CURVE PLOT
2.10.2
→ SWEEP LIST
2.10.4
→ SWP LIM REP
2.10.4
→ BARGRAPH
2.10.2
→ SPECT LIST
2.10.8
→ SPC LIM REP
2.10.6
PROTOCOL
2.10
2.10.8
→ PROTO AUTO

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X:SPACing

LINear
LOGarithmic

2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X[:SCALe]:AUTO

ON
OFF

2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Scale
→ AUTO
→ MANUAL
or
Softkey
F7 (AUTOSCALE)
→ F9 (X)

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X[:SCALe]:LEFT
DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X[:SCALe]:RIGHT



2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Left
Right

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X[:SCALe]:RLEVel



2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Reference
→ VAQLUE

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:X[:SCALe]:UNIT

V
Hz
s
and so on
see 3.10.4 Units for IEC
Measurement Results

2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Unit

1078.2008.02

3.242

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:Y:AUTO

ONCE
OFF

Section
2.10.2
DISP-Panel
Scale
→ AUTO ONCE
→ MANUAL
ONCE via Softkey
F7 (AUTOSCALE)
→ F7 (A)
→ F8 (B)

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel



2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Reference
→ VALUE

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:Y[:SCALe]:UNIT


see 3.10.4 Units for IEC
Measurement Results

2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Unit

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[]:ZOOM


0
1
–1
2
3
4

2.10.2
Softkey
F10 (ZOOM)
→ F10 (UNZOOM)
→ F6 (AT o UP)
→ F7 (AT o
DOWN)
→ F8 (CEN TO o)
→ F9 (o TO *)
→ F11 (UNDO)

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1]:Y:LABel

'string'

2.10.2
DISP-Panel
Unit/Label

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:CURVe

OFF
ON

2.10.2
Softkey
→ F6 (CURVE)
→ F6 (A ON/OFF)
→ F7 (B ON/OFF)

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:FEED

'SENSe1:DATA1'
'SENSe1:DATA2'
'SENSe2:DATA1'
'SENSe2:DATA2'
'SENSe3:DATA1'
'SENSe3:DATA2'
’HOLD'
'FILE'
'DFILe’
'OFF'

2.10.1
DISP-Panel
TRACE A/B
→ FUNC CH1
→ FUNC CH2
→ INP RMS CH1
→ INP RMS CH2
→ FREQ CH1
→ FREQ CH2
→ PHASE
→ GROUP DEL
→ HOLD
→ FILE
→ DUAL FILE
→ OFF

1078.2008.02

3.243

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:MARKer:HARMonics

ON
OFF

2.10.2
Softkey
F11 (MARKER)
F6 (TRACE A)
or
F7 (TRACE B)
selects
→ F10 (HARM)
on/off

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:MARKer:MODE

MAXimum
CURSor
OFF

2.10.2
Softkey
F11 (MARKER)
F6 (TRACE A)
or
F7 (TRACE B)
selects
→ MAX
→ CURSOR
→ VIEW OFF

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y:SPACing

LINear
LOGarithmic

2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO

ONCE
OFF

2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Scale
→ AUTO ONCE
→ MANUAL

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom



2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Bottom

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:NORMaliz
e


10-12 to 106
or
–200 dB to 120 dB

2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Normalize

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:NORMaliz CURSor[1] (o-Cursor)
e:MODE CURSor2 (*-Cursor)
VALue

1078.2008.02

3.244

2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Normalize
→ o-Cursor
→ *-Cursor
→ VALue

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:M VALue
ODE MAXimum
CURSor[1]
CURSor 2
FILE
HOLD
OTRAce
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
GENTrack
IFILe
REF997
REF1000

Section
2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Reference
→ VALUE
→ MAX
→ oCURSOR
→ *CURSOR
→ FILE
→ HOLD
→ OTHER TRACE
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ GEN TRACK
→ FILE INTERN
→ REF 997 Hz
→ REF 1000 Hz

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1|2]:Y[:SCALe]:TOP



2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Top

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe2:Y:LABel

’string’

2.10.2
DISP-Panel
Unit/Label

DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe2:Y[:SCALe]:EQUal

ON
OFF

2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Scale B
→ EQUAL A
→ NOT EQUAL A

FORMat[:DATA]

ASCIi
REAL

No manual
control

HCOPy:ABORt

1078.2008.02

2.14
Taste H COPY
or CTRL F8

3.245

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

HCOPy:DESTination
PRSPc alias PRINter
PLHPgl alias PLOTter
PRPS
PRHPgl

FIPCx, ’filename.PCX’ alias
PCXFile, ’name.PCX’

Section
2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Destin
(Ziel/Format)
→ PRINTR/SPC
→ PLOTTR/HPGL
→ PRINTR/HPGL
→ PRINTR/PS
→ FILE/PCX
→ FILE/HPGL
→ FILE/PS
→ FILE/EPS

FIHPgl, ’filename.GL’ alias
HPGLfile, ’name.GL’
FIPS, ’filename.PS’
FIEPs, ’filename.EPS’
Query response:
PRIN
PLOT
PRHP
PRPS
PCXF
HPGL
FIPS
FIEP

HCOPy:DEVice:COLor

ON
OFF

2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
COLOR
→ ON
→ OFF

HCOPy:DEVice:PRINter



2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Printname

HCOPy:DEVice:RESolution

HIGH
MEDium
LOW

2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Prn Resol
→ HIGH
→ MEDIUM
→ LOW

HCOPy:ITEM

ALL
GRATicule
TRACe

2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Copy
→ SCREEN
→ CURVE/GRID
→ CURVE

HCOPy:ITEM:FRAMe

WHITe
FDEFined

2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Frame
→ WHITE
→ FILE DEF

1078.2008.02

3.246

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

Section

HCOPy:ITEM:LABel:STATe

ON
OFF

2.14
Taste H COPY
or Ctrl F8

HCOPy:PAGE:LENGth?


Query only

2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Prn Height

HCOPy:PAGE:LMARgin


0 to 80

2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
LEFT MRGN

HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation

LANDscape
PORTtrait

2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
ORIENTATION
→ LANDSCAPE
→ PORTRAIT

HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe:X


0.1 to 10

2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
X-SCALING

HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe:Y


0.1 to 10

2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Y-SCALING

HCOPy:PAGE:WIDTh?


Query only

2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Prn Width,

HCOPy:PLADdress


0 to 31

2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
→ IEC Adr

HCOPy:PLOTs


1 to 6

2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Plots/Page

HCOPy:PLPort

COM2
LPT1
IEC

2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Plot on
→ COM 2
→ LPT 1
→ IEC BUS

HCOPy:SIZE
A4
LETTer

HCOPy:WAIT

2.14
No manual
control

HCOPy[:IMMediate]

1078.2008.02

2.14
OPTIONS-Panel
Paper Size
→ A4
→ LETTER

CNF
CF
NCNF
NCF
CONFig

3.247

2.14
Taste H COPY or
CTRL F8

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

INITiate:CONTinuous

ON
OFF

INITiate:FORCe
STARt
SINGle
STOP
CONTinuous

INITiate:NEXT



INITiate[:IMMediate]

Section
2.11
Taste START
Taste SINGLE
2.11
→ Taste START
→ Taste SINGLE
→ STOP function
of toggel key
STOP/CONT
→ CONT function
of toggel key
STOP/CONT
2.11
Drehrad
2.11
Taste START
Taste SINGEL

INPut:FILTer[:LPASs]:FREQuency

 Query only
10 Hz | 20 Hz

2.6.1
ANLR-Panel
Min Freq

INPut[]:AUDiobits


Value range see 2.6.3
Configuration of the Digital
Analyzer

2.6.3
ANLR-Panel
Audio Bits

INPut[]:SAMPle:FREQuency


Opt. UPL-B2 (Digital Audio I/O)
27 kHz to 55 kHz
Opt. UPL-B29 im Base Rate Mode
40 kHz to 55 kHz
Opt. UPL-B29 im High Rate Mode
40 kHz to 106 kHz

2.6.3
ANLR-Panel
Sample Frq
→ VALUE:

INPut[]:SAMPle:FREQuency:MODE

F32
F44
F48
F88
F96
VALue
AUTO
CHSTatus

2.6.3
ANLR-Panel
Sample Frq
→ 32 kHz
→ 44.1 kHz
→ 48 kHz
→ 88.2 kHz
→ 96.0 kHz
→ VALUE:
→ AUTO
→ CHAN STATUS

INPut[]:SELect

CH1
CH2
CH1And2
CH1Is2
CH2Is1
BOTH

2.6.2
2.6.3
ANLR-Panel
CHANNEL(s)
→1
→2
→1&2
→1≡2
→2≡1
→ BOTH

1078.2008.02

3.248

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

Section

INPut[1|2]:COUPling

AC
DC

2.6.2
ANLR-Panel
CH1 Coupl
CH2 Coupl
→ AC
→ DC

INPut[1|2]:IMPedance

R300
R600
R200K

2.6.2
ANLR-Panel
Imped
→ 300 Ω
→ 600 Ω
→ 200 kΩ

INPut[1|2]:LOW

FLOat
GROund

2.6.2
ANLR-Panel
Common
→ FLOAT
→ GROUND

INPut[1|2]:TYPE

BALanced
GEN1
GEN2
AESebu
SPDif
OPTical
INTern

2.6.2
2.6.3
ANLR-Panel
Input
→ BAL XLR
→ GEN1
→ GEN2
→ GEN CROSSED
→ BAL (XLR)
→ UNBAL (XLR)
→ OPTICAL
→ INTERN

INSTrument[1]:NSELect

1
3

2.5.1
GEN-Panel
INSTRUMENT
→ ANALOG
→ DIGITAL

INSTrument[1][:SELect]

A25
D48

2.5.1
GEN-Panel
INSTRUMENT
→ ANALOG
→ DIGITAL

INSTrument2:NSELect

1
2
4

2.6.1
ANLR-Panel
INSTRUMENT
→ ANLG 22 kHz
→ ANLG 110 kHz
→ DIGITAL

INSTrument2[:SELect]

A22
A110
D48

2.6.1
ANLR-Panel
INSTRUMENT
→ ANLG 22 kHz
→ ANLG 110 kHz
→ DIGITAL

MMEMory:CDIRectory

’pathname’

2.9.2
FILE-Panel
Work Dir

1078.2008.02

3.249

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

MMEMory:CHECk?

’filename’

3.10.13
3.15.20
3.17.5
keine
Handbedienung

MMEMory:COPY

’filename1’,’filename2’

2.9.2
FILE-Panel
Copy + To

MMEMory:DATA

’filename’

3.10.13
3.15.20
3.17.5
keine
Handbedienung

MMEMory:DELete

’filename’

2.9.2
FILE-Panel
Delete

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

LIMUpper, ’filename’
Query-Form
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? LIMU

2.10.7
DISP-Panel
Lim Upper
→ FILE + filename

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

LIMLower, ’filename’
Query-Form
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? LIML

2.10.7
DISP-Panel
Lim Lower
→ FILE + filename

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

EQUalize,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? EQU

2.5.4.3
2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Equal File
→ FILE + filename

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

ARBitrary,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? ARB

2.5.4.9
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
Shape File
→ FILE + filename

RANDom,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? RAND

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

DWELl,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? DWEL

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Dwell File
→ FILE + filename

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

FREQuency[1|2],’filename’

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
FREQ FILE
→ FILE + filename

Query-Form
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? FREQ[1|2]

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

FREQuency,’filename’
Query-Form
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? FREQ

1078.2008.02

3.250

2.6.5.3
2.9.1.3
ANLR-Panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ FILE + filename

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

INTerval,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? INT

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

ONTime,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? ONT

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

VOLTage[1|2],’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? VOLT[1|2]

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

DWELl2,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? DWEL2

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

FREQuency2,’filename’
Query-Form
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? FREQ2

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

VOLTage2,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? VOLT2

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

EQUalize,’filename’.
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? EQU

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST

EQUalize,’filename’
Query form:
MMEM:LOAD:LIST? EQU

Section
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN-Panel
INTV FILE
→ FILE + filename
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN-Panel
ONTIM FILE
→ FILE + filename
2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
VOLT FILE
→ FILE + filename
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
Dwell File
→ FILE + filename
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN
FREQUENCY
FREQ FILE
→ FILE + filename
2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN
VOLTAGE | AMPL
VOLT FILE
→ FILE + filename
2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Equal.File
→ FILE + filename
2.5.4.1.1
GEN-Panel
Equal.File

MMEMory:LOAD:LIST SENSe,

’filename’

2.6.5.7
2.6.5.12
ANL Panel
Equal. file

MMEMory:LOAD:LPGC,

’filename’

2.5.3.2
GEN-Panel
Filename

MMEMory:LOAD:PAC,

’filename’

2.10.8
DISP-Panel
Proto File

1078.2008.02

3.251

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

MMEMory:LOAD:PAU,

’filename’

2.10.8
DISP-Panel
Proto File

MMEMory:LOAD:PGU,

’filename’

2.5.3.2
GEN-Panel
Filname

MMEMory:LOAD:RPGC,

’filename’

2.5.3.2
GEN-Panel
Filename

MMEMory:LOAD:STATe

0|2|4, ’filename’

2.9.1.1
FILE-Panel
Mode / Filename

Query:
MMEM:LOAD:STAT? 0
MMEM:LOAD:STAT? 2
MMEM:LOAD:STAT? 4

MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe

TRACe[1|2],’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:TRAC? TRAC[1|2]

MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe[1|2]

REFTrace,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:LOAD:TRAC[1|2]? REFT

2.10.1
DISP-Panel
TRACE A/B
→ FILE + Filename
2.10.1
DISP-Panel
Reference
→ FILE +
Reference

MMEMory:STORe:FORMat

BIN
ASCii
EXPort

2.9.1.2
FILE-Panel
Format
→ REAL
→ ASCII
→ EXPORT

MMEMory:STORe:INFOtext

’string’

2.9.1.1
FILE-Panel
Info Text

MMEMory:STORe:LIST

LIST[1|2],
DWELl[1|2],
ERRors,
LIMUpper,
LIMLower,
EQUalize,

’filename’
’filename’
’filename’
’filename’
’filename’
’filename’

Query:
MMEM:STOR:LIST? LIST[1|2]
MMEM:STOR:LIST? DWEL[1|2]
MMEM:STOR:LIST? LIMU
MMEM:STOR:LIST? LIML
MMEM:STOR:LIST? EQU

MMEMory:STORe:STATe

0|2,’filename’
Query:
MMEM:STOR:STAT? 0
MMEM:STOR.STAT? 2

1078.2008.02

3.252

2.9.1.2
FILE-Panel
Store
→ X-Axis
→ Z-Axis
→ DWEL VALUE
→ LIM REPORT
→ LIM UPPER
→ LIM LOWER
→ EQUALIZATN

2.9.1.1
FILE-Panel
Mode / Filename

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

Section

MMEMory:STORe:STATe:RONLy

ON
OFF

2.9.1.1
FILE-Panel
Attrib
→ READ ONLY
→ READ/WRITE

MMEMory:STORe:TRACe

TRACe[1|2],’filename’
TR1And2,’filename’

2.9.1.2
FILE-Panel
Store
→ TRACE A
→ TRACE B
→ TRACE A+B

Query:
MMEM:STOR:TRAC? TRAC[1|2]
MMEM:STOR:TRAC? TR1A

OUTPut

ON
OFF

2.13
Taste
OUTPUT OFF

OUTPut:AUDiobits

 = 8 to 24

2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Audio Bits

OUTPut:DIGital:CSIMulator

OFF
SIMLong

2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Cable Sim
→ OFF
→ LONG CABLE

OUTPut:DIGital:REFerence:FEED

AINPut
AINReclock
AOUTput
RGENerator

2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Ref Out
→ AUDIO IN
→ AUD IN RCLK
→ AUDIO OUT
→ REF GEN

OUTPut:DIGital:SYNC:FEED

AIPut
GCLock
RINPut
SPLL

2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Sync Out
→ AUDIO IN
→ GEN CLK
→ REF IN
→ SYNC PLL

OUTPut:DIGital:SYNC:TYPE

WCLock
BCLock

2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Type
→ WORD CLK
→ BIPHASE CLK

OUTPut:DIGital:UNBalanced:FEED

AOUTput
AINPut

2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Unbal Out
→ AUDIO OUT
→ AUDIO IN

1078.2008.02

3.253

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

OUTPut:IMPedance

R10
R200
R150 (Query response = R200)
R600

2.5.2
GEN-Panel
Impedance
→ 10 Ω
→ 200 Ω
→ 150 Ω
→ 600 Ω

OUTPut:SAMPle:FREQuency


, Opt. UPL-B2 (Digital Audio I/O):
27 kHz to 55 kHz (UPL-B2)
Opt. UPL-B29 (Dig. Audio 96 kHz):
40 kHz to 106

2.5.3
GEN-Panel

OUTPut:SAMPle[:FREQuency]:MODE

F32
F44
F48
F88
F96
EXTern
SYNChron
VALue

2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Sample Freq
→ 32 kHz
→ 44.1 kHz
→ 48 kHz
→ 88.2 kHz
→ 96 kHz
→ EXTERN
→ SYNCHRON
→ VALUE:

OUTPut:SELect

OFF
CH1
CH2
CH2Is1

2.5.2
2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Channel(s)
→ OFF
→1
→2
→2≡1

OUTPut:SIGNal:BALanced:LEVel



2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Bal Vpp

OUTPut:SIGNal:LEVel



2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Unbal Vpp

OUTPut:TYPE

BALanced
UNBalanced

2.5.2
GEN-Panel
Output
→ BAL
→ UNBAL

OUTPut:VALidity

CH1And2
NONE

2.5.3.2
GEN-Panel
Validity

OUTPut2:IMPedance

R10
R200
R600

2.5.5
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
Impedance
→ 10 Ω
→ 200 Ω
→ 600 Ω

1078.2008.02

3.254

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

Section

OUTPut2:SELect

OFF
CH1
CH2
CH2Is1

2.5.5
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
Channel(s)
→ OFF
→1
→2
→2≡1

OUTPut2:TYPE

UNBalanced
BALanced

2.5.5
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
Output
→ UNBAL
→ BAL

SENSe:DIGital:FEED

ADATa
JPHase
CINPut

2.6.3.1
ANLR-Panel
Meas Mode
→ AUDIO DATA
→ JITTER/PHAS
→ COMMON/INP

SENSe:DIGital:SYNC:REFerence

GCLock
PLLVari
PLL32
PLL44
PLL48
PLL88
PLL96

2.6.3
ANLR-Panel
Related to
→ GEN CLK
→ VARI (PLL)
→ 32.0 (PLL)
→ 44.1 (PLL)
→ 48.0 (PLL)
→ 88,2 (PLL)
→ 96.0 (PLL)

SENSe:DIGital:SYNC:SOURce

AINPut
RINPut

2.6.3
ANLR-Panel
Sync To
→ AUDIO IN
→ REF IN

SENSe:EQUalize:CONTrol:POINts?


0 to 1024
Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
operation

SENSe:EQUalize:CONTrol[:DATA]

{,}

2.9.1.3
No manual
operation

SENSe:FREQuency:FACTor

 MLT
1 to 20 for RMS-Sel. measurement

2.6.5.3
2.6.5.23
ANLR-Panel
FREQ MODE
→ Factor

SENSe:SWEep:SYNC

NORMal
BLOCk

2.6.5.1
2.6.5.23
ANLR-Panel
Sweep Mode
→ NORMAL
→ BLOCK

1078.2008.02

3.255

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

SENSe:UFILter[1 to 9]:ORDer

N4
N8

2.7.2
FILTER-Panel
Order
→4
→8

SENSe:VOLTage:EQUalize:POINts?


0 to 1024
Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
operation

SENSe:VOLTage:EQUalize[:DATA]

{,}

2.9.1.3
No manual
operation

SENSe:VOLTage:EQUalize[:STATe]
ON
OFF

SENSe:VOLTage:INTV:MODE

OFF
FORever
SMOoth
EDGE

SENSe:VOLTage:INTV:MODE
OFF
ON

2.6.5.7
2.6.5.12
ANL Panel
Equalizer
→ ON
→ OFF

2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Max Hold
→ OFF
→ FOREVER
→ SLOW DECAY
→ FAST DECAY

2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
Max Hold
→ OFF
→ ON

SENSe[]:POWer:REFerence:RESistance


1 mΩ to 100 kΩ

2.4 (RREF)
2.6.2
ANLR-Panel
Ref Imped

SENSe[]:VOLTage:RANGe[1|2]:AUTO

ON
OFF

2.6.22.6.2
ANLR-Panel
Range
→ AUTO

SENSe[]:VOLTage:RANGe[1|2]:LOWer


Value range see 2.6.2
Configuration of the Analog
Analyzers

2.6.2
ANLR-Panel
Range
→ LOWER

SENSe[]:VOLTage:RANGe[1|2][:UPPer]


Value range see 2.6.2
Configuration of the Analog
Analyzers

2.6.2
ANLR-Panel
Range
→ FIX

SENSe[1]:BWIDth[:RESolution]


Value range determined by
instrument or function

2.6.5.3
ANLR-Panel
Bandwidth

gleichbedeutend mit

SENSe[1]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]

1078.2008.02

3.256

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

SENSe[1]:BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE

Section

PPCT1
PPCT3
PTOCt
POCT12
PFIX
PFASt
SPCT1
SPCT3
STOCt
SOCT12
SFIX
SFASt

2.6.5.3
ANLR-Panel
Bandwidth
→ BP 1%
→ BP 3 %
→ BP 1/3 OCT
→ BP 1/12 OCT
→ BP FIX:
→ BP FAST
→ BS 1%
→ BS 3 %
→ BS 1/3 OCT
→ BS 1/12 OCT
→ BS FIX:
→ BS FAST

SENSe[1]:CHANnel:DELay


-10 to 10 s

2.6.5.12
2.6.5.22
ANLR-Panel
Chan Delay

SENSe[1]:DATA1|2?


Query only

3.15.8
Result display

SENSe[1]:FILTer

*) = 1 to 3
OFF
Query returns name of the filter
switched on:
UFIL1
:
UFIL9
AWE
CMES
CCIT
CCIR
CCIU
DEMP5015
DEMP50
DEMP75
DEMP17
WRUM
URUM
DCN
CARM
IECT
JITT

2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter

SENSe[1]:FILTer:AWEighting[:STATe]


1 to 3
ON|OFF

2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ A Weighting

SENSe[1]:FILTer:CARM[:STATe]


1 to 3
ON|OFF

2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ CCIR ARM

SENSe[1]:FILTer:CCIR[:STATe]


1 to 3
ON|OFF

2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ CCIR wtd

gleichbedeutend mit

SENSe[1]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:MODE

1078.2008.02

3.257

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

SENSe[1]:FILTer:CCITt[:STATe]


1 to 3
ON|OFF

2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ CCITT

SENSe[1]:FILTer:CCIUnweight[:STATe]


1 to 3
ON|OFF

2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ CCIR unwtd

SENSe[1]:FILTer:CMESsage[:STATe]


1 to 3
ON|OFF

2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ C MESSAGE

SENSe[1]:FILTer:DCNoise[:STATe]


1 to 3
ON|OFF

2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ DC NOISE HP

SENSe[1]:FILTer:DEMPhasis17[:STATe]


1 to 3
ON|OFF

2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ DEEMPH J.17

SENSe[1]:FILTer:DEMPhasis50[:STATe]


1 to 3
ON|OFF

2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ DEEMPH 50

SENSe[1]:FILTer:DEMPhasis5015[:STATe]


1 to 3
ON|OFF

2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ DEEM 50/15

SENSe[1]:FILTer:DEMPhasis75[:STATe]


1 to 3
ON|OFF

2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ DEEMPH 75

SENSe[1]:FILTer:IECTuner[:STATe]


1 to 3
ON|OFF

2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ IEC Tuner

SENSe[1]:FILTer:JITTer[:STATe]


1 to 4
ON | OFF

2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ JITTER wtd

SENSe[1]:FILTer:UFILter1...:UFILter9[:STATe]


1 to 3
ON|OFF

2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter

SENSe[1]:FILTer:URUMble[:STATe]


1 to 3
ON|OFF

2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ RUMBLE unw

1078.2008.02

3.258

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

SENSe[1]:FILTer:WRUMble[:STATe]


1 to 3
ON|OFF

Section
2.7.1
FILTER-Panel
Filter
→ RUMBLE wtd

SENSe[1]:FILTer2:.....

2.7.1
ANLR panel
Filter

SENSe[1]:FREQuency:APERture:MODE

2.6.5.19
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time
→ FAST
→ PRECISION

FAST
PRECision

SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:LOWer


Value range determined by
instrument or function

2.6.5.7
2.6.5.23
2.6.5.24
2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
→ Frq Lim Low

SENSe[1]:FREQuency:LIMit:UPPer


Value range determined by
instrument or function

2.6.5.7
2.6.5.23
2.6.5.24
2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
→ Frq Lim Upp

SENSe[1]:FREQuency:MODE

FIXed|CW
SWEep
LIST
MULTisine

GENTrack
CH1
CH2

2.6.5.3
ANLR panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ OFF
→ AUTO SWEEP
MANU SWEEP
→ AUTO LIST
MANU LIST
→GEN MLTSINE
FREQ MODE
→ GEN TRACK
→ FREQ CH1
→ FREQ CH2

SENSe[1]:FREQuency:STARt
SENSe[1]:FREQuency:STOP


Value range determined by
instrument or function

2.6.5.3
ANLR-Panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ Start  Stop

SENSe[1]:FREQuency[:FIXed|CW]


Value range determined by
instrument or function

2.6.5.3
ANLR-Panel
FREQ MODE
→ FIX

1078.2008.02

3.259

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

’OFF’
’RMS’
’RMSSelectiv’
’PEAK’
’QREak’
’DC’
’THD’
’THDNsndr’
’MDISt’
’DFD’
’WAF’
’POLarity’
’FFT’
’FILTersimulation’
’WAVeform’
’COHerence’
’RUBBuzz’
’PROTocol’
’THIRdoct’

2.6.5
ANLR-Panel
FUNCTION
→ OFF
→ RMS & S/N
→ RMS SELECT
→ PEAK & S/N
→ QPK & S/N
→ DC
→ THD
→ THD+N/SINAD
→ MOD DIST
→ DFD
→ WOW & FL
→ POLARITY
→ FFT
→ FILTER SIM.
→ WAVEFORM
→ COHERENCE
→ RUB & BUZZ
→ PROTOCOL
→ THIRD OCT

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion

’OFF’
’RMS’
’RMSSelectiv’
’PEAK’
’QPEak’
’DC’
’THD’
’THDNsndr’
’MDISt’
’DFD’
’WAF’
’POLarity’
’FFT’
’FILTersim’
’WAVeform’
’PROTocol’’
TWELvthoct’

2.6.5
ANLR-Panel
FUNCTION
→ OFF
→ RMS & S/N
→ RMS SELECT
→ PEAK & S/N
→ QPK & S/N
→ DC
→ THD
→ THD+N/SINAD
→ MOD DIST
→ DFD
→ WOW & FL
→ POLARITY
→ FFT
→ FILTER SIM.
→ WAVEFORM
→ PROTOCOL
→ 12th OCTAVE

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DCSuppression

ON
OFF

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
DC Suppres
→ ON
→ OFF

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DISTortion



2.6.5.6
ANLR-Panel
→ di2468

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:DMODe

FAST
PRECision

2.6.5.6
2.6.5.7
2.6.5.8
2.6.5.9
ANLR-Panel
Dyn Mode
→ FAST
→ PRECISION

1078.2008.02

3.260

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:MCOunt
T30
T32

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:MMODe
PPEak
NPEak
PTOPeak
PABSolut
SELectdi
LSELectdi
DALL
LDALl
DODD
LDODd
DEVen
LDEVen
THDN
LTHDn
SNDRatio
NOISe
LNOise
D2_268 alias D2
D3_268 alias D3
D2_118
D3_118
STANdard
COMPressed
USAMpl

Section
2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Line Count
→ 30
→ 32
2.6.5.4
ANLR-Panel
Meas Mode
→ PK +
→ PK → PK to PK
→ PK abs
2.6.5.6
→ SELECT di
→ LEV SEL di
→ All di
→ LEV All di
→ All odd di
→ LEV odd di
→ All even di
→ LEV even di
2.6.5.7
→ THD+N
→ LEVEL THD+N
→ SINAD
→ NOISE
→ LEVEL NOISE
2.6.5.9
→ d2 (IEC268)
→ d3 (IEC268)
→ d2 (IEC118)
→ d3 (IEC118)
2.6.5.14
→ STANDARD
→ COMPRESSED
→ UNDERSAMP

O33

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:...

2.3.4.2
ANLR-Panel
Fnct Settl

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:COUNt


EXP | FLAT:
2 to 6
AVER:
2 to 100

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Samples

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:MODE

OFF
EXPonential
FLAT
AVERage

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Settling
→ OFF
→ EXPonential
→ FLAT
→ AVERage

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:RESolution


Value range and units are
determined by instrument or
function
see 2.6.5.1

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Resolution

1078.2008.02

3.261

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:TOLerance


0.001 to 10 %

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Tolerance

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SETTling:TOUT

 0.001 to 10 s

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Timeout

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:SNSequence

ON
OFF

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
S/N Sequ
→ ON
→ OFF

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:STANdard

NAB
JIS
DINiec
SI05
SI10

2.6.5.10
ANLR-Panel
Rule
→ NAB
→ JIS
→ DIN/IEC
→ 2 Sigma 5 s
→ 2 Sigma 10s

SENSe[1]:FUNCtion:WEIGhting

ON
OFF

2.6.5.10
ANLR-Panel
Weighting
→ ON
→ OFF

SENSe[1]:LIST:FREQuency

{,}

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

SENSe[1]:LIST:FREQuency:POINts?


0 to 1023
Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

SENSe[1]:LIST:MODE

AUTO
MANual

2.6.5.3
ANLR-Panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ AUTO LIST
→ MANU LIST

SENSe[1]:NOTCh:FREQuency:FIXed


Value range determined by
instrument or function

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Notch Freq
→ VALUE:

SENSe[1]:NOTCh:FREQuency:MODE

FIXed
GENTrack

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Notch Freq
→ VALUE:
→ GEN TRACK

SENSe[1]:NOTCh[:STATe]

DB0
DB12
DB30
OFF

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Anlg. Notch
→ 0 dB
→ 12 dB
→ 30 dB
→ OFF

1078.2008.02

3.262

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

Section

SENSe[1]:O33?

Query only
Query response: ASCII string.

No manual
control

SENSe[1]:SMOothing:APERture

N1
N2
N4
N8
N16
N32

2.6.5.14
ANLR-Panel
Interpol
→1
→2
→4
→8
→ 16
→ 32

SENSe[1]:SWEep:MODE

AUTO
MANual

2.6.5.3
ANLR-Panel
SWEEP CTRL
→ AUTO SWEEP
→ MANU SWEEP

SENSe[1]:SWEep:POINts


2 to 1024

2.6.5.3
ANLR-Panel
Points

SENSe[1]:SWEep:SPACing

LINear
LOGarithmic

2.6.5.3
ANLR-Panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG

SENSe[1]:SWEep:STEP

 | 

2.6.5.3
ANLR-Panel
Steps

SENSe[1]:THDN:REJection

NARRow
WIDE

2.6.5.7
ANLR-Panel
Rejection
→ NARROW
→ WIDE

SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:.....

2.3.4.2
ANLR-Panel
Fnct Settl

SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:COUNt


EXP | FLAT:
2 to 6
AVER:
2 to 100

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Samples

SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:MODE

OFF
EXPonential
FLAT
AVERage

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Settling
→ OFF
→ EXPONENTIAL
→ FLAT
→ AVERAGE

SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:RESolution


Value range and units determined
by instrument or function see
2.6.5.1

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Resolution

1078.2008.02

3.263

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

SENSe[1]:TRIGger:SETTling:TOLerance


0.001 to 10 %

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Tolerance

SENSe[1]:UFILter:ATTenuation


1 to 9
 3 to 120 dB

2.7.2.1
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Atten

SENSe[1]:UFILter:BPASs[:STATe]


1 to 9
ON

2.7.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 01 to 09

SENSe[1]:UFILter:BSTOp[:STATe]


1 to 9
ON

2.7.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 01 to 09

SENSe[1]:UFILter:CENTer


1 to 9

Value range see 2.6.1 Selecting
the Analyzer

2.7.2.4
2.7.2.5
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Center Frq

SENSe[1]:UFILter:DELay


1 to 9

0 to 1 s
Query only for all filters except for
file-defined filters

2.7.2.7
2.7.2.1 Query only
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Delay

SENSe[1]:UFILter:FILE

’filename’

1 to 9

2.7.2.7
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Filename

SENSe[1]:UFILter:FILE[:STATe]


1 to 9
ON

2.7.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 01 to 09

SENSe[1]:UFILter:HPASs[:STATe]


1 to 9
ON

2.7.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 01 to 09

SENSe[1]:UFILter:LPASs[:STATe]


1 to 9
ON

2.7.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 01 to 09

SENSe[1]:UFILter:NOTCh[:STATe]


1 to 9
ON

2.7.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 01 to 09

SENSe[1]:UFILter:OCTav[:STATe]


1 to 9
ON

2.7.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 01 to 09

SENSe[1]:UFILter:PASSb


1 to 9

Value range see 2.6.1

2.7.2.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Passband

1078.2008.02

3.264

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

Section

SENSe[1]:UFILter:PASSb:LOWer


1 to 9

Value range see 2.6.1

2.7.2.3
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Passb low

SENSe[1]:UFILter:PASSb:UPPer


1 to 9

Value range see 2.6.1

2.7.2.3
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Passb upp

SENSe[1]:UFILter:STOPb:LOWer?


1 to 9

Query only

2.7.2.3
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Stopb low

SENSe[1]:UFILter:STOPb:UPPer?


1 to 9

Query only

2.7.2.3
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Stopb upp

SENSe[1]:UFILter:STOPb?


1 to 9

Query only

2.7.2.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Stopband

SENSe[1]:UFILter:TOCTave[:STATe]


1 to 9
ON

2.7.2
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 01 to 09

SENSe[1]:UFILter:WIDTh


1 to 9

Value range see 2.6.1

2.7.2.4
2.7.2.5
FILTER-Panel
FILTER 1 to 9
→ Width

SENSe[1]:UNIT

PCT|DB

2.4
ANLR-Panel
Unit

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture

 = >1 ms ...
Value range see 2.6.5.2

2.6.5.2
2.6.5.3
2.6.5.24
2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE

AFASt
AUTO
TRIGgered
GENTrack
VALue
FAST

2.6.5.2,
2.6.5.3
2.6.5.5
2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time
→ AUTO FAST
→ AUTO
→ TRIGGERED
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE
→ FIX 200ms

1078.2008.02

3.265

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE

VALue

2.6.5.25
ANLR-Panel
Meas Time
→ VALUE:

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:FUNDamental


Value range and units determined
by instrument or function

2.6.5.6
ANLR-Panel
Fundamentl

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:FUNDamental:MODE

AUTO
VALue

2.6.5.6
2.6.5.7
ANLR-Panel
Fundamentl
→ AUTO
→ VALUE:

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime


20 ms to 10 s
20 ms to 100 s

2.6.5.4
2.6.5.24
ANLR-Panel
Intv Time

SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime:MODE

SFASt
FAST
SLOW
FIXed
VALue

2.6.5.4
ANLR-Panel
Intv Time
→ FIX 50ms
→ FIX 200ms
→ FIX 1000ms
→ FIX 3 SEC
→ VALUE:

SENSe[1]:WAVeform:COMPression


2 to 1024

2.6.5.14
ANLR-Panel
Comp Fact

SENSe[1]:WAVeform:DURation


see 2.6.5.14 WAVEFORM

2.6.5.14
ANLR-Panel
Trace Len

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence


Analog instruments
100 pV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
0.0 to 1.0 FS |
100 pFS to 100 FS

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference |
Ref Volt

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:REFerence:MODE

CH1Store
CH2Store
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
STORe
GENTrack
VALue

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]

PCT
DB
see 3.10.4 Units for IEC
Measurement Results

2.4
ANLR-Panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2

1078.2008.02

3.266

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

SENSe[1][:VOLTage|POWer]:UNIT[1|2]

Analog units:
V | DBV | DBU |
DBM | W | DPCTV |
DV | VVR | PCTVVR | DPCTW |DW
| PPR | PCTPPR |DBR

Section
2.4
ANLR-Panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2

Digital units:
FS | PCTFS | DBFS | DPCT | DBR
| LSBS | BITS

SENSe2:DATA1|2?


Query only

3.15.8
Result display

SENSe2:FUNCtion

’OFF’
’PEAKvoltage’
’RMS’
’PHASetoref’
’DIGInpampl’

2.6.5.18
ANLR-Panel
INPUT DISP
→ OFF
→ PEAK
→ RMS
→ PHAS to REF
→ DIG INP AMP

SENSe2:VOLTage:REFerence


Analog instruments
1 mV to 1000 V
Digital instrument
0.0 to 1.0 FS

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference

SENSe2:VOLTage:REFerence:MODE

CH1Store
CH2Store
STORe
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
GENTrack
DIGoutampl
VALue

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ DIG OUT AMP
→ VALUE:

SENSe3:DATA1|2?

Query only

3.15.8
Result display

SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence


-1 MHz to 1 MHz

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Ref Freq

SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence:MODE

CH1Store
CH2Store
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
STORe
GENTrack
VALue

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE CH2
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ STORE
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:

1078.2008.02

3.267

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

SENSe3:FREQuency:REFerence:MODE

CH1Store
CH2Store
STORe
CH1Meas
CH2Meas
GENTrack
VALue

SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:.....

Section
2.6.5.19
ANLR-Panel
Ref Freq
→ STORE CH1
→ STORE Ch2
→ STORE
→ MEAS CH1
→ MEAS CH2
→ GEN TRACK
→ VALUE:
2.3.4.2
ANLR-Panel
Freq Settl

SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:COUNt


EXP | FLAT:
2 to 6
AVER:
2 to 100

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Samples

SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:MODE

OFF
EXPonential
FLAT
AVERage

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Settling
→ OFF
→ EXPonential
→ FLAT
→ AVERage

SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:RESolution


Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
see 2.6.5.1

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Resolution

SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:TOLerance


0.001 to 10 %

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Tolerance

SENSe3:FREQuency:SETTling:TOUT


0.001 to 10 s

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Timeout

SENSe3:FREQuency:UNIT[1|2]

HZ
DHZ
DPCTHZ
TERZ
OCT
DEC
FFR

2.4
ANLR-Panel
Unit Ch1/Ch2

SENSe3:FUNCtion

’OFF’
’FREQuency’
’SFREquency’
’FQPHase’
’FQGRoupdelay’

2.6.5.19
2.6.5.20
2.6.5.21
ANLR-Panel
FREQ/PHAS
→ OFF
→ FREQ
→ SAMPLE FREQ
→ FREQ&PHASE
→ FREQ&GRPDEL

1078.2008.02

3.268

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

Section

SENSe3:PHASe:FORMat

POSitive
POSNegative
NEGative
RAD
RADBipolar
RADNegative

2.6.5.19
ANLR-Panel
Format Pha
→ 0 to 360°
→ -180° to 180°
→ - 360° to 0°
→ 0 to 2 π
→ - π to + π
→ -2 π το 0

SENSe3:PHASe:REFerence


-360° to +360°

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference

SENSe3:PHASe:REFerence:MODE

STORe
VALue

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Reference
→ STORE
→ VALUE:

SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:.....

2.3.4.2
ANLR-Panel
Phas Settl

SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:COUNt


EXP | FLAT:
2 to 6
AVER:
2 to 100

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Samples

SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:MODE

OFF
EXPonential
FLAT
AVERage

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Settling
→ OFF
→ EXPonential
→ FLAT
→ AVERage

SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:RESolution


Value range and units determined
by instrument or function
see 2.6.5.1

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Resolution

SENSe3:PHASe:SETTling:TOUT


0.001 to 10 s

2.6.5.1
ANLR-Panel
Timeout

SENSe3:PHASe:UNIT2

DEG
RAD
DDEG
DRAD
S
DS

2.4
ANLR-Panel
Unit Ch2

SENSe4:DATA?


Query only

3.15.8
Result display

1078.2008.02

3.269

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

SOURce:AM:MODE
OFF
SINusoid
BURSt

SOURce:AM:MODE
OFF
SINusoid
BURSt

SOURce:CODedaudio:CHANnel
CH2
CH6
CHL
CHC
CHR
CHLS
CHRS
CHLF

SOURce:CODedaudio:FORMat

AC3

SOURce:CODedaudio:FREQuency
F042
F997
F15K

Section
2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Ampl Var
→ OFF
→ SINE
→ BURST
2.5.4.9
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
Ampl Var
→ OFF
→ SINE
→ BURST
2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Chan Mode
→ 2/0 192kb/s
→ 5.1 448kb/s
→L
448kb/s
→ C 448kb/s
→ R 448kb/s
→ LS 448kb/s
→ RS 448kb/s
→ LFE 448kb/s
2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Format
→ AC-3
2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Frequency
→ 42 Hz
→ 997 Hz
→ 15 kHz

SOURce:DIGital:FEED

ADATa
JITTer
PHASe
COMMon

2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Src Mode
→ AUDIO DATA
→ JITTER ONLY
→ PHASE
→ COMMON
ONLY

SOURce:DIGital:REFerence

AZERo
AONE

2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Data
→ ALL ZERO
→ ALL ONE

SOURce:DIGital:SYNC:DELay



2.5.3.1
GEN-Panel
PhaseToRef

1078.2008.02

3.270

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

Section

SOURce:DIGital:SYNC:MODE

V50
V60
WCLock
IWCLock
F1024

2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Sync Mode
→ VIDEO 50
→ VIDEO 60
→ WORD CLK
→ WRD CLK INV
→ 1024 kHz

SOURce:DIGital:SYNC:SOURce

GCLock
AINPut
RINPut
SINPut

2.5.3
GEN-Panel
Sync Out
→ GEN CLK
→ AUDIO IN
→ REF IN
→ SYNC IN

SOURce:EQUalize:CONTrol:POINts?


0 to 1023
Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

SOURce:EQUalize:CONTrol[:DATA]

{,}

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

SOURce:FREQuency



2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
FREQUENCY

5.21 Hz to 20 kHz at a sampling
rate of 48 kHz

SOURce:FREQuency:AM


1 µHz to fmax
fmax depending on generator

2.5.4.4
2.5.4.9
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
Mod Freq

SOURce:FREQuency:CH2Stereo


Value range determined by sample
frequency

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Freq Ch2

SOURce:FREQuency:DIFFerence


Value range and units determined
by instrument or function

2.5.4.8
GEN-Panel
DIFF FREQ

SOURce:FREQuency:MEAN


Value range and units determined
by instrument or function

2.5.4.8
GEN-Panel
MEAN FREQ

SOURce:FREQuency:MODE

CW | FIXed
SWEep1
SWEep2
LIST1
LIST2

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
Z Axis

SOURce:FREQuency:MODE

FIX

2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Vari Mode
→ FREQUENCY

1078.2008.02

3.271

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet:STATe

ON
OFF

2.5.4.1
GEN-Panel
Frq. Offset
→ + 1000 PPM
→ OFF

SOURce:FREQuency:REFerence


1 mHz to 1 MHz

2.5.2
GEN-Panel
Ref.Freq

SOURce:FREQuency:SELect

FQPH
FQFQ

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Freq Mode
FREQ&PHASE
FREQ CH1&2

SOURce:FREQuency:STARt
SOURce:FREQuency:STOP


Value range and units determined
by instrument or function

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
FREQUENCY
→ Start
→ Stop

SOURce:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed]


Value range and units determined
by instrument or function

2.5.4.5
GEN-Panel
FREQUENCY

SOURce:FREQuency[][:CW|FIXed]


1 to 17

Value range and units determined
by instrument or function

2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel

SOURce:FREQuency[1][:CW|FIXed]


Value range and units determined
by instrument or function

2.5.4.8
GEN-Panel
UPPER FREQ

SOURce:FREQuency[1][:CW|FIXed]


ANALOG-Gen:
240 Hz to 21,75 kHz
DIGITAL-Gen:
240 Hz to fmax
fmax see 2.5.1

2.5.4.7
GEN-Panel
UPPER FREQ

SOURce:FREQuency2[:CW|FIXed]


0 Hz to fmax / 8

2.5.4.7
2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
LOWER FREQ
Carr Freq

fmax see 2.5.1

1078.2008.02

3.272

Freq No1 to 17

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

SOURce:FUNCtion:MODE
EQUalvoltage
DEFinedvoltage

IEC268
IEC118

SOURce:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]

2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
Mode
→ FM
→ AM

SINusoid
MULTisine
BURSt
S2Pulse
MDISt
DFD
RANDom
USER
POLarity

2.5.4
GEN-Panel
FUNCTION
→ SINE
→ MULTISINE
→ SINE BURST
→ SINE² BURST
→ MOD DIST
→ DFD
→ RANDOM
→ ARBITRARY
→ POLARITY

SINusoid
STEReo
MULTisine
BURSt
S2Pulse
MDISt
DFD
RANDom
USER
POLarity
FSK
FM
DC
CODedaud



SOURce:INTerval:MODE

1078.2008.02

3.273

2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Mode
→ EQUAL VOLT
→ DEFINE VOLT
2.5.4.1.1
GEN-Panel
Mode
→ IEC 268
→ IEC 118

FM
AM

SOURce:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]

SOURce:INTerval

Section

2.5.4
GEN-Panel
FUNCTION
→ SINE
→ STEREO SINE
→ MULTISINE
→ SINE BURST
→ SINE² BURST
→ MOD DIST
→ DFD
→ RANDOM
→ ARBITRARY
→ POLARITY
→ FSK
→ MODULATION
→ DC
→ CODED AUDIO

set burst duration ... 60 s

2.5.4.4
2.5.4.9
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
INTERVAL

CW | FIXed
SWEep1
SWEep2
LIST1
LIST2

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
Z Axis

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

SOURce:INTerval:STARt


Value range and units determined
by instrument or function

2.5.4.1.3
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN-Panel
Start

SOURce:INTerval:STOP


Value range and units determined
by instrument or function

2.5.4.1.3
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN-Panel
Stop

SOURce:INTerval[:CW|FIXed]


Value range and units determined
by instrument or function

2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN-Panel
INTERVAL

SOURce:LIST:DWELl

{,}

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

SOURce:LIST:DWELl:CONTrol:POINts?


0 to 1023
Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

SOURce:LIST:DWELl:CONTrol[:DATA]

{,}

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

SOURce:LIST:DWELl:POINts?


0 to 1023
Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

SOURce:LIST:FREQuency

{,}

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

SOURce:LIST:FREQuency:POINts?


0 to 1023
Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

SOURce:LIST:INTerval

{,}

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

SOURce:LIST:INTerval:POINts?


0 to 1023
Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

SOURce:LIST:ONTime

{,}

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

SOURce:LIST:ONTime:POINts?


0 to 1023
Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

SOURce:LIST:VOLTage

{,}

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

1078.2008.02

3.274

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

Section

SOURce:LIST:VOLTage:POINts?


0 to 1023
Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

SOURce:LOWDistortion

ON
OFF

2.5.4.1
2.5.4.3
GEN-Panel
Low Dist
→ ON
→ OFF

SOURce:MULTisine:COUNt


1 to 17

2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
No of Sine

SOURce:MULTisine:MODE

EQUalvoltage
DEFinedvoltage

2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Mode
→ EQUAL VOLT
→ DEFINE VOLT

SOURce:O33

’O33 ID code’

No manual
control

SOURce:OFF:MODE

SWEep2 | LIST2

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Z Axis
→ OFF

SOURce:ONTime



2.5.4.4
2.5.4.9
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
ON TIME

tmin to tmax
Analog generator:
tmin= 20.83 µs
Digital generator: tmin= 1 / sample
frequency
tmax: 60 s – tmin

SOURce:ONTime:DELay


0 to 60 s

2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN-Panel
BurstOnDel

SOURce:ONTime:MODE

CW | FIXed
SWEep1
SWEep2
LIST1
LIST2

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
Z Axis

SOURce:ONTime:STARt
SOURce:ONTime:STOP


Value range and units determined
by instrument or function

2.5.4.2
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
GEN-Panel
Start
Stop

SOURce:ONTime[:CW|FIXed]


Value range and units determined
by instrument or function

2.5.4.5
GEN-Panel
ON TIME

1078.2008.02

3.275

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

SOURce:PHASe


0 ° to 360 °

Section
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Phas Ch2:1

SOURce:PHASe[][:ADJust]


1 to 17

0 to 360 °

2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Phas No 1 to 17

SOURce:PROTocol

OFF
STATic
ENHanced

2.5.3.2
ANA-Panel
PROTOCOL
→ PANEL OFF
→ STATIC
→ ENHANCED

SOURce:PROTocol:RCHannelstatus

ZERO
LEQual
AES3
CRC
RAW

2.5.3.2
GEN-Panel
Ch Stat. R
→ ZERO
→ EQUAL L
→ FILE+AES3
→ FILE+CRC
→ FILE

SOURce:PROTocol:UMODe

ZERO
FILE

2.5.3.2
GEN-Panel
User Mode
→ ZERO
→ FILE DEF

SOURce:RANDom:DOMain

FREQuency
TIME

2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
Domain
→ FREQ
→ TIME

SOURce:RANDom:FREQuency:LOWer
SOURce:RANDom:FREQuency:UPPer


Value range and units determined
by instrument or function

2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
Lower Freq
Upper Freq

SOURce:RANDom:PDF

GAUSsian
TRIangle
RECTangle

2.5.4.1.1
2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
PDF
→ GAUSS
→ TRIANGLE
→ RECTANGLE

SOURce:RANDom:SHAPe

WHITe
PINK
TOCTave
ARBitrary

2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
Equalizatn
→ WHITE
→ PINK
→ THIRD OCT
→ FILE

1078.2008.02

3.276

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

Section

SOURce:RANDom:SPACing:FREQuency


Lower limit value:
analog = 2.93 Hz
digital = sampling frequency /
16384

2.5.4.4
2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
Spacing

SOURce:RANDom:SPACing:MODE

ATRack
USERdefined

2.5.4.4
2.5.4.9
GEN-Panel
Spacing
→ ANLR TRACK
→ USER DEF

SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer


0 to 1 FS

2.5.4.1.1
GEN-Panel
Dither

SOURce:SINusoid:DITHer:STATe

ON
OFF

2.5.4.1.1
GEN-Panel
Dither
→ ON
→ OFF

SOURce:SWEep ...

3.10.1.4
GEN-Panel

SOURce:SWEep:DWELl


10 ms to 1000 s

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Dwell

SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:POINts


2 to 1024

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Points

SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing

LINear
LOGarithmic

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Spacing

SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP



2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Step

SOURce:SWEep:INTerval:POINts


2 to 1024

2.5.4.1.3
GEN-Panel
Points

SOURce:SWEep:INTerval:SPACing

LINear
LOGarithmic

2.5.4.1.3
GEN-Panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG

SOURce:SWEep:INTerval:STEP


Value range and units determined
by instrument or function

2.5.4.1.3
GEN-Panel
Step

SOURce:SWEep:MODE

MANual
AUTO

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Sweep Ctrl

1078.2008.02

3.277

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

SOURce:SWEep:NEXTstep

DWELl
ASYNc
LIST

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Next Step
→ ANLR SYNC
→ DWELL VALUE
→ DWELL FILE

SOURce:SWEep:ONTime:POINts


2 to 1024

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Points

SOURce:SWEep:ONTime:SPACing

LINear
LOGarithmic

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG

SOURce:SWEep:ONTime:STEP


Value range and units determined
by instrument or function

2.5.4.1.3
GEN-Panel
Step

SOURce:SWEep:VOLTage:POINts


2 to 1024

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Points

SOURce:SWEep:VOLTage:SPACing

LINear
LOGarithmic

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG

SOURce:SWEep:VOLTage:STEP


Value range and units determined
by instrument or function

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
Step

SOURce:VOLTage:AM



2.5.4.4
2.5.4.9
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
Variation

-100% to 0%

SOURce:VOLTage:CH2Stereo


0 to 1 FS

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
VOLT Ch2

SOURce:VOLTage:CREStfactor


1 to 100

2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Crest Fact

SOURce:VOLTage:CREStfactor:MODE

MINimized
DPHase
VALue

2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Crest Fact
→ OPTIMIZED
→ DEFINE PHAS
→ VALUE

SOURce:VOLTage:EQUalize:POINts?


0 to 1023
Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

1078.2008.02

3.278

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

Section

SOURce:VOLTage:EQUalize:STATe

ON
OFF

2.5.4.1.1
2.5.4.4
2.5.4.3
GEN-Panel
Equalizer
→ ON
→ OFF

SOURce:VOLTage:EQUalize[:DATA]

{,}

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

SOURce:VOLTage:LIMit[:AMPLitude]


0 to 20 V
0 to 1 FS

2.5.2
GEN-Panel
For Volt Range =
AUTO, Max Volt
is displayed,
for Volt Range =
FIX, a numeric
value.

SOURce:VOLTage:LOWLevel


0 to SOUR:VOLT

2.5.4.5
GEN-Panel
Low Level

SOURce:VOLTage:MODE

CW | FIXed
SWEep1
SWEep2
LIST1
LIST2

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis
Z Axis

SOURce:VOLTage:MODE

FIX

2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
Vari Mode
→ VOLTAGE

SOURce:VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO

ON
OFF

2.5.2
GEN-Panel
Volt Range
→ AUTO
→ FIX

SOURce:VOLTage:RATio


1 to 10

2.5.4.7
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
VOLT LF:UF or
Volt Ch2:1

SOURce:VOLTage:REFerence


1 mV to 1 MV

2.5.2
GEN-Panel
Ref.Volt

SOURce:VOLTage:SELect

VLRT
VLVL

2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
Volt Mode
VOLT&RATIO
VOLT CH1&2

1078.2008.02

3.279

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

SOURce:VOLTage:STARt


Value range determined by
instrument or function

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
VOLTAGE
→ Start

SOURce:VOLTage:STOP


Value range determined by
instrument or function

2.5.4.2
GEN-Panel
VOLTAGE
→ Stop

SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal:GAIN



2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
TOTAL GAIN

SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal:RMS?


0 V to 20 V

2.5.4.4
2.5.4.9
2.5.4.10
GEN-Panel
TOTAL RMS

SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal[:LEVel|AMPLitude]


Value range determined by
instrument or function

2.5.4.4 Query only
2.5.4.7
2.5.4.8
2.5.4.9
2.5.4.10
2.5.4.15
GEN-Panel
TOTAL VOLT

SOURce:VOLTage:TOTal[:LEVel|AMPLitude]



2.5.4.16
GEN Panel
TOTAL VOLT

1 µFS to 1 FS or
-120 dBFS to 0 dBFS

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]


0 to 12 V
0 to 24 V
0 to 1 FS

2.5.4.3
2.5.4.5
2.5.4.6
2.5.4.11
2.5.4.12
2.5.4.13
GEN-Panel
VOLTAGE or
VOLT Ch1

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet


-5 V to 5 V
–10 V to 10 V
–1 FS to 1 FS

2.5.4.1.1
GEN-Panel
DC Offset

SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]:OFFSet:STAT OFF
ON
e

1078.2008.02

3.280

2.5.4.1.1
GEN-Panel
DC Offset
→ OFF
→ ON

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

Section

SOURce:VOLTage[][:LEVel|AMPLitude]


1 to 17

Analog instr.: OUTP:TYPE UNB
0 to 10 V
Analog instr.: OUTP:TYPE BAL
0 to 20 V
Digital instrument:
0 to 1 FS

2.5.4.4
GEN-Panel
Volt No 1 to 17

SOURce:VOLTage2


0 to 5 V
0 to 6V
0 to 0.5 FS

2.5.4.14
GEN-Panel
Carr Volt

SOURce2:FREQuency:MODE

CW | FIXed
SWEep1
LIST1

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis

SOURce2:FREQuency:STARt


10 Hz to 110 kHz

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
FREQUENCY
Start

SOURce2:FREQuency:STOP


10 Hz to 110 kHz

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
FREQUENCY
Stop

SOURce2:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed]


10 Hz to 110 kHz

2.5.5
GEN-Panel
Abhängig von
AUX GEN:
→ Anlg Freq
→ Comm Freq
→ JittPkFreq

SOURce2:FUNCtion

OFF
ANLGout
COMMon
JITTer

2.5.5
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
→ OFF
→ ANALOG OUT
→ COMMON
MODE
→ JITTER

SOURce2:SWEep ...

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:

SOURce2:SWEep:DWELl

1078.2008.02


10 ms to 1000 s

3.281

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
Dwell

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

SOURce2:SWEep:FREQuency:POINts


2 to 1024

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
FREQUENCY
Points

SOURce2:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing

LINear
LOGarithmic

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG

SOURce2:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP


depending on STARt and STOP

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN
FREQUENCY
Step

SOURce2:SWEep:MODE

MANual
AUTO

2.5.4.1.3
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN
Sweep Ctrl

SOURce2:SWEep:NEXTstep

DWEL
ASYN
LIST

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN:
Next Step
→ ANLR SYNC
→ DWELL VALUE
→ DWELL FILE

SOURce2:SWEep:VOLTage:POINts


2 to 1024

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN
VOLTAGE | AMPL
Points

SOURce2:SWEep:VOLTage:SPACing

LINear
LOGarithmic

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
VOLTAGE | AMPL
AUX GEN:
ANALOG
Spacing
→ LIN
→ LOG

SOURce2:SWEep:VOLTage:STEP


depending on STARt and STOP

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN
VOLTAGE | AMPL
Step

SOURce2:VOLTage:MODE

CW | FIXed
SWEep1
LIST1

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN
SWEEP CTRL
X Axis

1078.2008.02

3.282

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

Section

SOURce2:VOLTage:STARt


0 to 7.07 V
0 to 250 mUI

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN
VOLTAGE | AMPL
Start

SOURce2:VOLTage:STOP


0 to 7.07 V
0 to 7.07 V
0 to 250 mUI

2.5.4.2 Sweeps
GEN-Panel
AUX GEN
VOLTAGE | AMPL
Stop

SOURce2:VOLTage[:LEVel|AMPLitude]


0 to 7.07 V
0 to 7.07 V
0 to 250 mUI

2.5.5
GEN-Panel
Abhängig von
AUX GEN:
→ Anlg Ampl
→ Comm Ampl
→ JittPkAmpl

STATus:OPERation:COND?


Query only

3.7.3.4
No manual
control

STATus:OPERation:ENABle


.... 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
...
....d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0

3.7.3.4
No manual
control

Example:
d2 and d5 set:
 = 36 (4 + 32)

STATus:OPERation:NTRansition



3.7.3.4
No manual
control

STATus:OPERation:PTRansition



3.7.3.4
No manual
control

STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?


Query only

3.7.3.4
No manual
control

STATus:PRESet

3.7.5
No manual
control

STATus:QUEStionable:COND?


Query only

3.7.3.5
No manual
control

STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle



3.7.3.5
No manual
control

STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition



3.7.3.5
No manual
control

1078.2008.02

3.283

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition



3.7.3.5
No manual
control

STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?


Query only

3.7.3.5
No manual
control

STATus:XQUEstionable:COND?


Query only

3.7.3.6
No manual
control

STATus:XQUEstionable:ENABle



3.7.3.6
No manual
control

STATus:XQUEStionable:NTRansition



3.7.3.6
No manual
control

STATus:XQUEstionable:PTRansition



3.7.3.6
No manual
control

STATus:XQUEstionable[:EVENt]?


Query only

3.7.3.6
No manual
control

SYSTem:AHARdware:VERSion?

ABOard
ACODe
Query only

2.15.7
OPTIONS-Panel
VERSIONS -----Anlg Board
code

Query:
SYST:AHAR:VERS? ABO
SYST:AHAR:VERS? ACOD
The response is either the number
of a version (eg 0.01) or
–NA- (Not Available) if the board is
not installed.

SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe

ON
OFF

2.15.2
OPTIONS-Panel
Beeper
→ ON
→ OFF

SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess


0 to 31

2.15.1
OPTIONS-Panel
UPL IECadr

SYSTem:COMMunicate:GTL

LOCALTastendruck

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2: CONTrol

1078.2008.02

RTS
XON

3.284

2.15.1
OPTIONS-Panel
Handshake
→ RTS/CTS
→ XON/XOFF

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

Section

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2: FEED:BITS


n=7|8

2.15.1
OPTIONS-Panel
Data Bits
→7
→8

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:FEED:BAUD



2.15.1
OPTIONS-Panel
Baud Rate
→ 2400 Baud
→ 3600 Baud
→ 4800 Baud
→ 7200 Baud
→ 9600 Baud
→ 19200 Baud
→ 38400 Baud
→ 56000 Baud

n=
2400
3600
4800
7200
9600
19200
38400
56000

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:FEED:PARity[:TYPE NONE
EVEN
]
ODD

2.15.1
OPTIONS-Panel
Parity
→ NONE
→ EVEN
→ ODD

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:FEED:SBITs


n=1|2

2.15.1
OPTIONS-Panel
Stop Bits
→1
→2

SYSTem:DHARdware:VERSion?

CPUboard
DBOard
Query only

2.15.7
OPTIONS-Panel
VERSIONS -----CPU Board
Dig. Board

Query:
SYST:DHAR:VERS? CPU
SYST:DHAR:VERS? DBO
The response is the number of a
version (eg 0.05).

SYSTem:DISPlay:READing:RATE

MAXSpeed
FSTSpeed
MEDSpeed
SLWSpeed

2.15.5
OPTIONS-Panel
Read Rate
→ MAX SPEED
→ 6/s
→ 3/s
→ 1/s

SYSTem:DISPlay:READing:RESolution



2.15.5
OPTIONS-Panel
Read Resol

SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACe[]:LOAD

MANual
DEFault
ACOLor
ALINe

2.15.5.4
OPTIONS-Panel
Scan conf
→ MANUAL
→ DEFAULT
→ AUTO COLOR
→ AUTO LINE

1078.2008.02

3.285

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:COLor

GREen
YELLow
BLUE
CYAN
MAGenta
WHITe
BLACk
DGRay
LGRay

Section
2.15.5.4
OPTIONS-Panel
Color (A) / (B)
→ GREEN
→ YELLOW
→ BLUE
→ CYAN
→ MAGENTA
→ WHITE
→ BLACK
→ DARK GRAY
→ LIGHT GRAY

SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:LINE
SSOLid
SD
SP
SPD
DSOLid
DD
DP
DPD

2.15.5.4
OPTIONS-Panel
Line (A) / (B)
→
→ -----→ ......
→ .-.-.→
→ ======
→ ::::::
→ :=:=:=

SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACe[1|2]:SELect


1 to 17

2.15.5.4
OPTIONS-Panel
Scannr.(A)
Scannr.(B)

SYSTem:ERRor?


Query only

3.3.2
No manual
control

SYSTem:INFOtext:STATe

ON
OFF

2.9.1.1
FILE-Panel
Info Displ
→ ON
→ OFF

SYSTem:KEY:RDELay


0.25 to 1.0 s

2.15.3
OPTIONS-Panel
Rep Delay

SYSTem:KEY:RRATe


0 to 50 Hz

2.15.3
OPTIONS-Panel
Reptn Rate

SYSTem:LSPeed

FAST
SLOW

No manual
control

1078.2008.02

3.286

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

SYSTem:OPTions:VERSion?

LDG
REMOte
DAUDio
SPEaker
DAPRotocol
DAJItter
SQCOntrol

alias B1
alias B4
alias B2|B29
alias B5
alias B21
alias B22
alias B10
B33
B6
B8

Query only
Query-Form e. g.:
SYST:OPT:VERS? LDG

Section
2.15.7
2.6.6
OPTIONS-Panel
OPTIONS ------B1 Low Dist
B4 Rem Ctrl
B2 DigAudio
B5 Speaker
B21 DA Prot
B22 DA Jitt
B10 Seq Ctrl
ITU-T O33
B6 Coher
B8 PhoneTst

The response is either the number
of an option (eg 0.01), INST or
-NA- (Not Available) if the board or
option are not installed.

SYSTem:PARameter:LINK


0 to 2047

2.15.7
OPTIONS-Panel
Param. Link

SYSTem:PHONe

SPKC
PERM

2.6.6
ANLR-Panel
Phone Out
→ SPKPhone
→ PERMANENT

SYSTem:PRINt

TRACe1
TRACe2
EQUalize
ERRors
DWELl
LIMLower
LIMUpper
LIST1
LIST2
TR1And2
OFF

2.14.5
OPTIONS-Panel
PRINT
Type
→ TRACE A
→ TRACE B
→ EQUALIZATN
→ LIM REPORT
→ DWELL VALUE
→ LIM LOWER
→ LIM UPPER
→ X AXIS
→ Z AXIS
→ TRACE A+B
→ OFF

SYSTem:PROGram:EXECute

’filename’

2.16
OPTIONS-Panel
Exec Macro


SYSTem:PROGram:POINts?


0 to 1024
Query only

No manual
control

SYSTem:PROGram[:DATA]

{,}

No manual
control

1078.2008.02

3.287

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

SYSTem:SOFTware:VERSion?

SOFTware
SETUp
Query only
Query:
SYST:SOFT:VERS? SOFT
SYST:SOFT:VERS? SETU
The response is the number of a
version (e.g. 3.05).

Section
2.15.7
OPTIONS-Panel
VERSIONS -----Software
Setup

SYSTem:SPEaker:GAIN


-120 to 120 dB

2.6.6
ANLR-Panel
Pre Gain

SYSTem:SPEaker:SOURce

OFF
INP1
INP2
IN1And2
FNC1
FNC2
FN1And2
AES1
AES2
AE1And2

2.6.6
ANLR-Panel
SPEAKER
→ OFF
→ INPUT Ch1
→ INPUT JITT
→ INPUT COMM
→ INPUT Ch2
→ INPUT Ch1&2
→ FUNCT Ch1
→ FUNCT Ch2
→ FUNCT Ch1&2
→ DIG IN Ch1
→ DIG IN Ch2
→ DIG Ch1&2

SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume


0 to 100 %

2.6.6
ANLR-Panel
Skp Volume

SYSTem:SPEaker[:STATe]

ON
OFF

2.6.6
ANLR-Panel
LOCAL-Taste

SYSTem:VERSion?


Query only

2.15.7
No manual
control

TRACe:POINts?

CREFerence1
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? CREF1
Query response
 =
0 to 1023

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

TRACe:POINts?

CREFerence2
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? CREF2
Query response:
 =
0 to 1023

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

1078.2008.02

3.288

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

Section

TRACe:POINts?

REFerence1
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? REF1
Query response:
 =
0 to 1023

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

TRACe:POINts?

REFerence2
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? REF2
Query response:  =
0 to 1023

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

TRACe:POINts?

TRACe2
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? TRAC2
Query response:
 =
0 to 1023
Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

TRACe:POINts? LIST1

LIST1
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? LIST1
Query response:
 =
0 to 1023

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

TRACe:POINts? LIST2

LIST2
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? LIST2
Query response:
 =
0 to 1023

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

TRACe:POINts? TRACe1

TRACe1
Query only
Query:
TRAC:POIN? TRAC1
Query response:
 =
0 to 1023
Query only

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

TRACe[:DATA]

LIST1,{,}
Queryform:
TRACe? LIST1

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

TRACe[:DATA]

LIST2,{,}
Queryform:
TRACe? LIST2

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

TRACe[:DATA]

REFerence1,{,}
Queryform:
TRACe? REF1

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

1078.2008.02

3.289

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

UPL

Command

Parameter

Section

TRACe[:DATA]

REFerence2,{,}
Queryform:
TRACe? REF2

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

TRACe[:DATA]

TRACe1,{,}
Queryform:
TRACe? TRAC1

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

TRACe[:DATA]

TRACe2,{,}
Queryform:
TRACe? TRAC2

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

TRACe[:DATA] CREFerence1,

{,}
Queryform:
TRACe? CREF1

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

TRACe[:DATA] CREFerence2,

{,}
Queryform:
TRACe? CREF2

2.9.1.3
No manual
control

TRIGger:CHANnel

CH1
CH2
GENBurst

2.6.5.14
ANLR-Panel
Trig Src
→ CHAN 1
→ CHAN 2
→ GEN BURST

TRIGger:COUNt


2 to 1024

2.6.4
ANLR-Panel
Points

TRIGger:DELay


0 to 10 s

2.6.4
ANLR-Panel
Delay

TRIGger:FREQuency:VARiation


> 0.1 to 50%

2.6.4
ANLR-Panel
Variation

TRIGger:LEVel


Analog instruments
–50 V to 50 V
Digital instrument
–1 FS to 1 FS

2.6.5.14
ANLR-Panel
Trig Level

TRIGger:SLOPe

POSitive
NEGative

2.6.5.14
ANLR-Panel
Trig Slope
→ RISING
→ FALLING

1078.2008.02

3.290

E-10

UPL

Alphabetical List of Commands
Command

Parameter

Section

TRIGger:SOURce

IMMediate
TIMer
CH1Freq
CH2Freq
CH1Level
CH2Level
CH1Trigger
CH2Trigger
TCHart
CH1Rapidfreq
CH2Rapidfreq
CH1Edgetrigger
CH2Edgetrigger

2.6.4
ANLR-Panel
START COND
→ AUTO
→ TIME
→ CH1Freq 
CH2Freq
→ CH1Level 
CH2Level
→ LEV TRG CH1
LEV TRG CH2
→ TIME CHART
→ FRQ FST CH1
→ FRQ FST CH2
→ EDG TRG CH1
→ EDG TRG CH2

TRIGger:TIMer


10 ms to 2000 s

2.6.4
ANLR-Panel
Timetick

TRIGger:VOLTage:VARiation


> 0.1 ,900%
oder
> 0.01 to 20 dB

2.6.4
ANLR-Panel
Variation

1078.2008.02

3.291

E-10

Alphabetical List of Commands

1078.2008.02

UPL

3.292

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface

3.12 IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface
The UPL is equipped with an IEC/IEEE-bus interface as a standard. The mating 25-pin connector
according to standard IEC 625.1/IEEE 488 is at the rear of the instrument. A controller for remote
control can be connected via the interface. Interconnection is made via a shielded cable.

3.12.1 Interface Characteristics
é 8-bit parallel data transfer
é bidirectional data transfer
é three line handshake
é high data transfer rate of max. 350 kByte/s
é up to 15 devices can be connected
é maximum length of interconnecting cable 15 m (single connection 2m)
é wired OR if several instruments are interconnected in parallel.

ATN
IFC
NRFD EOI
DIO3 DIO1
SHIELD SRQ NDAC DAV DIO4
DIO2

12
24

1
13

LOGIC GND GND(10) GND(8) GND(6) DIO8 DIO6
GND(11)
GND(9) GND(7)
REN DIO7 DIO5

Fig. 3-7

Pin assignment of IEC/IEEE-bus interface

3.12.2 Bus Lines
1. Data bus with 8 lines DIO 1 to DIO 8.
The transmission is bit-parallel and byte-serial in the ASCII/ISO code. DIO1 is the bit of lowest order,
DIO8 the bit of highest order.
2. Control bus with 5 lines.
IFC (Interface Clear),
active low resets the interfaces of all connected instruments to the default setting.
ATN (Attention),

1078.2008.02

3.293

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface

UPL

active low signals the transmission of interface messages
inactive high signals the transmission of device-dependent messages.
SRQ (Service Request),
active low enables a device connected to send a service request to the controller.
REN (Remote Enable),
active low permits the switchover to remote control.
EOI (End or Identify),
has two functions in connection with ATN:
active low marks the end of data transmission with ATN = HIGH
active low triggers a parallel poll with ATN = LOW.
3. Handshake Bus mit drei Leitungen.
DAV (Data Valid),
active low signals a valid data byte on the data bus.
NRFD (Not Ready For Data),
active low signals that one of the devices connected is not ready for data transfer.
NDAC (Not Data Accepted),
active low as long as the instrument connected is accepting the data present on the data bus.

3.12.3 Interface Functions
Instruments which can be remote-controlled via IEC/IEEE bus can be equipped with different interface
functions. Table A-1 lists the interface functions appropriate for the UPL.
Table 3-10
Control
character

Interface functions
Interface function

SH1

Handshake source function (source handshake)

AH1

Handshake drain function (acceptor handshake)

L3..L4/LE3..LE4

Listener function.

T5..T8/TE5..TE8

Talker function, ability to respond to serial poll

SR1

Service request function

PP1

Parallel poll function

RL1

Remote/Local switchover function

DC1

Resetting function (Device Clear)

DT1

Trigger function (Device Trigger)

C1...C27

Controller function (with optional software UPL-B10only)

1078.2008.02

3.294

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Error Messages

3.13 Interface Messages
Interface messages are transmitted to the UPL on the data lines, with the attention line being active
(LOW). They enable the communication between instrument and controller.Das Parsen von Befehlen
entfällt, dadurch wird eine hohe Verarbeitungsgeschwindigkeit erreicht.

3.13.1 Common Commands
The common commands are encoded in the range 10 through 1F hex. They are effective for all
instruments connected to the bus without addressing them before.
Table 3-11

Common commands

Command

BASIC command for R&S
controllers

Effect on UPL

DCL

(Device Clear)

IECDCL

Aborts the processing of the commands just received
and sets the command processing software to a
defined initial state. Does not change the instrument
setting.

IFC

(Interface Clear)

IECIFC

Resets the interfaces to the default setting.

LLO

(Local Lockout)

IECLLO

The REM/LOCAL key is disabled.

SPE

(Serial Poll Enable)

IECSPE

Ready for serial poll

SPD

(Serial Poll Disable)

IECSPD

End of serial poll

IECPPU

End of the parallel-poll state

PPU (Parallel Poll
Unconfigure)

3.13.2 Addressed Commands
The addressed commands are encoded in the range 00 through 0F hex. They are only effective for
instruments addressed as listeners.
Table 3-12

Addressed commands

Command

BASIC command for R&S
controllers

Effect on UPL

SDC

IECLAD 20: IECSDC

Aborts the processing of the commands just received
and sets the command processing software to a
defined initial state. Does not change the instrument
setting.

GET (Group Execute Trigger)

IECLAD 20: IECGET

Triggers all actions which are waiting for a trigger
event. This command is identical with the commands
INIT and *TRG.

GTL

(Go to Local)

IECLAD 20: IECGTL

Transition to the "Local" state (manual control)

PPC

(Parallel Poll Configure)

IEC PCON 20,1,6

Configure instrument for parallel poll
In the command to the left, the UPL with an address
of 20 is reporting a 1 on line 6.

(Selected Device Clear)

1078.2008.02

3.295

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Error Messages

UPL

3.14 List of Error Messages
The following list contains error messages which can be obtained via IEC/IEEE bus or in manual
operation. Negative error numbers are SCPI-defined. The positive error number "111" marks devicespecific errors.
When and how is the error queue output?
If the controller does not succeed in transmitting a command to UPL, an error message appears in the
information line on the screen and a short signal can be heard.
This error message can be indicated in the control program by outputting the error queue after every
command sent to UPL. This should be controlled by SRQ, i.e. only when bit 3 (Device Dependent Error),
bit 4 (Execution Error) or bit 5 (Command Error) of the event status register is set, but can also happen
at any location in the control program.
If no error has been detected, the message is
0, "No Error"
Example:
1000Errqueue:
1010 IEC OUT 20,"SYST:ERR?":
1020 IEC IN 20,E$.
1030 IF LEFT$(E$,1)="0" THEN RETURN:
1040 PRINT "Contents of error queue:"; E$:GOTO Errqueue

’ Output error queue until it is empty!
’ Read error information
’ 0, "No Error", error queue empty!

The table contains the error number in the left-hand column. In the right-hand column, the error text
being entered into the error/event queue or being displayed is printed in bold face. Below the error text,
there is an explanation as to the respective error.

3.14.1 SCPI-Specific Error Messages
No Error
Error number
0

1078.2008.02

Error query response
Explanation
No error
This message is output if the error queue is completely empty.

3.296

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Error Messages

3.14.2 Command Error
Command error — sets bit 5 in the ESR register.
Error number

Error query response
Explanation

-100

Command Error
The command is faulty or invalid.

-101

Invalid Character
A syntactic element contains a character which is invalid for that type.
Example: A header containing an ampersand, "SOURCE&".

-102

Syntax error
An unrecognized command or data type was received.
Example: A string was received when the device does not accept strings.

-103

Invalid separator
The device was expecting a separator and received an illegal character.
Example: The semicolon was omitted after a program message unit.

-104

Data type error
The device recognized a data element different than one allowed.
Example: Numeric or string data are expected but block data was received.

-105

GET not allowed
A Group Execute Trigger (GET) was received within a program message.

-112

Program mnemonic too long
The header contains more than 12 characters.

-113

Undefined header
The header is syntactically correct, but it is undefined for the UPL.
Example: *XYZ is not defined for any device.

-114

Header suffix out of range
A nonheader character has been encountered in the header element parsed by the device.
Example: SOURce3 is not defined for any device.

-123

Exponent too large
The magnitude of the exponent is larger than 320000.

-124

Too many digits
The mantissa of a decimal numeric data element contains more than 255 digits (excluding leading
zeros).

-128

Numeric data not allowed
A legal numeric data element was received, but the device does not accept one in this position for the
header.
Example: Command SOURce:FREQuency:MODE requires the indication of a text parameter.

-131

Invalid suffix
The suffix is inappropriate for this device.
Example: nHz is not defined?

-134

Suffix too long
The suffix contains more than 12 characters.

-138

Suffix not allowed
A suffix was received after a numeric element which does not allow suffixes.
Example: Command *RCL does not permit indicating a suffix.

-141

Invalid character data
Either the character data element contains an invalid character or the particular element received is not
valid for the header.
Example: Write error with parameter indication; SOURce:FREQuency:MODE FIKSed.

1078.2008.02

3.297

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Error Messages

UPL

Command error (cont.)
Error number

Error query response
Explanation

-144

Character data too long
The character data element contains more than 12 characters.

-148

Character data not allowed
A legal character data element was encountered where prohibited by the device.
Example: Command *RCL requires the indication of a number.

-151

Invalid string data
A string data element was expected, but was invalid for some reason.
Example: An END message was received before the terminal quote character.

-158

String data not allowed
A legal string data element was encountered where prohibited by the device.

-161

Invalid block data
A block data element was expected, but was invalid for some reason.
Example: An END message was received before the length was satisfied.

-168

Block data not allowed
A legal block data element was encountered where prohibited by the device.

-178

Expression data not allowed
A legal expression data element was encountered where prohibited by the device.

3.14.3 Execution Error
Execution error — sets bit 4 in the ESR register.
Error number

Error query response
Explanation

-200

Execution error
An error occurred when executing a received command.

-220

Parameter error
A program data element related error occurred.

-221

Settings conflict
A legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed due to the current device state.

-222

Data out of range
The received data element was syntactically correct but could not be executed because the value was
outside the legal range as defined by the device.
Example: Command TRIG:DEL only permits entries in the range of 50 ms to 10 sec.

-241

Hardware missing
A legal program command or query could not be executed because of missing device hardware;
for example, an option was not installed.

1078.2008.02

3.298

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Error Messages

3.14.4 Device-Specific Error
Device-specific Error — sets bit 3 in the ESR register.
Error number
-300

Error query response
Explanation
Device-specific error
Generic device-dependent error for devices that cannot detect more specific errors.

3.14.5 Query Error
Query Error — sets bit 2 in the ESR register.
Error number

Error query response
Explanation

-400

Query error
Generic device-dependent query error for devices that cannot detect more specific errors.

-420

Query UNTERMINATED
A condition causing an UNTERMINATED query error occurred.
Example: The device was addressed to talk and an incomplete program message was received.

-430

Query DEADLOCKED
A condition causing an DEADLOCKED query error occurred.
Example: Both input buffer and output buffer are full and the device cannot continue.

3.14.6 UPL-Specific Error Messages
Device-specific Error — sets bit 3 in the ESR register.
Error number

Error query response
Explanation

111

After the error queue has been output, all device-dependent errors are shown with the code number 111
and a self-explanatory text having a maximum length of 50 characters, e.g.
111, „Device dep. error; Insufficient disk space! Cannot write file".

1078.2008.02

3.299

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

UPL

3.15 Examples of IEC/IEEE-Bus Programming
(Hints and Program Examples)
The examples illustrate UPL programming and may be taken as a basis for solving more complex
programming tasks.
All programming examples for IEC/IEEE-bus control in the path C:\UPL\IEC EXAM\EXAM1.BAS ff and
those of the UPL software are written in R&S BASIC.
These examples can be run directly on a controller using a suitable IEC/IEEE-bus card and R&S BASIC
(see (siehe 3.15.1, R&S BASIC). Files with the extension .SAC are setup files requiring the program
examples for setting the UPL. Files with the extension .TXT give the program code of the examples as
ASCII file so that they can be accessed with any editor.
If other languages are used for controlling the UPL by means of IEC/IEEE commands, the given
sequence of commands may be used but for a few exceptions, as it is independent of the programming
language.

3.15.1 R&S BASIC
The following program routines and examples and those contained in the UPL software are ready for
use provided R&S BASIC and the R&S IEC/IEEE-bus card have been installed in the controller.
Note:
R&S BASIC and the R&S IEC/IEEE-bus interface card may be ordered from your local sales engineer
under the designation PAT-B1, Order No. 1007.1150.02.

3.15.2 IEC/IEEE-Bus Control after Power-Up
After UPL power-up, messages may be displayed which have to be acknowledged using the ENTER or
CANCEL key. If the instrument is to be remote-controlled after power-up irrespective of any messages
displayed, it is recommended to start the UPL with the aid of the command line parameter "-r". In this
case messages do not require to be acknowledged by a keystoke, the UPL is started with a suitable
setup and immediately ready for remote control.
Example: C:\UPL\UPL_UI-r 

3.15.3 Command Logging - Converting UPL-B10 Commands into IEC/IEEE-Bus
Commands
All commands required for setting the UPL or for measurements are listed in section 3.10 IEC-bus
Commands and section 3.11 Alphabetical List of IEC-bus Commands of the UPL manual. To avoid
a tedious search for the commands required, the Universal Sequence Controller, UPL-B10, which is
simply called B10 below and available as an option, permits all manual setting procedures to be stored
as B10 commands and to be converted into the IEC/IEEE-bus control program.
Note:
The Universal Sequence Controller option UPL-B10 may be ordered from your local sales engineer
under the Order No. 1078.3856.02. For installation please refer to the Installation Instruction enclosed
with Option UPL-B10.

1078.2008.02

3.300

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

The procedure is explained by way of a sweep with subsequent display of the sweep curve:
• Prior to recording the desired command sequence, press key F2 to activate command logging
("logging on" displayed at bottom right). All settings performed subsequently in the UPL are
recorded as a sequence of B10 commands.
• When the setting sequence has been completed, disable command logging by pressing the F2 key
again ("logging off" displayed at bottom right).
• Call up the B10 program by pressing F3. Upon pressing F8 (LISTe), a list of commands is displayed
- for the time being without comments - which has been generated by means of B10 commands and
correspond to the settings just performed (in the example Settings for a frequency sweep).
10 UPL OUT "*RST"
Listing
of
B10
commands
without
comments.

20
30
40
50
60
70

UPL
UPL
UPL
UPL
UPL
UPL

OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT

"DISP:MODE COLB"
Comments will we added manually later on.
"SENS:VOLT:APER:MODE AFAS"
"SENS:FILT:AWE ON"
"DISP:TRAC:OPER CURV"
"DISP:TRAC:X:SPAC LOG"
"SOUR:SWE:MODE AUTO;:SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1"

• Use command ASAVE "A:LOGGING.TXT" to store the listing as ASCII file on a floppy disk.
• Return to the UPL operating level by pressing F3 and quit the UPL (CTRL+F9).
• Using an editor of your own choice at the DOS operating system level, edit the A:LOGGING.TXT file

,

in a form suitable for IEC/IEEE-bus control by replacing |UPL OUT| by |IEC OUT 20 | and store it on
the floppy disk.
10 IEC OUT 20,"*RST"
20
30
40
50
60
70

IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC

OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT

Listing of IEC/IEEE-bus commands without
comments.
Comments will be added manually later on!

20,"DISP:MODE COLB"
20,"SENS:VOLT:APER:MODE AFAS"
20,"SENS:FILT:AWE ON"
20,"DISP:TRAC:OPER CURV"
20,"DISP:TRAC:X:SPAC LOG"
20,"SOUR:SWE:MODE AUTO;:SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1"

• Establish connection to IEC/IEEE-bus controller and start R&S BASIC on the controller.
• Insert floppy holding the "LOGGING.TXT" file into the controller.
• Load the listing as ASCII file from the floppy with command ALOAD "A:LOGGING.TXT" and extend it
as required by IEC/IEEE-bus-specific commands and comments.
10 IEC TERM 10:’
Controller waits for Line Feed as terminator
20 IEC TIME 10000:’
IEC/IEEE-bus timeout 10 s
30 IEC OUT 20,"*RST;*WAI":’
UPL default setup
40 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:MODE COLB":’
Changes of colour
50 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER:MODE AFAS":’
High measurement speed
60 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FILT:AWE ON":’
Switches on A-weighting filter
70 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:OPER CURV":’
Selects trace display
80 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:X:SPAC LOG":’
Logarithmic X axis
0 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:SWE:MODE AUTO;:SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1":’
Autom. Sweep
100 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:CONF AP":’
Selects graphic window
110 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI":’
Starts sweep and waits for end
120 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:Y:AUTO ONCE":’
Autoscaling
130 IEC LAD 20: IEC GTL:’
Return to manual control
140 END
(listing of IEC/IEEE-bus commands with additional commands and comments)

• Start the ready-to-run program with RUN or F2.

1078.2008.02

3.301

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

UPL

3.15.4 Initialization and Default Status
The controller must be informed that the end character for query replies from the UPL is < Line Feed>
and that it has to wait for max. 10 s after a trigger command or an IEC-IN command before it signals a
timeout. The IEC/IEEE-bus Status Registers and the UPL are reset to the default state.
For default settings of UPL see annex A UPL Default Setup
10
10
20
10
20
30

’Initialization of controller
IEC TERM 10:’
Controller waits for Line Feed as terminator
IEC TIME 10000:’
After 10 s controller signals IEC/IEEE-bus timeout
’Initialization of UPL
IECOUT 20,"*CLS":’
Resets Status Register
IECOUT 20,"*RST:*WAI":’
Resets device and waits for end of calibration
:

3.15.5 Sending Instrument Setting Commands
In this routine, the UPL is set to maximum speed for triggered measurements.
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90

IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
:

TERM 10:’
Terminator for query replies is Line Feed
TIME 10000:’
Max. waiting time for query replies is 10 s
OUT 20,"*CLS":’
Resets IEC/IEEE-bus Status Register
OUT 20,"*RST;*WAI":’
UPL default setting, *WAI waits for calibr.
OUT 20,"DISP:ANN OFF":’
Switches off result display
OUT 20,"SENS2:FUNC ’OFF’":’
Switches off input-peak measurement
OUT 20,"SENS3:FUNC ’OFF’":’
Switches off frequency measurement
OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER:MODE VAL"
OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER 1ms":’
Sets a measurement speed of 1 ms

3.15.6 Switchover to Manual Control
REM ------ Switching the instrument to manual control ------:
100 IEC LAD 20:’ Addresses UPL
110 IEC GTL:’
Sets UPL to local
:

3.15.7 Readout of Instrument Settings
The settings made in section 3.15.5 Sending Instrument Setting Commands, are read out. In this
case the short form of the commands is used.
110
120
130
140
150
160
170

:
’------- Readout of instrument settings --------IEC OUT 20,"DISP:ANN?":’
Query for setting the display Update
IEC IN 20,A$: PRINT A$:’
Displays OFF
IEC OUT 20,"SENS2:FUNC?":’
Query for input peak measurement
IEC IN 20,A$: PRINT A$:’
Displays OFF
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER?":’
Query for measurement speed
IEC IN 20,A$: PRINT A$:’
Displays 1.E-3
:

1078.2008.02

3.302

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

3.15.8 Readout of Measurement Results
Numeric results of a specific measurement function, ie input peak, input RMS or frequency and phase
measurements, can be taken from the UPL in a triggered or non-triggered form.
For triggering measurements and sweeps see section 3.6.7 Triggering a Measurement/Sweep
Waiting for the end of a measurement or sweep is described in section 3.6.8.2 Wait for End of
Measurement/Sweep.
The display below gives the IEC/IEEE-bus commands used for selecting and calling up measurement
results.

Fig. 3-8

"SENS:DATA1?"

"SENS2:DATA1?"

"SENS3:DATA1?"

"SENS:DATA2?"

"SENS2:DATA2?"

"SENS3:DATA2?"
"SENS4:DATA?"

Result display and associated IEC/IEEE-bus commands

Table 3-13

Selecting measurement results

Measurement function

Channel setting

Selection and readout of measurement results

Function
IECOUT 20,
"SENS:FUNC
"SENS:FUNC
"SENS:FUNC
"SENS:FUNC
"SENS:FUNC
"SENS:FUNC
"SENS:FUNC
"SENS:FUNC
"SENS:FUNC
"SENS:FUNC
"SENS:FUNC
"SENS:FUNC
"SENS:FUNC
"SENS:FUNC
"SENS:FUNC
"SENS:FUNC

’RMS’"
’RMSS’"
’PEAK’"
’QPE’"
’DC’"
’THD’"
’THDN’"
’MDIST’"
’DFD’"
’DIM’"
’WAF’"
’POL’"
’FFT’"
’FILT’"
’WAV’"
’COHE’"

Input PEAK or
Input RMS
IECOUT 20,
"SENS2:FUNC ’PEAK’"
"SENS2:FUNC ’RMS’"

IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH1"

IECOUT 20,"SENS:DATA1?":IECIN 20,Func$

IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH2"

IECOUT 20,"SENS:DATA2?":IECIN 20,Func$

IECOUT
IECOUT
IECOUT
IECOUT

20,"INP:SEL
20,"INP:SEL
20,"INP:SEL
20,"INP.SEL

CH1A" or
CH1I" or
CH2I" or
BOTH"

IECOUT 20,"SENS:DATA1?":IECIN 20,FuncA$
IECOUT 20,"SENS:DATA2?":IECIN 20,FuncB$

IECOUT 20,"INP:SEL CH1"

IECOUT 20,"SENS2:DATA1?":IECIN 20,Ip$

IECOUT
IECOUT
IECOUT
IECOUT
IECOUT

20,"INP:SEL
20,"INP:SEL
20,"INP:SEL
20,"INP:SEL
20,"INP.SEL

CH2"
CH1A" or
CH1I" or
CH2I" or
BOTH"

IECOUT 20,"SENS2:DATA2?":IECIN 20,Ip$

IECOUT
IECOUT
IECOUT
IECOUT
IECOUT
IECOUT

20,"INP:SEL
20,"INP:SEL
20,"INP:SEL
20,"INP:SEL
20,"INP:SEL
20,"INP.SEL

CH1"
CH2"
CH1A" or
CH1I" or
CH2I" or
BOTH"

IECOUT 20,"SENS3:DATA1?":IECIN 20,Freq$
IECOUT 20,"SENS3:DATA2?":IECIN 20,Freq$

IECOUT 20,"SENS2:DATA1?":IECIN 20,IpA$
IECOUT 20,"SENS2:DATA2?":IECIN 20,IpB$

Frequency measurement
IECOUT 20,
"SENS3:FUNC ’FREQ’"

1078.2008.02

3.303

IECOUT 20,"SENS3:DATA1?":IECIN 20,FreqA$
IECOUT 20,"SENS3:DATA2?":IECIN 20,FreqB$

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

Measurement function
Frequency and
phase measurement
IECOUT 20,
"SENS3:FUNC ’FQPH’"
with two-channel
measurements only
Frequency and
group delay measurement
IECOUT 20,
"SENS3:FUNC ’FQGR’"
with two-channel
measurements only

UPL

Channel setting

Selection and readout of measurement results

IECOUT
IECOUT
IECOUT
IECOUT

20,"INP:SEL
20,"INP:SEL
20,"INP:SEL
20,"INP.SEL

CH1A" or
CH1I" or
CH2I" or
BOTH"

IECOUT 20,"SENS3:DATA1?":IECIN 20,Freq$
IECOUT 20,"SENS4:DATA?":IECIN 20,Phas$

IECOUT
IECOUT
IECOUT
IECOUT

20,"INP:SEL
20,"INP:SEL
20,"INP:SEL
20,"INP.SEL

CH1A" oder
CH1I" oder
CH2I" oder
BOTH"

IECOUT 20,"SENS3:DATA1?":IECIN 20,Freq$
IECOUT 20,"SENS4:DATA?":IECIN 20,Grpl$

3.15.8.1 Readout of Triggered Measurements
Readout of triggered measurement is demonstrated by way of an RMS measurement:
:
100 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FUNC ’RMS’":’
Sets RMS measurement
110 IEC OUT 20,"INPUT:SELECT CH1":’
Sets channel 1
:
210 ’One of three trigger modes can be selected
220 INPUT "Select trigger mode INIT [I], GET [G] or *TRG [T]:";Tg$
:
330 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI":’
Selects single-measurement mode
:
480 IF Tg$="I" THEN IEC OUT 20,"INIT":
GOTO In
490 IF Tg$="G" THEN IEC LAD 20: IEC GET :GOTO In
500 IF Tg$="T" THEN IEC OUT 20,"*TRG":
GOTO In
:
620In:
630 IEC OUT 20,"*WAI":’
Sends next IEC/IEEE-bus command only after
640 ’
a result has been obtained.
650 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:DATA1?":’
Selects result of channel 1
660 IEC IN 20,Mwert$:’
Reads in measurement result
667 PRINT Mwert$:’
Outputs measurement result
:

1078.2008.02

3.304

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

3.15.8.2 Readout of Non-Triggered Measurements
Contrary to triggered measurements, results of non-triggered measurements are read from the buffer at
maximum speed without considering settling so that the same value is displayed several times before a
new value is output.
Since results of non-triggered measurements are read out as an exception, no detailed description will
be given. Reading out triggered measurement results as described in section 3.15.8.1 Readout of
Triggered Measurements, is to be preferred in any case.
:
190 IEC OUT 20,"*RST;*WAI": ’
Sets up RMS measurement
200 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:ANN OFF":’
Switches off result display
210 IEC OUT 20,"SENS2:FUNC ’OFF’":’
Switches off PEAK measurement
220 IEC OUT 20,"SENS3:FUNC ’OFF’":’
Switches off frequency measurement
230 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER:MODE AFAS":’
Selects high measurement speed
240 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT ON":’
Selects continuous measurements
250 IEC LAD 20: IEC GET :’
Triggers with Group Executive Trigger
260 ’"*WAI" omitted!
270 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:DATA1?":’
Selects RMS result on channel 1
280 IEC IN 20,Mwert$:’
Reads in measurement result
:

3.15.9 Sweep Setting/Trigger
3.15.9.1 Generator Sweep
With a generator sweep of the UPL, output frequency, output level, burst duration, etc. are swept
between the start/stop values .
A sweep is triggered with INIT, *TRG or GET (see section 3.6.7 Triggering a Measurement/Sweep).
:
50 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:SWE:MODE AUTO;:SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1":’
Freq. sweep
60 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:FREQ:STAR 100 HZ":’
Sweep start frequency 100 Hz
70 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:FREQ:STOP 10 KHZ":’
Sweep stop frequency 10 kHz
80 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:SWE:FREQ:POIN 15":’
15 sweep points
90 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FILT:AWE ON": ’
Selects A-weighting filter
100 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:OPER CURV": ’
Selects trace display
110 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI":’
Triggers single sweep, waits for end
120 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:CONF AP":’ Selects analyzer display with graphic window
130 IEC LAD 20: IEC GTL: ’
Displays sweep curve
:
See also section 3.15.10.3 Configuration for Maximum Sweep Speed and 3.15.10.3.1 Generator
Sweep.

1078.2008.02

3.305

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

UPL

3.15.9.2 External Sweep
With external sweep of UPL, measurement results are obtained by frequency and level variations
at channel 1 or 2 of the analyzer input.
The example below illustrates an external frequency sweep.
:
300 ’*** Setting parameters for external sweep
310 IEC OUT 20,"TRIG:SOUR CH1F": ’
Setup for external frequency sweep
320 IEC OUT 20,"ARM:LEV:MIN 100 mV": ’
Minimum level 100 mV
330 IEC OUT 20,"ARM:FREQ:STAR 100 Hz": ’
Start frequency 100 Hz
340 IEC OUT 20,"ARM:FREQ:STOP 16 kHz": ’
Stop frequency 16 kHz
350 IEC OUT 20,"TRIG:FREQ:VAR 4.5": ’
Var. just below sweep step width
360 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:CONF AP": ’
Selects graphic window
370 PRINT "External sweep is started - recording is in progress!"
380 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI": ’
Triggers external single sweep
390 IEC OUT 20,"SYST:BEEP:STAT ON": ’ Waits for sweep end with dummy command
400 IEC LAD 20: IEC GTL : ’
Displays curve
:
See also section 3.15.10.3 Configuration for Maximum Sweep Speed and 3.15.10.3.2 External
Sweep.

3.15.9.3 RMS-Selektiv-Sweep
With the RMS selective sweep, the center frequency of a bandpass or bandstop filter is swept between
the start/stop frequencies and an RMS measurement is carried out after each sweep step.
The sweep is triggered with "INIT", "*TRG" or GET (see section 3.6.7
Triggering a
Measurement/Sweep)
:
100 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FUNC ’RMSS’":’
Setup for RMS selective measurement
110 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:BAND:MODE PPCT1":’
Bandwidth of bandpass filter 1%
120 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FREQ:MODE SWE;:SENS:SWE:MODE AUTO":’
Sweep setup
130 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:SWE:SPAC LOG;POIN 50":’
Log. sweep with 50 points
140 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FREQ:STAR 4000Hz;STOP 16000Hz":’
Start/stop freq.
150 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI":’
Triggers sweep and waits for end
160 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:OPER CURV":’
Selects trace display
170 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:CONF AP":’
Selects analyzer panel with graphic window
180 IEC LAD 20: IEC GTL:’
Displays curve
:
See also section 3.15.10.3 Configuration for Maximum Sweep Speed and 3.15.10.3.3 RMSselective Sweep.

1078.2008.02

3.306

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

3.15.10 Tuning - Setup for Maximum Measurement Speed
3.15.10.1 Configuration for Maximum Measurement Speed
To obtain maximum measurement speed, all unnecessary measurements and result displays are to be
avoided. This is demonstrated by way of a fast RMS measurement:
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280

:
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
:

OUT 20,"*RST;*WAI": ’
Sets up RMS measurement
OUT 20,"DISP:ANN OFF":’
Switches off result display
OUT 20,"SENS2:FUNC ’OFF’":’
Switches off PEAK measurement
OUT 20,"SENS3:FUNC ’OFF’":’
Switches off frequency measurement
OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER:MODE AFAS":’
Selects high measurement speed
OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF":’
Selects single measurement
LAD 20: IEC GET :’
Triggers sweep with Group Execute Trigger
OUT 20,"*WAI":’ *WAI
Waits for measurement results
OUT 20,"SENS:DATA1?":’
Selects RMS results on channel 1
IN 20,Mwert$:’
Reads in measured value

3.15.10.2 Adapting Measurement Speed to Signal Frequency
Table 3-14

Hints for matching measurement speed and signal frequency
Automatic adaptation of measurement speed to signal frequency

IEC/IEEE-bus command

Used for

"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE AFASt"

RMS and RMS selective measurements:
Automatic matching of measurement time and signal
frequency by taking into account the signal period. The
measurement time is optimally adapted to the input signal. An
algorithmic error of max. 1% may occur

"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE AUTO"

RMS and RMS selective measurements:
Same as AFASt but with an algorithmic error of max. 0.1%.

1078.2008.02

3.307

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

UPL

Fixed measurement speed

IEC/IEEE-bus command

Used for

"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE SFASt"

RMS and RMS selective measurements:
measurement time 50 ms

"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE FAST"

RMS, RMS selective and DC measurements:
measurement time 200 ms

"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE SLOW"

RMS and RMS selective measurements:
measurement time 1000 ms

"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture:MODE VALue"
"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:APERture xxx ms"

RMS-, RMS selective and DC measurements:
measurement time freely selectable

VALue is a fixed integration time irrespective of the signal period.
RMS and RMS selective measurements:
•

If the measurement time is an integral multiple of the signal period, optimum integration and therefore a steady display is
obtained.

•

If the measurement time is longer and not an integral multiple of the signal period, an integration is obtained with a beat
effect in the display.

DC measurements:
If an AC voltage is superimposed on the DC, the measurement time as integration period has different effects with respect to
the signal period of the AC voltage shows different effects:
•

If the measurement time is an integral multiple of the signal period, optimum integration is obtained. The AC voltage does
not influence the DC measurement result and the display is steady.

•

If the measurement time is longer and not an integral multiple of the signal period, an integration is obtained with a beat
effect in the display. The AC voltage has no effect on the DC measurement result.

•

If the measurement time is shorter than the signal period, the measurement result follows the signal curve. The AC voltage
affects the DC measurement result.

Fixed monitor time

IEC/IEEE-bus command

Used for

"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime:MODE SFASt"

PEAK measurements:
time 50 ms

"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime:MODE FAST"

PEAK measurements:
time 200 ms

"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime:MODE SLOW"

PEAK measurements:
time 1000 ms

"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime:MODE FIXed"

QPK measurements:
time 3000 ms

"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime:MODE VALue"
"SENSe[1]:VOLTage:INTVtime xxx ms"

PEAK and QPK measurements:
time freely selectable
Generally no recommendation can be made as to the most
suitable monitor time for peak values, as it depends on the
input signal and on the measurement itself.

1078.2008.02

3.308

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

3.15.10.3 Configuration for Maximum Sweep Speed
3.15.10.3.1 Generator Sweep
To obtain maximum sweep speed, switch off all "slowing-down" settings. Particularly the frequency
measurement and settling of the low-distortion generator are very time-consuming. If permitted by the
measurement, these functions should be switched off.
The following example illustrates which functions are to be switched on or off to obtain maximum sweep
speed.
A typical example is a
• single-channel linear frequency sweep on channel 1 of
• 100 points,
• 200 Hz to 4 kHz and
• RMS measurement in
• AUTO FAST.
Each speed-reducing function can be switched off separately by means of a command after the *RST
command. In this case a single sweep should be triggered once with "INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI" (program
line 230) before sweeping is started to avoid the setting times of this command influencing the sweep
time. The sweep performed at maximum speed is then triggered with another INIT command (program
line 300).
:
100
IEC OUT 20,"*RST;*WAI"
110
IEC OUT 20,"INP:TYPE GEN1"
120
IEC OUT 20,"OUTP:SEL CH2"
130
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:RANG 1V": ’
Prevent ranging
140
IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:LOWD OFF": ’
Low-distortion generator off
150
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER:MODE GENT": ’
Measurement speed GEN TRACK
160
IEC OUT 20,"SENS2:FUNC ’OFF’": ’
Input peak measurement off
170
IEC OUT 20,"SENS3:FUNC ’OFF’": ’
Frequency measurement off
180
IEC OUT 20,"DISP:ANN OFF": ’
No display of measured values
190
IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:SWE:MODE AUTO;:SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE1": ’Frequency sweep
200
IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:FREQ:STAR 200;STOP 4000": ’
Sweep 200Hz to 4kHz
210
IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:SWE:FREQ:SPAC LIN": ’
Linear sweep
220
IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:SWE:FREQ:POIN 100": ’
100 Sweep points
230
IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI": ’
Triggers single sweep
240
IEC OUT 20,"SYST:BEEP:STAT OFF": ’
Dummy command waits for sweep end
:
300 IEC OUT 20,"INIT;*WAI": ’ Einzelswp mit max. Geschwindigkeit ausloesen
310 IEC OUT 20,"SYST:BEEP:STAT OFF": ’ Dummy command waits for sweep end
:
The fastest way to set a suitable sweep is to load an ACTUAL SETUP in which the required settings
have already been made.
:
100 IEC OUT 20,"MMEM:LOAD:STAT 0,’C:\UPL\USER\MAXSWP.SAC’;*WAI"
110 IEC OUT 20,"INIT;*WAI": ’
Triggers single sweep
120 IEC OUT 20,"SYST:BEEP:STAT OFF": ’
Dummy command waits for sweep end
:
The maximum sweep speed attained in this example is approx. 25 ms/step when an UPL with 386
board is used and approx. 8 ms/step when a 486 board is used.

1078.2008.02

3.309

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

UPL

3.15.10.3.2 External Sweep
The example below demonstrates the setup for a fast external frequency sweep with a sweep-signal
sequence obtained, for instance, from a CD or tape.
Matching the external frequency sweep to the signal sequence:
• Set a start value which should corresponds to the expected lowest frequency of the sweep-signal
sequence.
• Select a stop value slightly below the expected highest sequence frequency (approx. 0.1%) to
provide a safe halt criterion.
• elect a variation that is approx. 5 to 10 % lower than the expected frequency variation of the signal
sequence to ensure safe triggering and avoid unwanted intermediate values.
The example below illustrates the settings for matching the external sweep of the UPL to the signal
sequence generated by a sweep generator for demonstration purposes.
Connect the sweep generator to UPL input UNBAL Ch1, and set and start a
• continuous logarithmic sweep of 100 Hz to 16.1 kHz,
• with a step width 5%,
• and 120-ms time tick
The external sweep parameters of the UPL are set as recommended above and the external single
sweep is started.
• Start frequency of ext. sweep = 100 Hz (expected lowest frequency in this case 100 Hz)
• Stop frequency of ext. sweep = 16 kHz (0.1% below the expected highest frequency, in this case
16.1 kHz)
• Variation of ext. sweep = 4.5% (10% below the expected frequency variation of the sequence, in this
case 5 %)
Each time the frequency varies by more than 4.5% on channel 1, UPL carries out an RMS measurement
until a frequency greater than 16 kHz is measured. After this the external sweep is terminated and the
sweep curve is displayed.
With the speed-increasing settings in lines 270 to 290 and the fast frequency measurement for the
external sweep in line 310, a signal sequence with a minimum time tick of 120 ms can still be reliably
measured. For all other settings a longer time is required.
:

260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
400

’*** Speed-increasing settings
IEC OUT 20,"DISP:ANN OFF": ’
Display Update off
IEC OUT 20,"SENS3:FUNC ’OFF’": ’
Frequency measurement off
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER:MODE AFAS": ’
RMS meas. speed AUTO FAST
’*** Setting of external sweep parameters
IEC OUT 20,"TRIG:SOUR CH1R": ’
Ext. sweep with fast freq. measurement
IEC OUT 20,"ARM:LEV:MIN 100 mV": ’
Measurement above 100 mV
IEC OUT 20,"ARM:FREQ:STAR 100 Hz": ’
Start frequency 100 Hz
IEC OUT 20,"ARM:FREQ:STOP 16 kHz": ’
Stop frequency 16 kHz
IEC OUT 20,"TRIG:FREQ:VAR 4.5": ’
Var. just below sweep step width
IEC OUT 20,"DISP:CONF AP": ’
Selects graphic window
PRINT "External sweep is started - recording goes on!"
IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI": ’
Triggers external single sweep
IEC OUT 20,"SYST:BEEP:STAT ON": ’
Dummy command waits for sweep end
IEC LAD 20: IEC GTL : ’
Displays curve
:

3.15.10.3.3 RMS Selective Sweep
1078.2008.02

3.310

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

In the example below settings are made for a fast RMS selective sweep. The sweep speed mainly
depends on the
• bandwidth of the set bandpass /bandstop filter and the
• center frequency.
The bandpass or bandstop filters are very steep filters with an attenuation of 100 dB. The higher the
center frequency the wider the passband range and the faster the settling and therefore the RMS
selective measurement.
The example below illustrates a fast RMS selective sweep of a 5-kHz squarewave signal produced by
the UPL generator. The narrowband RMS measurement from 4 to 16 kHz yields a spectrum display of
the fundamental with the 2nd and 3rd harmonic of the squarewave signal.
10 IEC TERM 10: IEC TIME 60000
20 IEC OUT 20,"*RST;*WAI;:DISP:MODE COLB;:INP:TYPE GEN2"
30 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:FUNC SQU;:SOUR:FREQ 5000Hz;:SOUR:VOLT 1V"
70 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FUNC ’RMSS’":’
Switches on RMS selective measurement
80 ’*** Speed-increasing measures
90 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:VOLT:APER:MODE AFAS":’
Fast RMS measurement
100 IEC OUT 20,"SENS2:FUNC ’OFF’":’
Input-peak measurement off
110 IEC OUT 20,"SENS3:FUNC ’OFF’":’
Frequency measurement off
120 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:ANN OFF":’
Display Update off
130 ’*** Settings for RMS selective sweep
140 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:BAND:MODE PPCT1":’
Bandpass filter 1%
150 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FREQ:MODE SWE;:SENS:SWE:MODE AUTO":’
Auto sweep
160 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:SWE:SPAC LOG;POIN 50":’
Log. sweep over 50 points
180 IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FREQ:STAR 4000Hz;STOP 16000Hz":’
Start/stop frequency
190 ’*** Settings for graphics display
200 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:OPER CURV"
210 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:Y:UNIT DBV;:DISP:TRAC:X:AUTO OFF"
220 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:X:LEFT 3000Hz;RIGH 17000Hz":’
X scale
230’Measuring the sweep time
240 Z1=TIME
250 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI"
260 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:CONF AP":’
Selects analyzer panel with graphic window
270 Z2=TIME: IEC LAD 20: IEC GTL:’
Displays spectrum
280 PRINT (Z2-Z1)/100;" Sec pro Sweep": END
Speed-increasing measures become more effective towards higher center frequencies ( > 5 kHz)!

Grundwelle
3. Harmonische

2. Harmonische

Fig. 3-9

Spectrum of 5-kHz squarewave obtained through RMS selective sweep

1078.2008.02

3.311

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

UPL

3.15.10.3.4 Measurement Speed with Reference to Sampling Mode
If the HIGH RATE sampling mode (CONF:DAI HRM) is used with option UPL-B29 (digital audio 96 kHz),
the increased performance requirements caused by the higher clock rates lead to a certain reduction of
the measurement speed as compared to the BASE RATE mode (CONF:DAI BRM).See also chapter
2.6.8 Optimizing the Measurement Speed, section 5, Optimized Utilization of DSP Performance with
Reference to the Clock Rate.

3.15.11 List Management
3.15.11.1 Loading Lists into the UPL
3.15.11.1.1 Loading Sweep Lists into the UPL
Depending on the application, data are loaded into the UPL by a variety of commands that can be
looked up in section 3.10.6 Commands for Graphical Representation of Results. Loading the frequency
values for a frequency sweep is used as an example for demonstrating the procedure.
Load command:
"SOURce:LIST:FREQuency 100.0,300.0,500.0, ... ,20000"
permits a maximum of 1024 values to be loaded.
Use DATA and READ for handling a greater number of frequency values in program code:
:
8110 DATA 100,300,500,700,800,900,1000,2000,3000,4000,5000,6000,7000
8120 DATA 10000,13000,15000,17000,20000,0
8150 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:SWE:MODE AUTO":’
AUTO sweep
8160 IEC OUT 20,"SOUR:FREQ:MODE LIST1":’
LIST sweep of frequencies
8170 Bef$="SOUR:LIST:FREQ": ’
Lists block data of frequencies
8180 READ Frq
8190 Loop1:
8200 IF Frq<>0 THEN Bef$=Bef$+STR$(Frq)
8210 READ Frq: IF Frq<>0 THEN Bef$=Bef$+",": GOTO Loop1
8230 IEC OUT 20,Bef$:’
Outputs block command
:

3.15.11.1.2 Loading and Display of Several Traces in the UPL
Not only curves generated in the UPL by a sweep or FFT, or those stored in a file can be graphically
displayed but also any data sequences loaded into the UPL by the control program. All UPL capabilities
for scaling and unit conversion are used for the graphic display.
The following routine demonstrates loading of three traces into the UPL and their graphic display.
:
200 ’*********************** Loading traces ****************************
210 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:COUN 3":’
Sets number of traces to be loaded
220 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 0":’
Selects trace with index 0
230 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC LIST1, 100,1000,5000,15000":’
X values for trace 0
240 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC TRAC1, 0.001,0.01,0.01,0.001":
’Y values for trace 0
250 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 1":’
Selects trace with index 1
260 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC LIST1, 100,1500,5500,15000":’
X values for trace 1
270 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC TRAC1, 0.001,0.02,0.02,0.001":
’Y values for trace 1
280 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 2":’
Selects trace with index 2
290 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC LIST1, 100,1800,6000,15200":’
X values for trace 2
300 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC TRAC1, 0.001,0.03,0.03,0.001":
’Y values for trace 2
310 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:OPER CURV":’
Selects the display mode
320 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:Y:AUTO ONCE":’
Optimizes scale

1078.2008.02

3.312

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

330 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:CONF AP":’
Activates analyzer panel + graphic window
340 IEC LAD 20:IEC GTL:’
Displays curve
:
Note:
If traces are loaded into the UPL under program control and a sweep is subsequently selected, the trace
in the display will be erased and the sweep curve displayed.

3.15.11.1.3 Loading and Displaying of Trace Pairs in the UPL
The program below demonstrates loading of three trace pairs into the UPL, the graphic display,
subsequent selection of another unit, rescaling and changing from linear to logarithmic display on the X
axis.
:
290 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC1:FEED ’SENS:DATA’":’
Enables trace A
300 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC2:FEED ’SENS:DATA’":’
Enables trace B
310 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:COUN 3":’Three trace pairs
320 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 0":’
Selects trace pair with index 0
330 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC LIST1, 100,1000,5000,15000":’
X values of trace A
340 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC TRAC1, 0.001,0.01,0.01,0.001":’
Y values of trace A
350 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC LIST2, 100,1100,5100,15000":’
X values of trace B
360 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC TRAC2, 0.001,0.02,0.02,0.001":’
Y values of trace B
370 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAc:IND 1":’
Selects trace pair with index 1
380 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC LIST1, 100,1500,5500,15000":’
X values of trace A
390 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC TRAC1, 0.001,0.03,0.03,0.001":’
Y values of trace A
400 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC LIST2, 100,1600,5600,15000":’
X values of trace B
410 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC TRAC2, 0.001,0.04,0.04,0.001":’
Y values of trace B
420 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAc:IND 2":’
Selects trace pair with index 2
430 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC LIST1, 100,1800,6000,15200":’
X values of trace A
440 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC TRAC1, 0.001,0.05,0.05,0.001":’
Y values of trace A
450 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC LIST2, 100,1900,6100,15200":’
X values of trace B
460 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC TRAC2, 0.001,0.06,0.06,0.001":’
Y values of trace B
470 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:OPER CURV":’
Selects trace display
480 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC2:Y:EQU ON":’
Scaling of trace B same as for A
490 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC1:Y:AUTO ONCE":’
Autoscaling
500 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:CONF DP":’
Selects DISPLAY panel with graphic window
510 IEC LAD 20: IEC GTL: HOLD 5000:’
Result display for 5 s
520 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC1:Y:UNIT W":’
Conversion of Y values into Watt
530 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC1:Y:AUTO ONCE":’
Autoscaling
540 IEC LAD 20: IEC GTL:HOLD 5000:’
Result display for 5 s
550 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:X:SPAC LOG":’
Log display on X scale
560 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC1:Y:AUTO ONCE":’
Autoscaling
570 IEC LAD 20: IEC GTL
:

1078.2008.02

3.313

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

Fig. 3-10

UPL

Trace pairs loaded into UPL by control program

3.15.11.2 Readout of Data Lists from the UPL
When data lists are read from the UPL, in compliance with SCPI values are always transferred in the
basic unit even if other units have been selected for the trace display. The table below shows the basic
units for transferring data of various functions from the UPL to the controller.
Table 3-15

Basic units of data

Measurement function/sweep settings

Data with basic unit
for analog/digital instruments

"SENS:FUNC ’RMS’"

V/FS

"SENS:FUNC ’RMSS’"

V/FS

"SENS:FUNC ’PEAK’"

V/FS

"SENS:FUNC ’QPE’"

V/FS

"SENS:FUNC ’DC’"

V/FS

"SENS:FUNC ’THD’"

%

"SENS:FUNC ’THDN’"

%

"SENS:FUNC:MMOD THDN|NOIS

%

"SENS:FUNC:MMOD SNDR

% (große Werte)

"SENS:FUNC:MMOD LTHD|LNOI

V/FS

"SENS:FUNC ’DFD’"

%

"SENS:FUNC ’DIM’"

%

"SENS:FUNC ’MDIS’"

%

"SENS:FUNC ’WAF’"

%

"SENS:FUNC ’POL’"

keine Daten

"SENS:FUNC ’FFT’"

V/FS

"SENS:FUNC ’WAV’"

V/FS

"SENS:FUNC ’COHE’"

%

"SENS:FUNC ’RUBB’"

V

"SENS2:FUNC ’PEAK’"

V/FS

"SENS2:FUNC ’RMS’"

V/FS

1078.2008.02

3.314

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

"SENSe2:FUNCtion ’DIGInpamp’"

V

"SENSe2:FUNCtion ’PHASetoref’"

UI

"SENS3:FUNC ’FREQ’"

Hz

"SENS3:FUNC ’FQPH’"

Grad

"SENS3:FUNC ’FQGR’"

s

"SOUR:FREQ:MODE ..."

Hz

"SOUR:VOLT:MODE ..."

V/FS

"SOUR:ONT:MODE ..."

s

"SOUR:INT:MODE ..."

s

"SENS:FREQ:MODE ..."

Hz

When reading out lists remember that with commands
- "SOUR:LIST:FREQ?"
- "SOUR:LIST:INT?"
- "SOUR:LIST:ONT?"
- "SOUR:LIST:VOLT?"
- "SENS:LIST:FREQ?"
always the X values of the set sweep are read, contrary to commands
- "TRAC? LIST1"
- "TRAC? LIST2"
which cause the X values of the current graphic display to be read.
Note:
Normally, X values are identical for both command groups. They are only different if other than the
sweep curve is subsequently selected by means of program control or by loading a file while the
sweep mode is on .

3.15.11.2.1 Readout of Lists of up to 1024 Values
A great number of application-specific commands are available for reading out sweep data, FFT data,
data loaded from a file or by the control program (see section 3.10.6 Commands for Graphical
Representation of Results). The procedure is illustrated by an example for reading out level values of a
frequency sweep.
The readout procedure is as follows
"TRAC? TRAC" permits 1024 values to be read.
:
8270 IEC OUT 20,"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI": ’
Triggers a single sweep
:
8420 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC":’
Reads in level data of trace A
8430 IEC IN 20,S$:’
S$ comprises an ASCII string with level values in the
8440 ’
form "1.1234E-003,2.3456E-002,3.4567E-001 ..."
:

3.15.11.2.2 Readout of FFT Lists of more than 1024 Values
The number of values that can be transferred is limited to 1024 lines. If more than 1024 lines are to be
read, the data have to be divided in blocks of 1024 values. The table in section 2.6.5.12 FFT informs
on the number of lines of the selected FFT which are a function of FFT size and zooming.
In the R&S BASIC program below, the 7488 lines of a 8k-zoom FFT with 8 blocks each (7 x 1024 and 1
x 320 lines) are read and stored in the form of a string
(eg "5.50884e-004,4.1273e-004,1.64638e-004,...") in files FFT_Y1.TXT ... FFT_Y8.TXT.
:

1078.2008.02

3.315

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

UPL

500 FOR Blkidx=0 TO 7
510 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND"+STR$(Blkidx):’
Selects block index 0 to 7
520 ’
Reads out FFT lines and stores in string Fftdat$
530 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC"
540 IEC IN 20,Fftdat$:’
Reads in FFT data as ASCII string
550 Filename$="FFT_Y"+RIGHT$(STR$(Blkidx+1),1)+".TXT":’
Defines file name
560 OPENO# 1,Filename$: PRINT# 1,Fftdat$: CLOSE# 1
570 NEXT Blkidx
:
FFT line frequencies are read out in the same way with command
"TRAC? LIST1"

1078.2008.02

3.316

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

3.15.11.2.3 FFT Lists with Suppressed Noise Floor
Since in most cases the noise floor of an FFT is of no interest, the number of lines can be considerably
reduced by including only values exceeding a certain limit in the trace, eg 0.1 V.
To do so set the UPL as described below:
:
100 IECOUT 20,"DISPlay:TRACe:OPERation FFTErrors":’
Sets limits
110 IECOUT 20,"CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:VALue 0.1V":’..
>0.1 V
:
510 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 0":’
Block index 0
520 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC":’
Stores FFT lines above 0.1 V
530 IEC IN 20,Fftdat$:’
as string data under Fftdat$
:
FFT lines frequencies are read out in the same way using command
"TRAC? LIST1"

3.15.11.2.4 Readout of Several Traces from UPL
If several traces are displayed on the UPL ("DISP:TRAC:COUN > 1" set), the required trace can be
selected with command "DISP:TRAC:IND 0 to 17" and read out with commands "TRAC?
LIST1" and "TRACE? TRAC":
200
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350

:
’**************** Readout of traces ********************
IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 0":’
Selects trace with index 0
IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? LIST1":’
Selects X values of trace with index 0
IEC IN 20,X0$:’
Stores X values as ASCII string under X0$
IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC":’
Selects Y values of trace with index 0
IEC IN 20,Y0$:’
Stores Y values as ASCII string under Y0
IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 1":’
Selects trace with index 1
IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? LIST1":’
Selects X values of trace with index 1
IEC IN 20,X1$:’
Stores X values as ASCII string under X1$
IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC":’
Selects Y values of trace with index 1
IEC IN 20,Y1$:’
Stores Y values as ASCII string under Y1$
IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 2":’
Selects trace with index 2
IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? LIST1":’
Selects X values of trace with index 2
IEC IN 20,X2$:’
Stores X values as ASCII string under X1$
IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC":’
Selects Y values of trace with index 2
:

1078.2008.02

3.317

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

UPL

3.15.11.2.5 Readout of Trace Pairs from UPL
Trace pairs are read out in the way described in section 3.15.11.2.4 Readout of Several Traces from
UPL, with the difference
"TRAC? LIST1" and "TRAC? TRAC1" reads out the X and Y values of trace A
"TRAC? LIST2" and "TRAC? TRAC2" reads out the X and Y values of trace B
:
200 ’******************** Readout of trace pairs**********************
220 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 0":’
Selects trace pair with index 0
230 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? LIST1":’
Selects X values of trace A with index 0
240 IEC IN 20,Xa0$:’
Stores X values as ASCII string under Xa0$
250 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC1":’
Selects Y values of trace A with index 0
260 IEC IN 20,Ya0$:’
Stores Y values as ASCII string under Ya0$
270 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? LIST2":’
Selects X values of trace B with index 0
280 IEC IN 20,Xb0$:’
Stores X values as ASCII string under Xb0$
290 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC2":’
Selects Y values of trace B with index 0
300 IEC IN 20,Yb0$:’
Stores Y values as ASCII string under Yb0$
310 ’
320 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 1":’
Selects trace pair with index 1
330 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? LIST1":’
Selects X values of trace A with index 1
340 IEC IN 20,Xa1$:’
Stores X values as ASCII string under Xa0$
350 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC1":’
Selects Y values of trace A with index 1
360 IEC IN 20,Ya1$:’
Stores Y values as ASCII string under Ya0$
370 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? LIST2":’
Selects X values of trace B with index 1
380 IEC IN 20,Xb1$:’
Stores X values as ASCII string under Xb0$
390 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC2":’
Selects Y values of trace B with index 1
400 IEC IN 20,Yb1$:’
Stores Y values as ASCII string under Yb0$
410 ’
420 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:IND 2":’
Selects trace pair with index 2
430 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? LIST1":’
Selects X values of trace A with index 2
440 IEC IN 20,Xa2$:’
Stores X values as ASCII string under Xa0$
450 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC1":’
Selects Y values of trace A with index 2
460 IEC IN 20,Ya2$:’
Stores Y values as ASCII string under Xa0$
470 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? LIST2":’
Selects X values of trace B with index 2
480 IEC IN 20,Xb2$:’
Stores X values as ASCII string under Xa0$
490 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC2":’
Selects Y values of trace B with index 2
500 IEC IN 20,Yb2$:’
Stores Y values as ASCII string under Xa2$
:

1078.2008.02

3.318

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

3.15.12 Filter Settings
In the case of RMS measurements, the analyzer permits a maximum of 4 filters to be switched into the
measurement path, 3 filters with PEAK and QPK measurements and one filter with THDN
measurements. Fixed filters like CCITT, CCIR or WRUMble or user-defined filters can be used.
The example below illustrates a customized filters made up of a bandpass filter of 11 to 15 kHz and the
two notch filters of 12 and 14 kHz.
300
310
315
320
330
340
350
355
360
370
380
390
395
400
410
420
430
435
436
437
440
450
460
470
480

:
IEC OUT 20,"*RST;*WAI": ’
*WAI waits for end of calibration
IEC OUT 20,"DISP:MODE COLB":’
Coloured user interface
’----- User filter No. 1: Bandpass filter 11 to 15 kHz, Atten. 100 dB
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL1:BPAS ON"
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL1:PASS:LOW 11 KHZ"
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL1:PASS:UPP 15 KHZ"
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL1:ATT 100 DB"
’----- User filter No. 2: 12-kHz notch filter
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL2:NOTC ON"
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL2:CENT 12 KHZ"
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL2:WIDT 500 HZ"
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL2:ATT 100 DB"
’----- User filter No. 3: 14-kHz notch filter
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL3:NOTC ON"
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL3:CENT 14 KHZ"
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL3:WIDT 500 HZ"
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:UFIL3:ATT 100 DB"
’The 3 customized filters defined above are used for RMS
’measurements; the bandpass filter for increasing the filter slope
’is used twice.
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FUNC ’RMS’"
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FILT1:UFIL1 ON":’
Two bandpass filters for
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FILT2:UFIL1 ON":’
increasing the filter slope
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FILT3:UFIL2 ON":’
12-kHz notch filter
IEC OUT 20,"SENS:FILT4:UFIL3 ON":’
14-kHz notch filter
:

Filter curve obtained in a sweep from 9 to 17 kHz:

Fig. 3-11

Filter curve: steep bandpass filter + 2 notch filters

1078.2008.02

3.319

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

UPL

3.15.13 Finding a File
UPL provides no special command to find out whether a file has been stored on the UPL hard disk or on
a floppy.
Remedy:
If an attempt to copy the file in a temporary file is not followed by an error message, the file already
exists.
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170

:
File$ = "’C:\UPL\USER\MY.SCO’":’ File of interest
IECOUT 20,"MMEM:COPY "+File$+",’TMP.TMP’"
IECOUT 20,"SYST:ERROR?": IECIN 20,E$
IF LEFT$(E$,1)="0" THEN
PRINT "File available!"
ELSE
PRINT "File not available!"
ENDIF
:

3.15.14 Readout of Error Queue
The error queue can be read out after each command or by means of an SRQ interrupt routine if an
error has occurred (see section 3.7.4.5 Error Queue Query)
The program below is a routine for reading out the error queue until it is empty.
:
1290Errqueue:
1300 IEC OUT 20,"SYST:ERR?": ’
Reads out error queue until queue is empty
1310 IEC IN 20,E$
1320 IF LEFT$(E$,1)="0" THEN RETURN:’
Quits error routine
1330 PRINT "Contents of error queue: ";E$: GOTO Errqueue
:

3.15.15 Command Synchronization
The synchronization modes realized in the example below are described in section 3.6.8, Command
Synchronization.
Use commands *WAI, *OPC? or *OPC with SRQ to terminate a specific action before a new one is
executed. Through suitable programming the controller can be made to wait for a specific action to be
completed (see section 3.6.8.3 Comparison of Synchronization Capabilities).
There are two events in the UPL which have to be waited for before the next command can be
executed:
• End of calibration
• End of measurement
Selection of an instrument with automatic calibration is used as an example for demonstrating the three
synchronization methods. The following command should only be sent when the automatic calibration is
completed. For more detailed information refer to section 3.6.8.1 Wait for End of Calibration.

1078.2008.02

3.320

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

3.15.15.1 Command Synchronization with *WAI
IECOUT 20,"INSTrument2 A100;*WAI":’

Selects new analog instrument and
waits with *WAI for end of calibration

3.15.15.2 Command Synchronization with *OPC?
IECOUT 20,"INSTrument2 A100":’
IECOUT 20,"*OPC?":’
IECIN 20,A$:’

Selects new analog instrument
Sends OPC?. Calibration is terminated when
the response "1" is received.

3.15.15.3 Command Synchronization with *OPC and SRQ
Command synchronization with *OPC and SRQ is described in advance of section 3.15.16 Service
Request, which should best be read through first. Waiting for end of calibration with *OPC and SRQ
after an instrument selection is again used as an example.
Procedure:
• set Operation Complete bit (OPC) in the Event Status Register,
• set ESB bit 5 in the Status Byte Register
• activate SRQ handler,
• call up change of instrument with automatic calibration,
• output synchronization command *OPC,
• wait in a loop for SRQ (end of calibration).
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
1071
1072
1073
:
1080
1090
:
1100
1110
1120
1130
1140
:
2000
2010
2020
2040

’***************** Setting up SRQ ********************************
IEC TERM 10:’
Line Feed as terminator
IEC TIME 10000.’
IEC/IEEE-bus timeout 10 s
IEC OUT 20,"*CLS"
’Enable OPC (Operation Complete) in the Event Status Register
’
+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
’
| d7| Event Status Register | d0|
’
|POW|USR|CME|EXE|DDE|QUE|
|OPC|
IEC OUT 20,"*ESE 1": ’
| 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 1 |
’
+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
’Trigger SRQ through entry in the Event Status Register (d5=1)
’
+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
’
| d7| Status Byte Register | d0|
’
|SOR|RQS|ESB|
|SQR|
|
|
|
IEC OUT 20,"*SRE 96": ’
| 0 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
’
+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
ON SRQ1 GOSUB Srqintr:’
Activate SRQ handler of IEC/IEEE bus No. 1
IECOUT 20,"INSTrument2 A100":’ Instrument change with autom. calibr.
IECOUT 20,"*OPC":’
Synchronization command
REPEAT
’Other tasks may be performed as long as no SRQ is appears.
’Signalled by a count on screen.
Count=Count+1: PRINT Count
UNTIL Srqflag=0:’
Flag = 1 when calibration is completed
’** Standard SRQ interrupt routine shown in section 4.15.1.2 ***
Srqintr:
IEC SPL 20,Sb%: ’
Reads in Status Byte via Serial Poll
:

1078.2008.02

3.321

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

UPL

3.15.16 Service Request
As can be seen from the introduction to the SRQ standard routine below, a Service Request routine
requires an extended initialization of the UPL.
The SRQ standard routine uses Serial Poll for processing SRQ . This SRQ routine is used in almost all
demo programs but for the sake of clarity it is not listed each time (remark in program code). The
program example in section 3.15.16.2 SRQ Interrupt Routine with Parallel Poll, demonstrates SRQ
handling by means of Parallel Poll which should be used to speed up identification of the instrument
raising the SRQ when several IEC/IEEE-bus instruments are connected.
Same as with all other program examples it is assumed that IEC/IEEE-bus address 20 is set on the UPL
to be controlled.

3.15.16.1 SRQ Interrupt Routine with Serial Poll
The examples below for initializing an SRQ and the SRQ interrupt routine are suggestions which can be
modified as required by the specific application.
Serial Poll SRQ and the Serial Poll SRQ interrupt routine are initialized in this or a similar form in almost
all program examples.

3.15.16.1.1 Initialization of Serial Poll SRQ
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270

:
’************ Initializing Serial Poll SRQ ****************
IEC TERM 10:’ IEC/IEEE-bus terminator = Line Feed
IEC TIME 10000: ’ IEC/IEEE-bus waiting time 10 s
IEC OUT 20,"*CLS":’Resets Status Register
’Enables error bits in the Event Status Register
’
+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
’
| d7| Event Status Register | d0|
’
|POW|USR|CME|EXE|DDE|QUE|
|OPC|
IEC OUT 20,"*ESE 61": ’
| 0 | 0 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 1 |
’
+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
’Enables d5 for SRQ trigger through Event Status Register
’
+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
’
| d7| Status Byte Register | d0|
’
|SOR|RQS|ESB|
|SQR|
|
|
|
IEC OUT 20,"*SRE 96": ’
| 0 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
’
+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
Srqflag=0
ON SRQ1 GOSUB Srqintr: ’ Activates SRQ handler
:

1078.2008.02

3.322

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

3.15.16.1.2 Serial Poll SRQ Routine
The following standard SRQ interrupt routine is used in almost all the program examples. It displays the
reason for the SRQ and the contents of the error queue on the controller monitor and signals to the
main program with Srqflag = 1, that a SRQ has occurred.
1000Srqintr:
1010 ’ ***********************************************
1020 ’ ******* Standard SRQ Interrupt Routine ********
1030 ’ ***********************************************
1040 IEC SPL 20,Sb%: ’ Read-in of Status Byte
1050 IF (Sb% AND 64)=0 THEN GOTO Ret: ’ No response in the case of false
alarm
1060 Srqflag=1
1070 PRINT "Status Byte Register = ";Sb%
1080 IF (Sb% AND 1)
THEN PRINT " SRQ->Not used"
1090 IF (Sb% AND 2)
THEN PRINT " SRQ->Not used"
1100 IF (Sb% AND 4)
THEN PRINT " SRQ->Not used"
1110 IF (Sb% AND 8)
THEN PRINT " SRQ->Questionable-status bit"
1120 IF (Sb% AND 16) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Not used"
1130 IF (Sb% AND 32) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Event-status bit"
1140 IF (Sb% AND 64) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Summary bit"
1150 IF (Sb% AND 128) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Operation-status bit"
1160 ’
1170 IEC OUT 20,"*ESR?": ’ Read-in of Status Register
1180 IEC IN 20,Es$
1190 PRINT "Event Status Register = ";Es$
1200 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 1)
THEN PRINT " ESR->Operation-complete bit"
1210 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 2)
THEN PRINT " ESR->Not used"
1220 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 4)
THEN PRINT " ESR->Query-error bit"
1230 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 8)
THEN PRINT " ESR->Device-dep. error bit"
1240 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 16) THEN PRINT " ESR->Execution-error bit"
1250 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 32) THEN PRINT " ESR->Command-error bit"
1260 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 64) THEN PRINT " ESR->User-request bit"
1270 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 128) THEN PRINT " ESR->Power-on bit"
1280 ’
1290Errqueue:
1300 IEC OUT 20,"SYST:ERR?": ’ Readout of error queue until queue is empty!
1310 IEC IN 20,E$
1320 IF LEFT$(E$,1)="0" THEN GOTO Ret
1330 PRINT "Contents of Error Queue:"
1340 PRINT " ";E$: GOTO Errqueue
1350 ’
1360Ret: ON SRQ1 GOSUB Srqintr: RETURN:’ Reactivates SRQ!

1078.2008.02

3.323

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

UPL

3.15.16.2 SRQ Interrupt Routine with Parallel Poll
3.15.16.2.1 Initialization of Parallel Poll SRQ
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190

:
’************ Initialization of Parallel Poll SRQ ********************
IEC TERM 10:’
IEC/IEEE-bus terminator = Line Feed
IEC TIME 10000: ’
IEC/IEEE-bus waiting time 10 s
IEC OUT 20,"*CLS":’
Resets Status Register
IEC OUT 20,"*ESE 121":’ Enables OPC,DDE,EXE,CMD in the Event Status Reg.
IEC OUT 20,"*SRE 32":’
Enables Event Status bit as SRQ event
IEC OUT 20,"*PRE 255":’
Enables all Parallel Poll lines
IEC PCON 20,1,6:’UPL identifies itself with 1 on line 6
IEC PCON 10,1,3:’Device with address 10 ident. itself with 1 on line 3
ON SRQ1 GOSUB Srqintr:’
SRQ handler activated
:

3.15.16.2.2 Parallel Poll SRQ Routine
740 ’******************************************************************
750 ’******* Standard Parallel-Poll SRQ Interrupt Routine *************
760 ’******************************************************************
770Srqintr:
790 PRINT "SRQ has occurred!"
800 IEC PPL Pp%
810 IF (Pp% AND 32)<>0 THEN GOSUB UPLsrq
820 IF (Pp% AND 4)<>0 THEN GOSUB Adr10srq
825 ON SRQ1 GOSUB Srqintr: RETURN:’ Reactivates SRQ
826 ’
830UPLsrq:
840 ’******************************************************************
850 ’**********
SRQ sent by UPL
*******************
860 ’******************************************************************
1040 IEC SPL 20,Sb%: ’ Read-in of Status Byte
1060 Srqflag=1
1070 PRINT "Status Byte Register = ";Sb%
1080 IF (Sb% AND 1)
THEN PRINT " SRQ->Not used"
1090 IF (Sb% AND 2)
THEN PRINT " SRQ->Not used"
1100 IF (Sb% AND 4)
THEN PRINT " SRQ->Not used"
1110 IF (Sb% AND 8)
THEN PRINT " SRQ->Questionable status"
1120 IF (Sb% AND 16) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Not used"
1130 IF (Sb% AND 32) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Event Status"
1140 IF (Sb% AND 64) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Summary"
1150 IF (Sb% AND 128) THEN PRINT " SRQ->Operation Status"
1160 ’

1078.2008.02

3.324

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

1170 IEC OUT 20,"*ESR?": ’ Read-in of Event Status Register
1180 IEC IN 20,Es$
1190 PRINT "Event Status Register = ";Es$
1200 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 1)
THEN PRINT " ESR->Operation complete"
1210 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 2)
THEN PRINT " ESR->Not used"
1220 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 4)
THEN PRINT " ESR->Query error"
1230 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 8)
THEN PRINT " ESR->Device-dep. error"
1240 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 16) THEN PRINT " ESR->Execution error"
1250 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 32) THEN PRINT " ESR->Command error"
1260 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 64) THEN PRINT " ESR->User request"
1270 IF (VAL(Es$) AND 128) THEN PRINT " ESR->Power on"
1280 ’
1290Errqueue:
1300 IEC OUT 20,"SYST:ERR?": ’ Read-out of error queue until it is empty
1310 IEC IN 20,E$
1320 IF LEFT$(E$,1)="0" THEN RETURN
1330 PRINT "Contents of error queue:"
1340 PRINT " ";E$: GOTO Errqueue
1250 RETURN
1260 ’
1270Adr10srq:
1280 ’*****************************************************************
1290 ’******* SRQ sent by device with the address 10
*************
1300 ’*****************************************************************
1310 IEC SPL 10,Sb%: ’
Reset SRQ conditions for device with address 10
1320 ’SRQ evaluation for device with the address 10
1330 ’
1340 ’
1350 RETURN

3.15.17 Readout of Cursor Position and Values
The values of a curve displayed on the UPL can be read by the controller, no matter whether the curve
has been generated by a sweep or FFT or loaded into the UPL from a file or the controller. To do so the
o- or * cursor has to be positioned as required. The value at the cursor crossing the curve or the
difference value can be read out.
The great number of commands available for positioning the cursor are listed below.
To simplify the program examples for the various cursor display modes and the respective intercept
points, the cursor position is indicated directly in the form of a value.

1078.2008.02

3.325

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
Table 3-16

UPL

Positioning the cursor on the displayed curve
Positioning the cursor for curve display

Positioning the o cursor:

Positioning the *-cursor:

"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE MIN1"
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE MIN1"
Sets the horizontal o-cursor to the minimum value of Sets the horizontal *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE N12|D12|C12"
curve A on the X axis.
to the minimum value of curve A on the X axis .
Sets vertical *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE HL1|HL2|HLD1|HLD2"
to minimum of curve A on the Y axis.
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE MAX1"
Sets horizontal o-cursor to maximum of
curve A.

"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE MAX1"
Sets horizontal *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE N12|D12|C12"
to maximum of curve A on the X axis.

F

Sets vertical *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE HL1|HL2|HLD1|HLD2"
to maximum of curve A on the Y axis.
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE MIN2"
Sets horizontal o-cursor to minimum of
curve B.

"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE MIN2"
Sets horizontal *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE N12|D12|C12"
to maximum of curve B on the X axis.
Sets vertical *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE HL1|HL2|HLD1|HLD2"
to minimum of curve B on the Y axis.

"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE MAX2"
Sets horizontal o-cursor to maximum of
curve B.

"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE MAX2"
Sets horizontal *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE N12|D12|C12"
to maximum of curve B on the X axis.

F

Sets vertical *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE HL1|HL2|HLD1|HLD2"
to maximum of curve B on the Y axis.
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE VALue"
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS 1000kHz"
Sets
horizontal
o-cursor
for
modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE N12|D12|C12"
to specified position on the X axis.

"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE VALue"
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS 1000kHz"
Sets horizontal *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE N12|D12|C12"
to specified X position.

F

Sets vertical *-cursor for modes
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE HL1|HL2|HLD1|HLD2
to specified position on the Y axis.

1078.2008.02

3.326

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

Table 3-17

Positioning the cursor for FFT spectrum display
Positioning the cursor for FFT spectrum display

Positioning the o-cursor:

Positioning the *-cursor:

"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE MARKer1"
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE MARKer1"
Sets vertical o-cursor to X position of marker if the latter was Sets vertical *-cursor to X position of marker if the latter was
switched on with "DISP:TRAC1|2:MARK:MODE MAX|CURS".
switched on with
"DISP:TRAC1|2:MARK:MODE MAX|CURS".
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE NEXTmarker"
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE NEXTmarker"
Sets vertical o-cursor to X position of next harmonic if Sets vertical *-cursor to X position of next harmonic if
harmonics display was switched on with
harmonics display was switched on with
DISP:TRAC1|2:MARK:HARM ON.
"DISP:TRAC1|2:MARK:HARM ON".
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE IMAX1"
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE IMAX1"
Sets vertical o-cursor to X position of highest Y value of FFT Sets vertical *-cursor to X position of highest Y value of
FFT curve A.
curve A.
"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE IMAX2"
"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE IMAX2"
Sets vertical o-cursor to X position of highest Y value of FFT Sets vertical *-cursor to X position of highest Y value of
FFT curve B.
curve B.

Note:
Positioning of *-cursor partly depends on the set cursor mode "DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE
N12|D12|C12|HL1|HL2|HLD1|HLD2". Function and effect of the individual cursor modes can be
seen from the following diagrams and the associated program line 110

Abbreviations used in the diagrams below:
o(A)
o(B)
o(X)
*(A)
*(B)
*(X)
*(Y)
*(X)AL
*(X)AR
*(X)BL
*(X)BR

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Y value at crosspoint of vertical o-cursor on curve A
Y value at crosspoint of vertical o-cursor on curve B
X value of vertical o-cursor
Y value at crosspoint of vertical *-cursor on curve A
Y value at crosspoint of vertical *-cursor on curve B
X value of vertical *-cursor
Y value of horizontal *-cursor
X value at left crosspoint of horizontal *-cursor on curve A
X value at right crosspoint of horizontal *-cursor on curve A
X value at left crosspoint of horizontal *-cursor on curve B
X value at right crosspoint of horizontal *-cursor on curve B
Cursor data for traces can be read out without restrictions as from UPL program version 2.10 onwards.!

1078.2008.02

3.327

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

Y

DATA1?

Kurve B
Kurve A

o(A)
DAT A 2?

100
110
120
130

IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC

OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT

UPL

20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1 ACT": ’ Activates o-cursor 1
20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:MODE N12"
20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE VAL": ’at 1000 Hz
20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS 1000 Hz"

o(X)
DATA3?

o(B)

Analogously, CURS2 activates the *-cursor yielding the values *(A), *(X) and
*(B)

X

o

Fig. 3-12

Cursor data o(A), o(X), o(B), *(A), *(X), *(B)

Y

DATA1?

Kurve B
Kurve A

o(A)-o(B)
DATA2?

100
110
120
130

IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC

OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT

20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1 ACT": ’ Activates o-cursor 1
20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:MODE D12"
20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE VAL": ’at 1000 Hz
20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS 1000 Hz"

o(X)

Analogously, CURS2 activates the *-cursor yielding the values *(A) - *(B) and
*(X)
X

o

Fig. 3-13

Cursor data o(A)-o(B), o(X), *(A)-*(B), *(X)

Y

DATA1?

Kurve B
Kurve A

*(A)-o(A)
DATA2?

*(X)-o(X)
DATA3?

*(B)-o(B)

o

Fig. 3-14

X

*

Cursor data *(A)-o(A), *(X)-o(X), *(B)-o(B)

Y

DATA1?

Kurve B
Kurve A

*(X)AL
DATA2?

*(Y)

*

DATA3?

*(X)AR

Fig. 3-15

100 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2 ACT": ’ Activates *-cursor
110 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:MODE HL1"
120 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE VAL": ’Positions
cursor to
Y value 0.2 V
130 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS 0.2 V"

Analogously, cursor ...CURS2:MODE
*(X)BR for curve B.

X

*-

HL2 yields values *(X)BL, *(Y) and

Cursor data *(X)AL, *(Y), *(X)AR

Y

DATA1?

Kurve B
Kurve A

*(X)AL
DATA2?

*

o(A)-*(Y)
DATA3?

*(X)AR

X

o

Fig. 3-16

100 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1 ACT;CURS2 ACT": ’Activates
o- and *-cursors
110 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:MODE C12"
120 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE VAL": ’o-cursor 1 kHz
130 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS 1000 Hz"
140 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE VAL": ’*-cursor 2 kHz
150 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS 5000 Hz"

100 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1 ACT;CURS2 ACT": ’Activates
o- and *-cursors
110 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:MODE HLD1"
120 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE VAL": ’Positions
o-cursor on 1000 Hz
130 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS 1000.0 Hz"
140 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE VAL": ’Positions
*-cursor on Y value 0.2 V.
150 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS 0.2 V"

Cursor data *(X)AL, o(A)-*(Y), *(X)AR

1078.2008.02

3.328

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

Y

DATA1?

Kurve B
Kurve A

*(X)BL
DATA2?

*

o(B)-*(Y)
DATA3?

*(X)BR

X

o

Fig. 3-17

100 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1 ACT;CURS2 ACT": ’Activates
o- and *-cursors
110 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:MODE HLD2"
120 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS:MODE VAL": ’Positions
o-cursor on 1000 Hz
130 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS1:POS 1000.0 Hz"
140 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS:MODE VAL": ’Positions
*-cursor on Y value 0.2 V
150 IEC OUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS2:POS 0.2 V"

Cursor data *(X)BL, o(B)-*(Y), *(X)BR

Readout of cursor values
DATA1?, DATA2? and DATA3? values are read in with the following commands:
IECOUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS:DATA1?":IEC IN 20,"D1$
IECOUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS:DATA2?":IEC IN 20,"D2$
IECOUT 20,"DISP:TRAC:CURS:DATA3?":IEC IN 20,"D3$

3.15.18

Values are output with the unit
indicated in the display.

Call a BASIC-Macro

With the UPL, setting and measurement sequences can be written as BASIC programs or recorded
using the built-in program generator (see 3.15.3 Command Logging - Converting B10 into IEC/IEEEBus Commands). Option UPL-K2 (Universal Autorun Control) is required. The generated BASIC
programs can be stored (preferred file extension: .BAS) and called and used in various ways (see Macro
operating).
The following example illustrates how a BASIC macro is called by means of an IEC/IEEE-bus control
program in the programming language C and the IEC/IEEE-bus driver GPIB.COM from National
Instruments:

Example 1:
BASIC macro transfers a measurement result in a measurement-result buffer to the
control program
BASIC macro:
A short program is written under Universal Autorun Control UPL-B10 to trigger a level in channel 1. To
demonstrate that any data can be transferred to the IEC/IEEE-bus control program as floating-point
values via the measurement-result buffers, the level of channel 1 (line 30) is copied into the
measurement-result buffer of channel 2 (line 40), from where it is read with the aid of the IEC/IEEE-bus
control program.
This BASIC macro is stored in the UPL under the file name LEV_CH1.BAS.
10
20
30
40
50

UPL
UPL
UPL
UPL
END

OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT

"INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI"
"*TRG;*WAI"
"SENS:DATA?": UPL IN A$: ’ level of channel 1 ...
"SENS:DATA2 "+A$: ’... copying into buffer of channel 2

How to proceed:
• Press the F3 key to switch from the UPL user interface to Universal Autorun Control.
• Type the five lines shown above.
• Store program with SAVE LEV_CH1.BAS.
• Press the F3 key again to return to UPL user interface.
1078.2008.02

3.329

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

UPL

The following IEC/IEEE-bus control program calls the BASIC macro in the UPL with the command
SYST:PROG:EXEC ’LEV_CH1.BAS’. There is a delay until serial polling indicates that bit 14 (RUN)
has changed from 1 to 0 in the OPERation register; this indicates that the BASIC macro has been
executed.
The measurement result is read from channel 2’s measurement-result buffer and displayed on the
screen.
IEC/IEEE-bus control program in controller:
/*************************************************************************
* A BASIC program in UPL triggering a level-measurement result in channel 1
* To be started as a BASIC macro from the controller
* Measurement result to be output at the controller
**************************************************************************/
#include 
#include 
#include 
#include 
#include 
#include "C:\NI-GPIB\C\DECL.H"
void report_error(int fd, char *errmsg)
{
fprintf(stderr, "Error %d: %s\n", iberr, errmsg);
if (fd != -1) {
printf("Cleanup: taking board off-line\n");
ibonl(fd,0);
}
getch();
exit(1);
/* abort program */
}
void befout (int upl, char *befstr)
{
ibwrt(upl, befstr,(long)strlen(befstr));
if (ibsta & ERR)
report_error (upl, "Could not initialize UPL");
}
void queryin (int upl, char* reading)
{
ibrd(upl, reading, 20L);
if (ibsta & ERR)
report_error (upl, "Could not read data from UPL");
reading[ibcnt-1] = ’\0’; /* Overwrites line feed with string terminator */
}
void main()
{
int
upl;
/* File descriptor for UPL */
int
i;
char
reading[20]; /* UPL measurement results */
long count = 0;
char stb;
if ((upl = ibdev(0, 20, 0, T10s, 1, 0)) < 0)
report_error (upl, "Could not initialize UPL");
befout (upl,"*ESE 0"); //Disables information from event status register
befout (upl,"*SRE 0"); //Disables SRQ

1078.2008.02

3.330

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

/* The 1 -> 0 transition of bit 14 (RUN) in the OPERation register
should set bit 7 (OPER) in the STB. The STB is read by means
of serial poll until the event has occurred. */
befout (upl,"STAT:OPER:NTR 16384"); /* Enables 1->0 transition of bit 14 */
befout (upl,"STAT:OPER:PTR 0");
/* Disables 0->1 transition of bit 14
*/
befout (upl,"STAT:OPER:ENAB 16384"); /* Enables bit 14 for STB */
/* The BASIC program LEV_CH1.BAS in the UPL working directory writes
the level measured in channel 1 to the measurement-result buffer
channel 2
to demonstrate data transfer via the measurement-result buffers. */

of

for (i=1; i <= 10; i++)
{/* Reads 10 measurement results via the BASIC macro LEV_CH1.BAS */
/* Reading the EVENt part of the OPERation register deletes the
OPER bit in the status byte register! */
befout (upl,"STAT:OPER:EVEN?");
queryin (upl,reading);
befout (upl,"SYST:PROG:EXEC ’LEV_CH1.BAS’"); // Starts the BASIC macro
/* When the RUN bit (bit 14) in the OPERation register changes from 1 to
0, the BASIC macro has been executed and the measurement
result can be read from the measurement-result buffer. */
stb = 0;
while ((stb & 0x80) == 0)
// Serial poll is performed until
{
// bit 7 (OPER) in the STB is set to 1.
ibrsp (upl,&stb);
// Serial poll of the status byte register
if ((count++ % 100) == 0) // Progress counter while
printf ("+");
// waiting for bit 7 = 1 */
}
/* The level of channel 1 can be read from the channel-2 measurementresult buffer, where it was stored by the BASIC macro. */
befout (upl,"SENS:DATA2?");
queryin (upl,reading);
printf ("\n%s\n",reading);
}
printf ("Any key:\n");
getch ();
ibonl(upl, 0); /* Take UPL off-line */
}
Data transfer between BASIC macro and controller via the measurement-result buffers:
The measurement-result buffers can be written to so as to transfer data between the BASIC macro and
the controller. The measurement results calculated by the macro can thus then be displayed in the UPL
environment, which is familiar to the user.
Furthermore, fast exchange of floating-point parameters and floating-point measurement results
between the UPL macro and the controller is possible via the measurement-result buffers. The following
commands are available for the data exchange:
SENS1:DATA1, SENS1:DATA2
SENS2:DATA1, SENS2:DATA2
SENS3:DATA1, SENS3:DATA2

1078.2008.02

3.331

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

UPL

Note:
If the measurement results are not to be overwritten by the UPL measurement task, make sure the
measurement task is halted, ie no measurement or sweep is being performed, while the measurement
results are being written.

Example 2:
BASIC macro transfers a set of data in a block buffer to the control program
BASIC macro:
A short program is written under Universal Autorun Control UPL-B10. This program writes any set of
data into the block buffer specially generated for BASIC macros. The data are then read from this buffer
by the IEC/IEEE-bus control program.
This BASIC macro is stored in the UPL under BLK.BAS.
10
20
30
40
50
60
70

DIM A(1000): Frq=100: A(0)=X
FOR I=1 TO 999: ’ 1000 log. frequency values ...
Frq=Frq*1.00503: A(I)=Frq: ’ ... 100 Hz to 15 kHz
NEXT I
UPL BLOCKOUT A(0),1000
UPL OUT "SYST:PROG"
END

Proceed as for example 1.
The following IEC/IEEE-bus control program calls the BASIC macro in the UPL with the command
SYST:PROG:EXEC ’BLK.BAS’. There is a delay until serial polling indicates that bit 14 (RUN) in the
OPERation register has changed from 1 to 0. This shows that the BASIC macro has been executed.
The block data are read from the block buffer and displayed on the screen.
IEC/IEEE-bus control program in the controller:
First part of program as in example 1
:
:
befout (upl,"SYST:PROG:EXEC ’BLK.BAS’"); // Starts the BASIC macro
stb = 0;
while ((stb & 0x80) == 0) // Serial poll is performed until
{
// bit 7 (OPER) in the STB is set to 1.
ibrsp (upl,&stb);
if ((count++ % 100) == 0) // Progress counter while
printf ("_");
// waiting for bit 7 = 1 */
}
/* Determines number of values in the block buffer */
befout (upl, "SYST:PROG:POIN?");
queryin (upl,reading);
points = atoi (reading);
printf ("\nBlock buffer contains %d values. Display values...\n",points);
getch();
/* Read values from block buffer */
befout (upl,"SYST:PROG?"); /* Fetch contents from block buffer.
The values are available as ASCII characters separated
by commas */
ibeos (upl,0x142C); //Stringterminator = ’,’
for (i = 0; i < points-1; i++)

1078.2008.02

3.332

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

{// Each value is read up to the comma
queryin (upl,reading);
fltvalfield[i] = atof (reading);
}
// Before the last value has been read, the string terminator ...
ibeos (upl,0x140A); //... is reset to AF.
queryin (upl,reading);
fltvalfield[i] = atof (reading);
// Values are output on the screen.
for (i = 0; i < points; i++)
printf ("%d: %f\n", i+1, fltvalfield[i]);
printf ("Any key:\n");
getch ();
ibonl(upl, 0); /* Take UPL off-line */
}

3.15.19

Third analysis - Output of Block Data

Example of Programming for Universal Autorun Control UPL-B10:
The following program example shows the settings for the third analysis measurement function of a
noise signal (1/3 OCTAVE measurement function in ANALYZER panel).
Important!
The current level values of the 1/3 octave analysis are available under Scan Count 1 (line 200), the
maximum level values of the max. hold function (line 60) under Scan Count 2 (line 210). The frequency
list is queried with TRAC? LIST (line 140) , the max. hold level values with TRAC? TRAC (line 260).
10 REM ******** Third analysis - read out of Block Data ******************
20 UPL OUT "*RST": ’
UPL default setup
30 UPL OUT "SOUR:FUNC RAND": ’
Noise signal for generator
40 UPL OUT "INP:TYPE GEN2": ’
Internal connection to generator channel 2
50 UPL OUT "SENS:FUNC ’THIR’": ’
Switches on Third Analysis
60 UPL OUT "SENS:VOLT:INTV:MODE FOR": ’
Max-hold function switched on
70 UPL OUT "DISP:TRAC:OPER FFTL": ’
FFT data in tabular form
80 UPL OUT "INIT:CONT OFF": ’
Selects single-measurement mode
90 UPL OUT "*TRG;*WAI": ’
Triggers single-measurement
100 UPL OUT "TRAC:POIN? LIST": ’
Request count of frequency values
110 UPL IN A$: Count=VAL(A$): ’
Read out count of frequency values
120 PRINT "Count of freq. values:";Count: INPUT "Go on......";A$
130 DIM X(Count): ’
Field for frequency values
140 UPL OUT "TRAC? LIST": ’
Read out frequency values
150 UPL BLOCKIN X(0): ’
Loads frequency block data into the data field X
160 FOR I=0 TO Count-1
170 PRINT X(I);"Hz ": ’
Display frequency values
180 NEXT I
190 UPL OUT "DISP:TRAC:OPER SPEC": ’
COUNT selection only avail. in SPEC
200 REM UPL OUT "DISP:TRAC:COUN 1": ’ Choose current values of T. Analysis
210 UPL OUT "DISP:TRAC:COUN 2": ’ Choose Max-hold values of Third Analysis
220 UPL OUT "TRAC:POIN? TRAC": ’
Request count of level values
230 UPL IN A$: Count=VAL(A$): ’
Read out count of level values
240 PRINT : PRINT "Count of level values: ";Count: INPUT "Go on......";A$
250 DIM Y(Count): ’
Field for level values
260 UPL OUT "TRAC? TRAC": ’
Read out Max-hold level values
270 UPL BLOCKIN Y(0): ’
Loads level block data into the data field Y
280 FOR I=0 TO Count-1
290 PRINT Y(I);"V ": ’
Display level values
300 NEXT I
310 END

1078.2008.02

3.333

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming
3.15.20

UPL

Binary Data via IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface

Using the IEC bus command MMEMory:DATA 'filename', #, it is
possible to transfer any binary data and files from the host to the UPL.

:MMEM:DATA ’filename’, # 2 2 0

< Any binary data >

Length in ASCII of the binary datarecord in Bytes.
Number of digits of the following lenght value in ASCII
The ASCII character ’#’ precedes each binary block transfer

Using the IEC bus command MMEMory:CHECk? 'filename', a digital signature can be calculated on
the transferred binary data record in order to check whether an error occurred.
To ease the file transfer from host to the UPL not only experienced C- and IEC bus programmers the
DOS programs IEC_BT.EXE, RS232_BT.EXE and UPMD5.EXE are provided from UPL version 2.0.

First Steps
After the installation of a new UPL software version 2.0 or higher, the following two EXE files are stored
in the C:\UPL\IEC_EXAM directory (the EXE files can be run under DOS):
IEC_BT.EXE
RS232_BT.EXE
UPMD5.EXE

(copied by a process controller from a file and transferred to UPL via the IEC/IEEE bus)
(kopiert von einem Steuerrechner aus eine Datei über RS232-Schnittstelle zum UPL)
(generates the unique signature of a file)

The associated source code
IEC_BT.C
RS232_BT.BAS
is stored too.
To be able to transfer a file from a process controller to the UPL via the IEC/IEEE-bus interface or
RS232 control, the files IEC_BT.EXE, RS232_BT.EXE and UPMD5.EXE must be copied to a floppy disk
and transferred from the disk to the process controller. The disk can be copied either on the UPL under
DOS or, with the UPL measurement software running, from the FILE Panel using the commands ’Copy’
and ’To’.
Important:

The program UPMD5.EXE must be in the directory from which IEC_BT.EXE or
RS232_BT.BAS is started, or in a directory specified under PATH.

Transfer of File to UPL via IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface
The program IEC_BT.EXE allow the transfer of any file to the UPL via the IEC/IEEE-bus interface.
This is done by transmitting then IEC bus command MMEM:DATA followed by then contents of the file
to the UPL. The filename is specified interactively.
The source file IEC_BT.C is written in the programming language C. The source file provides
information on the transfer procedure and the call-up of the MD5 signature method. IEC_BT can be
adapted to user’s requirements.
For the signature method to be executed, an IEC/IEEE-bus driver from National Instruments must be
installed in the process controller, and the setting Remote via IEC BUS selected in the OPTIONS
Panel of the UPL.
After IEC_BT is called up, the program tries to find
• an UPL connected to the IEC/IEEE bus. When an UPL has been found, measurements on UPL are
stopped to obtain maximum transfer speed.
• The path and name of the file to be transferred are requested, as well as the path and name of the
target file to be generated in the UPL.

1078.2008.02

3.334

E-10

UPL

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

• The program generates a temporary file with the name TEMP.OUT, which contains the IEC/IEEEbus command required for the UPL as well as the data record to be transferred.
• TEMP.OUT is transferred to the UPL, followed by a final NL. The transfer rate between 30 and 100
Kbytes per second depends on the process controller and the UPL configuration. The file
TEMP.OUT remains stored in the process controller after it is transferred so that it can be read if
necessary by means of an editor capable of handling binary characters.
• At the end of the transfer, a signature is generated both of the original file stored in the process
controller and the file generated in the UPL (see MD5 signature method). If the signatures agree, it
can be assumed that the two files are completely identical and no transmission errors have occurred.

Transmitting a File to UPL via RS232 Interface
see 3.17.5 Binary Data via RS232 Interface

MD5 Signature Method
MD5 stands for "Message Digest 5" (coding and processing rule), an algorithm recognised world-wide
which is used for generating a 128-bit checksum (Signature) of a data record.
To check whether a file was transferred error-free from the process controller to the UPL, the
MD5 signature method can be used to generate the digital signature of the file on the process controller
prior to the transfer. After the transfer of the file to the UPL via the IEC/IEEE bus, a digital signature is
generated on the UPL. If the two signatures agree, it can be assumed that the contents of the files are
identical and the transfer was therefore error-free. Moreover, it can be determined in this way whether
any subsequent modifications have been made to the file.
The program UPMD5.EXE generates a 16-byte hexadecimal signature of any file. The signature is
displayed as a 32-digit ASCII character string on the screen.
Example:
The signature of the file IEC_BT.C is to be generated:
UPMD5 IEC_BT.C
ASCII character string displayed on the screen:
0d45494a3e3e262609e20050b5274f58
If the signature of a file is needed for further processing in a program, the signature can be written to a
file instead of being displayed on the screen:
Example:
UPMD5 IEC_BT.C > IEC_BT.CHK
UPMD5.EXE can conveniently be called up as "child process" from its IEC/IEEE-bus or RS232 control
program in order to evaluate the signature.
As an example in programming language C, here are the lines of source code IEC_BT.C:
// Calculate MD5 checksum of host file. Pipe result to chkfile
sprintf (syststr,"UPMD5.EXE %s > %s",hostfile, chkfile);
// UPMD5.EXE child process prints checksum to chkfile
err = system (syststr); // Call MD5 data security child process
Example in QuickBASIC see source code RS232_BT.BAS lines 53 and 54
shellcmd$ = "UPMD5.EXE " + hostfina$ + "> " + hostcheckfina$
SHELL (shellcmd$)
To fetch the signature of a file stored on the UPL via the IEC/IEEE bus or under RS232 control, the
command
"MMEMory:CHECk? ’filename’"
is to be sent to the UPL.
The 32-digit signature of the requested file will be sent in return.
If ’filename’ is specified without giving the path, the file will be searched in the current working
directory of the UPL. The current working directory of the UPL is the directory specified under Work
Dir in the FILE Panel of the UPL.The source code for the MD5 signature method is available on the
Internet under www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1321.html

1078.2008.02

3.335

E-10

IEC/IEEE-Bus: Examples of Programming

UPL

1078.2008.02

E-10

3.336

UPL-B10

3.16

Universal Sequence Controller

Automatic Control of UPL with R&S BASIC

Important:
The software described below is an accessory for UPL and available under the designation UPL-B10 . It
is not part of the equipment supplied with UPL.
The program examples in the paths C:\UPL\B10_EXAM\EXAM1.BAS ff of the UPL software can be
directly run on the UPL with Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10. Files with the extension .SAC are
setup files required by the examples for setting the UPL. Files with the extension .TXT provide the
program code of the examples as an ASCII file and can be accessed by any editor.

3.16.1

Use

Executing frequent test sequences in a fast and reproducible way, summing up the results and creating
a valuable documentation, these are the applications of the UPL universal sequence controller using
R&S BASIC. These automatic measurements, consisting of generator and analyzer functions of the
UPL, are used for a full characterization of instruments and components in production or the test shop
and for ensuring and monitoring the characteristics of system and transmission devices.
A universal sequence controller for automatic measurements does not only have to control the
instrument functions, but must also be able to evaluate the measurement results and branch in the
program. Besides, operator prompting with confirmations and indications is expected. Furthermore,
synchronization with a time base or external events may be required. Thus, some programming is
sometimes required, but it should be as simple as possible. Therefore, a complete BASIC interpreter
with optimally integrated commands is used for operation of the measuring instrument. A simple
keystroke permits to change between normal operation of the measuring instrument and BASIC. The
command extensions for the instrument control feature the same structure as the IEC/IEEE-bus
commands, which in turn comply with the international SCPI standard.

3.16.2

Scope of Functions

The UPL provides about 600 elements (ie functions in the programming language) and almost as many
keywords as parameters. Therefore, users not wishing to do any programming, but also experts will
appreciate the integrated program generator. Every input via front panel or keyboard for setting the UPL
is recorded in logging mode and added to the program as a complete program line. Simple test
sequences are thus completely programmed without having typed a single line. There is no need to
check the correct syntax, the created program can be easily read due to the standard SCPI notation and
is thus simple to modify and supplement.
R&S BASIC with easy-to-handle IEC/IEEE-bus commands that are optimally incorporated into the
syntax can also control further IEC/IEEE-bus devices without the need for an external controller. (This
requires the Remote Control option UPL-B4). Likewise, it is straightforward to operate the serial
interface and write and read files for connection with peripheral devices or other programs.
For graphical output, BASIC can fully make use of the UPL software: Graphs with sophisticated scaling
and labelling, bargraphs, bargraphs with trailing pointers, all of them also with automatic scaling
depending on the measured value, are still available. In addition, the graphics commands belonging to
BASIC can also be used.
If the UPL is to be controlled by an external controller in a test system, two REPLACE commands can
be used to convert all UPL IN/OUT instructions into IEC/IEEE commands (IEC IN/OUT). This
constitutes the basic program for controlling the UPL.

1078.2008.02

3.337

E-10

Universal Sequence Controller
3.16.3

UPL-B10

Preparation for Use

If the Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10 is ordered together with the UPL it is immediately ready
for use. When retrofitted, it has to be enabled by means of an installation key. A key matching the serial
number of the UPL is supplied to the user to activate the software.
Subsequently, a memory model for BASIC can be selected by calling UPLSET. The user has to indicate
how much memory he wants to reserve for the BASIC program and BASIC data (variables). Since the
UPL cannot simultaneously be remote-controlled via the IEC/IEEE bus and the Universal Sequence
Controller UPL-B10, the user must choose between the two modes by means of UPLSET. The files
CONFIG.SYS and UPL.BAT are thus changed.
-UPLSET contains a menu through which the user is guided:
½ Enter "UPLSET" and "↵" after the prompt c:>.
The selected operating mode is maintained even after instrument switch-off.
To estimate the required memory, the following empirical values are given: A typical BASIC line requires
about 25 bytes. A 13k program memory is thus sufficient for about 500 lines or 10 pages of program.
The remaining empty memory can be polled in BASIC with FRE(1). A variable in BASIC requires about
15 bytes (depending on the length of the name), and a field with floating-point numbers requires 8 bytes
for each index. FRE(o) indicates the remaining storage area.
The memory should not be oversized, since the program may be limited in its speed from a certain size
onwards (see also Section 3.16.4.11 UPL/Basic Memory Management - UPL-B10). If the preset values
are not exceeded, the UPL operates at full speed.
In the case of first installation, the UPL must be booted anew; otherwise this is only necessary when the
memory model is changed. UPLSET can also be called in order to poll about the currently active
memory allocation. If the UPL is to operate again as a measuring instrument controlled externally via
IEC/IEEE bus, UPLSET can be used to return to this mode.

1078.2008.02

3.338

E-10

UPL-B10
3.16.4

Universal Sequence Controller
Operation

In the following, a distinction is made between BASIC and the UPL program, the latter including all
routines except BASIC (i.e. the test, readout, graphics output and input routines).

3.16.4.1

Switchover between UPL and BASIC Entry Mode

• Switchover from UPL to BASIC entry mode:
Use function key F3 on the external keyboard or BACKSP on the front panel. With BASIC in the
entry mode, the fields for reading out measured values are displayed at the upper edge irrespective
of whether full graphics display is selected in the UPL or not. The field below down to the softkeys is
available to BASIC.
Possible error messages after pressing the F3 key: When the message "BASIC not installed" is
displayed, BASIC has not been installed at all or incorrectly. "Memory not available" indicates that a
memory size exceeding the available space has been selected with UPLSET.
• Entry in the BASIC mode:
All characters can be entered from the external keyboard as required. A limited control is also
possible from the UPL front panel:
Keys of the front-panel key blocks DATA/PANEL and EDIT as well as the CURSOR keys have the
common functions.
Exceptions:
SELECT
= blank
+/- = - (minus)
The keys of the CONTROL block as well as HELP, the tabulator and PgUp/Dn keys in the
CURSOR/VARIATION block have no function.
Letters cannot be output with the front-panel keys but the entry of numerals opens up plenty of
possibilities for controlling a BASIC program without the burden of an external keyboard.
While BASIC waits for a line entry (as after pressing of the "↵"-key), the UPL program continuous to
run in the background and the measurement results are displayed. The effects of the settings made
by BASIC can thus be observed immediately. However, after the first character has been entered,
the UPL program is not called up any more. No measurements are performed and the printer spooler
(HCOPY) does not run in the background until the entry is terminated with "↵".
Note:
When the UPL is controlled with BASIC, printing with HCOPY is considerably slowed down as the
available computing time must be divided up. There will be more time for the printout if the
measurement is stopped using the STOP key on the front panel.

• Switching back from BASIC to UPL entry mode:
Key F3 on the external keyboard or the keys ENTER and then LOCAL on the front panel.
When switching back to UPL control the panels are completely restored to show the current settings
as there may have been changes under BASIC. BASIC is inactive but the last-set status will be
retained.

1078.2008.02

3.339

E-10

Universal Sequence Controller
3.16.4.2

UPL-B10

First Steps (Readout of Measurement Results)

Program example:
Triggering 10 measurement results and output on the screen.
• Press key F3 of the external keyboard from the UPL user interface. The result display field appears
at the top of the screen, the softkey lines at the bottom. "R&S-BASIC version..." is displayed in the
screen center.
• Enter the following program (including line numbers 10-90).
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90

UPL OUT "*RST": ’
UPL default setting
UPL OUT "INP:TYPE GEN2": ’Internal connection to generator channel 2
FOR I=1 TO 10
UPL OUT "INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI": ’
Triggers a single measurement
UPL OUT "SENS:DATA?": Requests function test result from channel 1
UPL IN M$: ’
Reads in measurement result
PRINT M$: ’
Prints measurement result
NEXT
END

• Start the program with F6:
Due to the default setting made with *RST (see Appendix A UPL Default Setup), the UPL generator
produces a 1-kHz sinewave signal with a level of 0.5 V.
Command INP:TYPE GEN2 internally links generator channel 2 and analyzer channel 1 so that cabling
between inputs and outputs is not required for this first test. The UPL analyzer performs 10 RMS
measurements and the results are displayed on the UPL screen.
Note:
To display a measurement result on the screen it must first be triggered (line 40). After triggering a
settled result is available which can be requested (line 50), read out (line 60) and displayed on the
UPL screen (line 70).
• Return to manual operation: Press F3 on the external keyboard or ENTER and then LOCAL on the
front panel.

3.16.4.3

Logging Mode

Function key F2 switches the logging mode on or off. The respective mode is indicated in the bottom
righthand corner above the softkeys. In the case of "on", all entries used for setting the UPL are
appended to the BASIC program as a command line. After switching to the BASIC mode, these new
lines are displayed automatically and may be modified.
The BASIC commands for automatic control of the UPL differ only slightly from the commands for
remote control via the IEC/IEEE bus. The program can easily be converted into the other commands
using the BASIC command REPLACE (eg for controlling the UPL with an external controller). See also
UPL-specific modifications of the BASIC manual, paragraph REPLACE. A detailed example is given in
section 3.15.3 Command Logging - Converting B10 into IEC/IEEE-Bus Commands.

1078.2008.02

3.340

E-10

UPL-B10
3.16.4.4

Universal Sequence Controller
Differences to IEC/IEEE-Bus Remote Control

The differences between the R&S BASIC commands of the universal sequence controller and the R&S
BASIC commands of the IEC/IEEE-bus control are illustrated by way of examples:

Delimiters of character strings, Timeout

R&S BASIC command

R&S IEC/IEEE-bus command

A delimiter need not be specified for the transfer of 10 IEC TERM 10
a character string.
Controller expects LF as delimiter for an UPL
response
Waits indefinitely for a response.
However, in special cases the time can be
monitored by querying bit d0 (OPC) of the Event
Status Register in a loop until the bit assumes the
value 1 which signals that a measurement result is
available. The program example is given under
"Other differences to IEC/IEEE-bus remote control"
further down in this section.

10 IEC TIME 5000
The controller does not wait longer than 5 s for a
response from the UPL before an IEC/IEEE-bus
timeout is signalled.

Output of commands
R&S BASIC command

R&S IEC/IEEE bus command
10 IEC OUT 20, " SOUR:FREQ 1000Hz "

10 UPL OUT "SOUR:FREQ 1000Hz"
(sets generator frequency)

Transfers a character string (constant in quotes,
variable denoted with $ or a character string
expression) to the UPL program.

Reading in responses
R&S BASIC command

R&S IEC/IEEE-bus command

100 UPL OUT "SENS:DATA2?"
110 UPL IN A$
(transfers the measured value of channel 2 to the variable A$

100 IEC OUT 20, "SENS:DATA2?"
110 IEC IN 20, A$

for processing)

Takes a character string from the UPL program.
This may be a measured value or a queried
setting. The information to be taken must first be
defined in a query (command with question mark).

1078.2008.02

3.341

E-10

Universal Sequence Controller

UPL-B10

Output of block data
R&S BASIC command
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80

R&S IEC/IEEE-bus command
10 DIM A(20)
20 ’ Combines block data to a string
30 Bef$="SOUR:LIST:FREQ"
40 Frqval=20
50 FOR I=0 TO 19
60 Bef$=Bef$+STR$(INT(Frqval))
70 IF I<19 THEN Bef$=Bef$+","
80 Frqval=Frqval*1.44
90 NEXT I
100 IEC OUT 20,Bef$

DIM A(20)
Frqval = 20
FOR I = 0 TO 19
A(I) = Frqval
Frqval = Frqval*1.44
NEXT I
UPL BLOCKOUT A(0),20
UPL OUT "sour:list:freq"

(transfer of 20 values for a frequency list sweep to the UPL)

UPL BLOCKOUT [,n]
Stores block data in a reserved communication
range of the UPL so that they can be transferred
subsequently from BASIC to the UPL with an UPL
OUT "...." command. This applies, for instance, to
the transfer of lists or values for graphic display.
The index i indicates the value from which onwards
the data field is to be transferred. n defines the
number of values. If n is not specified, the quantity
defined with DIM will be used.
Reading out block data
R&S BASIC command
10
20
30
40
50

R&S IEC/IEEE-bus command

DIM A(200)
UPL OUT "TRAC? TRAC"
UPL BLOCKIN A(0)
UPL OUT "TRAC:POIN? TRAC"
UPLIN A$:Count = VAL(A$)

10 DIM A (200)
20 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC:POIN? TRAC"
30 IEC IN 20,Count$: Count=VAL(Count$)
40 IEC OUT 20,"TRAC? TRAC"
50 IEC TERM 44: ’ Sets string term. to ’,’ (0x2C = 44d)
(loads a sweep list in the form of block data from 60 FOR I=0 TO Count-2: ’ Reads in n - 1 values
the UPL into field A( ) of BASIC and loads the
70 IEC IN 20,A$: DIM(I) = VAL(A$)
data into Count)
80 NEXT I
90 ’Reads last value
UPL BLOCKIN 
100 IEC TERM 10: ’Resets string term. to LF
110 IEC IN 20,A$: DIM(Count-1) = VAL(A$)
loads block data (ie lists or a
measurement sequence) from the UPL
program into a data field (index
variable) for further processing. Same
as with UPL IN the data to be read
must first be defined in a query
(sour:list:freq?). i denotes the
index from which the first value of a
block is stored. The list is always used
in full length, ie a sufficiently large data
field has first to be defined with DIM.

1078.2008.02

3.342

E-10

UPL-B10

Universal Sequence Controller

Switchover to UPL user interface
R&S BASIC command

R&S IEC/IEEE-bus
command
IEC LAD 20
IEC GTL

UPL GTL (Go To Local)
With this command BASIC is quit and the UPL screen is displayed. Control is
also transferred to the UPL and entries can be made in the UPL panels. To
return to BASIC the F3 key has to be pressed.
This means that in the program mode this command has the same function as
the F3 key (switchover from BASIC to UPL). If the operator now presses F3,
control is switched back and BASIC continues with the command that follows
UPL GTL in the program. When entered in the BASIC direct mode, this
command has the same function as the F3 key.
Note:
After a BASIC program has been started with RUN, key F3 is disabled. It is
enabled again only after END, STOP or abort (with Ctrl/Break)in the BASIC entry
mode.
UPL GTL U (Go To Local, temporarily with UPL screen)
This command is required when the UPL display should be used under BASIC.
Thus an ongoing sweep or FFT can be monitored (provided a measurement was
started before, the display is continuously updated) or values computed in BASIC
are to be displayed. (These values have to be transferred first from BASIC to
UPL using the UPL BLOCKOUT command).
The panel displayed at the left of the graphics window can be used by BASIC for
PRINT outputs. A line must not be longer than 26 characters, however, as
otherwise the graphics window will be overwritten. After the UPL GTL U
command, the screen scroll is stopped to avoid the graphic display being shifted
and destroyed when the first or the last line is reached (in the case of
uncontrolled PRINT outputs). Status lines 1 and 2 cannot be used either as this
space is occupied by the UPL display.
With this command the BASIC display is stored and the UPL screen displayed.
Control is not transferred to the UPL, however, and entries cannot be made in
the UPL panels. Immediately after display of the UPL screen, control is handed
back to BASIC without the BASIC display being restored.
Use the GTL B command described below to restore the BASIC display. After an
UPL GTL U command and before terminating the program with END, STOP or
abort (with Ctrl/Break or in case of a fault) the operator should restore the BASIC
display as otherwise no entries can be made, eg in the UPL full-screen mode. As
an aid for the operator, the BASIC display is automatically restored when the
BASIC entry mode is reached (entry of commands or program instructions) with
the consequence that UPL GTL B is performed immediately when UPL GTL U
command is entered in the direct mode and the entry has no effect.
UPL OUT "DISP:ACT ON | OFF"
This command is of interest in conjunction with GTL U. The OFF state prevents
the graphics display being updated after every control command as this might be
disturbing and slow down program execution. With ON the display is completely
restored and then continually updated. The OFF and ON commands are to be
used together as a pair as otherwise the UPL graphics display is not restored, not
even when the UPL is manually controlled.

1078.2008.02

3.343

E-10

Universal Sequence Controller

UPL-B10

UPL GTL B (set BASIC screen)
This command is only needed with UPL GTL U. It restores the BASIC screen
displayed before the UPL display set up with UPL GTL, UPL GTL U or with the
F3 key (change from BASIC to UPL control).
UPL GTL G (draw UPL graphic)
This command is needed when the UPL graphics display is to be used under
BASIC. The display is restored but not subsequently updated as is the case with
UPL GTL U. Thus values computed in BASIC, for instance, can be displayed (the
values have to be transferred first from BASIC to the UPL using the UPL
BLOCKOUT command). The operator can make full use of the UPL graphics
display with scales and labels.
The graphics display must be switched on of course (with command
UPL OUT "disp:conf ...." using parameters xP or P, or previously in manual
control). Note: Upon loading a setup, the 3-panel display may be selected which
has the effect of switching off the graphics display. In case of doubt check the
setting by changing to the UPL mode.
When the result output has been activated (set to display) using UPLOUT
"disp:ann on" also the measurement results in the display field at the screen top
are updated.
Contrary to F3, UPL GTL or UPL GTL U, the BASIC screen is not stored and the
UPL display set up, but the UPL graphics display is integrated in the BASIC
screen. Like any other graphic drawn under BASIC, the display is shifted
together with the text when the cursor reaches the top or bottom edge. The
graphic may also be overwritten by text (in this case the background is blanked)
irrespective of whether this is useful or not.
When the display is shifted, which can always be prevented by adequately
positioning the cursor (see section 3.16.4.8 STRINX.SYS Driver for Screen and
Keyboard - UPL-B10), parts of the graphics display remain visible at the upper or
lower edge of the scroll window as the scrolled parts are shifted in multiples of
the text size, which do not correspond to the UPL graphic displayed.
Since the UPL graphic has become part of the BASIC screen it is always
restored when the UPL display is switched over to BASIC with the F3 key. It is
cleared together with the BASIC text screen using the sequence PRINT "Esc[2J".
CLEAR also clears the screen or parts thereof (see section 3.16.4.5 UPLspecific Modifications to the Basic Manual - UPL-B10 under CLEAR).

Further differences to IEC/IEEE-bus remote control:
• An SRQ procedure cannot be programmed in R&S BASIC of the Universal Sequence Controller
UPL-B10, ie the control program cannot perform other tasks while waiting for measurement results
or error messages from the UPL. Error queue or the status registers must be queried cyclically in the
control program.
• Since the UPL does not generate an SRQ for the Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10, there is
no need to determine the sender or source of the SRQ by means of a serial or parallel poll. This
should not be mixed up with the possibility of using the UPL as an IEC/IEEE-bus controller and to
control other instruments on the IEC/IEEE bus from the Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10
(described in the manual R&S BASIC Interpreter supplied with the UPL-B10 option).
• Line messages like REN, GET, DCL, etc are not possible.
• The line message EOI denoting the end of a binary block cannot be used.
Binary block data cannot be received. The command " FORMat REAL" is ineffective.
Block data can only be received with command UPL BLOCKIN described above.

1078.2008.02

3.344

E-10

UPL-B10

Universal Sequence Controller

• In R&S BASIC of the Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10 all common commands referring to
SRQ control are not relevant. Respective information can be obtained from the table under 3.9
Common Commands.
An exception is the *OPC command. Although mainly intended to trigger an SRQ when a
measurement result is relevant, under R&S BASIC this command may be used to wait for a
measurement result in a loop by querying the bit d0 of the Event Status Register:
Example:
110 UPL OUT "*OPC;*TRG": ’ Triggers measurement result
120 Brk=0: I=0
130 WHILE (Brk=0) AND (I<=100)
140 UPL OUT "*ESR?"
150 I=I+1: UPL IN Esr$: IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 1)<>0 THEN Brk=1: ’ Queries OPC
160 WEND
170 IF I>100 THEN PRINT "Timeout": STOP
180 UPL OUT "SENS:DATA?": ’ Requests measured value
190 UPL IN M$: PRINT M$: ’ Reads and output measured value
• Common commands (3.13.1) and addressed commands (3.13.2) are not available for the Universal
Sequence Controller UPL-B10.
• All registers and commands of the status reporting system which are not related to SRQ generation
can be used:
*STB?
*SRE
*PRE
*IST?
*ESR?
*ESE
STATus:OPERation?
STATus:QUEStionable?
STATus:XQUEstionable?
SYSTem:ERRor?

not usable
not usable
not usable
not usable
usable
not usable
usable
usable
usable
usable

• Note:
If UPL with Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10 is used as a controller for other IEC/IEEE-bus
devices (described in the R&S BASIC Interpreter manual supplied with the UPL-B10 option), and
should again be controlled by another controller as a talker/listener on the IEC/IEEE bus, IEC/IEEEbus control must be released by the Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10 with command IECRLC
(IEC ReLease Control) .

1078.2008.02

3.345

E-10

Universal Sequence Controller
3.16.4.5

UPL-B10

UPL-Specific Modifications to the BASIC Manual

There are only a few modifications to the supplied standard BASIC manual which result from different
conditions. In the part of the manual dealing with process controllers, the BASIC manual of the PSA and
PAT controller versions is valid.
Softkey labelling and function keys
As against the standard BASIC manual, the function keys are shifted by 4 keys as F1 to F4 are
assigned different functions in the UPL. The softkey labelling has been adapted accordingly for the UPL.
Switchover between alphanumeric and graphics mode ( F8) is not provided in the UPL.
BYE
is a synonym for EXIT; description see under EXIT.
CLEAR [ 1 | 2 | 3 ]
This command clears the screen or parts of it. The size of the parts corresponds to the UPL panels or
fields. The commands always clear the indicated parts irrespective of whether they are assigned UPL
fields or not.
Without parameter specified, the upper part of the screen is cleared, however without the output field for
measured values.

CLEAR 1 clears the output field for measured values

CLEAR 2 clears the field at the left of the graphic display.

CLEAR 3 clears the UPL graphics.

1078.2008.02

3.346

E-10

UPL-B10

Universal Sequence Controller

COLOR
should not be modified to avoid changing of the UPL graphics output. The colours are assigned as
follows:
Pen
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

UPL colour mode
white
dark grey
white
red
grey
yellow
dark grey
yellow
green
green
blue
green
yellow
cyan
black
black

UPL b/w mode
white
(background)
white
black
black
grey
light grey
dark grey
dark grey
grey
black
black
black
grey
dark grey
black
black
(preselected colour)

COPYOUT
is not supported. See GSAVE "LPT1".
EXIT (Synonym for BYE)
leaves the BASIC mode and returns to the UPL input mode and not to MS-DOS.
GRAPHIC
The interface name for putting out graphics on the screen is no longer GRAPH but GRAPX with the
UPL.
GSAVE on LPT
is not supported. Instead, the HCOP:DEST <> remote-control command should be used for a printout
of the display.
HELP
is not supported as a command.
HOLD
Note:
During the wait time the routines are not continued. Therefore, with long times, the wait time should
better be implemented with a loop using TIME.
REPLACE
To allow also the comma to be contained in the REPLACE command as part of the string (and not as
separator between the new and the old string), it has to be preceded by a backslash (\,).
Example 1:
old program: 100 UPL OUT A$
REPLACE UPL OUT, IEC OUT 20,
new program: 100 IEC OUT 20,A$
Example 2:
old program: 100 IEC IN 20, A$
REPLACE IEC IN 20\,, UPL IN
new program: 100 UPL IN A$

1078.2008.02

3.347

E-10

Universal Sequence Controller

UPL-B10

SCREEN
is not supported; SCREEN 18 ( VGA mode with 16 colours/grey shades) is always set.
SET
The colour of the pen is selected from the colours described above under COLOR.
SHELL
is only supported with restrictions, since the remaining memory of approx. 60 Kbytes is too small; the
MS-DOS command interpreter together with the program called must not exceed this memory size.
However, this is the case with the internal and a few external MS-DOS commands (dir, del, md, cd etc,
see MS-DOS manual).
VIEWPORT
The upper limit for y2 should be 294 so that the upper field remains vacant for readout of the measured
values. In principal, there are no restrictions to the BASIC graphics commands, it is up to the user
whether the area used by the UPL graphics is overwritten.
WINDOW
The preselected values are 0,639,0,293.
ZOOM
is not supported

3.16.4.6

BASIC Screen

The screen contains 30 text lines, 5 at the lower edge being reserved for softkeys and two lines for
status indication. One status line is used by BASIC, the other is available to the user (see labels of
status lines and softkeys).
Two modes are provided for the upper 25 lines: either BASIC uses all lines or the UPL builds up a field
for the output of measured values at the top edge, where the measurement results are continuously
updated. This field comprises 7 text lines and reduces the BASIC text window to 18 lines. The second
mode is activated using UPL OUT "disp:ann on".
Inside the 25/18-line window, the text is scrolled when the cursor reaches the top or bottom edge. If this
window contains a graphic, the latter is shifted as well. This also applies to graphics drawn by the UPL
software. However, since the graphics are slightly larger than the text window, which is variable in steps
of 16 pixels only (text size), they seem to be somewhat "torn". By positioning the text appropriately, the
user must ensure not to write outside the text window (which causes a shift).
The command PRINT "Esc (2)" clears the 18- or 25-line window depending on the mode. The CLEAR
command (without parameter) only clears the 18-line window (without the area reserved for the output of
measured values). The BASIC extensions CLEAR 1½ 2 ½ 3 clear the panel fields or the output field for
measured values irrespective of whether they contain UPL panels or not (see section 3.16.4.5 UPLspecific Modifications to the Basic Manual - UPL-B10).
If text is entered for BASIC, BASIC does not get the keyboard entries but reads out the screen contents.
If graphics are superimposed on this text, it is possible that the character is not identified and BASIC
responds with an error message. Even the space between the last character and the right-hand screen
edge is significant if it can be interpreted as a blank or character. Therefore, the user should write at a
"clean" position, or go to a position by scrolling the text before writing.

1078.2008.02

3.348

E-10

UPL-B10
3.16.4.7

Universal Sequence Controller
Control Commands Unsuitable for Logging

The control commands are described in detail in the UPL manual, classified according to their function
and then in alphabetical order. Furthermore, almost all commands can be logged in manual operation,
the commands being created in the correct notation and added to the program.
Commands for reading out measured values and control commands via the front-panel keys in the
CONTROL block cannot be logged. They are briefly summed up in the following.
CONTROL key commands:
START
SNGL
STOP
HCOPY
LCD ON/OFF
OUTPUT ON/OFF
LOCAL

UPL OUT "init:cont on"
UPL OUT "init”
UPL OUT "init:cont off"
UPL OUT "abort"
UPL OUT "hcop"
UPL OUT "disp:enab on" adv. off
----UPL GTL

Commands for reading out single measurement results:
Function CH1:
Function CH2:
Input PEAK CH1:
Input PEAK CH2:
Freq CH1:
Freq CH2:
Phase:

UPL OUT "sens:data?":UPL IN A¤
UPL OUT "sens:data2?":UPL IN A¤
UPL OUT "sens2:data?":UPL IN A¤
UPL OUT "sens2:data2?":UPL IN A¤
UPL OUT "sens3:data?":UPL IN A¤
UPL OUT "sens3:data2?":UPL IN A¤
UPL OUT "sens4:data2?":UPL IN A¤

Commands for reading out block data:
Trace A:
Trace B:
X values:
Z values:

UPL OUT "trac? trac1":UPL BLOCKIN A(0)
UPL OUT "trac? trac2":UPL BLOCKIN B(0)
UPL OUT "trac? list1":UPL BLOCKIN X(0)
UPL OUT "trac? list2":UPL BLOCKIN Z(0)

Command for synchronization:
UPL OUT "*WAI"

1078.2008.02

3.349

E-10

Universal Sequence Controller
3.16.4.8

UPL-B10

Driver for Screen and Keyboard STRINX.SYS

An internationally standardized software interface based on the ANSI standard X 3.41-1774 is provided
for addressing the screen. This standard defines all functions required to operate a terminal. The most
important functions of this standard as well as certain functions mainly required for operating the BASIC
editor are implemented in the STRINX device driver.
This driver is loaded when booting the operating system, if
DEVICE = C:\UPL\DRIVER\STRINX.SYS
is contained in the configuration file CONFIG.SYS.
The following function groups are supported:
• Cursor control
• Labelling of status lines and softkeys
• Clearing screen areas
• Editing screen
• Setting the video attributes.
If the appropriate ANSI sequence can be assigned parameters P1; P2 ...; Pn, they must be entered as
decimal numbers with one or two digits. The individual parameters are separated by semicolons.
The STRINX.SYS driver is to be used exclusively for programming in R&S BASIC. With this driver, the
UPL is largely compatible with the PSA. ANSI.SYS has to be loaded for programs using the control
sequences of the ANSI standard.

Cursor Control
The cursor can be set to absolute or relative positions. The output of new characters is continued
starting at the set position.
Table 3.18

Cursor Control (UPL-B10)

Cursor function

Sequence

Example in BASIC

Free positioning (one parameter may be omitted)

ESC[P1; P2H *)

?”Ec[05;32H”;

ESC[Pn A
ESC[Pn B
ESC[Pn C
ESC[Pn D

?”Ec[5A”;
?”Ec[3B”;
?”Ec[3C”;
?”Ec[5D”;

ESC[ : A
ESC[ : B

?”Ec[:A”;
?”Ec[:B”;

Store cursor position /
recall cursor position

ESC[ s
ESC[ u

?”Ec[s”;
?”Ec[u”;

Switch off cursor
Switch on cursor

ESC[ h
ESC[ l

?”Ec[h”;
?”Ec[l”;

Shift cursor by Pn positions ↑
Shift cursor by Pn positions ↓
Shift cursor by Pn positions →
Shift cursor by Pn positions ←
Shift cursor by one position ↑
↓

Column
Row

(Pn with one digit only)

with scrolling

*) ESC means the key "Esc" or the keyboard code 1BH or 27 decimal

1078.2008.02

3.350

E-10

UPL-B10

Universal Sequence Controller

Labelling of Status Lines and Softkeys
Table 3.19

Labelling of Status Lines and Softkeys (UPL-B10)

Function

Sequence

Example in BASIC

Label status lines

ESCQPnTEXT

?”EcQ3TEXT”

Label softkeys

ESCRPnTEXT

?”EcR4TEXT”

Note:
The sequences must be terminated by LF (ASCII code 10).
Softkeys 1 to 4 cannot be labelled as they have been assigned important basic functions that must be
available in all program states.
Status and softkey lines are labelled as follows:
Table 3.20

Labelling of Softkeys (UPL-B10)

Screen lines
First

Last

VGA graphics mode *)
25
26
27
28
29

Q1
Q2,
Q3
Q4,
Q5

Q
softk.

*) Compatible with PSA mode

1078.2008.02

3.351

E-10

Universal Sequence Controller

UPL-B10

If one of the softkeys is labelled, the PSA compatibility mode is switched on (return with sequence
"ESC[1j"). The keyboard codes are converted to the corresponding values of the PSA according to the
following table:
Table 3.21
PSA code

Labelling of Softkeys, Conversion table (UPL-B10)
PC comp.
scan code

0E0H
0E1H
0E2H
0E3H
0E4H
0E5H
0E6H
0E7H
0E8H
0E9H
0EAH
0EBH
0B7H
0B8H
0B9H
0B4H
0B6H
0B1H
0B2H
0B3H
0B0H
0AEH

1078.2008.02

3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4B
4D
4F
50
51
52
53

Keyboard labels
German
keyboard

American
keyboard

F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
Pos 1
↑
Bild ↑
←
→
Ende
↓
Bild ↓
Einfg
Entf

F1
F2
F3
F5
F4
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
Home
↑
Pg Up
←
→
End
↓
Pg Dn
Ins
Del

7
8
9
4
6
1
2
3
0
.

3.352

E-10

UPL-B10

Universal Sequence Controller

Editing the screen
Table 3.22

Editing the screen (UPL-B10)

Action

Sequence

Example

Insert blank lines

ESC[ PnL

?”Ec[ 5L”

Delete lines

ESC[ PnM

?”Ec[ 3M”

Clearing Screen Area
Table 3.23

Clearing Screen Area (UPL-B10)
Cursor function

Sequence

Example in
R&S BASIC

Clear screen, Cursor È

ESC[ 2J

?”Ec[ 2J”

Clear complete video RAM, Cursor È

ESC[ 3J

?”Ec[ 3J”

Clear from cursor to end of screen

ESC[ J

?”Ec[ J”

Clear from cursor to end of line

ESC[ K

?”Ec[ K”

Clear status and softkey lines
Note:
The sequence must be terminated by LF.

ESC[ y

?”Ec[ y”

Setting the colours
Colours may be assigned to each character output on the screen. The colours are also set via the ANSI
interface.
Table 3.24

Setting the colours (UPL-B10)

Colour

b/w

light grey

light grey

ESC[ 91m

?”Ec[ 91m”

light grey

light grey

ESC[ 92m

?”Ec[ 92m”

yellow

white

ESC[ 93m

?”Ec[ 93m”

----

----

ESC[ 94m

?”Ec[ 94m”

blue

black

ESC[ 95m

?”Ec[ 95m”

dark grey

dark grey

ESC[ 96m

?”Ec[ 96m”

black

black

ESC[ 97m

?”Ec[ 97m”

black

black

ESC[ 98m

?”Ec[ 98m”

1078.2008.02

Sequence

Example in
R&S BASIC

3.353

E-10

Universal Sequence Controller
3.16.4.9

UPL-B10

Operation of Serial Interfaces COM1 and COM2

The transmission rate, parity bit, number of data and stop bits as well as the error handling mode of the
serial interfaces can be configured using the MS-DOS MODE program, which is described in section
2.17 Connecting External Devices or in the DOS manual (DOS commands). Configuration is made
either automatically on calling the AUTOEXEC.BAT program, in the operating system by means of an
entry via the keyboard, or in BASIC using the SHELL command. Example:
10 SHELL "mode com2: baud=24 parity=e data=7 stop=1 retry=n >NUL"
The last instruction for rerouting to the NUL device ensures that MODE does not output the response on
the screen, but suppresses it.
The serial interface designated COM1 or COM2 is prepared for the output using the PRINT# command.
As with every PRINT command, CR and LF are added to the string to be output if the line is not
terminated by a comma or semicolon. Example:
10 OPENO #1,"com1:"
20 PRINT #1,A$
If the acknowledge lines DSR and CTS are not active, the operating system outputs the error message
"ERROR 74 IN LINE xx: DOS: write fault".
The interfaces are prepared for reception using the OPEN command. With the subsequent INPUT#
command, characters are read in until a CR is received. If the sending device continues to transmit
characters, these characters must immediately be read in using the next INPUT# command, otherwise
they are lost and an error is signalled. Timing becomes more critical the higher the transmission rates. If
no characters are received (timeout), a zero is stored every 100 ms.
Example:
10 OPENI #1,"com1:"
20 INPUT #1,A$
The entry described above is for line-oriented text as characters are accepted until reception of CR.
However, if the number of characters is known, the INPUT$() function ensures that any character and
almost any number of characters can be received.
Example:
10 OPENI #1, "com2:"
20 A$=INPUT$( 100, #1)
Precisely 100 characters are read in. If less characters are received, the device waits 100 ms (specified
timeout) for every expected character (and enters zero).
To wait for the start of the transmission, a character can be entered in a loop until the character is no
longer zero.
Example:
20
30
40
40
50

REPEAT
A$=INPUT( 1, #1)
UNTIL ASC( A$) > 0
INPUT #1,B$
B$=A$+B$

1078.2008.02

3.354

E-10

UPL-B10

Universal Sequence Controller

3.16.4.10 UPL-Specific Error Messages From BASIC
ERROR 83:

’Instrument command allowed in this context’
The command is not allowed in this instrument state and depends on other settings.
(’Execution error’ with IEC/IEEE-bus control)

ERROR 84:

’Instrument param not within valid range’
The value of the command parameter is illegal.

ERROR 85:

’Instrument unit not allowed in this context’
The indicated unit is not allowed (in this state).

ERROR 87:

’Instrument option not installed’
The option required for this command is not fitted.

ERROR 88:

’Instrument ??? user error’
A user-correctable error has occurred during command execution (eg file not found).

ERROR 89:

’Instrument ??? system error’
An error has occurred in the MS-DOS or UPL software during command execution.

ERROR 90:

’Instrument invalid header string’
The actual command was not recognized (possibly because of a notation error).

ERROR 91:

’Instrument invalid parameter string’
The parameter of the command (string) is invalid.

ERROR 92:

’Instrument invalid unit string’
The unit of the command (string) is invalid.

1078.2008.02

3.355

E-10

Universal Sequence Controller

UPL-B10

3.16.4.11 UPL/BASIC Memory Management
The user need not be familiar with all the details, as the user automatically receives the CONFIG.SYS to
be used and associated batch files with the program UPLSET described in section 3.16.3.
Since the memory available to MS-DOS programs is limited, the overlay technique is used in the UPL
program. Furthermore, BASIC requires memory for the user program and its data (variables). These
memory areas are assigned the parameters
-bp for the program memory and
-bd for the data memory.
Example:
upl_ui -bp16 -bd8
reserves 16k main memory for the program and 8k for the data, BASIC itself needing about 3k for its
own management.
The minimum values are about 8k program and 4k data. BASIC can manage a maximum of 64k.
However, with a size of about 2 times 32 k, the overlay memory for the UPL program decreases,
reducing the program speed. More details cannot be given, since the available total memory, which may
be occupied by resident programs and device drivers, may be very different.
The memory management of the UPL program is to be briefly explained in the following so that an
experienced user can optimize his own configuration. The program and data memory used for BASIC is
first reserved in the UMB area. If this is not possible (because the line DOS=HIGH,UMB is missing in
the CONFIG.SYS, or too may other programs have been loaded into this area by LOADHIGH or
DEVICEHIGH), the space in the conventional memory (below 640k) is used. If the remaining memory
for the UPL program thus becomes too small, no memory is reserved for BASIC at all. The attempt to
switch to BASIC then produces the error message "not enough memory for BASIC".
In memory models 64k plus 32k (or 32k plus 64k) also the device drivers are loaded into the UMB area.
With 64k plus 64k the upper memory is completely full and the device drivers have to be stored in the
conventional memory.
If space is to be used in the conventional memory, the size of the overlay memory is reduced. The UPL
program may be restricted in its speed from a certain size onwards, which also depends on the memory
required by other resident programs.
When executing BASIC, other instruments can also be controlled via the IEC/IEEE-bus interface. In this
case, the UPL is the system controller via BASIC, i.e. it can no longer be remote-controlled by an
external controller. The parser program UPL_IEC.EXE is no longer needed and must not be loaded any
more when starting the UPL. Instead, BASIC requires the following device drivers:
STRINX.SYS
IECX.SYS
GRAPHX.SYS
BEEPX.SYS

1078.2008.02

as BASIC editor
as IEC/IEEE-bus controller
for the BASIC commands for graphics output
for audio outputs.

3.356

E-10

UPL

3.17

Remote Control via RS-232 Interface

Remote Control via RS-232 Interface

As from UPL version 1.0 onwards, when an option UPL-B4 is purchased, remote control is not only
possible via the IEC/IEEE bus but also via the RS-232 interface at the COM2 port at the rear of the
instrument.

3.17.1

Preparation for Use

To activate the COM2 interface of the UPL for remote control select
Remote via
COM2
in the options panel.
To allow communication between controller and UPL via the RS-232 interface, the parameters of the
two COM2 interfaces must be matched. The UPL parameters can be set with
COM2 PARAMETER ------------Baud Rate
2400
...
56000
Parity
EVEN|ODD|NONE
Data Bits
7|8
Stop Bits
1|2
Handshake
XON/XOFF|RTS/CTS
in the options panel.
The meaning of the parameters can be seen in section 2.15.1 IEC/IEEE-bus Address
Use a zero-modem cable with the following assignment for interconnecting controller and UPL (2 x 9-pin
female connector, R&S Order No. 1050.0346). This cable is suitable for RTS/CTS and XON/XOFF
handshake.

UPL
pin
1

Controller
9 pin
1

UPL
9 pin

Controller
25 pin

1

8

2 RxD

RxD 2

2 RxD

TxD

3 TxD

TxD 3

3 TxD

4 DTR

DTR 4

4 DTR

RxD 3
DSR 6

6 DSR

DSR 6

5 GND

5 GND

GND 5

6 DSR

7 RTS

RTS 7
CTS 8

7 RTS

CTS 5

8 CTS

RTS 4

8 CTS
9

Fig. 3-18

9

2

GND 7
DTR 20

22

9

Universal RS-232 cable, suitable for RTS/CTS and XON/XOFF handshake

RTS (request to send) is an output of the UPL which is set to TRUE (+12V) upon UPL switch-on. With
handshake = RTS/CTS selected, UPL sets RTS to FALSE (-12V) when the UPL buffer is full during a
data transmission from the controller to the UPL. In this case the controller must stop data transmission
immediately until the contents of the data buffer have been processed by the UPL and RTS has been
reset to TRUE. Normally, the RTS line of the UPL is connected to the CTS line of the controller. With
handshake = XON/XOFF, RTS is not served by the UPL and remains set to TRUE.

1078.2008.02

3.357

E-10

Remote Control via RS-232 Interface

UPL

DTR (data terminal ready) is an output of the UPL which is set to TRUE (+12V) upon UPL switch-on
and which does not change. If the RS-232 interface of the controller requires the DSR (data nor ready)
input to be set to TRUE, it is best to connect DTR of the UPL to DSR of the controller. With Handshake
= XON/XOFF selected, RTS of UPL is always TRUE. Thus DSR and CTS of the controller could be
linked by means of a jumper on the PC connector (see dotted line).
CTS (clear to send) of the UPL is an input. If the UPL wishes to send data to the controller or plotter
with handshake = RTS/CTS selected, it first checks whether the addressed device is ready to receive
data. State-of-the-art devices normally signal their readiness to receive via the RTS output (older
devices often via the DTR output). If the CTS input of the UPL is TRUE (+12V), UPL starts data
transmission. If the data buffer of the addressed device is full, the RTS output is reset and the CTS input
of the UPL is set to FALSE (-12V). As soon as the data buffer of the addressed device is empty, the
device resets the RTS output and thus the CTS input of the UPL to TRUE and UPL continues data
transmission. With handshake = XON/XOFF selected, the CTS input of the UPL is irrelevant and the
connection CTS - . - . RTS (dash-point line) is not required.
DSR (data set ready) of the UPL is an input which is not evaluated however. The line
DSR - . . - . . DTR (dash-dot-dot line) is not required.

3.17.2

Switchover to Remote Control

After power-up, the UPL is always in the manual operating mode (LOCAL state)") and can be controlled
from the front panel or a keyboard. Control is switched to REMOTE as soon as a signal is identified at
the RS-232 interface via COM2 in the remote control mode. During remote control the front-panel keys
are disabled. The UPL remains in the REMOTE control mode.

3.17.3

Return to Manual Operation

UPL remains in the REMOTE control mode until switched to manual mode by means of the LOCAL key
on the front panel or command SYSTem:GTL. A change from manual to remote control and vice versa
does not change the instrument settings.

3.17.4

First Steps (Readout of Measurement Results)

A simple test of the RS-232 interface can first be performed with DOS commands from the PC.
Example:
• Connect the COM1 interface of the PC and the COM2 interface of the UPL using the zero-modem
cable. If the COM1 interface of the PC is assigned to a mouse, the mouse may be connected to the
COM2 interface of the PC using the adapter cable (9 → 25-way) normally supplied with the mouse.
• Set UPL in the OPTIONS panel to remote control using the RS-232 interface. The standard
parameters of the COM2 interface, 9600 baud, even parity, 7 data bits, 1 stop bit, are set in the UPL.
This standard setting is made when the BACKSPACE key is pressed during UPL switch-on (loading
DEFAULT setup), UPL -d is entered at the DOS level and after (new) installation of an UPL software.
On switching the UPL off and on or upon loading a setup, the "Remote via" settings and the
parameters of the serial COM2 interface remain unchanged.

1078.2008.02

3.358

E-10

UPL

Remote Control via RS-232 Interface

Remote via
:
:
PARAMETER
Baud Rate
Parity
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Handshake

COM2
-----------9600
EVEN
7
1
RTS/CTS

• Adapt the COM1 interface of the PC to the COM2 interface of the UPL with DOS command mode:
mode com1
:9600,e,7,1
• Create an ASCII file with the name COMOUT.TXT at the PC using the DOS editor, which comprises
the characters "*RST" (set UPL to default setting).
• Send the contents of file COMOUT.TXT to the COM1 interface:
• copy COMOUT.TXT com1:
UPL goes to the REMOTE mode and to the default setting.
• Although the described method allows control of the UPL, data cannot be read out as the copy
command of DOS requires received characters to be terminated with the delimiter CTRL Z (1A hex)
and UPL terminates its responses with a Line Feed (0A hex).
The following program examples demonstrate UPL control and read-out of measurement results via the
RS-232 interface. For the three examples the RS-232 interface parameter should be set as described in
section 3.17.4.

Because of the default setting with "*RST" (see Appendix A UPL Default Setup), the UPL generator
produces a 1-kHz sinewave signal with a level of 0.5 V.
Command "INP:TYPE GEN2" internally links generator channel 2 and analyzer channel 1 so that no
cabling of outputs and inputs is required. The UPL analyzer performs 10 RMS measurements and the
results are displayed in the result field and on the controller screen.
Note:
A measurement result must be triggered before it can be displayed on the screen ("INIT:CONT
OFF;*WAI"). After triggering, a settled result is available which can be queried, ("SENS1:DATA1?"),
read in (comin) and displayed on the screen of the controller. (PRINT...).

3.17.4.1

Readout of Measurement Results in QuickBASIC

Enter the following program listing in Microsoft QuickBASIC (most of the PCs will use QuickBASIC
under MS-DOS on the PC) and start with Shift-F5:
In QuickBASIC a maximum transfer rate of 19200 baud can be set (OPEN
"COM1:19200,E,7,1,RB100" FOR RANDOM AS #1).
Since QuickBASIC does not support the hardware handshake RTS/CTS the size of the communication
buffer (RB value in byte) had to be adapted to the expected data quantity and the controller speed: the
slower the controller the larger the data quantity and the higher the RB value.
Every output string must be terminated with an LF (line feed) so that UPL is able identify the end of the
command. In this program example the line feed is added generally to the output string in the Comout
output routine (PRINT #1, A$; CHR$(10)).

1078.2008.02

3.359

E-10

Remote Control via RS-232 Interface

UPL

’***************************************************
’* Triggering and output of 10 measurement results *
’***************************************************
DECLARE FUNCTION Comin$ ()
DECLARE SUB Comout (A$)
OPEN "COM1:9600,E,7,1,RB100" FOR RANDOM AS #1: ’
Parameter of COM1
’The size of the communication buffer
(RB value in bytes) has to be
’adapted to the expected data quantity: The slower the controller the larger
the data quantity and the higher the RB value.
’For a single measurement result a few bytes will be sufficient,
’for a block data transfer of 1024 Y values of an FFT in ASCII
’format with a total length of more than 12000 bytes approx. RB5000
is required.
Comout ("*RST;*WAI"): ’
Loads default setup
Comout ("INP:TYPE GEN2"):’Connects analyzer input to generator output
FOR I = 1 TO 10
Comout ("INIT:CONT OFF;*WAI"): ’
Triggers and waits for result
Comout ("SENS1:DATA1?"): ’ Queries measurement result of channel 1
PRINT Comin$: ’
Reads out and outputs measurement result
NEXT I
CLOSE
END
FUNCTION Comin$
’*** Reading the response string of UPL at COM1 ***
’ UPL terminates each output string with NL (CHR$(10)).
’ Characters are read from the COM1 interface until NL is received.
X$ = ""
NZ: Z$ = INPUT$(1, 1): ’
Reads single characters from COM1
IF Z$ <> CHR$(10) THEN X$ = X$ + Z$: GOTO NZ: ’
Next character
Comin$ = X$: ’
Returns complete string
END FUNCTION
SUB Comout (A$) STATIC
’*** Output of ASCII string at the COM1 interface ***
PRINT #1, A$; CHR$(10): ’Each string must be terminated with NL (CHR$(10)).
END SUB

3.17.4.2

Readout of Measurement Results in R&S BASIC

Enter the following program listing in R&S BASIC and start with F2 (RUN).
When R&S BASIC is already installed on the controller, the COMX.SYS device driver allows the
maximum UPL transmission rate of 56000 baud (OPENI# 1,"com1:56000,e,7,1,2000") to be
used.
Every output string must be terminated with LF so that the UPL is able to identify the end of a command
(eg "INP:TYPE GEN2"+CHR$(10);).
10 ’************************************************************************
30 ’* Triggering and output of 10 measurement results
*
40 ’************************************************************************
50 OPENO# 2,"com1:"
60 OPENI# 1,"com1:9600,e,7,1,2000": ’
Set COM1 parameter
70 PRINT# 2,"*RST"+CHR$(10);: ’ Sets default setup with internal connection
80 PRINT# 2,"INP:TYPE GEN2"+CHR$(10);: ’
between generator and analyzer
90 FOR I=1 TO 10: ’
Outputs 10 individually triggered measurement results
100 PRINT# 2,"INIT;*WAI"+CHR$(10);: ’
Triggers measurement result
110 PRINT# 2,"SENS:DATA?"+CHR$(10);: ’
Selects measurement result
120 GOSUB Comin: ’
Reads out measurement result

1078.2008.02

3.360

E-10

UPL
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230

Remote Control via RS-232 Interface

PRINT Instr$: ’
Outputs measurement result
NEXT I
END
’
’************** Reading in the UPL response *****************
Comin:
C$="": Instr$=""
Nexchar:
C$=INPUT$(1,#1): ’
Reads individual characters
IF C$=CHR$(10) THEN RETURN : ’Terminates reading when an LF is received
Instr$=Instr$+C$: GOTO Nexchar: ’Links individual characters to a string

3.17.4.3

Readout of Measurement Results in Borland-C 3.0

Enter the following program listing in Borland-C 3.0 and start with CTRL-F9 (RUN).
In Borland-C 3.0 a maximum transmission rate of 9600 baud can be set.
Each output string must be terminated with a line feed so that UPL can identify the command end (eg
"INP:TYPE GEN2\n").
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include








/**************************************************************************/
/*
Declarations
*/
/**************************************************************************/
#define COM_1 0
#define COM_2 1
#define SETTINGS (_COM_9600 | _COM_CHR7 | _COM_STOP1 | _COM_EVENPARITY)
/*The following settings can be made in bios.h: */
// _COM_CHR7
0x02
/* 7 data bits */
// _COM_CHR8
0x03
/* 8 data bits */
// _COM_STOP1
0x00
/* 1 stop bit */
// _COM_STOP2
0x04
/* 2 stop bits */
// _COM_NOPARITY
0x00
/* no parity */
// _COM_EVENPARITY 0x18
/* even parity */
// _COM_ODDPARITY 0x08
/* odd parity */
// _COM_110
0x00
/* 110 baud */
// _COM_150
0x20
/* 150 baud */
// _COM_300
0x40
/* 300 baud */
// _COM_600
0x60
/* 600 baud */
// _COM_1200
0x80
/* 1200 baud */
// _COM_2400
0xa0
/* 2400 baud */
// _COM_4800
0xc0
/* 4800 baud */
// _COM_9600
0xe0
/* 9600 baud */

1078.2008.02

3.361

E-10

Remote Control via RS-232 Interface

UPL

/**************************************************************************/
/* Initialization of interface */
/**************************************************************************/
void init_com(int port)
{
_bios_serialcom(_COM_INIT, port, SETTINGS);}
/**************************************************************************/
/* Output of character */
/**************************************************************************/
void outp_char(int port,char c)
{
_bios_serialcom(_COM_SEND, port, c);
}
/**************************************************************************/
/* Reading a character */
/**************************************************************************/
int inp_char(int port,char *to_rec)
{
unsigned int status;
while (1)
{ /* Read until a character of error-free status is received */
status = (_bios_serialcom(_COM_RECEIVE, port, 0) & 0x9fff);
if ((status & 0x9f00) == 0)
{
*to_rec = (char)status;
return (0);
}
}
}
/**************************************************************************/
/* Output of string */
/**************************************************************************/
void comout(int port, char *strptr)
{
while (*strptr != ’\0’)
outp_char(port,*strptr++);
}
/**************************************************************************/
/* Read string until a line feed is received */
/**************************************************************************/
void comin (int port, char *recptr)
{
int idx = 0;
char c = 0;
while (1)
{
inp_char (port,&c);
recptr[idx] = c;
if (c == ’\n’) // Abort when LF is received
break;
idx++;
}
recptr[idx] = ’\0’; // Overwrite NL with ’\0’
}

1078.2008.02

3.362

E-10

UPL

Remote Control via RS-232 Interface

/***************** Main program *******************/
/* Triggering and output of 10 measurement results */
/***************************************************/
int main ()
{
char recstring[100];
int i;
init_com(COM_1);
comout (COM_1, "*RST;*WAI\n");
comout (COM_1, "INP:TYPE GEN2\n");
for (i = 1; i <= 10; i++)
{
comout (COM_1, "INIT;*WAI\n");
comout (COM_1, "SENS:DATA?\n");
comin (COM_1, recstring);
printf ("%s\n",recstring);
}
printf ("Continue: ");
getch ();
return (1);
}

3.17.5

Binary Data via RS232 Interface

First steps
To obtain the programs RS232_BT.EXE and RS232_BT.BAS, which are required for a transmission of
binary data via RS232 interface, proceed as described under 3.15.20 Binary Data via IEC/IEEE-Bus
Interface.

Transmitting a File to UPL via RS232 Interface
RS232_BT.BAS is written in the programming language QuickBASIC from Microsoft, which are under
MS-DOS on most PCs.
The source file RS232_BT.BAS runs under QuickBASIC and can be adapted to the user’s needs
whenever necessary.
For transmitting binary data via RS232_BT.EXE, the following settings must be made in the OPTIONS
panel of UPL:
Remote via
COM2
COM2 PARAMETER ------Baud Rate
19200
(max. permissible baudrate for QuickBASIC)
Parity
NONE
(required for binary transmission)
Data Bits
8
(required for binary transmission)
Stop Bits
1
Handshake
RTS/CTS
When transmitting binary data via the RS232 interface, the XON/XOFF handshake must not be set in
the OPTIONS panel of UPL, since XON/XOFF functions by means of exchanging binary characters,
which may affect characters in the binary data stream.

1078.2008.02

3.363

E-10

Remote Control via RS-232 Interface

UPL

As an RS232 cable connecting UPL and the control PC, a modem-bypass cable with R&S order number
1050.0346 should be used, or a cable with a pin assignment as described in 3.17.1 Preparation for
Use, Fig. 3-42.
After RS232_BT has been called, the program requests the following:
• Selection of the desired interface COM1 or COM2 at the controller as well as the desired baud rate
(make sure the baud rate selected in UPL is used). The program now attempts to contact the UPL. If
this is successfully done, UPL measurements are halted to attain maximum transmission speed.
• Path and file name of the file to be transmitted are polled as well as the name of the file to be
generated with this content in the UPL working directory.
• The program now generates a temporary file with the name TEMP.OUT, which contains the RS232
command required for UPL and the data set to be transmitted.
• TEMP.OUT is now transmitted to UPL. As the transmission takes considerably more time than via
IEC/IEEE bus, the program has a progress bar. The file TEMP.OUT is retained in the controller also
after the transmission is completed so that it can be viewed by means of an editor with binary
capability.
• Following the transmission, signatures are generated (see MD5 signature technique) using the
original file on the controller and the file stored in UPL. If these two files have the same signatures, it
may be assumed with great certainty that the file are absolutely identical and no transmission errors
have occurred.

MD5 Signature Method
To check whether a file was transferred error-free from the process controller to the UPL, the
MD5 signature method can be used, see 3.15.20 Binary Data via IEC/IEEE-Bus Interface.
UPMD5.EXE can conveniently be called up as "child process" (SHELL) from its RS232 control program
in order to compate the signature with the signature of the file transmitted to the UPL.
Example in QuickBASIC see source code RS232_BT.BAS lines 53 and 54
shellcmd$ = "UPMD5.EXE " + hostfina$ + "> " + hostcheckfina$
SHELL (shellcmd$)
To fetch the signature of a file stored on the UPL under RS232 control, the command
"MMEMory:CHECk? ’filename’"
is to be sent to the UPL.

3.17.6

Differences to Remote Control via IEC/IEEE Bus

• A command line sent to the UPL must always be terminated with  (ASCII code 10,
decimal). Since the character  (ASCII code 13, decimal) before the delimiter is a
filler without significance, the combination   is also permissible.
• ASCII strings sent by the UPL as a response to the controller via the RS-232 interface are always
terminated with  (ASCII code 10, decimal).
Block data in binary form are sent to the controller via the RS-232 interface without delimiter. The
number of bytes can be seen from the digits sent ahead of the block data:

1078.2008.02

3.364

E-10

UPL
# 2 2 0

Remote Control via RS-232 Interface
--- 1.1 ---

--- 1.2 ---

--- 1.3 ---

--- 1.4 ---

--- 1.5 ---

23 32 32 30 cd cc 8c 3f 9a 99 99 3f 66 66 a6 3f 33 33 b3 3f 00 00 c0 3f
1st value

2nd value

3rd value

4th value

Hexadecimal
form

5th value

Number of following bytes in ASCII. This value divided by 4 yields
the number of subsequent floating-point values in IEEE format.
Number of digits of subsequently indicated length in ASCII
The ASCII character ’#’ introduces a binary block transfer.

Program examples 3.17.4.1 Readout of Measurement Results in QuickBASIC and 3.17.4.3
Readout of Measurement Results in Borland-C 3.0 illustrate the readout of binary block data.
• With remote control via RS-232 all the common commands related to SRQ control are not useful.
This can be seen in the table under 3.9 Common Commands . An exception is the *OPC command.
The main task of this command is to trigger an SRQ when a measurement result is available, but in
the case of RS-232 control, it may be used to wait in a loop for a measurement result by querying bit
d0 of the Event Status Register, see 3.17.4.1 Readout of Measurement Results in QuickBASIC.
• Common commands (3.13.1) and addressed commands (3.13.2) are not used in RS-232 control.
• With RS-232 remote control, an SRQ procedure cannot be programmed, ie the control program is
not able to carry out another task while it waits for measurement results or error messages from the
UPL.
Error queue or status register must be queried cyclically in the control program.
• Since an SRQ routine is not available, there is no need to determine the sender or the source of an
SRQ in a serial or parallel poll.
• Line messages like REN, GET, DCL, etc are not possible.
• The line message EOI denoting the end of a binary block cannot be used.
If binary data are to be received nevertheless, the expected block length must be used instead.
Remember that data bits = 8 and parity = NONE must be set for the receipt of binary data.
• All registers and commands of the status reporting system not referring to SRQ generation may be
used:
*STB?
*SRE
*PRE
*IST?
*ESR?
*ESE
STATus:OPERation?
STATus:QUEStionable?
STATus:XQUEstionable?
SYSTem:ERRor?

1078.2008.02

not usable
not usable
not usable
not usable
usable
not usable
usable
usable
usable
usable

3.365

E-10

Maintenance

UPL

4

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

4.1

Maintenance

4.1.1

Mechanical Maintenance

•

Clean the front panel and keys using a soft, damp cloth soaked with a liquid detergent, if required.

•

Cleaning the LC display: do not use any acid solutions or abrasive cleaners (otherwise the
anti-reflecting coat is damaged)! We recommend that standard cleaners as are used for optical
devices such as glasses, objectives and the like or water mixed with some rinsing liquid be used for
cleaning.

4.1.2

Electrical Maintenance

The UPL requires no electrical maintenance.

4.2

Function Test

Upon switch-on of the UPL the following self-tests are performed:

•

Self-test on the computer. On the detection of any error the AT warning tone codes (see Table 4-1)
will be audible. The system start is aborted, the UPL cannot be operated. With an external keyboard
connected, the subsequent memory test can be aborted by pressing the "ESC" key.

Table 4-1 AT warning tone codes
AT-warning tone
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Meaning
DRAM refresh failure
Parity Circuit failure
Base 64kB RAM failure
System Timer failure
Processor Failure
Keyboard Controller-Gate A20 error
Virtual Mode Exception Error
Display Memory R/W Test Failure *)
ROM-BIOS CheckSum Failure

*) non-fatal error

•

Self-test on all boards of the measurement hardware including all options installed (recognized by the
UPL itself). The self-test is carried out while the switch-on picture is being displayed on the screen
and also during normal measurement procedures - however to a limited extent. On the detection of
an error a message is displayed, which specifies the type of error, the name of the defective board
and, if possible, a hint for the user how to eliminate the defect.

1078.2008.02

4.1

E-10

UPL

4.3

Troubleshoooting

Troubleshooting

Error messages displayed after the self-tests or during a measurement usually contain a hint as to the
cause of trouble and its elimination (see Section 2.3.6 Error Messages). If the cause is a defective
board, it should be replaced (see 4.4 Replacing the Boards). For more details on the theory of
operation of the measurement hardware boards and instructions on further fault locating, please refer to
the Service Manual (order designation 1030.7551.24 ).

4.3.1

BIOS-SETUP

It depends on the UPL model and the time of delivery, which controller boards and hard disk drives are
supplied with the instrument. Thus, the operating menu for setting the SETUP parameters and the
parameters, too, differ accordingly.
Operation of the setup menu is not explained since it may be obtained from the operator guidance lines.
Calling the SETUP menu
• Switch off the instrument, connect external keyboard.
• Switch on, press "DEL" key (or ENTF key with German keypad) and hold until the SETUP menu is
displayed.
• Select menu item for setting the setup (e.g., "RUN CMOS SETUP", "STANDARD-SETUP", ...)
• Set according to the board and hard disk installed. The parameters to be entered are listed in the
paragraphs below.
Note:

The setup menus assume an English keypad to be connected. With a German keypad, Y
and Z have been exchanged compared to the English one (notice with acknowledging
requests).

Caution:

If the SETUP is not set correctly, this may lead to malfunction of the instrument! In this
case, switch off the instrument, press "INS" key (or "Einfg" key with German keypad) and
hold, switch on the instrument and release key with start of the memory test. The SETUP is
thus reset to default values.

SETUP for UPL 05 with 80486 DX4/75 Board
Table 4-2 Standard Setup (UPL05)
Date/Time

Current date /time

Floppy A

1,44 MB

Floppy B, Slave Disk

not installed

Hard Disk

use DETECT MASTER (s. u.)

1078.2008.02

4.2

E-10

Troubleshoooting

UPL

The parameters for the hard disk need not be entered. The setup program determines the parameters
when calling the "DETECT MASTER" function in the UTILITY menu.

Table 4-3 Advanced Setup (UPL 05)
Typematic Rate

30

System Keyboard

Absent

Primary Display

VGA/EGA

Above 1MB Memory Test

Enabled

Memory Test Tick Sound

Enabled

Hit "DEL" Message Display

Enabled

Extended BIOS RAM Area

0:300

Halt for "F1" if any Error

Disabled

System Boot Up Num Lock

On

Numeric Processor Test

Enabled

Floppy Drive Seek At Boot

Disabled

System Boot Up Sequence

C:, A:

Password Checking

Setup

Video Shadow C000, 32K

Enabled

Shadow C800, 32K

Enabled

Shadow D000, 32K

Disabled

Shadow D800, 32K

Disabled

Shadow E000, 32K

Disabled

Shadow E800, 32K

Disabled

Internal Cache

Enabled

Internal Cache Write Mode

Wrt-Thru

External Cache

Enabled

Video ROM Cache C000, 32k

Enabled

System ROM Cache F000, 64k

Enabled

Non Cachable Area #1 Size

Disabled

Non Cachable Area #1 Base

Disabled

Non Cachable Area #1 Type

DRAM

Non Cachable Area #2 Size

Disabled

Non Cachable Area #2 Size

Disabled

Non Cachable Area #2 Type

DRAM

IDE Block Mode

Disabled

Primary Master IDE LBA Mode

Disabled

Primary Slave IDE LBA Mode

Disabled

Secondary IDE Drives Preset

None

Secondary Master IDE LBA Mode

Disabled

Secondary Slave IDE LBA Mode

Disabled

1078.2008.02

4.3

E-10

UPL

Troubleshoooting

Table 4-4 Chipset Setup (UPL 05)
System Auto Configuration

Enabled

Bus Frequency

7.159 MHz

System DRAM Speed

Fastest

DRAM Write Cycle Pulse Time

1T

DRAM Write Cycle Wait State

1 ws

Cache Burst Read Cycle Time

1T

Cache Write Cycle Time

2T

16 Bit 0 Wait State Override

Disabled

16 Bit I/O Read Cmd Delay

Disabled

16 Bit Read Cyc Reduction

Disabled

DRAM Burst Write Mode

Disabled

Slow Refresh

Disabled

Hidden Refresh

Enabled

Local Bus Latch Timing

T3

Local Bus Ready (LRDY *)

Sync.

16 Bit I/O Recovery Time

5 Clks

16 Bit Memory, I/O Wait State

1 ws

8 Bit I/O Recovery Time

16 Clks

8 Bit Memory, I/O Wait State

4 ws

Note on memory expansion, if fitted:
The SIMM modules used have 72 contacts (PS2-SIMMs). 1Mx36 or 4Mx36 modules with an access
time of 70 ns may be used.
SETUP for UPL 02 with 80386/40-Board
Table 4-5 Standard Setup (UPL 02)
Floppy Drive A

1.44 MB

System Keyboard

Not Installed

Harddisk C

use AUTODETECT HARDDISK (s.u.)

Harddisk D

Not installed

Primary Display

VGA/EGA

The parameters for the hard disk need not be entered. The setup program determines the parameters
when calling the AUTO DETECT HARDDISK function.
Table 4-6 Advanced Setup (UPL 02)
Above 1MB Memory Test

Enabled

Memory Test Tick Sound

Disabled

Hard Disk Type 47 Area

0:300

System Boot Up Num Lock

Off

Floppy Drive Seek At Boot

Disabled

System Boot Up Sequence

C:, A:

External Cache

Enabled

Internal Cache

Disabled

Password Checking

Setup

IDE Block Mode

Disabled

IDE Standby Mode

Disabled

Chip Away Virus

Disabled

1078.2008.02

4.4

E-10

Troubleshoooting

UPL

Table 4-7 Chipset Setup (UPL 02)
Cache Read Option

3--1--1--1

Cache Write Option

1 WS

DRAM Waitstates

1 WS

Keyboard Clock Select

9.5 MHz

AT Clock

CPUCLK/5

16 Bit I/O Recovery Time

5/3 BCLK

CoProcessor Ready

No Delay

Non Cachable Area \#1 Size

Disabled

Non Cachable Area \#1 Base

Disabled

Non Cachable Area \#1 Type

DRAM

Non Cachable Area \#2 Size

Disabled

Non Cachable Area \#2 Size

Disabled

Non Cachable Area \#2 Type

DRAM

Memory Remapping

Enabled

Alle Shadow Optionen

Enabled

•

Store setup

Note on memory expansion, if fitted :
The SIMM modules used have 72 contacts (PS2-SIMMs). 1Mx36 or 4Mx36 modules with an access
time of 70 ns may be used..

4.3.2 Others
Fault symptom:

•

After switch-on, the UPL is not in the same state as it was before switch-off. The last entries have
been omitted.

•

The following error message is displayed:
"CMOS CHECKSUM ERROR. "

Cause:
Battery of test hardware discharged, since the instrument has long since been switched on.
The UPL contains a CMOS memory which stores all settings of all active panels and the data of the
recorded traces. The settings of the other panels and the previous states of the active panels is saved
on the hard disk, in addition. These data are still available after a failure of the battery. A capacitor bank
is used as backup for the CMOS RAM when the instrument is switched off.
Error recovery:
Have the instrument switched on for at least four hours. The battery is then recharged and the settings
are retained after switch-off.

1078.2008.02

4.5

E-10

UPL

Troubleshoooting

Fault symptom:
The UPL does not respond in a sensible way or not at all on key depressions or IEC bus commands.
Cause:
The combination of previous settings resulted in an inadvertent program run causing the software to
"crash".
Error recovery:
Restart the UPL!
Depending on the desired instrument setup take the following steps:
Restart the UPL with the instrument setup most recently stored in the CMOS-RAM.
This setup may be correct despite the faulty response of the UPL. To avoid having to enter again the
settings most recently made, have a try at starting the UPL with this setup.

• Turn power switch off and on. (No further action possible).
In case the procedure stated above fails, restart the UPL with its default setup.

• Connect external keyboard (see 1.1.6 Connecting an External Keyboard).
• Turn power switch off and on.
• When the UPL switch-on logo is displayed, abort the UPL program by pressing ESC and enter the
DOS operating system level, where you can restart the UPL with its default setting by entering the
command
UPL -d and confirm by pressing ENTER
The setup "DEFAULT.SET" in the "c:\upl\setup" directory supplied together with the UPL is loaded.
LOAD INSTRUMENT STATE in the FILE panel allows the loading of a setup which was stored by the
user (see 2.9.1.1).
Further notes on software faults can be looked up in Section 2.3.6 Error Messages.

1078.2008.02

4.6

E-10

UPL

Generator Default Settings

A

UPL Default Setup

The default setup of the UPL is triggered by means of the settings below:
Manual setting in the FILE panel:

IEC/IEEE
bus:

LOAD INSTRUMENT STATE
Mode
DEF SETUP

*RST

A precondition for the validity of basic settings is that the parameter link is switched off (see 2.15.8
Transfer of Parameters (Parameter Link Function)).

A.1

Default Settings of Generator
INSTRUMENT — ANALOG
· Channel(s) 2 = 1
For setting GENERATOR → ANALOG (default setting) the following applies:
· Output
UNBAL
· Max Volt
12.000 V
· Ref Freq
1000.0 Hz
· Ref Volt
1.0000 V
For setting GENERATOR → DIGITAL the following applies:
Further selections: JITTER ONLY | PHASE | COMMON ONLY
· Src Mode
AUDIO DATA
· PhaseToRef 0.0000 %FRM
with Src Mode PHASE only
· Channel(s) 2 = 1
not with Src Mode COMMON ONLY
· Unbal Out AUDIO OUT
· Cabel Sim OFF
· Sync To
AUDIO IN
· Sample Frq 48 kHz
· Sync Out
GEN CLK
Type
WORD CLK
· Ref Out
REF GEN
· Data
ALL ZERO
· Audio Bits 20
with Src Mode AUDIO DATA| PHASE only
· Unbal Vpp 1.0000 V
· Bal
Vpp 0.0000 V
· Max Volt
1.0000 FS
with Src Mode AUDIO DATA | PHASE only
· Ref Freq
1000.0 Hz
· PROTOCOL
STATIC
· Ch Stat. L ZERO
· Ch Stat. R EQUAL L
· AUX GEN

OFF

with SRC Mode AUDIO DATA | PHASE only

For setting AUX GEN → ANALOG OUTthe following appliest:
·
·
·
·
·

Channel(s)
Output
SWEEP CTRL
Anlg Freq
Anlg Ampl

1078.2008.02

2 = 1
UNBAL
OFF
1000.0 Hz
0.1000 V

The auxiliary generator (AUX GEN) has its own sweep system
designed similar to the sweep system of the function generator. The
function for a 2-dimensional sweep (Z axis), ie simultaneous
frequency and level sweep, is not implemented. The default setting
of commands is largely identical to the SWEEP CTRL points
described for FUNCTION SINE in the section "Functions common
to all generators".

A.1

E-10

Generator Default Settings

UPL

For setting AUX GEN → COMMON MODE the following applies:
· SWEEP CTRL OFF
· Comm Freq 1000.0 Hz
· Comm Ampl 0.1000 V
For setting AUX GEN → JITTER the following applies:
· SWEEP CTRL OFF
· Jitt Freq 1000.0 Hz
· Jitt Ampl 0.1000 UI

Functions common to all generators
FUNCTION
·
·
·
·

Frq Offset
Low Dist
DC Offset
Dither

SINE
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

ANALOG generator. If low-dist. generator option not installed: OFF
with ON: 0.0000 FS
or: 0.0000 V
with DIGITAL generator

For setting Dither ON the following applies:
0.0001 FS
with DIGITAL generator
· PDF
GAUSS
with DIGITAL generator
· Equalizer OFF
· Equal.File R&S_EXAM.VEQ
with equalizer ON
· SWEEP
CTRL OFF
· FREQUENCY 1000.0 Hz
· VOLTAGE
0.5000 V[FS]
For setting SWEEP CTRL → AUTO SWEEP or MANU SWEEP the following applies:
· Next Step ANLR SYNC
with AUTO SWEEP only
· X Axis
FREQ
· Z Axis
OFF
With X or Z axis → FREQ selected

FREQUENCY
· Spacing
· Start
· Stop
· Points
· VOLTAGE

LOG POINT
20000 Hz
20.000 Hz
30
0.5000 V [FS]

With X or Z axis → VOLT selected

· FREQUENCY
· Equalizer
· Equal.File
VOLTAGE
· Spacing
· Start
· Stop
· Points

1078.2008.02

20000 Hz
OFF
R&S_EXAM.VEQ

with equalizer ON

LIN POINTS
0.0100 V[FS]
0.5000 V[FS]
30

A.2

E-10

UPL

Generator Default Settings
For setting SWEEP CTRL → AUTO LIST or MANU LIST the following applies:
· Next Step ANLR SYNC
with AUTO LIST only
· X Axis
FREQ
· Z Axis
OFF
With X or Z axis → FREQ selected

· FREQ.FILE

R&S_EXAM.SPF

with X or Z axis → FREQ selected

With X or Z axis → VOLT selected

· FREQUENCY
· VOLT.FILE

1000.0 Hz
R&S_EXAM.SPV

FUNCTION

STEREO SINE

with INSTRUMENT DIGITAL only

. Frq Offset OFF
. DC Offset OFF
with ON: 0.0000 FS
. Dither
OFF
For setting Dither ON the following applies
0.0001 FS
. PDF
GAUSS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Equalizer
Equal.File
Freq Mode
Volt Mode
SWEEP
FREQUENCY
Phas Ch2:1
VOLT CH1
Volt Ch2:1

OFF
R&S_EXAM.VEQ
FREQ&PHASE
VOLT&RATIO
CTRL OFF
1000.0 Hz
0.0000 °
0.5000 FS
4.0000 :1

with Equalizer ON

For setting Freq Mode → FREQ CH1&2
. Freq Ch1
1000.0 Hz
. Freq Ch2
1000.0 Hz
For setting Volt Mode → VOLT CH1&2
. Volt Ch1
0.5000 FS
. Volt Ch2
0.5000 FS
For setting von SWEEP CTRL → AUTO SWEEP or MANU SWEEP the following applies:
. Next Step ANLR SYNC
with AUTO SWEEP only
. X Axis
FREQ
. Z Axis
OFF
For setting Freq Mode → FREQ&PHASE
with X- or Z-Axis → FREQ selected
FREQUENCY
. Spacing
LOG POINT
. Start
20000 Hz
. Stop
20.000 Hz
. Points
30
. Phas Ch2:1 0.0000 °
For setting Freq Mode → FREQ CH1&2
with X- or Z-Axis → FREQ selected
FREQUENCY
. Spacing
LOG POINT
. Start
20000 Hz
. Stop
20.000 Hz
. Points
30
. Freq Ch2
1000.0 Hz
1078.2008.02

A.3

E-10

Generator Default Settings

UPL

For setting Volt Mode → VOLT&RATIO
with X- or Z-Axis → VOLT selected
VOLTAGE CH1
. Volt Ch2:1 4.0000 :1
. Spacing
LIN POINTS
. Start
0.0100 FS
. Stop
0.5000 FS
. Points
30
For setting Volt Mode → VOLT CH1&2
with X- or Z-Axis → VOLT selected
VOLTAGE CH1
. Spacing
LIN POINTS
. Start
0.0100 FS
. Stop
0.5000 FS
. Points
30
. Volt Ch2
0.5000 FS
For setting von SWEEP CTRL → AUTO LIST or MANU LIST the following applies:
with AUTO LIST only
. Next Step ANLR SYNC
. X Axis
FREQ
. Z Axis
OFF
For setting Freq Mode → FREQ&PHASE
with X- or Z-Axis → FREQ selected
. FREQ FILE R&S_EXAM.SPF
. Phas Ch2:1 0.0000 °
. VOLT CH1
0.5000 FS
. Volt Ch2:1 4.0000 :1
For setting Freq Mode → FREQ CH1&2
with X- or Z-Axis → FREQ selected
. FREQ FILE R&S_EXAM.SPF
. Freq Ch2
1000.0 Hz
. VOLT CH1
0.5000 FS
. Volt Ch2:1 4.0000 :1
For setting Volt Mode → VOLT&RATIO
with X- or Z-Axis → VOLT selected
. Freq Ch1
21000 Hz
. Freq Ch2
1000.0 Hz
. Volt Ch2:1 4.0000 :1
. VOLT FILE R&S_EXAM.SPF
For setting Volt Mode → VOLT CH1&2
with X- or Z-Axis → VOLT selected
. Freq Ch1
21000 Hz
. Freq Ch2
1000.0 Hz
. VOLT FILE R&S_EXAM.SPF
. Volt Ch2
0.5000 FS
FUNCTION
MULTISINE
· DC Offset OFF
· Spacing
USER DEF
10.000 Hz
· Mode
DEFINE VOLT
· Equalizer OFF
· Crest Fact OPTIMIZED
· Equal.File R&S_EXAM.VEQ
· No of Sin 2
1078.2008.02

with ON: 0.0000 FS or 0.0000 V

with equalizer ON

A.4

E-10

UPL

Generator Default Settings
·
·
·
·
.

Multisine
TOTAL GAIN
TOTAL PEAK
TOTAL RMS
Ampl Var

CHOICE
0.0000
1.0000
1.0000
OFF

...
dB
V[FS]
V

for INSTRUMENT ANLG only

For setting Ampl Var → SINE
. Mod Freq 10.000 Hz
. Variation 0.0000 %
For setting Ampl Var → BURST
. ON TIME
0.0100 s
. INTERVAL 1.0000 s

For setting "No of Sin 17" and Crest Fact → OPTIMIZED the following applies:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Frequency
1000.0 Hz
40.000 Hz
60.000 Hz
120.00 Hz
250.00 Hz
310.00 Hz
500.00 Hz
1000.0 Hz
2000.0 Hz
4000.0 Hz
6290.0 Hz
8000.0 Hz
10000 Hz
12500 Hz
14000 Hz
16000 Hz
18000 Hz

Multisine
Voltage
0.5000 V [FS]
0.5000 V
0.0000 V
0.0000 V
0.0000 V
0.0000 V
0.0000 V
0.0000 V
0.0000 V
0.0000 V
0.0000 V
0.0000 V
0.0000 V
0.0000 V
0.0000 V
0.0000 V
0.0000 V

Close

For setting "No of Sin 17" and Crest Fact → , OPTIMIZED the following applies::
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Frequency
1000.0 Hz
40.000 Hz
60.000 Hz
120.00 Hz
250.00 Hz
310.00 Hz
500.00 Hz
1000.0 Hz
2000.0 Hz
4000.0 Hz
6290.0 Hz
8000.0 Hz
10000 Hz
12500 Hz
14000 Hz
16000 Hz
18000 Hz

Multisine
Phase
Voltage
0.0000 °
0.5000
0.0000 °
0.5000
0.0000 °
0.0000
0.0000 °
0.0000
0.0000 °
0.0000
0.0000 °
0.0000
0.0000 °
0.0000
0.0000 °
0.0000
0.0000 °
0.0000
0.0000 °
0.0000
0.0000 °
0.0000
0.0000 °
0.0000
0.0000 °
0.0000
0.0000 °
0.0000
0.0000 °
0.0000
0.0000 °
0.0000
0.0000 °
0.0000

V [FS]
V
V
Close
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V

FUNCTION
SINE BURST | SINE² Burst
· DC Offset OFF
with ON: 0.0000 FS or 0.0000 V
. Equalizer
OFF
. Equal.File
R&S_EXAM.VEQ
with Equalizer ON
· SWEEP CTRL OFF
· FREQUENCY 1000.0 Hz
· VOLTAGE
0.5000 V [FS]
For setting SWEEP CTRL → AUTO SWEEP or MANU SWEEP the following applies:
· Next Step ANLR SYNC
with AUTO SWEEP only
· X Axis
VOLT
· Z Axis
OFF

1078.2008.02

A.5

E-10

Generator Default Settings

UPL

With X or Z axis → VOLT selected

FREQUENCY
VOLTAGE
· Spacing
· Start
· Stop
· Points
· Low Level
· ON TIME
· INTERVAL
· BurstOnDel

1000.0 Hz
LIN POINTS
0.0100 V[FS]
0.5000 V[FS]
30
0.0000 V [FS]
0.0100 s
1.0000 s
0.0000 s

for SINE BURST only

With X or Z axis → FREQ selected

FREQUENCY
· Spacing
· Start
· Stop
· Points
· VOLTAGE
· Low Level
· ON TIME
· INTERVAL
· BurstOnDel

LIN POINT
20000. Hz
20.000 Hz
30
0.0100 V [FS]
0.0000 V [FS]
0.0100 s
1.0000 s
0.0000 s

points 2 for SINE² burst
for SINE BURST only

With X or Z axis → ON TIME selected

· FREQUENCY
· VOLTAGE
· Low Level
ON TIME
· Spacing
· Start
· Stop
· Points
· INTERVAL
· BurstOnDel

20000 Hz
0.0100 V [FS]
0.0000V [FS]

for SINE BURST only

LIN POINTS
0.0010 s
0.2000 s
30
1.0000 s
0.0000 s

With X or Z axis → INTERVAL selected

· FREQUENCY
· VOLTAGE
· Low Level
· ON TIME
INTERVAL
· Spacing
· Start
· Stop
· Points
· BurstOnDel

20000 Hz
0.0100 V [FS]
0.0000V [FS]
0.0010 s
LIN POINTS
1.0000 s
0.0200 s
30
0.0000 s

for SINE BURST only

points 2 for SINE² burst

For setting SWEEP CTRL → AUTO LIST or MANU LIST the following applies:
· Next Step ANLR SYNC
with AUTO LIST only
· X Axis
FREQ
· Z Axis
OFF
With X or Z axis → VOLT selected

·
·
·
·
·

FREQUENCY
VOLT FILE
Low Level
ON TIME
INTERVAL

1078.2008.02

1000.0 Hz
R&S_EXAM.SPV
0.0000 V [FS]
0.0100 s
1.0000 s

for SINE BURST only

A.6

E-10

UPL

Generator Default Settings
· BurstOnDel 0.0000 s
With X or Z axis → FREQ selected

·
·
·
·
·
·

FREQ FILE
VOLTAGE
Low Level
ON TIME
INTERVAL
BurstOnDel

R&S_EXAM.SPF
0.5000 V
0.0000 V [FS]
0.0100 s
1.0000 s
0.0000 s

for SINE BURST only

With X or Z axis → ON TIME selected

·
·
·
·
·
·

FREQUENCY
VOLTAGE
Low Level
ONTIM FILE
INTERVAL
BurstOnDel

1000.0 Hz
0.5000 V [FS]
0.0000 V [FS]
R&S_EXAM.SPO
1.0000 s
0.0000 s

for SINE BURST only

With X or Z axis → INTERVAL selected

·
·
·
·
·
·

FREQUENCY
VOLTAGE
Low Level
ON TIME
INTV FILE
BurstOnDel

FUNCTION
· Frq Offset
· DC Offset
· SWEEP CTRL
· UPPER FREQ
· LOWER FREQ
· Volt LF:UF
· TOTAL VOLT

1000.0 Hz
0.5000 V [FS]
0.0000 V [FS]
0.0100 s
R&S_EXAM.SPI
0.0000 s
MOD DIST
OFF
OFF
OFF
4000.0 Hz
40.000 Hz
4.0000 :1
1.0000 V

for SINE BURST only

with ON: 0.0000 FS or 0.0000 V

For setting SWEEP CTRL → AUTO SWEEP or MANU SWEEP the following applies:
· Next Step ANLR SYNC
with AUTO SWEEP only
· X Axis
FREQ
· Z Axis
OFF
With X or Z axis → FREQ selected

UPPER FREQUENCY
· Spacing
LOG POINTS
· Start
20000. Hz
· Stop
4000.0 Hz
· Points
30
· LOWER FREQ 40.000 Hz
· VOLT LF:UF 4.0000 :1
· TOTAL VOLT 1.0000 V [FS]
With X or Z axis → VOLT selected

· UPPER FREQ 20000 Hz
· LOWER FREQ 40.000 Hz
· VOLT LF:UF 4.0000 :1
TOTAL VOLTAGE
· Spacing
LIN POINTS
· Start
0.0100 V[FS]
· Stop
0.5000 V[FS]
· Points
30

1078.2008.02

A.7

E-10

Generator Default Settings

UPL

For setting SWEEP CTRL → AUTO LIST or MANU LIST the following applies:
· Next Step ANLR SYNC
with AUTO LIST only
· X Axis
FREQ
· Z Axis
OFF
With X or Z axis → FREQ selected

·
·
·
·

UPP F.FILE
LOWER FREQ
VOLT LF:UF
TOTAL VOLT

R&S_EXAM.SPF
40.000 Hz
4.0000 :1
1.0000 V [FS]

if X or Z axis → FREQ selected

With X or Z axis → VOLT selected

·
·
·
·

UPPER FREQ
LOWER FREQ
VOLT LF:UF
TOT V.FILE

FUNCTION
· Frq Offset
· DC Offset
· MODE

4000.0 Hz
40.000 Hz
4.0000 :1
R&S_EXAM.SPV

DFD
OFF
OFF
IEC 268

with ON: 0.0000 FS or 0.0000 V

For setting the IEC 268 mode the following applies:
· Equalizer OFF
with Equalizer ON
· Equal.File R&S_EXAM.VEQ
· SWEEP CTRL OFF
· MEAN FREQ 12500. Hz
· DIFF FREQ 80.000 Hz
· TOTAL VOLT 1.0000 V
For setting the IEC 118 mode the following applies:
· Equalizer OFF
· Equal.File R&S_EXAM.VEQ
with Equalizer ON
· SWEEP CTRL OFF
· UPPER FREQ 12500. Hz
· DIFF FREQ 80.000 Hz
· TOTAL VOLT 1.0000 V
For setting SWEEP CTRL → AUTO SWEEP or MANU SWEEP the following applies:
· Next Step ANLR SYNC
with AUTO SWEEP only
· X Axis
FREQ
· Z Axis
OFF

1078.2008.02

A.8

E-10

UPL

Generator Default Settings
With X or Z axis → VOLT selected

· MEAN FREQ 12500 Hz
· DIFF FREQ 80.000 Hz
TOTAL VOLTAGE
· Spacing
LIN POINTS
· Start
0.0100 V[FS]
· Stop
0.5000 V[FS]
· Points
30

UPPER FREQ with IEC 118 mode selected

With X or Z axis → FREQ selected

MEAN FREQUENCY
· Spacing
LIN POINTS
· Start
20000 Hz
· Stop
200.0 Hz
· Points
30
· DIFF FREQ 80.000 Hz
· TOTAL VOLT 0.0100 V [FS]

UPPER FREQuency with IEC 118 mode selected

For setting SWEEP CTRL → AUTO LIST or MANU LIST the following applies:
· Next Step ANLR SYNC
with AUTO LIST only
· X Axis
FREQ
· Z Axis
OFF
With X or Z axis → VOLT selected

· MEAN FREQ 12500 Hz
· DIFF FREQ 80.000 Hz
· TOT V.FILE R&S_EXAM.SPV

UPPER FREQuency with IEC 118 mode selected

With X or Z axis → FREQ selected

· MEANF.FILE R&S_EXAM.SPF
· DIFF FREQ 80.000 Hz
· TOTAL VOLT 1.0000 V [FS]
FUNCTION
· DC Offset
· Domain
· PDF
· VOLT PEAK
· VOLT RMS

RANDOM
OFF
TIME
GAUSS
1.0000 V [FS]
0.2550 V

UPP F.FILE with IEC 118 mode selected

with ON: 0.0000 FS or 0.0000 V

in analog generator only

For setting Domain FREQ the following applies:
· Spacing
USER DEF
10.000 Hz
· Shape
WHITE
· Lower Freq 10.000 Hz
· Upper Freq 20000. Hz
· Equalizer OFF
· Equal.File R&S_EXAM.VEQ
with equalizer ON
· VOLT PEAK 1.0000 V [FS]
· VOLT RMS
1.0000 V
in analog generator only
. Ampl Var
OFF
For setting Ampl Var → SINE
. Mod Freq 10.000 Hz
. Variation 0.0000 %
For setting Ampl Var → BURST
. ON TIME
0.0100 s
. INTERVAL 1.0000 s

1078.2008.02

A.9

E-10

Generator Default Settings
FUNCTION
· DC Offset
· Shape File
· VOLT PEAK
· VOLT RMS
. Ampl Var

ARBITRARY
OFF
R&S_EXAM.TTF
1.0000 V [FS]
1.0000 V
OFF

UPL

with ON: 0.0000 FS or 0.0000 V

in analog generator only

For setting Ampl Var → SINE
. Mod Freq 10.000 Hz
. Variation 0.0000 %
For setting Ampl Var → BURST
. ON TIME
0.0100 s
. INTERVAL 1.0000 s

1078.2008.02

A.10

E-10

UPL

Generator Default Settings
FUNCTION
· DC Offset
· VOLTAGE

POLARITY
OFF
0.5000 V [FS]

with ON: 0.0000 FS or 0.0000 V

FUNCTION
· DC Offset
· VOLTAGE

FSK
OFF
0.5000 V[FS]

with ON: 0.0000 FS or 0.0000 V

FUNCTION
. DC Offset
. Spacing

RANDOM+ANLR
OFF
USER DEF
10.000 Hz
. Lower Freq 350.00 Hz
. Upper Freq 550.00 Hz
. Crest Fact OPTIMIZED

with ON: 0.0000 FS bzw. 0.0000 V

For setting Crest Fact → Value:
1.0000
.
.
.
.

RND PEAK
RND RMS
Loop Chan
Loop Gain

1.0000 V|FS
0.3869 V|FS
1
0.0000 *

FUNCTION
. DC Offset
. Mode
. Mod Freq
. Deviation
. Carr Freq
. Carr Volt

MODULATION
OFF
FM
1000.0 Hz
0.5000 %
40.000 Hz
0.5000 V|FS

For setting Mode → AM
. Mod Freq
1000.0
. Mod Depth 0.5000
. Carr Freq 40.000
. Carr Volt 0.5000

with ON: 0.0000 V | FS

Hz
%
Hz
V|FS

FUNCTION
DC
. SWEEP CTRL OFF
. VOLTAGE
1.000 V|FS
For setting von SWEEP CTRL → AUTO SWEEP or MANU SWEEP the following applies:
. Next Step ANLR SYNC
. X Axis
VOLT
only Volt
VOLTAGE
. Spacing
LIN POINTS
. Start
0.0100 V|FS
. Stop
0.5000 V|FS
. Points
30
For setting von SWEEP CTRL → AUTO LIST or MANU LIST the following applies:
. Next Step ANLR SYNC
. X Axis
VOLT
only Volt
. VOLT FILE R&S_EXAM.SPF

1078.2008.02

A.11

E-10

Generator Default Settings
FUNCTION

CODED AUDIO

UPL
for INSTRUMENT DIGITAL only

. Format
AC-3
. Chan Mode 2/0 192kb/s
. SWEEP CTRL OFF
SWEEP Setting like Function SINE
. Vari Mode FREQUENCY
. FREQUENCY 1000.0 Hz
. TOTAL VOLT 0.1000 FS

1078.2008.02

A.12

E-10

UPL

A.2

Analyzer Default Settings

Default Settings of Analyzer
INSTRUMENT — ANLG 22kHz
For setting ANALYZER ANLG 22 kHz and ANLG 110 kHz the following applies.
20 Hz for ANLG 110kHz only
· Min Freq
10 Hz
· Ref Imped 600.00 Ω
· Channel(s) 1
· Ch1 Coupl AC
· Ch1 Input BAL
· Ch1 Imped 600 Ω

· Ch1 Common FLOAT
 The same settings apply with channel 2 selected
· Ch1 Range AUTO

For setting ANALYZER DIGITAL the following applies:
· Meas Mode AUDIO DATA
· Min Freq
10 Hz
for Meas Mode AUDIO DATA only
· Channel(s) 1
for Meas Mode AUDIO DATA only
· Input
BAL (XLR)
· Sync To
AUDIO IN
for Meas Mode AUDIO DATA only
· Sample Frq 48 kHz
for Meas Mode AUDIO DATA only
· Audio Bits 20
for Meas Mode AUDIO DATA only
· Jitter Ref VARI (PLL) for Meas Mode JITTER/PHAS only
START COND

—

AUTO

· Delay

0.0000 s

For setting START COND TIME TICK the following applies:
· Time
1.0000 s
· Points
30
For setting START COND
· Delay
0.0000
· Min Volt
0.0100
· Start
1000.0
· Stop
10000.
· Variation 10.000
· Settling
OFF

FREQ CH1  FREQ CH2 the following applies:
s
V [FS]
Hz
Hz
%

For setting START COND
· Delay
0.0000
· Start
0.0100
· Stop
1.0000
· Variation 10.000
· Settling
OFF

VOLT CH1  VOLT CH2 the following applies:
s
V [FS]
V [FS]
%

For setting START COND
· Delay
0.0000
· Start
0.0100
· Stop
1.0000
· Variation 10.000
· Settling
OFF

LEV TRG CH1  LEV TRG CH2 the following applies:
s
V [FS]
V [FS]
%

For setting START COND TIME CHART the following applies:
· Time
1.000 s
· Points
30

1078.2008.02

A.13

E-10

Analyzer Default Settings

UPL

For setting START COND
· Delay
0.0000
· Min Volt
0.0100
· Start
1000.0
· Stop
10000
· Variation 10.000
· Settling
OFF

FRQ FST CH1  FRQ FST CH2 the following applies:
s
V [FS]
Hz
Hz
%

For setting START COND
Settling EXPONENTIAL ½
· Samples
3
· Tolerance 1.0000
· Resolution 0.0010

FREQ CH1|2 | FRQ FST CH1|2 and
FLAT the following applies:

For setting START COND
Settling EXPONENTIAL ½
· Samples
3
· Tolerance 1.0000
· Resolution 0.0010

VOLT CH1|2 | LEV TRG CH1|2and
FLAT the following applies:

%
Hz

%
V [FS]

Functions common to all analyzers
Input measurement for analog analyzers
INPUT DISP
PEAK | RMS
· Unit Ch1
V
· Unit Ch2
V
· Reference VALUE:
1.0000 V [FS]

with two-channel measurement

Input measurement for digital analyzer in Meas Mode AUDIO DATA
INPUT DISP
PEAK | RMS
· Unit Ch1
dBFS
FS for RMS
· Unit Ch2
dBFS
FS for RMS, with two-channel measurement
· Reference VALUE:
1.0000 FS
Input measurement for digital analyzer in Meas Mode COMMON/INP
INPUT DISP
PEAK | DIG INP AMP
· Unit Ch1
V
· Reference VALUE:
1.0000 V[FS]
Input measurement for digital analyzer in Meas Mode JITTER/PHAS
INPUT/PHAS
· Unit Ch1
· Reference

PEAK
UI
VALUE:
1.0000 UI

INPUT/PHAS
· Unit

PHAS TO REF
%FRM

1078.2008.02

%FRM for PHAS TO REF
for PEAK only
for PEAK only

A.14

E-10

UPL

Analyzer Default Settings
Frequency measurement for analog analyzers and digital analyzer
in Meas Mode AUDIO DATA
FREQ/PHASE
· Unit Ch1
· Unit Ch2
· Ref Freq

FREQ
Hz
Hz
VALUE:
1000.0 Hz
· Freq Settl OFF

with two-channel measurement

Frequency/phase measurement with two-channel measurement for analog analyzers and digital
analyzer in Meas Mode AUDIO DATA
FREQ/PHASE
· Unit Ch1
· Unit Ch2
· Ref Freq
·
·
·
·

FREQ&PHASE
Hz
°

VALUE:
1000.0 Hz
Format Pha -180...+180°
Ref Phase VALUE:
10.000 °
Freq Settl OFF
Phas Settl OFF

Formatt Pha 0 to 360° for analog analyzer

Frequency/group-delay measurement with two-channel measurements for analog
analyzers and digital analyzer in Meas Mode AUDIO DATA
FREQ/PHASE
· Unit Ch1
· Unit Ch2
· Ref Freq

FREQ&GRPDEL
Hz
s

VALUE:
1000.0 Hz
· Ref Phase VALUE:
10.000 s
· Freq Settl OFF
Sample frequency measurement for digital analyzer in Meas Mode AUDIO DATA
FREQ/PHASE
· Unit Ch1
· Unit Ch2
· Ref Freq

SAMPLE FREQ
Hz
Hz
VALUE:
1000.0 Hz
· Freq Settl OFF
· Freq Settl OFF

with two-channel measurement

Frequency and sample frequency measurement for digital analyzer in Meas Mode
JITTER/PHAS | COMMON/INP
FREQ/PHASE
· Unit
· Ref Freq

FREQ | SAMPLE FREQ
Hz
VALUE:
1000.0 Hz

common to all FREQ/PHASE settings:
For setting Freq Settl EXPONENTIAL  FLAT the following applies:
·
·
·
·

Samples
Tolerance
Resolution
Timeout

1078.2008.02

3
0.1000 %
0.1000 Hz
5.0000 s
A.15

E-10

Analyzer Default Settings

UPL

For setting Freq Settl AVERAGE the following applies:
· Samples

3

For setting Phas Settl EXPONENTIAL  FLAT the following applies:
· Samples
3
· Resolution 0.1000 °
· Timeout
5.0000 s
For setting Phas Settl AVERAGE the following applies:
· Samples

3

Functions of all analyzers:
FUNCTION
· DC Suppres
· S/N Sequ
· Meas Time
· Unit Ch1
· Unit Ch2
· Reference
·
·
·
·
·

RMS & S/N
ON
OFF
AUTO FAST
V
[FS]
V
[FS]
VALUE:
1.0000 V [FS]
Notch (Gain)OFF
Filter
OFF
Filter
OFF
Filter
OFF
Fnct Settl OFF

· POST FFT
· SPEAKER

for digital- analysator only
for analogen analyzers only

(with channel 2 activated)

for analogen analyzers only

OFF
OFF

For setting POST FFT = ON the following applies:
· FFT Size
4096
· Window
RIFE VINC 2
FUNCTION
· DC Suppres
· Meas Time
· Unit Ch1
· Unit Ch2
· Reference

RMS SELECT
ON
AUTO
V
[FS]
V
[FS]
VALUE:
1.0000 V [FS]
· Sweep Mode NORMAL
· Bandwidth BP 1%
· SWEEP CTRL OFF
· FREQ MODE GEN TRACK
·
Factor
1.0000 *

for digital- analysator only

if channel 2 is on

with bandwidth BP FIX or BS FIX: 100.00 Hz

with FREQ MODE GEN TRACK only

For setting SWEEP CTRL AUTO SWEEP, MANU SWEEP the following applies:
· Spacing
LOG POINTS
· Start
100.00 Hz
· Stop
20000. Hz
· Points
30

1078.2008.02

A.16

E-10

UPL

Analyzer Default Settings
For setting SWEEP CTRL AUTO LIST, MANU LIST the following applies:
· Filename
R&S_EXAM.SPF
For setting SWEEP CTRL GEN MLTSINE the following applies:
There are no further parameters

·
·
·
·

Notch(Gain)OFF
Fiter
OFF
Fnct Settl OFF
SPEAKER
OFF

for analogen analyzers only
for analogen analyzers only

FUNCTION
PEAK & S/N
· S/N Sequ
OFF
· Meas Mode PK+
· Intv Time FIX 200ms
· Unit Ch1
V
[FS]
· Unit Ch2
V
[FS]
· Reference VALUE:
1.0000 V [FS]
· Filter
OFF
· Filter
OFF
· Filter
OFF
· Fnct Settl OFF
· SPEAKER
OFF

for analyzers ANLG 22kHz and DIGITAL only

FUNCTION
QPK & S/N
· S/N Sequ
OFF
· Intv Time FIX 3
· Unit Ch1
V
[FS]
· Unit Ch2
V
[FS]
· Reference VALUE:
1.0000 V
· Notch (Gain) OFF
· Filter
OFF
· Filter
OFF
· Filter
OFF
· Fnct Settl OFF
· SPEAKER
OFF

for analyzers ANLG 22 kHz and DIGITAL

FUNCTION
· Meas Time
· Unit Ch1
· Unit Ch2
· Reference

with channel 2 activated

[FS]

DC
FIX 200ms
V
[FS]
V
[FS]
VALUE:
1.0000 V|FS
· Fnct Settl OFF
· SPEAKER
OFF

FUNCTION
THD
· Meas Mode All di
· Dyn Mode
PRECISION
· Unit
dB
· Fundamentl AUTO
· Fnct Settl OFF
· SPEAKER
OFF

1078.2008.02

(if channel 2 is on)

for analog analyzers only

if channel 2 is on

for analogen analyzers only

A.17

E-10

Analyzer Default Settings
FUNCTION
THD+N/SINAD
· Meas Mode THD+N
· Dyn Mode
PRECISION
· Meas Time SLOW
· Rejektion NARROW
· Unit
dB
· Fundamentl AUTO
· FILTER
OFF
· FrqLim Low 100.00 Hz
· FrqLim Upp 20000. Hz
· Fnct Settl OFF
· POST FFT
OFF
. Equalizer OFF
. Equal.File R&S_EXAM.VEQ
SPEAKER
OFF

UPL

for analog analyzers only
for digital analyzer only

128 Hz for ANLG 110kHz

with Equalizer ON

For setting POST FFT ON the following applies:
· FFT Size
8192
· Window
RIFE VINC 3
FUNCTION
· Dyn Mode
· Unit
· Fnct Settl
· SPEAKER —

MOD DIST
PRECISION
dB
OFF
OFF

FUNCTION
DFD
· Meas Mode d2 (IEC 268)
· Dyn Mode
PRECISION
· Unit
dB
· Fnct Settl OFF
SPEAKER — OFF
FUNCTION
WOW & FL
· Standard
DIN/IEC
· Weighting ON
· Unit
%
· Fnct Settl OFF
· POSTFFT
OFF
· SPEAKER — OFF

for analog analyzers only

for analogen analyzers only

in analyzers ANLG 22 kHz and DIGITAL

For setting POST FFT the following applies:
· FFT Size
8192
· Window
RIFE VINC 1
FUNCTION

POLARITY

There are no further parameters

FUNCTION
· DC Suppres
· Unit Ch1
· Reference
·
·
.
.
.
·
·
·
·
.
.
·

FFT
ON
dBV [dbFS]
VALUE:
1.0000 V [FS]
Notch (Gain)OFF
FFT Size
4096
Filter
OFF
Filter
OFF
Filter
OFF
Window
RIFE VINC 2
Avg Mode
EXPONENTIAL
Avg Count 1
Zooming
OFF
Equalizer OFF
Equal.File R&S_EXAM.VEQ
SPEAKER — OFF

1078.2008.02

with digital analysator only

for analogen analyzers only

RIFE VINC 3 for digital analyzers

with Equalizer ON

A.18

E-10

UPL

Analyzer Default Settings
For setting ZOOMING ON the following applies:
· Zooming
ON (2 to 128)
Zooming ON (2 to 8) for ANLG 110 kHz
· Center
10000 Hz
· Span
21.94 kHz
SPAN 140.40 for ANLG 110 kHz
In the digital analyzer, the value depends on the selected
sample rate

· Zoom Fact
FUNCTION
· Unit
· Filter
· Filter
· Filter
· SPEAKER

2
FILTER SIM.
%
OFF
OFF
OFF
— OFF

FUNCTION
WAVEFORM
· DC Suppres ON
· Meas Mode STANDARD
· Unit
V [FS]
· REF VOLT
1.0000 V
· Filter
OFF
· Trig Level 0.0000 V
· Trig Slope RISING
· Interpol
1
· Trace Len 0.0100 s
· Trig Src
CHAN 1
· SPEAKER — OFF
FUNCTION

PROTOCOL

with digital analysator only

for analog analyzer ANLG 22kHz only

for digital analyzer only

there are no further parameters

FUNCTION
COHERENCE
· Unit
%
. Chan Delay 0.0000 s
·
·
·
·
·
·

FFT Size
Window
Avg Count
Start
Stop
Resolution

FUNCTION
· Meas Time
· Unit Ch1
· Reference
·
· FREQ MODE
·
Factor
· Sweep Mode
· Filter
· FrqLim Low
· FrqLim Upp

1078.2008.02

for analyzers ANLG 22kHz and DIGITAL only with two channels

4096
RIFE VINC 2
2
0.0000 Hz
21938 Hz
11.719 Hz
RUB & BUZZ
GEN TRACK
V
VALUE:
1.0000 V
GEN TRACK
2.0000 *
NORMAL
OFF
100.0 Hz
21938 Hz

with analog analyzer only

120 kHz with analyzer ANLG 110 kHz only

A.19

E-10

Analyzer Default Settings
FUNCTION

UPL

3rd OCTAVE

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Line Count 30
Meas Time VALUE
0.5013
Max Hold
OFF
Unit Ch1
V [FS]
Unit Ch2
V [FS]
Reference VALUE:
1.0000
. Filter
OFF
. FrqLim Low 100.00
. FrqLim Upp 21938

for analyzers ANLG 22kHz and DIGITAL

s

V [FS]
Hz
Hz

FUNCTION
. Meas Time
.
. Max Hold
. Unit Ch1
. Unit Ch2
. Reference

12th OCTAVE for analyzers ANLG 22kHz and DIGITAL
VALUE
1.3925 s
OFF
V [FS]
V [FS]
VALUE:
1.0000 V [FS]
. Filter
OFF
. FrqLim Low 100.00 Hz
. FrqLim Upp 20586 Hz

Common to all measurement functions:
For setting SPEAKER unequal to OFF the following applies:
· Pre Gain
0.0000 dB
with SPEAKER FUNCT CH1|2|1&2 only
· Spk Volume 30.000 %
· Phone Out = SPEAKER
For setting Fnct Settl EXPONENTIAL  FLAT the following applies:
· Samples
3
· Tolerance 0.1000 %
· Resolution 0.0010 V
· Timeout
5.0000 s
For setting Fnct Settl AVERAGE the following applies:
· Samples
3

1078.2008.02

A.20

E-10

UPL

A.3

Filter Panel Default Settings

Default Settings of Filter Panel

Basic parameters of filters:
Lowpass filter:
· Order
· Passband
· Attenuat.
· Short Name

8
20000. Hz
60.000 dB
1:LP20.0kHz

Highpass filter:
· Order
· Passband
· Attenuat.
· Short Name

8
400.00 Hz
60.000 dB
2:HP400.0Hz

Bandpass filter:
· Passb Low 900.00 Hz
· Passb Upp 1100.0 Hz
· Attenuat. 60.000 dB
· Short Name 3:BP900.0Hz
Bandstop filter:
· Passb Low
· Passb Upp
· Attenuat.
· Short Name

900.00 Hz
1100.0 Hz
60.000 dB
4:BS900.0Hz

Notch filter:
· Center Frq
· Width
· Attenuat.
· Short Name

16000. Hz
500.00 Hz
60.000 dB
5:NO16.0kHz

Octave filter (1/3 OCT FLT):
· Center Frq 12500. Hz
· Attenuat. 60.000 dB
· Short Name 7:TO12.5kHz
Oktave filter (OCTAVE FLT):
· Center Frq 12500. Hz
· Attenuat. 60.000 dB
· Short Name 8:OC12.5kHz
File-defined filter (FILE DEF):
· Filename
R&S_EXAM.COE
· Delay
0.1000 s
· Short Name 9:R&S_EXAM

Standard filter types:
FILTER
FILTER
FILTER
FILTER
FILTER
FILTER
FILTER
FILTER
FILTER

1078.2008.02

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09

LOW PASS
HIGH PASS
BAND PASS
BAND STOP
NOTCH FLT
1/3 OCT FLT
OCTAVE FLT
FILE DEF.
FILE DEF.

A.21

E-10

Display Panel Default Settings

A.4

UPL

Default Settings of Display Panel
OPERATION
BARGRAPH
· Scans COUNT 1
· User Label OFF
BARGRAPH A
· Unit

FUNC CH1
V [FS, Hz, dB, %]

· Limit Ref

VALUE:
1.0000 V

· Scale
· Spacing

AUTO
LIN

BARGRAPH B

OFF

Basic unit of selected analyzer or bargraph
function (see section 2.4 Units)

[FS, Hz, dB, %]

Basic unit of selected analyzer or bargraph
function (see section 2.4 Units)

ONCE

If the same function was selected for BARGRAPH B and BARGRAPH A:
· Scale B
NOT EQUAL A
With Scale B → NOT EQUAL A selected :
· Unit
V
[FS, Hz, dB, %]
· Limit Ref
· Scale
· Spacing

VALUE:
1.0000 V

[FS, Hz, dB, %]

Basic unit of selected analyzer or bargraph
function (see section 2.4 Units)
Basic unit of selected analyzer or bargraph
function (see section 2.4 Units)

AUTO ONCE
LIN

BARGRAPH X VOLT
· Unit
V [FS]
· Reference
10000 V [FS]
· Scale
AUTO
· Spacing
LIN

VOLT, FREQ, ON TIME and INTERVAL are
displayed depending on the setting under
X axis in the case of a generator sweep.
For a sweep of the center frequency of the rms
selective bandpass filter in the analyzer with
measurement function RMS SELECT, FREQ is
displayed.

BARGRAPH X FREQ
· Unit
Hz
· Reference
1000.0 Hz
· Scale
AUTO
· Spacing
LIN
BARGRAPH X
· Unit
· Scale
· Spacing
LIMIT CHECK
· Mode

ON TIME  INTERVAL
S
AUTO
LIN
——————
OFF

For setting "Mode LIM LOWER, LIM UPPER, LIM LOW&UP" the following applies:
· Check
TRACE A
· Lim Upper
VALUE:
not with LIM LOWER
0.5000 V
· Lim Upper
VALUE:
not with LIM UPPER
0.0500 V

1078.2008.02

A.22

E-10

UPL

Standard Settings of Option Panel

A.5

Default Settings of Options Panel
· Remote via IEC BUS
· UPL IECadr 20
· Beeper
ON
PARAM.LINK ————————
· Param Link CHOICE...
DIGITAL AUDIO I/O ———
. Sampl Mode BASE RATE
SCREEN HARD COPY

with remote control option (UPL-B4) installed
not with remote control via COM2

Function tracking Gen

→ Anl selected

The HIGH RATE-Mode (96 kHz-Instrument) has also the
default setting described here

———

For setting Destin → PRINTR/SPC the following applies:
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·

Destin
Printname
Frame Col
Comment
Left Mrgn
Prn Resol
X Scaling
Y Scaling
Orientatn

PRINTR/SPC
Default-Printer
FILE DEF
ON
10
Chars
HIGH
1.5000
1.5000
PORTRAIT

Default Printer stands for the printer selected last by the user. If
printer 0 is selected in the setup, loading the default setup does
not overwrite the printer type selected by the user.

For setting Destin → PLOTTR/HPGL | PRINTR/HPGL the following applies:
·
·
·
·
·

Destin
Color
Copy
Plot on
IEC Adr

PLOTTR/HPGL | PRINTR/HPGL
OFF
SCREEN
COM2
4
with Plot on = IEC BUS

For setting Destin → FILE/PCX the following applies:
·
·
·
·

Destin
Color
Frame Col
Plot on

FILE/PCX
OFF
FILE DEF
COM2

For setting Destin → FILE/HPGL the following applies:
·
·
·
·

Destin
Color
Copy
Filename

FILE/HPGL
OFF
SCREEN
SCREEN

For setting Destin → PRINTR/PS | FILE/PS | FILE EPS the following applies:
·
·
·
·
·
·
·

Destin
Color
Comment
Paper Size
Orientatn
Plot on
Plots/Page

PRINTR/PS | FILE/PS | FILE EPS
OFF
ON
A4
LANDSCAPE
COM2
1

PRINT ——————————
· Type
OFF
COM2 PARAMETER ———————
· Baud Rate
9600
· Parity
EVEN
· Data Bits
7
· Stop Bits
1
· Handshake
RTS/CTS
1078.2008.02

This standard setting is only set when the BACKSPACE key is pressed
during UPL switch-on, UPL-d is entered or after a (new) installation of
an UPL software.
COM2 parameters remain unchanged when a default settup is loaded.
This prevents interface parameters, which have to correspond to those
of the connected device, being overwritten by mistake.

A.23

E-10

Standard Settings of Option Panel

UPL

PANEL KEYS ———————
· Reptn Rate 10.000 Hz
· Rep Delay
0.5000 s
DISPLAY —————————
· Extrn Disp BOTH AUTO
· Meas Disp
ON
· Read Rate
6/s
· Read Resol CHOICE ...
TRACES COLOR/LINE ————
· Scan Conf
MANUAL
· Scannr. (A) 0
· Color
(A) GREEN
· Line
(A) ————————
· Scannr. (B) 0
· Color
(B) GREEN
· Line
(B) ————————

Automatic for all 6 displays

HELP LANGUAGE ——————
· Language
GERMAN
CALIBRATion
· Zero Auto

ANL ————
ON

CALIBRATion
· PhaseToRef
· DIAGNOSTIC
· Device
· Option No.
· InstallKey

GEN ————
OFF
password ?
INSTALL KEY
0
0

1078.2008.02

A.24

E-10

UPL

A.6

Standard Settings of the File Panel

Default Settings of File Panel
LOAD INSTRUMENT STATE ———
. Applicat
USER DEF
· Mode
ACTUAL
· Info Displ ON
· Filename
LASTSAVE
STORE INSTRUMENT STATE ———
· Mode
ACTUAL
· Attrib
READ/WRITE
· Info Text
no infotext
· Filename
LASTSAVE
STORE TRACE/LIST ———————
· Store
OFF
UTILS —————————————
· Delete
TO_DELETE
· Work Dir
C:\UPL\USER
· COPY
SOURCE
· To
DEST

1078.2008.02

A.25

E-10

Index

UPL

A
A weighting..................................................................... 2.208
A WITH * ....................................................................... 2.343
A WITH o........................................................................ 2.343
Abort............................................................................... 2.364
Abort event .......................................................... 2.358, 2.363
AC coupling .................................................................... 2.147
AC coupling input unit..................................................... 2.151
AC supply network..............................................................1.1
AC supply voltages.............................................................1.1
AC-3 ............................................................................... 2.135
AC-3 format .................................................................... 2.135
Activating
STATUS panel ......................................................... 2.293
Activation panels ..............................................................2.31
ACTUAL .............................................................. 2.298, 2.299
Actual instrument setup ....................................... 2.298, 2.299
Actual setup......................................................... 2.298, 2.299
Actual setup and data ..................................................... 2.299
ACTUAL+DATA.............................................................. 2.299
Address
IEC/IEEE bus ...............................................................3.4
Addressed commands .................................................... 3.295
AES Ch1......................................................................... 2.262
AES Ch1&2 .................................................................... 2.262
AES Ch2......................................................................... 2.262
AES/EBU protocol definition .............................................2.78
AES/EBU receivers
reset ......................................................................... 2.365
ALL................................................................................. 2.348
All di ............................................................................... 2.200
All even di....................................................................... 2.200
All odd di......................................................................... 2.200
ALL ONE ..........................................................................2.74
ALL ZERO ........................................................................2.74
AM.................................................................................. 2.132
Ampl Var.......................................... 2.89, 2.105, 2.122, 2.126
Amplitude
distribution..................................................................2.86
ratio (MOD DIST)
generator............................................................ 2.111
Amplitude accuracy ........................................................ 2.226
Amplitude entry
FM............................................................................ 2.132
Amplitude list (list sweep) ............................................... 2.141
Amplitude modulation ..................................................... 2.132
Amplitude ratio (MOD DIST)
analyzer.................................................................... 2.212
Amplitude Variation...........................................................2.89
Analog
analyzer.................................................................... 2.146
Analog Ampl ................................................................... 2.139
Analog Freq .................................................................... 2.139
Analog generator ..............................................................2.66
Analog interfaces
Input connectors...........................................................2.9
Analog notch filter..................................... 2.201, 2.205, 2.213
ANALOG OUT ................................................................ 2.138
Analyzer
availability of functions ............................................. 2.144
configuration............................................................. 2.146
Filters ....................................................................... 2.278
input peak measurement .......................................... 2.144
input peak measurements ........................................ 2.235
instruments............................................................... 2.142
measurement functions ............................................ 2.165
measurement range limits ........................................ 2.143
reference value.............................................. 2.169, 2.172
Settings ......................................................................2.16
synchronization...........................................................2.94
ways of starting ........................................................ 2.159

1078.2008.02

ANALYZER panel .......................................................... 2.142
Analyzers
reference values ...................................................... 2.172
ANLG - ANLG ................................................................ 2.297
ANLG – DIGI .................................................................. 2.297
ANLG 25 kHz ................................................................... 2.65
ANLR key................................................................ 2.3, 2.278
ANLR SYNC..................................................................... 2.94
ANLR TRACK ................................................................ 2.101
ANLR-TRACK ................................................................ 2.118
Application ..................................................................... 2.297
application setups .......................................................... 2.297
ARBITRARY .................................................................... 2.85
ARBITRARY signals
measuring on ........................................................... 2.181
Arbitrary waveform ........................................................... 2.85
Arith. symm. bandwidth RMS sel.................................... 2.186
Arithmetic averaging, settling ................................ 2.42, 2.175
ASCII ...................................................................2.305, 2.354
ASCII format .................................................................. 2.305
Asterisk ............................................................................ 3.15
Asymmetrical sine burst ................................................... 2.85
AT o DOWN ................................................................... 2.340
AT o UP ......................................................................... 2.340
Atten .............................................................................. 2.285
Attenuation..................................................................... 2.284
Attrib .............................................................................. 2.300
Attribute.......................................................................... 2.300
AUD IN RCLK .................................................................. 2.74
Audio Bits.............................................................. 2.75, 2.157
AUDIO DATA ........................................................ 2.71, 2.153
AUDIO IN .............................................2.71, 2.72, 2.74, 2.156
AUDIO OUT ............................................................ 2.71, 2.74
AUTO ..2.157, 2.159, 2.174, 2.179, 2.185, 2.202, 2.207, 2.248
AUTO COLOR ............................................................... 2.397
AUTO FAST..............................................2.179, 2.185, 2.248
AUTO LINE .................................................................... 2.397
AUTO LIST
Generator-Sweep....................................................... 2.93
AUTO ONCE........................................................2.335, 2.348
AUTO Range
Analyzer................................................................... 2.149
generator ................................................................... 2.67
AUTO SCALE ...........................................2.335, 2.338, 2.348
AUTO SCALE ................................................................ 2.335
AUTO SWEEP
analyzer ................................................................... 2.187
Generator................................................................... 2.93
Automatic
sweep ...................................................................... 2.187
sweep ........................................................................ 2.93
Automatic control, size of data memory.......................... 3.356
Automatic range selection .............................................. 2.149
AUX GEN....................................................................... 2.138
Availability
phase measurement ................................................ 2.240
sweep parameters...................................................... 2.91
AVERAGE...................................................................... 2.175
AVERAGE, settling .......................................................... 2.42
Averaging
FFT .......................................................................... 2.223
measurement results.................................................. 2.42
Averaging method in the FFT ......................................... 2.223
Avg Count ............................................................2.223, 2.245
Avg Mode....................................................................... 2.223

I.1

E-10

Index

UPL

B
B WITH * ........................................................................ 2.343
B WITH o........................................................................ 2.343
BACK softkey ................................................................. 2.337
BACKSP.............................................................................2.5
BAL
Generator ................................................................. 2.139
BAL XLR
analyzer......................................................... 2.148, 2.154
Generator ........................................................ 2.66, 2.139
Balanced Output...............................................................2.69
Band limit
THD+N / SINAD ....................................................... 2.208
Band limits
analyzer instruments................................................. 2.143
BAND PASS................................................................... 2.287
BAND STOP................................................................... 2.287
Bandpass ....................................................................... 2.184
center frequency....................................................... 2.194
RMS sel.................................................................... 2.184
Bandpass ....................................................................... 2.287
Bandstop ........................................................................ 2.287
bandwidth
third octave............................................................... 2.252
twelfth octave ........................................................... 2.256
Bandwidth
analyzer.................................................................... 2.186
RMS Select .............................................................. 2.186
Bandwidth bandpass RMS sel. ....................................... 2.186
BAR 1 ............................................................................. 2.348
BAR 2 ............................................................................. 2.348
BAR 3 ............................................................................. 2.348
Bar chart
MOD DIST................................................................ 2.213
BARGRAPH ................................................................... 2.327
BARGRAPH display ............................................ 2.347, 2.349
BARGRAPH display parameters..................................... 2.347
BARGRAPH X ................................................................ 2.347
BARGRAPH1 ................................................................. 2.347
BARGRAPH2 ................................................................. 2.347
BASIC-Macro.................................................................. 3.329
Battery replacement............................................................4.8
baud ............................................................................... 2.409
Baud Rate ...................................................................... 2.391
Beats
DC measurement ..................................................... 2.198
RMS measurement................................................... 2.181
Beeper............................................................................ 2.393
Beeper On/Off ................................................................ 2.393
BIN ENTRY ............................................................. 2.79, 2.81
BINARY .......................................................................... 2.354
Binary block data ............................................................ 3.364
Binary data blocks ............................................................3.12
Binary form ..................................................................... 2.305
BIOS-SETUP......................................................................4.2
BIPHASE CLK ..................................................................2.74
Biquads .......................................................................... 2.229
BLACKMAN-HARRIS .......................................... 2.222, 2.245
BLOCK ..................................................... 2.182, 2.193, 2.250
Boards replacement............................................................4.7
Boolean parameter (command).........................................3.13
BOTH ............................................................................. 2.153
BOTH AUTO................................................................... 2.394
BOTH BW....................................................................... 2.394
BOTH COLOR................................................................ 2.394
Bottom ............................................................................ 2.335
Bounding Box ................................................................. 2.378
BP 1% ............................................................................ 2.186
BP 1/12 OCT .................................................................. 2.186
BP 1/3 OCT .................................................................... 2.186
BP 3% ............................................................................ 2.186

1078.2008.02

BP FAST ........................................................................ 2.186
BP FIX\: ......................................................................... 2.186
Broadband noise ............................................................ 2.199
BS 1%............................................................................ 2.186
BS 1/12 OCT.................................................................. 2.186
BS 1/3 OCT.................................................................... 2.186
BS 3%............................................................................ 2.186
BS FAST ........................................................................ 2.186
BS FIX\: ......................................................................... 2.186
BURST............................................. 2.89, 2.105, 2.122, 2.126
burst duration ................................... 2.90, 2.105, 2.123, 2.126
Burst duration SINE BURST........................................... 2.108
Burst on Del .........................................................2.108, 2.110
Burst signal SINE ........................................................... 2.106

C
C 448 kb/s...................................................................... 2.135
C MESSAGE.................................................................. 2.208
Cable Sim ........................................................................ 2.72
Cable Simulation .............................................................. 2.72
Calculation of filters..............................................2.285, 2.291
Calibration ...................................................................... 2.399
DIG .......................................................................... 2.399
Calibration ANL .............................................................. 2.399
Calibration GEN ............................................................. 2.399
Calibration of low-distortion generator ............................ 2.399
CANCEL ..................................................2.5, 2.13, 2.34, 2.35
CANCEL .................................................................................
Carr Freq........................................................................ 2.132
Carr Volt......................................................................... 2.132
Carrier frequency
FM ........................................................................... 2.132
CCIR 409-J standard W&F............................................. 2.217
CCIR unwtd.................................................................... 2.208
CCIR wtd........................................................................ 2.208
CCIT ARM...................................................................... 2.208
CCITT 0.41 .................................................................... 2.208
CEN TO o ...................................................................... 2.340
Center ............................................................................ 2.224
Center Freq ..........................................................2.289, 2.290
Center frequency
bandpass RMS sel................................................... 2.194
DFD ......................................................................... 2.115
notch filter ................................................................ 2.174
Center frequency............................................................ 2.290
Centronics...................................................................... 2.411
Ch Stat. L ......................................................................... 2.79
Ch. Stat. R ....................................................................... 2.81
Chan delay ...........................................................2.220, 2.245
Chan Mode..................................................................... 2.135
CHAN STAT L................................................................ 2.353
CHAN STAT R ............................................................... 2.353
CHAN STATUS.............................................................. 2.157
Changing
an instrument ............................................................. 2.33
functions .................................................................... 2.34
the panels .................................................2.29, 2.30, 2.31
Changing a function
parameter link ............................................................ 2.34
Changing an instrument
parameter link ............................................................ 2.33
Changing between the instruments .................................. 2.34
Changing the unit at a later date....................................... 2.35

I.2

E-10

UPL

Index

Channel
sequence.................................................................. 2.352
Channel delay................................................................. 2.220
Channel Mode ................................................................ 2.135
Channel status..................................................................2.84
Channel status data, user data, validity, parity..................2.78
Channel(s)
analyzer......................................................... 2.146, 2.153
generator....................................................................2.66
Generator ................................................................. 2.139
Character
data (command) .........................................................3.13
string (command)........................................................3.14
Characteristic notch ........................................................ 2.174
Check ............................................................................. 2.350
CHECKSUM ERROR .........................................................4.5
CHOICE ......................................................................... 2.403
Clock rate generator ........................................................2.73
Clock rate error............................................................... 2.352
CMOS CHECKSUM ERROR..............................................4.5
Coded Audio................................................................... 2.134
CODED AUDIO ................................................................2.85
Coded Audio Signal Generation...................................... 2.134
COHERENCE................................................................. 2.165
Coherence Measurement ............................................... 2.244
Colon ................................................................................3.15
Color...................................................................... 2.27, 2.398
Color palette information................................................. 2.294
Colour............................................................................. 2.377
Colour display................................................................. 2.394
Colour display PROTOCOL analysis .............................. 2.352
Colour monitor ................................................................ 2.394
Colour monitor ................................................................ 2.394
COM2 .................................................................. 2.379, 2.390
COM2 interface .............................................................. 2.390
COM2 PARAMETER ...................................................... 2.390
Comma .............................................................................3.15
Command
addressed ................................................................ 3.295
Common................................................................... 3.295
common commands ...................................................3.39
header ..........................................................................3.7
hierarchy ......................................................................3.7
keyword........................................................................3.7
line
delimiter .................................................................3.9
structure .................................................................3.9
numeric suffix ...............................................................3.8
parameters .................................................................3.13
permissibility...............................................................3.19
processing..................................................................3.18
structure .......................................................................3.7
synchronization...........................................................3.21
syntax elements .........................................................3.15
command line option
-tappl ........................................................................ 2.296
command line parameter
-tthdnwin................................................................... 2.210
COMMENT ..................................................................... 2.336
Comments for hardcopy.................................................. 2.299
Comments on hardcopy.................................................. 2.298
Common
analyzer.................................................................... 2.148
Common Ampl ................................................................ 2.140
Common commands.............................................. 3.39, 3.295
form..............................................................................3.7
Common Freq................................................................. 2.140
COMMON MODE ........................................................... 2.138
COMMON ONLY ..............................................................2.71

1078.2008.02

Common parameters
all analyzer functions................................................ 2.166
all filters ................................................................... 2.285
all generator functions................................................ 2.87
generator signals ....................................................... 2.86
SINE, DFD, MOD DIST signals.................................. 2.86
COMMON/INP ............................................................... 2.153
Comp ............................................................................. 2.231
COMPLETE .........................................................2.298, 2.299
Complete setup ....................................................2.298, 2.299
COMPRESS .................................................................. 2.135
COMPRESSED.............................................................. 2.231
Computer operation of UPL ............................................ 2.412
CONDition register ........................................................... 3.25
Conditional tracing of measured values.......................... 2.159
Configuration
analog analyzer........................................................ 2.146
analog generator ........................ 2.66, 2.139, 2.140, 2.141
digital analyzers ....................................................... 2.153
digital generator ......................................................... 2.71
Configuration File PS.CFG ............................................. 2.385
Connecting
external devices ....................................................... 2.408
external VGA monitor................................................. 2.11
CONT............................................................................. 2.358
CONT key ...................................................................... 2.161
Continuous measurement .............................................. 2.360
Continuous measurement without trigger condition ........ 2.159
Contrast ............................................................................. 1.3
Control file...................................................................... 2.321
Control panel
CONTROL ............................................................ 2.5, 2.7
CURSOR / VARIATION ............................................... 2.7
EDIT ............................................................................ 2.5
Front-panel................................................................... 2.3
conversion factor............................................................ 2.170
Conversion factor ........................................................... 2.269
Conversion formula of units.............................................. 2.57
Copy .............................................................................. 2.373
COPY............................................................................... 2.27
coupling
AC............................................................................ 2.178
DC ........................................................................... 2.178
Coupling
analyzer inputs ......................................................... 2.147
Crest Fact ............................................................2.102, 2.120
Crosstalk ........................................................................ 2.266
CRT monitor................................................................... 2.411
Ctrl D.............................................................................. 2.394
Cursor
graphics .........................................................2.337, 2.343
panel .......................................................................... 2.31
Cursor IMAX A ............................................................... 2.343
Cursor IMAX B ............................................................... 2.343
CURVE ................................................................2.338, 2.373
Curve plot
cursor....................................................................... 2.337
overrange................................................................. 2.337
underrange............................................................... 2.337
CURVE PLOT ................................................................ 2.327
CURVE/GRID................................................................. 2.373

I.3

E-10

Index

UPL

D

Directories........................................................................ 2.37
Directory structure.............................................................. 1.9
Display .................................................................... 2.7, 2.327
DISPLAY key ..................................................................... 2.3
Display modes
Switchover using the mouse ...................................... 2.29
Display of lists ................................................................ 2.344
Display of lists parameters ............................................. 2.344
Display of traces and spectra ...............................2.330, 2.337
Distant interferences suppression .................................. 2.222
Distortion measurement ................................................. 2.165
Distortion measurement THD+N/SINAD......................... 2.203
Distortion measurements THD ....................................... 2.199
Distribution
function ...................................................................... 2.86
noise ........................................................................ 2.122
Dither .................. 2.85, 2.86, 2.99, 2.101, 2.111, 2.114, 2.128
Dolby Digital ................................................................... 2.135
Domain........................................................................... 2.117
DOS operating system ..................................................... 2.53
Double cross .................................................................... 3.15
Drive ................................................................................ 2.38
drivername ..................................................................... 2.373
DUAL FILE..................................... 2.302, 2.330, 2.331, 2.344
Dual trac......................................................................... 2.302
Dwell ..................................................................... 2.94, 2.389
file .............................................................................. 2.94
time............................................................................ 2.94
value .......................................................................... 2.94
DWELL FILE .................................................................... 2.94
Dwell time ...................................................................... 2.304
Dwell time printout.......................................................... 2.389
DWELL VALUE ..................................................... 2.94, 2.304
Dyn Mode............................ 2.201, 2.205, 2.206, 2.213, 2.215
Dynamic
offset calibration....................................................... 2.399
Dynamic ....................................................2.201, 2.205, 2.215
Dynamic Mode ............................................................... 2.213
Dynamic Mode PRECISION........................................... 2.399

d2 (IEC 118) ................................................................... 2.215
d2 (IEC 268) ................................................................... 2.215
d3 (IEC 118) ................................................................... 2.215
d3 (IEC 268) ................................................................... 2.215
Dangerous contact voltages ...............................................2.1
data ................................................................................ 2.409
Data Bits......................................................................... 2.391
Data entry.........................................................................2.34
Data input or output during measurements .......................2.39
Data strings (command)....................................................3.14
DC ......................................................................... 2.85, 2.165
component..................................................................2.87
coupling.................................................................... 2.143
measurement ................................................ 2.165, 2.198
noise HP................................................................... 2.208
offset ..........................................................................2.87
offset calibration ....................................................... 2.399
voltage...................................................................... 2.198
DC coupling .................................................................... 2.147
DC coupling input unit..................................................... 2.151
DC Offset...............................2.99, 2.101, 2.106, 2.109, 2.111
............................................2.114, 2.117, 2.125, 2.127, 2.128
DC Suppres ....................................2.166, 2.178, 2.184, 2.220
Decimal point....................................................................3.15
DEEM 50/15 ................................................................... 2.208
Deemph 50 ..................................................................... 2.208
Deemph 75 ..................................................................... 2.208
Deemph J.17 .................................................................. 2.208
DEFAULT ............................................................ 2.298, 2.397
Default setup .................................................................. 2.298
DEFAULT.SET ............................................................... 2.296
DEFINE PHASE ............................................................. 2.102
DEFINE VOLT ................................................................ 2.102
DEL BEF WR ...................................................... 2.328, 2.330
Delay
filter .......................................................................... 2.285
restart of measurement............................................. 2.162
Delay value with external sweep.......................................2.50
Delete ............................................................................. 2.321
DELete BEFore WRite.................................................... 2.330
Delimiter
command line ...............................................................3.9
response to query.......................................................3.11
Destin .................................................................. 2.371, 2.372
Deviation ........................................................................ 2.132
FM............................................................................ 2.132
Deviation settling ............................................................ 2.176
DFD
analyzer.................................................................... 2.165
Generator ...................................................................2.85
Dialog window
multisine ................................................................... 2.103
DIFF FREQ .................................................................... 2.115
Difference frequency distortion ............................ 2.114, 2.214
measurement ................................................ 2.165, 2.214
Difference value curves .................................................. 2.339
Differences to IEC/IEEE-Bus Remote Control (B10)....... 3.341
Differences to remote control via IEC/IEEE bus (RS-232)
....................................................................................... 3.364
DIG INP AMP ...................................................... 2.166, 2.235
DIG OUT AMP................................................................ 2.170
DIGI – ANLG .................................................................. 2.297
DIGI – DIGI..................................................................... 2.297
DIGITAL ...........................................................................2.65
Digital generator ...............................................................2.71
DIN 45403 ...................................................................... 2.114
DIN 45507 standard W&F............................................... 2.217
DIN/IEC .......................................................................... 2.217
DIN-IEC 268-3 ................................................................ 2.114

1078.2008.02

E
EDG TRG CH1............................................................... 2.161
EDG TRG CH2............................................................... 2.161
Editing files and directories ............................................ 2.321
EMC problems ............................................................... 2.154
ENABle register................................................................ 3.26
ENHANCED ..................................................................... 2.78
ENTER............................................2.5, 2.13, 2.16, 2.34, 2.35
Entering a new file name .................................................. 2.37
Entering file names.................................................. 2.36, 2.37
Entry of amplitude
RANDOM (noise) ..................................................... 2.125
SINE ........................................................................ 2.141
Entry of data..................................................................... 2.34
Entry of figures ................................................................. 2.31
Entry of values
brief introduction ........................................................ 2.14
Epilog for HPGL ............................................................. 2.294
EQUAL A ....................................................................... 2.332
EQUAL L.......................................................................... 2.81
EQUAL VOLT................................................................. 2.102
Equal. file ..................... 2.88, 2.99, 2.102, 2.106, 2.114, 2.120
..................................................................2.130, 2.211, 2.225
Equalization.................................................................... 2.304
Equalization.................................................................... 2.389
Equalization data............................................................ 2.302

I.4

E-10

UPL

Index

Equalization file............................................................... 2.304
equalization of analyzer signal ............................. 2.210, 2.225
equalization of generator signals.......................................2.88
EQUALIZATN ................................................................. 2.389
EQUALIZATN ................................................................. 2.304
Equalizer.......................2.88, 2.99, 2.102, 2.106, 2.114, 2.120
................................................................. 2.130, 2.210, 2.225
equalizer file, generation ...................................... 2.211, 2.225
Equalizer file, generator ....................................................2.88
Equalizer table printout ................................................... 2.389
Equivalent....................................................................... 2.122
Error messages ....................................................... 2.51, 2.53
DFD measurement ................................................... 2.214
during program run .....................................................2.53
Fatal ...........................................................................2.54
MOD DIST measurement ......................................... 2.212
THD+N/SINAD measurement ................................... 2.203
Error Messages
IEC/IEEE bus ........................................................... 3.296
Error messages during measurement ...............................2.53
Error queue.......................................................................3.35
ESE (event status enable register) ...................................3.29
ESR (event status register)...............................................3.29
EVENt register..................................................................3.26
Examples of application
external sweep with settling process ..........................2.48
quantising noise measurement ................................. 2.175
Settling by arithmetic averaging..................................2.42
Exec macro .................................................................... 2.407
Explanations of Front- and Rearpanel Views ......................2.3
EXPONENTIAL .......................................... 2.42, 2.175, 2.223
EXPORT......................................................................... 2.305
Extension of file names................................................... 2.294
Extern disp ..................................................................... 2.394
External
sweep....................................................................... 2.159
external clock ...................................................................2.73
External Keyboard ..............................................................2.3

FILE + CRC............................................................. 2.79, 2.81
File attributes ................................................................. 2.300
FILE DEF .............................................................. 2.82, 2.374
File extensions ............................................................... 2.294
File extensions ............................................................... 2.321
FILE INTERN ................................................................. 2.333
FILE NAME .................................................................... 2.344
FILE panel...................................................................... 2.294
File selection .................................................................... 2.37
FILE/EPS ....................................................................... 2.372
FILE/HPGL..................................................................... 2.372
FILE/PCX ....................................................................... 2.372
FILE/PS ......................................................................... 2.372
File-defined filter............................................................. 2.292
Filename ............... 2.36, 2.80, 2.81, 2.82, 2.125, 2.190, 2.301
....................................................... 2.306, 2.331, 2.351, 2.378
FILENAME RMS-sel. sweep .......................................... 2.191
Filter......................... 2.182, 2.194, 2.197, 2.208, 2.221, 2.229
............2.232, 2.251, 2.254, 2.258, 2.278, 2.286, 2.287, 2.289
attenuation ............................................................... 2.284
parameters............................................................... 2.291
FILTER.................................................................2.172, 2.290
FILTER key ........................................................................ 2.3
Filter simulation .............................................................. 2.229
FILTER SIMULATION. ................................................... 2.165
First steps (readout of measurement results) ................. 3.340
First steps (readout of measurement results) (RS-232) .. 3.358
FIX 1000 MS .................................................................. 2.197
FIX 200 MS ..........................................................2.197, 2.198
FIX 3 SEC ...................................................................... 2.197
FIX 50 MS ...................................................................... 2.197
FIX Range
Analyzer................................................................... 2.149
generator ................................................................... 2.67
FIX\: ............................................................................... 2.191
FLAT ..................................................................... 2.42, 2.175
FLAT TOP...................................................................... 2.245
FLAT_TOP..................................................................... 2.222
FLOAT ........................................................................... 2.148
Floating inputs................................................................ 2.151
Floating reference values ............................................... 2.268
FM.................................................................................. 2.132
FNCT Ch1 ...................................................................... 2.262
FNCT Ch1&2.................................................................. 2.262
FNCT Ch2 ...................................................................... 2.262
Fnct Settl............................. 2.175, 2.182, 2.194, 2.197, 2.198
............................................ 2.202, 2.208, 2.213, 2.215, 2.218
FOREVER...................................................................... 2.254
Format.......................................................2.135, 2.305, 2.354
Format Pha .................................................................... 2.241
FrameCol ....................................................................... 2.374
FREQ .................................................................... 2.95, 2.117
Freq Ch1 ........................................................................ 2.129
FREQ CH1 .......................... 2.160, 2.191, 2.330, 2.344, 2.347
FREQ Ch1&2 ................................................................. 2.128
Freq Ch2 ........................................................................ 2.129
FREQ CH2 .......................... 2.160, 2.191, 2.330, 2.344, 2.347
FREQ FILE ........................................................... 2.97, 2.141
Freq Mode...................................................................... 2.128
FREQ MODE .......................................................2.191, 2.249
FREQ MODE RMS sel. Sweep ...................................... 2.191
Freq No (i)...................................................................... 2.103
Freq Settl ....................................... 2.175, 2.239, 2.242, 2.243
FREQ&PHASE............................................................... 2.128

F
Factor .................................................................. 2.192, 2.249
FALLING ........................................................................ 2.232
FAST ..............................................2.193, 2.206, 2.238, 2.250
analyzer....................................2.201, 2.205, 2.213, 2.215
FAST DECAY ................................................................. 2.254
Fast Fourier Transformation ........................................... 2.220
Fast frequency response measurement.......................... 2.271
Fatal error
with error message .....................................................2.53
without error message ................................................2.54
FDAS.............................................................................. 2.292
FFT......................................2.101, 2.118, 2.165, 2.220, 2.278
amplitude accuracy................................................... 2.226
frequency measurement ........................................... 2.226
implementation ......................................................... 2.227
POST FFT................................................................ 2.172
Resolution ................................................................ 2.173
Round noise ............................................................. 2.226
Size ............................................................... 2.173, 2.209
undersampling .......................................................... 2.226
Window .................................................................... 2.173
FFT...................................................................................2.15
FFT Size ................................................... 2.218, 2.221, 2.245
File
short form ................................................................. 2.284
FILE....................... 2.3, 2.79, 2.81, 2.331, 2.332, 2.344, 2.354
FILE + AES3............................................................ 2.79, 2.81

1078.2008.02

I.5

E-10

Index

UPL

Frequency ................ 2.106, 2.109, 2.129, 2.135, 2.139, 2.140
difference ................................................................. 2.115
generator....................................................................2.99
Offset ....................................................................... 2.111
results ........................................................................2.59
units ...........................................................................2.59
FREQUENCY ...................................................... 2.136, 2.137
Frequency and phase measurement............................... 2.237
Frequency entry
SINE................................................... 2.129, 2.139, 2.140
Frequency input
SINE...........................................................................2.99
frequency measurement
fast ........................................................................... 2.178
Frequency measurement ................................................ 2.237
Frequency measurement time ........................................ 2.238
Frequency measurement with FFT ................................. 2.226
Frequency modulation .................................................... 2.132
Frequency response measurement
fast ........................................................................... 2.271
Frequency response measurement...................................2.15
Frequency shift keying......................................................2.85
Frequency Sweep RMS sel. ........................................... 2.187
Frequency units
reference value.................................................. 2.67, 2.75
Frequency, Phase and Group Delay ............................... 2.240
Frequenzeingabe
SINE......................................................................... 2.129
Front-panel .........................................................................2.3
FRQ FST CH1 ................................................................ 2.160
FRQ FST CH2 ................................................................ 2.160
Frq lim Low ..................................................................... 2.255
Frq Lim Low.................................................................... 2.258
Frq lim Upp ..................................................................... 2.255
Frq Lim Upp.................................................................... 2.259
Frq Offset ................................2.86, 2.99, 2.111, 2.114, 2.128
FrqLim Low.......................................................... 2.208, 2.251
FrqLim Upp.......................................................... 2.208, 2.251
FSK ..................................................................................2.85
Full scale value.................................................................2.58
Full screen mode ............................................ 2.32, 2.29, 2.30
full-screen mode 3-panel display key ................................2.32
FUNC CH1 ............................................... 2.330, 2.344, 2.347
FUNC CH2 ............................................... 2.330, 2.344, 2.347
Function
analyzer......................................................... 2.165, 2.166
generator....................................................................2.85
FUNCTION
Generator ...................................................................2.85
Functions
changing of.................................................................2.34
Functions of softkey........................................................ 2.341
Fundamental................................................................... 2.203
Fundamental frequency .................................................. 2.203
Fundamentl.......................................................... 2.202, 2.207
Fuses .................................................................................1.2

GEN MLTSINE............................................................... 2.188
GEN TRACK ....................... 2.170, 2.171, 2.174, 2.191, 2.202
....................................................... 2.207, 2.248, 2.249, 2.333
GEN1 ............................................................................. 2.148
GEN2 ............................................................................. 2.148
General Instructions for Use............................................. 2.29
Generating a
sweep list ................................................................. 2.303
Generation of a sweep list.............................................. 2.303
Generation of an
sweep list ................................................................. 2.175
Generator
analog ...................................................................... 2.139
channels .................................................................... 2.66
common parameters .................................................. 2.86
configuration .............................................................. 2.66
frequency offset ......................................................... 2.86
functions .................................................................... 2.85
instuments ................................................................. 2.65
settings ...................................................................... 2.17
signal functions .......................................................... 2.85
sweeps ...................................................................... 2.91
GENERATOR .................................................................. 2.64
Generator source impedance ........................................... 2.66
Generator sweep
linear step size ........................................................... 2.96
Generator tracking
fundamental THD ..................................................... 2.202
linearity measurement .............................................. 2.268
Notch filter frequency ............................................... 2.174
GENTRACK
RMS measurement speed........................................ 2.185
RMS measuring speed............................................. 2.180
Gibb’s phenomenon ....................................................... 2.196
GRAPH ..................................................................... 2.3, 2.32
Graphic Display
Colour Selection....................................................... 2.395
Graphic window................................................................ 2.31
Graphical data presentation ........................................... 2.327
Graphical display
MOD DIST measurement......................................... 2.213
THD measurement................................................... 2.202
GROUND
analyzer ................................................................... 2.148
Group delay.................................................................... 2.144
GROUP DELAY ........................................2.331, 2.344, 2.347
Group of scans............................................................... 2.326
Group of traces ....................................................2.303, 2.330
group-delay measurement.............................................. 2.233

H
H COPY key............................................................ 2.5, 2.371
HAMMING............................................................2.222, 2.245
Handshake ..................................................................... 2.392
HANN...................................................................2.222, 2.245
Hard copy....................................................................... 2.371
Hard copy of screen ........................................................... 2.5
Hardcopy
PCX Images............................................................. 2.298
hardware options............................................................ 2.401
HARM ............................................................................ 2.343
Harmonics ...................................................................... 2.200
HCOPY key.................................................................... 2.298
Header ............................................................................... 3.7
Headphone/Speaker output............................................ 2.260
Headphones................................................................... 2.260
help .................................................................................. 2.15

G
Gain factor...................................................................... 2.174
for notch filters.......................................................... 2.174
MULTISINE .............................................................. 2.104
GAUSS........................................................................... 2.122
Gaussian distribution ........................................................2.86
GEN CLK...................................................... 2.72, 2.74, 2.155
GEN CROSSED ............................................................. 2.148
GEN key ...........................................................................2.64
GEN key .............................................................................2.3

1078.2008.02

I.6

E-10

UPL

Index

Help ..................................................................................2.15
functions.....................................................................2.55
texts ...........................................................................2.55
Help during entry ..............................................................2.36
Help for graphics softkeys ................................................2.55
Help functions................................................................. 2.393
HELP key ...........................................................................2.7
HEX................................................................................ 2.354
Hex display of measurement results .................................2.58
High level time for SINE BURST..................................... 2.108
HIGH PASS.................................................................... 2.286
Highpass filter................................................................. 2.286
Histogram
DFD.......................................................................... 2.215
MODDIST................................................................. 2.213
THD.......................................................................... 2.199
HLINE.................................................................. 2.340, 2.341
HOLD ....................................................... 2.330, 2.333, 2.344
Hold time ........................................................................ 2.254
HPGL data...................................................................... 2.372

Input interface ................................................................ 2.154
INPUT JITTER ............................................................... 2.262
input peak value ............................................................. 2.235
Input unit (IEC/IEEE-bus) ................................................. 3.18
INPUT/PHAS ................................................................. 2.235
PHASE .................................................................... 2.235
INPUT? - Press SHOW I/O .............................................. 2.53
Installation
hardware options ......................................................... 1.5
MS-DOS operating system........................................... 1.8
software options........................................................... 1.5
UPL operating and measurement software .................. 1.8
UPL software ............................................................... 1.8
Installation der UPL-Bedien- und Meßsoftware .................. 1.9
Instructions for Use, General............................................ 2.29
Instrument
change ....................................................................... 2.33
Instrument model (IEC/IEEE-bus) .................................... 3.18
Instrument status, loading and storing............................ 2.296
Integration effect ............................................................ 2.198
Integration time .............................................................. 2.181
Interchannel delay .......................................................... 2.220
Interface functions.......................................................... 3.294
Interface message
DCL ........................................................................... 3.18
GET ........................................................................... 3.19
LLO.............................................................................. 3.5
Interface messages ........................................................ 3.295
Interfaces
COM1, COM2 .......................................................... 2.408
RS-232..................................................................... 2.408
Interference level
measurement results.................................................. 2.59
units ........................................................................... 2.59
Interfering
frequency ................................................................. 2.112
signal ....................................................................... 2.111
sinewave signal........................................................ 2.212
Intermodulation
components ............................................................. 2.214
Intermodulation measurement
DFD ......................................................................... 2.214
MOD DIST ............................................................... 2.212
Intermodulation product.................................................. 2.212
INTERN.......................................................................... 2.154
INTERN ONLY ............................................................... 2.394
Internal
signal connection analyzer - generator..................... 2.148
Internal signal paths ....................................................... 2.151
Interpol ........................................................................... 2.233
Interpolated maximum .................................................... 2.343
Interpolated values ......................................................... 2.337
Interpolation steps.......................................................... 2.233
Interpolation to a common X Axis ................................... 2.325
Interpretation file for channel status data........................ 2.354
Interpretation file for user data........................................ 2.355
Interpretation mode ........................................................ 2.354
INTERVAL ........ 2.90, 2.95, 2.105, 2.108, 2.110, 2.123, 2.126
Interval for SINE BURST
monitoring interval.................................................... 2.196
Monitoring interval for peak value detection ............. 2.197
interval length................................................................... 2.90
Interval time .......................................................... 2.95, 2.197
Interval time ..................................................................... 2.95
Introduction
operation UPL ............................................................ 2.15
INTV FILE ........................................................................ 2.98
Intv Time ........................................................................ 2.197
Invert1/n ......................................................................... 2.306
IST flag ............................................................................ 3.29

I
IEC 118 .......................................................................... 2.115
IEC 268 .......................................................................... 2.115
IEC 386 standard W&F................................................... 2.217
IEC 61937 ...................................................................... 2.134
IEC Adr........................................................................... 2.379
IEC BUS .............................................................. 2.379, 2.390
IEC TUNER .................................................................... 2.208
IEC/IEEE bus
address ........................................................................3.4
connection................................................................ 2.408
interface ................................................................... 3.293
functions............................................................. 3.294
messages........................................................... 3.295
IEC/IEEE-bus
address .................................................................... 2.390
IEC/IEEE-bus control...................................................... 3.345
IEC/IEEE-bus interface................................................... 2.390
IMAX A ........................................................................... 2.343
IMAX B ........................................................................... 2.343
Impedance
analyzer.................................................................... 2.148
Implementing the FFT..................................................... 2.227
Info Disp ......................................................................... 2.300
Info Text ......................................................................... 2.300
INP RMS CH1 ................................................................ 2.330
INP RMS CH2 ................................................................ 2.330
Input .................................................................... 2.148, 2.154
analyzer.................................................................... 2.148
channels................................................................... 2.146
generator....................................................................2.66
impedance................................................................ 2.148
INPUT Ch1 ..................................................................... 2.262
INPUT Ch1&2................................................................. 2.262
INPUT Ch2 ..................................................................... 2.262
INPUT COMMON ........................................................... 2.262
Input connectors of analyzers
analog ..........................................................................2.9
digital............................................................................2.9
INPUT DISP ................................................................... 2.235
DIGital INPut AMPlitude ........................................... 2.236
PEAK ....................................................................... 2.236
PHASE ..................................................................... 2.235
PHASe TO REF ....................................................... 2.236
RMS ......................................................................... 2.236
Input during a measurement, data output..........................2.39

1078.2008.02

I.7

E-10

Index

UPL

J

Level measurement
DC ........................................................................... 2.198
PEAK ....................................................................... 2.196
QUASI-PEAK........................................................... 2.196
RMS......................................................................... 2.178
RMS SELECT .......................................................... 2.184
LEVEL NOISE................................................................ 2.205
LEVEL THDN ................................................................. 2.205
Level units........................................................................ 2.58
LFE 448 kb/s.................................................................. 2.135
LIM LOW&UP ................................................................ 2.350
LIM LOWER................................................................... 2.389
Lim Lower ...................................................................... 2.350
LIM LOWER.........................................................2.304, 2.350
LIM REPORT ................................................................. 2.389
Lim Upper....................................................................... 2.350
LIM UPPER...............................................2.304, 2.350, 2.389
Limit
check ................... 2.318, 2.319, 2.337, 3.349, 2.350, 3.19
curve........................................................................ 2.350
over/underrange....................................................... 2.317
violation.................................................................... 2.318
Limit curve
printing ..................................................................... 2.389
storing ...................................................................... 2.304
value ........................................................................ 2.326
Limit curve...................................................................... 2.350
Limit exceeded ............................................................... 2.350
Limit exceeded, printout ................................................. 2.389
Limit files
editing ...................................................................... 2.312
generated from trace file .......................................... 2.314
generation by means of application program............ 2.317
header...................................................................... 2.312
measured values...................................................... 2.312
Limit frequency of analyzer instruments ......................... 2.143
Limit frequency/cutoff frequency
FFT frequency measurement ................................... 2.237
Limit report list................................................................ 2.317
Limit value...................................................................... 2.351
LIN ................................................................................. 2.348
LIN POINTS
Analysator................................................................ 2.189
generator ................................................................... 2.96
LIN Spacing ................................................................... 2.335
LIN STEPS..................................................................... 2.189
generator ................................................................... 2.96
Line ................................................................................ 2.398
Line Count...................................................................... 2.253
Line diagram .................................................................. 2.327
Linear step size
generator sweep ........................................................ 2.96
Linearity Measurements ................................................. 2.268
List sweep ........................................................................ 2.91
buffers........................................................................ 2.91
generator .......................................................... 2.91, 2.93
storing ...................................................................... 2.303
LLO .................................................................................... 3.5
LOAD INSTRUMENT ..................................................... 2.296
Loading
and Storing .............................................................. 2.294
files .......................................................................... 2.294
instrument setups..................................................... 2.296
Loading of setups........................................................... 2.299
Loading the default setup ................................................. 2.15
LOCAL ............................................................................... 2.7
Local timecode and CRC.................................................. 2.79
lock error ........................................................................ 2.365
LOG ............................................................................... 2.348
LOG POINTS
analyzer ................................................................... 2.189

JIS standard W&F .......................................................... 2.217
JITTER .................................................................. 2.71, 2.138
Jitter Freq ....................................................................... 2.140
Jitter Peak Ampl ............................................................. 2.140
Jitter Ref ......................................................................... 2.155
JITTER/PHAS ....................................................... 2.71, 2.153

K
KAISER .......................................................................... 2.222
KEEP.............................................................................. 2.341
Key
[LOCAL]
lock ........................................................................3.5
DISPLAY .................................................................. 2.327
FILE ......................................................................... 2.294
GRAPH ......................................................................2.32
H COPY ................................................................... 2.371
OFF LCD.................................................................. 2.394
OPTIONS ................................................................. 2.381
OUTPUT OFF .......................................................... 2.371
SHOW I/O ................................................................ 2.370
STATUS ................................................................... 2.293
STOP CONT ............................................................ 2.370
Key combinations
ALT ............................................................................2.31
Ctrl D........................................................................ 2.394
of external keyboard ............................................ 2.3, 2.32
Keyboard settings........................................................... 2.393
Keys of the front panel............................................... 2.5, 2.31
Keys, front panel
ANLR........................................................................ 2.278
GEN ...........................................................................2.64
TAB ...................................................... 2.64, 2.142, 2.278
Keyword
form..............................................................................3.8
Keywords of the protocol file........................................... 2.354

L
L 448 kb/s....................................................................... 2.135
LANDSCAPE.................................................................. 2.376
Language........................................................................ 2.393
Language of help texts ................................................... 2.393
LCD ....................................................................................2.7
Contrast.................................................................... 2.394
LED
REM .............................................................................3.4
Left ................................................................................. 2.336
Left Mrgn ........................................................................ 2.375
LEFT/BOTTOM .............................................................. 2.348
Legend of graphic symbols .................................................2.1
LEV all di ........................................................................ 2.200
LEV even di .................................................................... 2.200
LEV odd di...................................................................... 2.200
LEV SEL di ..................................................................... 2.200
LEV TRG CH1 ................................................................ 2.161
LEV TRG CH2 ................................................................ 2.161
Level
ratio .......................................................................... 2.113
Level control monitor output............................................ 2.260
Level entry
Coded Audio............................................................. 2.137

1078.2008.02

I.8

E-10

UPL

Index

generator....................................................................2.96
LOG Spacing .................................................................. 2.335
LOG STEPS
analyzer.................................................................... 2.189
generator....................................................................2.96
Logarithmic step size
generator sweep.........................................................2.96
RMS sel. sweep ....................................................... 2.189
LONG CABLE...................................................................2.72
Long form (command).........................................................3.8
Loudspeaker................................................................... 2.260
Loudspeaker Measurements........................................... 2.246
Low Dist................................................................. 2.99, 2.399
low frequency enhancement ........................................... 2.135
Low Level ....................................................................... 2.107
Low level time for SINE BURST ..................................... 2.107
LOW PASS..................................................................... 2.286
Low-distortion generator ................................................. 2.109
Low-distortion generator ................................................. 2.203
Lower case (command) ....................................................3.37
Lower Freq ..................................................................... 2.121
LOWER FREQ ............................................................... 2.112
Lower frequency limit...................................................... 2.153
Lower frequency range limit............................................ 2.146
LOWER\: ........................................................................ 2.149
Lowpass filter ................................................................. 2.286
LPT1............................................................................... 2.379
LS 448 kb/s .................................................................... 2.135

Measured value resolution .................................... 2.45, 2.176
Measurement
range selection......................................................... 2.149
Measurement Display
ON/OFF ................................................................... 2.394
Readin Rate ............................................................. 2.395
Reading Resolution.................................................. 2.395
Measurement function
reference values ...................................................... 2.169
Measurement range ....................................................... 2.150
Measurement range limit
analyzer instruments ................................................ 2.143
lower ........................................................................ 2.146
upper........................................................................ 2.143
Measurement rate ................................................2.179, 2.185
Measurement results, display window .............................. 2.40
Measurement time................................................2.253, 2.257
Measurement valid/invalid ................................................ 2.39
Measurement, input during............................................... 2.39
Measurements ............................................................... 2.358
Measuring ...................................................................... 2.299
Measuring time.....................................................2.179, 2.185
Measuring time FFT ....................................................... 2.227
Memory expansion ...................................................... 4.4, 4.5
Messages on operating state ........................................... 2.51
Meßzeit .......................................................................... 2.257
Min Freq...............................................................2.146, 2.153
Min VOLT....................................................................... 2.163
Minimum value of resulution during settling ...................... 2.45
Minimum voltage ............................................................ 2.163
Mod Depth ..................................................................... 2.132
MOD DIST
analyzer .........................................................2.165, 2.212
generator ................................................................. 2.111
Generator................................................................... 2.85
Mod Freq............................... 2.89, 2.105, 2.123, 2.126, 2.132
MODDIST signal
measuring on ........................................................... 2.180
Mode ................................... 2.115, 2.298, 2.299, 2.330, 2.350
LOCAL ......................................................................... 3.4
REMOTE ..................................................................... 3.4
Modulation
factor analysis.......................................................... 2.109
MODULATION ...................................................... 2.85, 2.132
modulation deviation
AM ........................................................2.89, 2.105, 2.123
Modulation deviation
AM ........................................................................... 2.126
Modulation distortion ........................................................ 2.85
measurement ........................................................... 2.212
modulation frequency
AM .................................................................. 2.89, 2.139
Modulation frequency
AM ........................................................................... 2.126
FM ........................................................................... 2.132
MODULATION function.................................................... 2.89
Modulationshub
AM ........................................................................... 2.126
FM ........................................................................... 2.132
Monitor output ................................................................ 2.261
MORE ............................................................................ 2.341
mouse
scrolling in the panel .................................................. 2.32
mouse .............................................................................. 2.36

M
Mainlobe......................................................................... 2.222
MANU LIST
Generator-Sweep .......................................................2.93
MANU LIST .................................................................... 2.188
MANU SWEEP
analyzer.................................................................... 2.188
Generator-Sweep .......................................................2.93
MANUAL .................................................. 2.335, 2.348, 2.397
Manual control ....................................................................3.5
Manual Operation ...............................................................2.1
Manual sweeps
generator....................................................................2.93
operation .................................................................. 2.360
MARKER .................................................. 2.341, 2.342, 2.343
Marks comment lines...................................................... 2.322
MAX ...............................................2.332, 2.334, 2.345, 2.347
Max hold......................................................................... 2.254
Max Hold ........................................................................ 2.257
MAX HOLD..................................................................... 2.328
Max Volt .................................................................. 2.67, 2.75
Maximum of measurement series ................................... 2.343
Maximum peak value...................................................... 2.165
Maximum values bargraph.............................................. 2.349
MD5-Signaturverfahren (RS232)..................................... 3.364
MEAN FREQ ....................................................... 2.115, 2.121
MEAS CH1 ............................................... 2.170, 2.171, 2.333
MEAS CH2 ............................................... 2.170, 2.171, 2.333
Meas Disp ...................................................................... 2.394
Meas Mode..........................2.153, 2.196, 2.200, 2.205, 2.215
Meas time................................................. 2.238, 2.248, 2.253
Meas Time..... 2.179, 2.180, 2.185, 2.198, 2.206, 2.224, 2.257
RMS measurement................................................... 2.179
RMS SELECT measurement .................................... 2.185
Measured value
buffer........................................................................ 2.160
stabilization.................................... 2.41, 2.47, 2.1772.177
Measured value and status displays ............................... 2.394

1078.2008.02

Mouse
connection of ........................................................... 2.408
numeric entry ............................................................. 2.35
mouse functions ..........................................2.64, 2.142, 2.278
Mouse Operation.............................................................. 2.29
Multichannel ................................................................... 2.135
Multisine

I.9

E-10

Index
dialog window........................................................... 2.103
MULTISINE ........................................................... 2.85, 2.101

N
NAB................................................................................ 2.217
NAB standard W&F ........................................................ 2.217
NARROW ....................................................................... 2.206
Next step ..........................................................................2.94
NEXTHARM ................................................................... 2.343
No of sine ....................................................................... 2.103
Noise
distribution................................................................ 2.122
spacings ................................................................... 2.117
suppression (THD) ................................................... 2.199
weighting (THD+N/SINAD) ....................................... 2.203
Noise .............................................................................. 2.117
NOISE ............................................................................ 2.205
Noise component..............................................................2.86
Nominal AC supply voltage.................................................1.1
NONE ...............................................................................2.78
NORMAL ........................................2.182, 2.193, 2.223, 2.250
Normalize ....................................................................... 2.334
Normalized frequency response...................................... 2.305
Normfreq......................................................................... 2.305
NOT EQUAL A ............................................................... 2.332
Notch .............................................................................. 2.289
analog filter............................................................... 2.174
characteristic ............................................................ 2.174
freq........................................................................... 2.174
gain .......................................................................... 2.174
Notch (Gain) ........................2.174, 2.182, 2.194, 2.197, 2.221
NOTCH FLT ................................................................... 2.289
Notch Freq...................................................................... 2.174
Note on delay ...................................................................2.47
NTRansition register .........................................................3.26
number of thirds.............................................................. 2.253
Numeric values (command) ..............................................3.13

O
o CURSOR .....................................2.332, 2.334, 2.342, 2.345
o TO * ............................................................................. 2.340
Octave ............................................................................ 2.290
Octave ............................................................................ 2.290
Octave filter .................................................................... 2.290
Octave Filter ................................................................... 2.290
OCTAVE FLT ................................................................. 2.290
OFF LCD key.................................................................. 2.394
ON TIME ........... 2.90, 2.95, 2.105, 2.108, 2.110, 2.123, 2.126
one-dimensional sweep ....................................................2.95
ONTIM FILE .....................................................................2.98
Opening the instrument.......................................................4.7
Operating mode (IEC/IEEE)
LOCAL ..................................................................... 3.358
REMOTE.................................................................. 3.358
Operating states of sweep system.................................. 2.363
Operating system level ................................................... 2.294
OPERATION ............................................ 2.327, 2.328, 2.352
OPTICAL ........................................................................ 2.154
OPTIMIZED......................................................... 2.102, 2.120
Optimizing
Frequency Response ............................................... 2.277
measurement speed ................................................. 2.272
settling parameters .....................................................2.49

1078.2008.02

UPL
Option
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL B10) ............... 3.337
Options
enabling ................................................................ 1.5, 1.7
OPTIONS key .................................................................... 2.5
Order of a Filter .............................................................. 2.286
Orientation ..................................................................... 2.376
OTHER TRACE ............................................................. 2.333
Output .............................................................2.7, 2.66, 2.139
Impedance ................................................................. 2.66
power......................................................................... 2.70
Output BAL ...................................................................... 2.69
output clock rate............................................................... 2.73
Output clock rate ............................................................ 2.157
Output impedance .......................................................... 2.139
Output of block data (B10) ............................................. 3.342
Output of commands
Output of commands................................................ 3.341
Output of commands (B10) ............................................ 3.341
OUTPUT OFF key.......................................................... 2.371
output UNBAL .................................................................. 2.68
output voltage
bal.............................................................................. 2.75
unbal .......................................................................... 2.75
Output voltage
limit value.......................................................... 2.67, 2.75
limitation..................................................................... 2.75
Overlapping execution...................................................... 3.19
OVERlay/Max Hold ........................................................ 2.330
Overloading DC measurement ....................................... 2.198
Overshoots..................................................................... 2.196
Overview of measurement and sweep systems.............. 2.358

P
PAGE............................................................................... 2.13
Pair of traces.................................. 2.303, 2.325, 2.330, 2.332
Panel......................................................2.31, 2.39, 2.79, 2.81
ANALYZER.............................................................. 2.142
DISPLAY.............................................2.327, 2.330, 2.347
FILE ......................................................................... 2.294
FILTER .................................................................... 2.278
OPTIONS................................................................. 2.390
scrolling...................................................................... 2.32
STATUS................................................................... 2.293
Panel.............................................................................. 2.327
PANEL ............................................................................. 2.81
PANEL + AES 3 .................................................... 2.79, 2.819
PANEL + CRC ........................................................ 2.79, 2.81
PANEL OFF ..................................................................... 2.78
Panel selection................................................................. 2.31
Panelfile ........................................................................... 2.83
Panels
changing ........................................................... 2.29, 2.30
changing between ...................................................... 2.31
changing using the keyboard ..................................... 2.31
changing using the mouse ......................................... 2.31
position on the screen ................................................ 2.32
Paper Size...................................................................... 2.379
Parallel poll ...................................................................... 3.34
Param. Link .................................................................... 2.403
Parameter (command)...................................................... 3.13
Parameter Link..............................................2.33, 2.34, 2.403
Parameters
changing .................................................................... 2.34
display panel ..................................................2.330, 2.347
list display ................................................................ 2.344
selection..................................................................... 2.34

I.10

E-10

UPL
Parity ................................................................... 2.391, 2.409
Parser...............................................................................3.19
Partial setup, loading and storing.................................... 2.296
Part-screen graphics....................................................... 2.357
Passb Low...................................................................... 2.287
Passb Upp...................................................................... 2.287
Passband ....................................................................... 2.286
Password protection ....................................................... 2.402
Path..................................................................................2.36
PDF ..............................2.86, 2.99, 2.111, 2.114, 2.122, 2.128
PEAK.............................................................................. 2.235
PEAK & S/N ................................................................... 2.165
PEAK measurement ....................................................... 2.196
Peak value detector............................................. 2.165, 2.196
Peak weighting ............................................................... 2.196
Peak-to-peak amplitude
MOD DIST................................................................ 2.113
MULTISINE .............................................................. 2.104
POLARITY ............................................................... 2.127
SINE................................................... 2.100, 2.139, 2.140
SINE BURST............................................................ 2.107
SINE2 BURST.......................................................... 2.109
Periodic tracings of measured values ............................. 2.160
PERMANENT ................................................................. 2.263
Permissible range of values..............................................2.36
Phas Ch2
1 ............................................................................... 2.130
Phas Settl ............................................................ 2.175, 2.242
PHAS TO REF................................................................ 2.235
Phase
digital..........................................................................2.71
frame (jitter) .............................................................. 2.235
measurement results ..................................................2.59
optimization .............................................................. 2.117
position sine voltage with MULTISINE...................... 2.101
reference value......................................................... 2.172
units ...........................................................................2.59
PHASE ..................................................... 2.330, 2.344, 2.347
Frame Phase............................................................ 2.235
Phase difference............................................................. 2.240
phase measurement ....................................................... 2.144
Phase No (i).................................................................... 2.103
Phase Reference value .................................................. 2.172
PHASE TO REF ............................................................. 2.166
PhaseToRef.................................................................... 2.400
Phone ............................................................................. 2.263
Phone Out ...................................................................... 2.177
PINK............................................................................... 2.118
Pink noise....................................................................... 2.118
Plot on ............................................................................ 2.379
Plots/Page ...................................................................... 2.380
PLOTTR/HPGL............................................................... 2.372
Points
analyzer......................................................... 2.163, 2.190
generator....................................................................2.97
Polarity
measurement ........................................................... 2.219
Polarity measurement.................................................2.85
test ........................................................................... 2.127
Test .......................................................................... 2.219
POLARITY........................................................................2.85
analizer..................................................................... 2.127
generator.................................................................. 2.165
Polarity reversal.............................................................. 2.219
Polarity Test ................................................................... 2.219
Poles .............................................................................. 2.292
PORTRAIT ..................................................................... 2.376
Post FFT......................................................................... 2.183
POST FFT ........................................................... 2.173, 2.209
Post FFT RMS measurement ......................................... 2.183
Post-FFT ........................................................................ 2.218
Potential reference.......................................................... 2.149

1078.2008.02

Index
Power supply ..................................................................... 1.1
PPE (parallel poll enable register) .................................... 3.29
Pre Gain...............................................................2.177, 2.263
PRECISION ................................................................... 2.238
analyzer ................................... 2.201, 2.205, 2.213, 2.215
Precision of frequency measurement ............................. 2.238
Preparation for use (RS232)........................................... 3.357
Print
format....................................................................... 2.376
Printer
output....................................................................... 2.389
PRINTER ....................................................................... 2.371
Printing traces and lists .................................................. 2.389
Printname....................................................................... 2.373
Printout........................................................................... 2.376
PRINTR/HPGL ............................................................... 2.372
PRINTR/PS.................................................................... 2.372
Prn Hight ........................................................................ 2.379
Prn Resol ....................................................................... 2.376
Prn Width ....................................................................... 2.379
Program example
Readout of results in R&S BASIC ............................ 3.360
Program examples
Readout of Measurement results (B-10)................... 3.340
Readout of measurement results in Borland-C 3.0 ... 3.361
Result readout in QuickBASIC ................................. 3.359
Programming examples.................................................. 3.300
Programming model
UPL analyzer ............................................................. 3.17
UPL generator............................................................ 3.16
Prolog for HPGL............................................................. 2.294
PROTO AUTO ............................................................... 2.352
Proto File..............................................................2.354, 2.355
protocol ............................................................................ 2.78
PROTOCOL ..................................... 2.78, 2.165, 2.328, 2.352
PROTOCOL analysis ..................................................... 2.352
PTRansition register......................................................... 3.25
Pulse duration SINE2 BURST ........................................ 2.110
Pulse spectrum .............................................................. 2.222

Q
Q PK & S/N .................................................................... 2.165
Quantising noise measurement ...................................... 2.175
Quasi-PEAK measurement ............................................ 2.196
Quasi-peak weighting..................................................... 2.191
Query
form ............................................................................. 3.7
response .................................................................... 3.11
Question mark.................................................................. 3.15

I.11

E-10

Index

R
R 448 kb/s ...................................................................... 2.135
Rackmounting.....................................................................1.1
RAM drive................................................................ 1.7, 2.134
RANDOM .........................................................................2.85
Range............................................................................. 2.149
overranges .................................................................2.51
rated value .................................................... 2.149, 2.150
spacing..................................................................... 2.150
unterranges ................................................................2.51
Ranges ........................................................................... 2.150
READ ONLY................................................................... 2.300
Read Rate ...................................................................... 2.395
Read Resol..................................................................... 2.395
READ.ME ...........................................................................1.9
READ/WRITE ................................................................. 2.300
Reading in responses (B10) ........................................... 3.341
Reading out block data (B10) ......................................... 3.342
Readout of measurement results
in Borland-C 3.0 ....................................................... 3.361
in R&S BASIC .......................................................... 3.360
Univ. Sequence Controller UPL-B10......................... 3.340
Readout of Measurement Results
in QuickBASIC ......................................................... 3.359
REAL .............................................................................. 2.305
Rear view ................................................................ 2.10, 2.11
RECTANGLE....................................................................2.86
RECTANGULAR.................................................... 2.222, 2.245
Ref Freq ...........................................................................2.67
Analysator ................................................................ 2.243
analyzer.............................................. 2.171, 2.239, 2.241
Ref Frq .............................................................................2.75
REF GEN .........................................................................2.74
Ref Imped ....................................................................... 2.146
REF IN.......................................................... 2.72, 2.74, 2.156
Ref Out
Data ...........................................................................2.74
Source........................................................................2.74
Ref Phase............................................................ 2.172, 2.242
Ref Volt......................................................... 2.68, 2.76, 2.232
Reference ...... 2.169, 2.170, 2.181, 2.186, 2.197, 2.198, 2.201
...................... 2.206, 2.220, 2.236, 2.248, 2.254, 2.258, 2.332
................................................................. 2.333, 2.345, 2.347
impedance................................................................ 2.146
point DC measurement............................................. 2.198
trace was stored in the file........................................ 2.333
traces ....................................................................... 2.332
traces ............................................................ 2.302, 2.324
value depend............................................................ 2.335
variable..................................................................... 2.302
Reference measurement potential .................................. 2.149
Reference value
storage on key stroke ............................................... 2.172
Reference values
floating...................................................................... 2.268
group-delay measurement ........................................ 2.172
phase measurement ................................................. 2.172
Rejection ........................................................................ 2.206
Release control............................................................... 3.345
Remote control ...................................................................3.1
Remote control via RS-232 interface .............................. 3.357
Remote via ..................................................................... 2.390
Rep delay ....................................................................... 2.393
Rep rate.......................................................................... 2.393
Repetition delay.............................................................. 2.393
Repetition rate ................................................................ 2.393
Repetitive triggering........................................................ 2.393
Replace
the SETUP battery .......................................................4.8
Resolution
FFT .................... 2.173, 2.210, 2.218, 2.224, 2.227, 2.245

1078.2008.02

UPL
Settling............................................................ 2.50, 2.176
Resolution value............................................................... 2.50
Restart
of a measurement .................................................... 2.359
of sweep .................................................................. 2.160
of the last valid setting ............................................... 2.53
of the UPL.................................................................. 2.54
of the UPL with default setting ................................... 2.54
retry................................................................................ 2.410
Return to manual operation (RS-232)............................. 3.358
RIFE-VINC 1 ........................................................2.222, 2.245
RIFE-VINC 2 ........................................................2.222, 2.245
RIFE-VINC 3 ........................................................2.222, 2.245
Right .............................................................................. 2.336
RIGHT/TOP ................................................................... 2.348
Ripple............................................................................. 2.287
RISING........................................................................... 2.232
RMS.....................................................................2.178, 2.235
RMS & S/N..................................................................... 2.165
RMS S/N ........................................................................ 2.178
RMS SELECT ......................................................2.165, 2.184
RMS value incl. S/N ....................................................... 2.178
rollkey .............................................................................. 2.53
Rotary knob........................................................................ 2.7
Rounding noise .............................................................. 2.227
RS- 232 interface ........................................................... 2.390
RS 448 kb/s ................................................................... 2.135
RS-232 (COM1, COM2) ................................................. 2.408
RS-232 interface
Differences to the IEC/IEEE bus .............................. 3.364
First steps (readout of measurement results) ........... 3.358
Preparation for use................................................... 3.357
Return to manual operation ...................................... 3.358
RS-232 Interface
Switchover to Remote Control.................................. 3.358
RTS/CTS........................................................................ 2.392
RUB & BUZZ.................................................................. 2.165
Rub & Buzz Measurements ............................................ 2.246
Rub&Buzz ...................................................................... 2.278
RUMBLE UNW............................................................... 2.208
RUMBLE WTD ............................................................... 2.208

S
S/N measurement .......................................................... 2.167
S/N Sequ...................................................2.167, 2.178, 2.196
Sample.................................................................... 2.42, 2.50
Sample frequency
maximum ................................................................. 2.157
Sample Frequency
analyzer ................................................................... 2.157
generator ................................................................... 2.73
Sample Frq
Analyzer................................................................... 2.157
Generator................................................................... 2.73
Sample Mode ................................................................. 2.405
Sample rate
filter.......................................................................... 2.291
Samples ......................................................................... 2.175
Sampling Frequency
Measurement ........................................................... 2.243
Scale....................................................................2.335, 2.348
Scale B .......................................................................... 2.332
Scan conf ....................................................................... 2.397
Scan Count .................................................................... 2.329
Scan count =1 ................................................................ 2.324
Scan count >1 ................................................................ 2.325
Scan index ..................................................................... 2.337

I.12

E-10

UPL
Scan index............................................................... 2.7, 2.325
Scannr ............................................................................ 2.397
SCPI
introduction...................................................................3.7
keywords ......................................................................3.8
SCREEN ........................................................................ 2.373
Screen copies
plotting...................................................................... 2.381
printing ..................................................................... 2.381
storing ...................................................................... 2.381
Scrolling in the panel ........................................................2.32
SELECT .................................................................... 2.5, 2.16
SELECT ...........................................................................2.34
SELECT di...................................................................... 2.200
Selection
commands..................................................................2.83
file ..............................................................................2.37
of a Parameter............................................................2.34
Selection of analyzer ...................................................... 2.142
Selection of function
brief introduction.........................................................2.14
Selection of generator.......................................................2.65
Selective rms measurement ........................................... 2.165
Selective rms value ........................................................ 2.184
SELECTP ....................................................................... 2.379
Selftest ...............................................................................1.3
Semicolon.........................................................................3.15
Sequence Control (opt. UPL B10)................................... 3.337
Sequence of operation in the panels........................ 2.29, 2.30
Serial poll..........................................................................3.34
Series of data ................................................................. 2.302
Series of measured values ............................................. 2.324
Service functions ............................................................ 2.401
Service request.................................................................3.33
SET TO .......................................................................... 2.340
SETREF .............................................................. 2.341, 2.343
Setting and displaying auxiliary....................................... 2.390
Setting parameters ...........................................................2.13
Setting the Display Parameters ........................................2.18
Setting, switching off the displays ................................... 2.394
Settling ................................................................ 2.164, 2.175
delay with external sweep
control ..................................................................2.45
resolution .............................................................2.45
introduction.................................................................2.41
optimizing the parameters...........................................2.48
process
measurement run with external sweep .................2.47
Settling .............................................................................2.41
SETTLING
check..........................................................................2.48
Settling by arithmetic averaging ........................................2.42
Settling condition ..............................................................2.42
Settling delay with external sweep....................................2.50
Settling parameter
optimizing ...................................................................2.49
Settling parameters...........................................................2.42
settling process
combination ................................................................2.41
Settling process .............................................................. 2.175
possible combinations ................................................2.41
Settling process ................................................................2.41
Settling time
filter .......................................................................... 2.284
Settling tolerance..............................................................2.42
SETUP .................................................................... 1.3, 2.298
Shape ............................................................................. 2.118
Shape file ....................................................................... 2.119
Shielded cables .............................................................. 2.408
Short circuit
generator output .........................................................2.70
Short form (command) ........................................................3.8

1078.2008.02

Index
Short name of filters ....................................................... 2.284
Shortname...................................................................... 2.285
SHOW I/O ............................................................... 2.5, 2.370
key ........................................................................... 2.370
messages .................................................................. 2.53
SHOW I/O ........................................................................ 2.40
Signal amplification ........................................................ 2.261
Signal period matching .........................................2.179, 2.185
Signal spectrum ............................................................. 2.222
Signal-to-noise measurement......................................... 2.167
Signaturverfahren MD5 (RS232) .................................... 3.364
Simulation ............................................................2.172, 2.278
Simulation ...................................................................... 2.229
SINAD............................................................................ 2.205
Sine.................................................................................. 2.85
SINE ....................................... 2.85, 2.89, 2.105, 2.122, 2.126
SINE ................................................................................ 2.99
SINE BURST ................................................................... 2.85
Sine burst signal............................................................... 2.85
SINE2 BURST.................................................................. 2.85
SINE2 BURST................................................................ 2.127
SINE2 BURST signal ..................................................... 2.219
Sinewave amplitude
MULTISINE.............................................................. 2.104
SINE ........................................................................ 2.100
SINE BURST ........................................................... 2.107
SINE2 BURST ......................................................... 2.109
Sinewave amplitude SINE ....................................2.139, 2.140
Sinewave frequency
MULTISINE.............................................................. 2.103
SINE BURST ........................................................... 2.106
SINE2 BURST .............. 2.109, 2.110, 2.112, 2.113, 2.115
Sinewave signal ............................................................. 2.138
Single
key ........................................................................... 2.160
SINGLE.............................................................................. 2.5
SINGLE................................................................2.363, 2.364
SINGLE key ................................................................... 2.360
Single measurement ............................................... 2.5, 2.160
Single measurement at fixed intervals ............................ 2.163
Single measurements..................................................... 2.358
Single sine ..................................................................... 2.101
Sinusamplitude SINE ..................................................... 2.130
SLOW ............................................................................ 2.206
SLOW DECAY ............................................................... 2.254
Smoothed display........................................................... 2.233
SMPTE .......................................................................... 2.111
SMPTE measurement procedure ................................... 2.212
Softkey menus ............................................................... 2.337
Softkeys .................................................................... 2.9, 2.35
Softkeys ......................................................................... 2.339
software options ............................................................. 2.401
installing....................................................................... 1.5
Software options
enabling ....................................................................... 1.5
.................................................................................... 1.7
installation.................................................................... 1.5
.................................................................................... 1.7
new installation of ........................................................ 1.5
.................................................................................... 1.7
Software Options
enabling ....................................................................... 1.5
source .............................................................................. 2.66
Source..................................................................2.139, 2.353
Source impedance ................................................ 2.66, 2.139
Source impedance ........................................................... 2.66
Space............................................................................... 3.15
Spacing ...................... 2.96, 2.101, 2.118, 2.189, 2.335, 2.348
Span .............................................................................. 2.224
Span FFT ....................................................................... 2.227
SPC LIM REP ................................................................ 2.327
SPEAKER ................ 2.177, 2.183, 2.194, 2.197, 2.198, 2.202

I.13

E-10

Index
........... 2.213, 2.215, 2.218, 2.225, 2.229, 2.233, 2.251, 2.255
............................................................................ 2.259, 2.262
Speaker off ..................................................................... 2.260
SPECTR LIST ................................................................ 2.327
SPECTRUM ................................................................... 2.328
Spectrum Analysis.......................................................... 2.220
SPEKER......................................................................... 2.219
Spk Volume ......................................................... 2.177, 2.263
Spurious emissions......................................................... 2.408
SRE (service request enable register) ..............................3.28
SRQ (service request) ......................................................3.33
Standard......................................................................... 2.217
STANDARD.................................................................... 2.231
Standard W&F ................................................................ 2.217
Start............... 2.163, 2.173, 2.189, 2.210, 2.218, 2.223, 2.245
generator sweep.........................................................2.96
START................................................................................2.5
START COND ..................................................... 2.159, 2.160
START COND ..................................................................2.39
Start condition................................................................. 2.159
START key ..................................................................... 2.160
START key ............................................... 2.360, 2.363, 2.364
Start of arithmetic averaging .............................................2.42
Start Options ....................................................................1.10
Start/stop limits for triggering .......................................... 2.163
Starting and stopping of measurements or sweeps......... 2.358
State diagram
measurement ........................................................... 2.359
sweep....................................................................... 2.360
STATIC.............................................................................2.78
Status
display ...................................................................... 2.117
Status byte .......................................................................3.28
Status diagram
sweep....................................................................... 2.360
Status display
ANL status..................................................................2.51
GEN ORUN ................................................................2.73
GEN status.................................................................2.51
SWP status ................................................................2.52
Status display .......................................................... 2.51, 2.52
Status displays ............................................................... 2.358
Status information.............................................................2.40
STATUS key.......................................................................2.3
Status operation register...................................................3.30
Status panel .....................................................................2.32
STATUS panel................................................................ 2.293
Status questionable register .............................................3.31
Status register
condition part..............................................................3.25
enable part .................................................................3.26
error queue.................................................................3.35
event part ...................................................................3.26
event status enable register........................................3.29
event status register ...................................................3.29
IST flag.......................................................................3.29
ntransition part............................................................3.26
overview .....................................................................3.27
parallel poll enable register.........................................3.29
ptransition part............................................................3.25
service request enable register...................................3.28
status byte..................................................................3.28
status operation register .............................................3.30
status questionable register........................................3.31
structure .....................................................................3.25
summary bit................................................................3.26
Status reporting system ....................................................3.24
resetting .....................................................................3.36
use .............................................................................3.33
steady readout by settling.................................................2.41
Step
generator....................................................................2.97

1078.2008.02

UPL
RMS sel. sweep ....................................................... 2.190
Step size
linear generator sweep............................................... 2.96
logorithmic generator sweep ...................................... 2.96
STEREO SINE ...................................................... 2.85, 2.128
Stop ...............2.163, 2.173, 2.210, 2.218, 2.224, 2.245, 2.409
generator sweep ........................................................ 2.96
Stop ................................................................................... 2.5
STOP ............................................................................. 2.358
Stop Bits ........................................................................ 2.391
STOP CONT key............................................................ 2.370
STOP key....................................................................... 2.161
STOP/CONT ...................................................................... 2.5
STOP/CONT ........................................................2.363, 2.364
Stopb Low ............................................................2.287, 2.289
Stopb Upp ............................................................2.287, 2.289
Stopband........................................................................ 2.286
STORE........................................... 2.169, 2.171, 2.172, 2.303
STORE CH1.........................................................2.169, 2.171
STORE CH2.........................................................2.169, 2.171
STORE INSTRUMENT .................................................. 2.299
STORE TRACE/LIST ..................................................... 2.303
Store traces and sweep lists .......................................... 2.303
Storing complete instrument setup ................................. 2.299
Storing of setups ............................................................ 2.299
Strings.............................................................................. 3.14
Suffix, numeric ................................................................... 3.8
Sum transfer function ..................................................... 2.229
Summary bit ..................................................................... 3.26
SUPERFAST ................................................................. 2.206
Superimposed sinewave voltages .................................. 2.101
supplementary software
installation.................................................................... 1.6
sweep ............................................................................ 2.399
External.................................................................... 2.361
frequency sweeps.............................................. 2.361
level sweeps ...................................................... 2.361
level trigger ........................................................ 2.361
Time-chart................................................................ 2.361
Time-tick .................................................................. 2.361
Sweep
automatic lists-......................................................... 2.188
direction ..................................................................... 2.96
frequency of selective rms measurement ................. 2.187
lists RMS sel. sweep................................................ 2.191
manual lists.............................................................. 2.188
one-dimensional......................................................... 2.91
steps are skipped....................................................... 2.94
stop.............................................................................. 2.5
two-dimensional ......................................................... 2.91
Sweep ............................................................................ 2.358
Sweep Control.................................................................. 2.93
SWEEP CTRL2.99, 2.106, 2.109, 2.111, 2.115, 2.129, 2.133,
2.136, 2.141, 2.187, 2.188
sweep direction ................................................................ 2.96
SWEEP LIST .......................................................2.327, 2.330
Sweep Mode .............................................2.182, 2.193, 2.250
Sweep parameter
X axis)........................................................................ 2.95
Sweeps
analyzer ................................................................... 2.187
generator ................................................................... 2.91
Switching off....................................................................... 1.4
Switching on....................................................................... 1.3
Switching on the UPL ....................................................... 2.13
Switching sweeps on and off.......................................... 2.362
Switchover to Remote Control (RS232).......................... 3.358
Switchover to UPL user interface ................................... 3.343
SWP CONT RUNNING .................................................. 2.363
SWP INVALID................................................................ 2.363
SWP LIM REP ............................................................... 2.327
SWP MANU RUNNING.................................................. 2.363

I.14

E-10

UPL
SWP OFF ....................................................................... 2.363
SWP SNGL RUNNING ................................................... 2.363
SWP STOPPED ............................................................. 2.363
SWP TERMINATED ....................................................... 2.363
SYNC IN...........................................................................2.72
Sync Mode .......................................................................2.72
Sync Out
Source........................................................................2.74
Type ...........................................................................2.74
SYNC PLL ........................................................................2.74
Sync To
analyzer.................................................................... 2.156
generator....................................................................2.72
SYNC TO ANaLyzer .........................................................2.73
Synchronization (command) .............................................3.21
Syntax elements (command) ............................................3.15
SYSTEM.................................................................. 2.5, 2.412
System files .................................................................... 2.294
SYSTEM key .................................................................. 2.233

T
Test signal
intermodulation measurement ....................... 2.111, 2.114
polarity measurement ............................................... 2.127
Text commands ................................................................2.84
THD................................................................................ 2.165
THD measurement ......................................................... 2.199
THD+N ........................................................................... 2.205
THD+N / SINAD measurement ....................................... 2.208
THD+N/SINAD................................................................ 2.165
THD+N/SINAD measurement ......................................... 2.203
third analysis
lower band limit ........................................................ 2.255
upper band limit ........................................................ 2.255
Third analysis ................................................................. 3.333
Third Analysis ................................................................. 2.252
THIRD OCT .................................................................... 2.118
Third Octave ................................................................... 2.278
Third-octave.................................................................... 2.290
Third-octave Filter........................................................... 2.290
Third-octave noise .......................................................... 2.118
Time .................................................................... 2.117, 2.162
TIME CHART.................................................................. 2.160
Time domain display....................................................... 2.230
TIME TICK...................................................................... 2.160
Timeout ................................................................. 2.50, 2.177
Tolerance ....................................................................... 2.176
Tolerance .........................................................................2.50
Tolerance band.................................................................2.42
TOP................................................................................ 2.335
TOSLINK ........................................................................ 2.154
Total Gain factor ............................................................. 2.104
Total Peak ...................................................................... 2.104
Total RMS ...................................................................... 2.105
TOTAL VOLT....................................................... 2.113, 2.116
TRACE A.................. 2.303, 2.305, 2.330, 2.344, 2.350, 2.389
TRACE A + B ...................................................... 2.350, 2.389
Trace and spectrum display............................................ 2.337
TRACE B.................. 2.303, 2.305, 2.330, 2.344, 2.350, 2.389
Trace data storing........................................................... 2.303
Trace Len ....................................................................... 2.233
Trace length.................................................................... 2.233
Trace length of the signal ............................................... 2.233
Trace printout ................................................................. 2.389
TRACEA......................................................................... 2.341
TRACEB......................................................................... 2.341
Traces ............................................................................ 2.302

1078.2008.02

Index
Traces to be used .......................................................... 2.337
Tracing of measured values
continuous ............................................................... 2.160
due to frequency change.......................................... 2.160
due to voltage change.............................................. 2.160
fixed number ............................................................ 2.163
fixed time interval ..................................................... 2.163
Tracing of measured values at regular intervals ............. 2.160
Transfer function ............................................................ 2.292
Transfer Function ........................................................... 2.244
Transfer of parameters ................................................... 2.403
Triangle ................................................................. 2.86, 2.122
Triangular distribution....................................................... 2.86
Trig Chan ....................................................................... 2.233
Trig Level .............................................................2.183, 2.232
Trig Slope....................................................................... 2.232
Trigger
Waveform ................................................................ 2.230
Trigger............................................................................ 2.159
Trigger condition for tracing measured values ................ 2.159
Trigger event .................................................................. 2.160
trigger source ................................................................. 2.233
TRIGGERED
RMS measurement .................................................. 2.180
True rms measurement ........................................2.165, 2.178
twelfth analysis
lower band limit ........................................................ 2.258
upper band limit ....................................................... 2.259
Twelfth Analysis ............................................................. 2.256
two-dimensional sweep .................................................... 2.95
Two-tone signal to SMPTE............................................. 2.111
Type............................................................................... 2.389

U
UNBAL
Generator........................................................ 2.66, 2.139
UNBAL BNC
analyzer ................................................................... 2.154
Unbal Out......................................................................... 2.71
Unbalanced output ........................................................... 2.68
Unbalanced output (Output UNBAL, BNC) ....................... 2.69
UNDERSAMPLE............................................................ 2.231
Undersampling FFT........................................................ 2.226
UNDO ............................................................................ 2.341
Unit ................2.168, 2.201, 2.206, 2.213, 2.215, 2.218, 2.232
.............................................................................2.245, 2.332
UNIT ....................................................................2.344, 2.347
Unit Ch1 ................... 2.168, 2.181, 2.186, 2.197, 2.198, 2.220
.......................2.236, 2.239, 2.241, 2.243, 2.248, 2.254, 2.258
Unit Ch2 ................... 2.168, 2.181, 2.186, 2.197, 2.198, 2.220
.......................2.236, 2.239, 2.241, 2.243, 2.248, 2.254, 2.258
Unit/Label....................................................................... 2.332
Units
conversion formulas for entry of values................ 2.61
conversion formulas ................................................... 2.57
display of measurement results.................................. 2.57
for measurement results............................................. 2.57
for value inputs........................................................... 2.57
function labelling ...................................................... 2.329
IEC-bus notation ........................................................ 2.59
list of all...................................................................... 2.57
measurement result output....................................... 2.168
of measurement results............................................ 2.168
output of measurement result................................... 2.239
result display............................................................ 2.241
Universal Sequence Controller

I.15

E-10

Index
Switchover to UPL.................................................... 3.343
Universal Sequence Controller (UPL B10) ...................... 3.337
Universal Sequence Controller UPL-B10 ........................ 3.337
Differences to IEC/IEEE-bus Control ........................ 3.341
First steps (readout of measurement results)............ 3.340
Output of block data ................................................. 3.342
Reading in responses............................................... 3.341
Reading out Block data ............................................ 3.342
UNZOOM ....................................................................... 2.341
UPL IEC adr ................................................................... 2.390
UPL software
command line options.................................................1.11
command line parameters at power-up.......................1.13
integration of programs...............................................1.10
restarting ....................................................................1.10
UPL-B1........................................................................... 2.401
UPL-B10.................................................................. 1.5, 2.401
UPL-B10 Universal sequence controller ......................... 3.337
UPL-B2........................................................................... 2.401
UPL-B21......................................................... 1.5, 2.78, 2.401
UPL-B22.................................................................. 1.5, 2.401
UPL-B23....................................... 1.5, 1.7, 2.85, 2.134, 2.401
UPL-B29......................................................................... 2.401
UPL-B33.................................................................. 1.5, 2.401
UPL-B4.................................................................... 1.5, 2.401
UPL-B5........................................................................... 2.401
UPL-B6.................................................................... 1.5, 2.401
UPL-B8.................................................................... 1.5, 2.401
UPL-B9.................................................................... 1.5, 2.401
UPLCFG...........................................................................1.13
Upper case (command) ....................................................3.37
Upper Freq ..................................................................... 2.121
UPPER FREQ ................................................................ 2.112
Useful signal ................................................................... 2.111
Useful sinewave signal ................................................... 2.212
User data..........................................................................2.82
USER DEF ............................................... 2.101, 2.118, 2.297
User files ........................................................................ 2.294
USER L .......................................................................... 2.353
User Label ...................................................................... 2.329
User Mode ........................................................................2.82
USER R.......................................................................... 2.353
User-definable filter......................................................... 2.284
USERKEYB.BAT ..................................................... 1.10, 1.13

V
Valid Chan ........................................................................2.78
Validity bit ....................................................................... 2.352
VALUE..............................................................................2.73
Value commands ..............................................................2.84
Value entry, rotary knob, numeric keypad.........................2.35
Value of axes, printout .................................................... 2.389
VARI (PLL) ..................................................................... 2.155
Vari Mode ....................................................................... 2.136
Variation ................................2.89, 2.105, 2.123, 2.126, 2.164
Variation mode ............................................................... 2.136
Variation Mode ............................................................... 2.136
Version display ............................................................... 2.401
VGA
interface ................................................................... 2.411
monitor ..................................................................... 2.394
monitor connector 15-contact .....................................2.11
VGA monitor ................................................................... 2.394
VIDEO 50 .........................................................................2.72
VIDEO 60 .........................................................................2.72
VIEW OFF ...................................................................... 2.342
VIEW PCX...................................................................... 2.298

1078.2008.02

UPL
Virtual Drive
installation.................................................................... 1.7
VOLT ............................................................................... 2.95
Volt Ch1 ......................................................................... 2.130
VOLT CH1 ..................................................................... 2.161
VOLT CH1&2 ................................................................. 2.128
Volt Ch2 ......................................................................... 2.130
1............................................................................... 2.131
VOLT CH2 ..................................................................... 2.161
VOLT FILE ............................................................ 2.97, 2.141
VOLT LF\:UF.................................................................. 2.112
Volt Mode....................................................................... 2.128
Volt No (i) ....................................................................... 2.104
Volt Range ....................................................................... 2.67
VOLT RMS...........................................................2.122, 2.125
VOLT&RATIO ................................................................ 2.128
Voltage...........2.107, 2.109, 2.127, 2.130, 2.133, 2.139, 2.140
generator ................................................................. 2.100
increase ................................................................... 2.101
range........................................................................ 2.149
sweeps ...................................................................... 2.97
VOLTAGE ............................................................2.136, 2.137
voltage check ................................................................... 2.67
voltage limitation .............................................................. 2.67
VOLTAGE PEAK..................................................2.121, 2.125
Voltage selector ................................................................. 1.1
Voltsource ...................................................................... 2.305
Volume........................................................................... 2.261

W
W&F............................................................................... 2.165
Waterfall......................................................................... 2.223
WATERFALL ................................................................. 2.328
Waveform....................................................................... 2.165
WAVEFORM.................................................................. 2.165
Waveform display........................................................... 2.230
Ways of presentation ....................................................... 2.15
Ways of Starting the Analyzer, Ext. Sweep .................... 2.159
Weighting ....................................................................... 2.217
Weighting filters.............................................................. 2.279
WHITE .................................................................2.118, 2.374
White noise .................................................................... 2.118
WIDE ............................................................................. 2.206
Width.............................................................................. 2.290
Width of a Filter.............................................................. 2.289
Windoe........................................................................... 2.245
Window .....................................................2.210, 2.218, 2.222
FFT .......................................................................... 2.173
Window functions ........................................................... 2.222
Window functions of FFT................................................ 2.228
WORD CLK............................................................. 2.72, 2.74
Word width
digital generator ......................................................... 2.75
Work dir.......................................................................... 2.321
working directory ............................................................ 2.296
Working Directory............................................................. 2.38
WOW & FL..................................................................... 2.165
Wow & Flutter ................................................................ 2.217
Wow&Flutter .................................................................. 2.165
WRD CLK INV.................................................................. 2.72
Write protection .............................................................. 2.300

I.16

E-10

UPL

X
X AXIS................................................................. 2.303, 2.389
X Axis (sweep) .................................................................2.95
X Pos.............................................................................. 2.336
X scaling......................................................................... 2.376
X-axis (sweep)..................................................................2.91
XLR output ..................................................................... 2.139
XON/XOFF ..................................................................... 2.392

Index

-Π ... + ........................................................................ 2.229
#

∗ CURSOR..................................................................... 2.314

*
* CURSOR ...........................................................2.312, 2.314
*CURSOR ............................................................2.307, 2.321

Y
Y Pos.............................................................................. 2.336
Y scaling......................................................................... 2.376

+
+1000 ppm ....................................................................... 2.86

Z
Z Axis .................................................................... 2.95, 2.389
Z AXIS............................................................................ 2.303
Z sweep............................................................................2.91
Z-axis ...............................................................................2.91
ZERO ............................................................. 2.79, 2.81, 2.82
Zero Auto........................................................................ 2.399
Zeros .............................................................................. 2.292
ZOOM............................................................................. 2.340
Zoom Fact ...................................................................... 2.223
Zoom factor .................................................................... 2.223
Zooming frequency range FFT........................................ 2.223
Zooming zone ................................................................. 2.224
Z-parameter......................................................................2.91

=
= SPEAKER................................................................... 2.247

0
0 dB ............................................................................... 2.164

1
1/3 OCT FLT .................................................................. 2.273
1/3 OCTAVE ........................................................2.155, 2.240
1024 kHz.......................................................................... 2.72
12 dB Auto ..................................................................... 2.164
1-k block......................................................................... 2.306

2
2 Sigma.......................................................................... 2.206
2Sigma weighting ........................................................... 2.206

3
30 dB Auto ..................................................................... 2.164
32 kHz.............................................................................. 2.73
32.0 (PLL) ...................................................................... 2.145
3-panel display ........................................................ 2.29, 2.32

4
44,1 kHz........................................................................... 2.73
44.1 (PLL) ...................................................................... 2.145
48 kHz.............................................................................. 2.73
48.0 (PLL) ...................................................................... 2.145

1078.2008.02

I.17

E-10



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2002:01:16 14:40:03
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows
Modify Date                     : 2002:03:08 11:28:16+01:00
Page Count                      : 434
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu